fedora kernel: d9aad82f3319f3cfd1aebc01234254ef0c37ad84v3.3.2-1

Signed-off-by: Anton Arapov <anton@redhat.com>

126 files changed, 30275 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9ad9ddeb384
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX
@@ -0,0 +1,226 @@
+00-INDEX
+	- this file
+3c359.txt
+	- information on the 3Com TokenLink Velocity XL (3c5359) driver.
+3c505.txt
+	- information on the 3Com EtherLink Plus (3c505) driver.
+3c509.txt
+	- information on the 3Com Etherlink III Series Ethernet cards.
+6pack.txt
+	- info on the 6pack protocol, an alternative to KISS for AX.25
+DLINK.txt
+	- info on the D-Link DE-600/DE-620 parallel port pocket adapters
+PLIP.txt
+	- PLIP: The Parallel Line Internet Protocol device driver
+README.ipw2100
+	- README for the Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 driver.
+README.ipw2200
+	- README for the Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG and 2200BG driver.
+README.sb1000
+	- info on General Instrument/NextLevel SURFboard1000 cable modem.
+alias.txt
+	- info on using alias network devices 
+arcnet-hardware.txt
+	- tons of info on ARCnet, hubs, jumper settings for ARCnet cards, etc.
+arcnet.txt
+	- info on the using the ARCnet driver itself.
+atm.txt
+	- info on where to get ATM programs and support for Linux.
+ax25.txt
+	- info on using AX.25 and NET/ROM code for Linux
+batman-adv.txt
+	- B.A.T.M.A.N routing protocol on top of layer 2 Ethernet Frames.
+baycom.txt
+	- info on the driver for Baycom style amateur radio modems
+bonding.txt
+	- Linux Ethernet Bonding Driver HOWTO: link aggregation in Linux.
+bridge.txt
+	- where to get user space programs for ethernet bridging with Linux.
+can.txt
+	- documentation on CAN protocol family.
+cops.txt
+	- info on the COPS LocalTalk Linux driver
+cs89x0.txt
+	- the Crystal LAN (CS8900/20-based) Ethernet ISA adapter driver
+cxacru.txt
+	- Conexant AccessRunner USB ADSL Modem
+cxacru-cf.py
+	- Conexant AccessRunner USB ADSL Modem configuration file parser
+cxgb.txt
+	- Release Notes for the Chelsio N210 Linux device driver.
+dccp.txt
+	- the Datagram Congestion Control Protocol (DCCP) (RFC 4340..42).
+de4x5.txt
+	- the Digital EtherWORKS DE4?? and DE5?? PCI Ethernet driver
+decnet.txt
+	- info on using the DECnet networking layer in Linux.
+depca.txt
+	- the Digital DEPCA/EtherWORKS DE1?? and DE2?? LANCE Ethernet driver
+dl2k.txt
+	- README for D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapters (dl2k.ko).
+dm9000.txt
+	- README for the Simtec DM9000 Network driver.
+dmfe.txt
+	- info on the Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver.
+dns_resolver.txt
+	- The DNS resolver module allows kernel servies to make DNS queries.
+driver.txt
+	- Softnet driver issues.
+e100.txt
+	- info on Intel's EtherExpress PRO/100 line of 10/100 boards
+e1000.txt
+	- info on Intel's E1000 line of gigabit ethernet boards
+e1000e.txt
+	- README for the Intel Gigabit Ethernet Driver (e1000e).
+eql.txt
+	- serial IP load balancing
+ewrk3.txt
+	- the Digital EtherWORKS 3 DE203/4/5 Ethernet driver
+fib_trie.txt
+	- Level Compressed Trie (LC-trie) notes: a structure for routing.
+filter.txt
+	- Linux Socket Filtering
+fore200e.txt
+	- FORE Systems PCA-200E/SBA-200E ATM NIC driver info.
+framerelay.txt
+	- info on using Frame Relay/Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI).
+gen_stats.txt
+	- Generic networking statistics for netlink users.
+generic_hdlc.txt
+	- The generic High Level Data Link Control (HDLC) layer.
+generic_netlink.txt
+	- info on Generic Netlink
+gianfar.txt
+	- Gianfar Ethernet Driver.
+ieee802154.txt
+	- Linux IEEE 802.15.4 implementation, API and drivers
+ifenslave.c
+	- Configure network interfaces for parallel routing (bonding).
+igb.txt
+	- README for the Intel Gigabit Ethernet Driver (igb).
+igbvf.txt
+	- README for the Intel Gigabit Ethernet Driver (igbvf).
+ip-sysctl.txt
+	- /proc/sys/net/ipv4/* variables
+ip_dynaddr.txt
+	- IP dynamic address hack e.g. for auto-dialup links
+ipddp.txt
+	- AppleTalk-IP Decapsulation and AppleTalk-IP Encapsulation
+iphase.txt
+	- Interphase PCI ATM (i)Chip IA Linux driver info.
+ipv6.txt
+	- Options to the ipv6 kernel module.
+ipvs-sysctl.txt
+	- Per-inode explanation of the /proc/sys/net/ipv4/vs interface.
+irda.txt
+	- where to get IrDA (infrared) utilities and info for Linux.
+ixgb.txt
+	- README for the Intel 10 Gigabit Ethernet Driver (ixgb).
+ixgbe.txt
+	- README for the Intel 10 Gigabit Ethernet Driver (ixgbe).
+ixgbevf.txt
+	- README for the Intel Virtual Function (VF) Driver (ixgbevf).
+l2tp.txt
+	- User guide to the L2TP tunnel protocol.
+lapb-module.txt
+	- programming information of the LAPB module.
+ltpc.txt
+	- the Apple or Farallon LocalTalk PC card driver
+mac80211-injection.txt
+	- HOWTO use packet injection with mac80211
+multicast.txt
+	- Behaviour of cards under Multicast
+multiqueue.txt
+	- HOWTO for multiqueue network device support.
+netconsole.txt
+	- The network console module netconsole.ko: configuration and notes.
+netdev-features.txt
+	- Network interface features API description.
+netdevices.txt
+	- info on network device driver functions exported to the kernel.
+netif-msg.txt
+	- Design of the network interface message level setting (NETIF_MSG_*).
+nfc.txt
+	- The Linux Near Field Communication (NFS) subsystem.
+olympic.txt
+	- IBM PCI Pit/Pit-Phy/Olympic Token Ring driver info.
+openvswitch.txt
+	- Open vSwitch developer documentation.
+operstates.txt
+	- Overview of network interface operational states.
+packet_mmap.txt
+	- User guide to memory mapped packet socket rings (PACKET_[RT]X_RING).
+phonet.txt
+	- The Phonet packet protocol used in Nokia cellular modems.
+phy.txt
+	- The PHY abstraction layer.
+pktgen.txt
+	- User guide to the kernel packet generator (pktgen.ko).
+policy-routing.txt
+	- IP policy-based routing
+ppp_generic.txt
+	- Information about the generic PPP driver.
+proc_net_tcp.txt
+	- Per inode overview of the /proc/net/tcp and /proc/net/tcp6 interfaces.
+radiotap-headers.txt
+	- Background on radiotap headers.
+ray_cs.txt
+	- Raylink Wireless LAN card driver info.
+rds.txt
+	- Background on the reliable, ordered datagram delivery method RDS.
+regulatory.txt
+	- Overview of the Linux wireless regulatory infrastructure.
+rxrpc.txt
+	- Guide to the RxRPC protocol.
+s2io.txt
+	- Release notes for Neterion Xframe I/II 10GbE driver.
+scaling.txt
+	- Explanation of network scaling techniques: RSS, RPS, RFS, aRFS, XPS.
+sctp.txt
+	- Notes on the Linux kernel implementation of the SCTP protocol.
+secid.txt
+	- Explanation of the secid member in flow structures.
+skfp.txt
+	- SysKonnect FDDI (SK-5xxx, Compaq Netelligent) driver info.
+smc9.txt
+	- the driver for SMC's 9000 series of Ethernet cards
+smctr.txt
+	- SMC TokenCard TokenRing Linux driver info.
+spider-net.txt
+	- README for the Spidernet Driver (as found in PS3 / Cell BE).
+stmmac.txt
+	- README for the STMicro Synopsys Ethernet driver.
+tc-actions-env-rules.txt
+	- rules for traffic control (tc) actions.
+timestamping.txt
+	- overview of network packet timestamping variants.
+tcp.txt
+	- short blurb on how TCP output takes place.
+tcp-thin.txt
+	- kernel tuning options for low rate 'thin' TCP streams.
+tlan.txt
+	- ThunderLAN (Compaq Netelligent 10/100, Olicom OC-2xxx) driver info.
+tms380tr.txt
+	- SysKonnect Token Ring ISA/PCI adapter driver info.
+tproxy.txt
+	- Transparent proxy support user guide.
+tuntap.txt
+	- TUN/TAP device driver, allowing user space Rx/Tx of packets.
+udplite.txt
+	- UDP-Lite protocol (RFC 3828) introduction.
+vortex.txt
+	- info on using 3Com Vortex (3c590, 3c592, 3c595, 3c597) Ethernet cards.
+vxge.txt
+	- README for the Neterion X3100 PCIe Server Adapter.
+x25.txt
+	- general info on X.25 development.
+x25-iface.txt
+	- description of the X.25 Packet Layer to LAPB device interface.
+xfrm_proc.txt
+	- description of the statistics package for XFRM.
+xfrm_sync.txt
+	- sync patches for XFRM enable migration of an SA between hosts.
+xfrm_sysctl.txt
+	- description of the XFRM configuration options.
+z8530drv.txt
+	- info about Linux driver for Z8530 based HDLC cards for AX.25
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt b/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..dadfe8147ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+
+3COM PCI TOKEN LINK VELOCITY XL TOKEN RING CARDS README
+
+Release 0.9.0 - Release   
+	Jul 17th 2000 Mike Phillips 
+
+	1.2.0 - Final
+	Feb 17th 2002 Mike Phillips 
+	Updated for submission to the 2.4.x kernel.
+
+Thanks:
+	Terry Murphy from 3Com for tech docs and support,
+	Adam D. Ligas for testing the driver.
+ 
+Note:
+	This driver will NOT work with the 3C339 Token Ring cards, you need
+to use the tms380 driver instead.
+
+Options:
+
+The driver accepts three options: ringspeed, pkt_buf_sz and message_level.
+
+These options can be specified differently for each card found. 
+
+ringspeed:  Has one of three settings 0 (default), 4 or 16.  0 will 
+make the card autosense the ringspeed and join at the appropriate speed, 
+this will be the default option for most people.  4 or 16 allow you to 
+explicitly force the card to operate at a certain speed.  The card will fail 
+if you try to insert it at the wrong speed. (Although some hubs will allow 
+this so be *very* careful).  The main purpose for explicitly setting the ring
+speed is for when the card is first on the ring.  In autosense mode, if the card
+cannot detect any active monitors on the ring it will open at the same speed as
+its last opening. This can be hazardous if this speed does not match the speed
+you want the ring to operate at.  
+
+pkt_buf_sz:  This is this initial receive buffer allocation size.  This will
+default to 4096 if no value is entered. You may increase performance of the 
+driver by setting this to a value larger than the network packet size, although
+the driver now re-sizes buffers based on MTU settings as well. 
+
+message_level: Controls level of messages created by the driver. Defaults to 0:
+which only displays start-up and critical messages.  Presently any non-zero 
+value will display all soft messages as well.  NB This does not turn 
+debugging messages on, that must be done by modified the source code.
+
+Variable MTU size:
+
+The driver can handle a MTU size up to either 4500 or 18000 depending upon 
+ring speed.  The driver also changes the size of the receive buffers as part
+of the mtu re-sizing, so if you set mtu = 18000, you will need to be able
+to allocate 16 * (sk_buff with 18000 buffer size) call it 18500 bytes per ring 
+position = 296,000 bytes of memory space, plus of course anything 
+necessary for the tx sk_buff's.  Remember this is per card, so if you are
+building routers, gateway's etc, you could start to use a lot of memory
+real fast.
+
+2/17/02 Mike Phillips
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/3c505.txt b/Documentation/networking/3c505.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..72f38b13101
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/3c505.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+The 3Com Etherlink Plus (3c505) driver.
+
+This driver now uses DMA.  There is currently no support for PIO operation.
+The default DMA channel is 6; this is _not_ autoprobed, so you must
+make sure you configure it correctly.  If loading the driver as a
+module, you can do this with "modprobe 3c505 dma=n".  If the driver is
+linked statically into the kernel, you must either use an "ether="
+statement on the command line, or change the definition of ELP_DMA in 3c505.h.
+
+The driver will warn you if it has to fall back on the compiled in
+default DMA channel. 
+
+If no base address is given at boot time, the driver will autoprobe
+ports 0x300, 0x280 and 0x310 (in that order).  If no IRQ is given, the driver
+will try to probe for it.
+
+The driver can be used as a loadable module.
+
+Theoretically, one instance of the driver can now run multiple cards,
+in the standard way (when loading a module, say "modprobe 3c505
+io=0x300,0x340 irq=10,11 dma=6,7" or whatever).  I have not tested
+this, though.
+
+The driver may now support revision 2 hardware; the dependency on
+being able to read the host control register has been removed.  This
+is also untested, since I don't have a suitable card.
+
+Known problems:
+ I still see "DMA upload timed out" messages from time to time.  These
+seem to be fairly non-fatal though.
+ The card is old and slow.
+
+To do:
+ Improve probe/setup code
+ Test multicast and promiscuous operation
+
+Authors:
+ The driver is mainly written by Craig Southeren, email
+ <craigs@ineluki.apana.org.au>.
+ Parts of the driver (adapting the driver to 1.1.4+ kernels,
+ IRQ/address detection, some changes) and this README by
+ Juha Laiho <jlaiho@ichaos.nullnet.fi>.
+ DMA mode, more fixes, etc, by Philip Blundell <pjb27@cam.ac.uk>
+ Multicard support, Software configurable DMA, etc., by
+ Christopher Collins <ccollins@pcug.org.au>
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/3c509.txt b/Documentation/networking/3c509.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..dcc9eaf5939
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/3c509.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,214 @@
+Linux and the 3Com EtherLink III Series Ethercards (driver v1.18c and higher)
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+This file contains the instructions and caveats for v1.18c and higher versions
+of the 3c509 driver. You should not use the driver without reading this file.
+
+release 1.0
+28 February 2002
+Current maintainer (corrections to):
+  David Ruggiero <jdr@farfalle.com>
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+(0) Introduction
+
+The following are notes and information on using the 3Com EtherLink III series
+ethercards in Linux. These cards are commonly known by the most widely-used
+card's 3Com model number, 3c509. They are all 10mb/s ISA-bus cards and shouldn't
+be (but sometimes are) confused with the similarly-numbered PCI-bus "3c905"
+(aka "Vortex" or "Boomerang") series.  Kernel support for the 3c509 family is
+provided by the module 3c509.c, which has code to support all of the following
+models:
+
+  3c509 (original ISA card)
+  3c509B (later revision of the ISA card; supports full-duplex)
+  3c589 (PCMCIA)
+  3c589B (later revision of the 3c589; supports full-duplex)
+  3c529 (MCA)
+  3c579 (EISA)
+
+Large portions of this documentation were heavily borrowed from the guide
+written the original author of the 3c509 driver, Donald Becker. The master
+copy of that document, which contains notes on older versions of the driver,
+currently resides on Scyld web server: http://www.scyld.com/.
+
+
+(1) Special Driver Features
+
+Overriding card settings
+
+The driver allows boot- or load-time overriding of the card's detected IOADDR,
+IRQ, and transceiver settings, although this capability shouldn't generally be
+needed except to enable full-duplex mode (see below). An example of the syntax
+for LILO parameters for doing this:
+
+    ether=10,0x310,3,0x3c509,eth0 
+
+This configures the first found 3c509 card for IRQ 10, base I/O 0x310, and
+transceiver type 3 (10base2). The flag "0x3c509" must be set to avoid conflicts
+with other card types when overriding the I/O address. When the driver is
+loaded as a module, only the IRQ may be overridden. For example,
+setting two cards to IRQ10 and IRQ11 is done by using the irq module
+option:
+
+   options 3c509 irq=10,11
+
+
+(2) Full-duplex mode
+
+The v1.18c driver added support for the 3c509B's full-duplex capabilities.
+In order to enable and successfully use full-duplex mode, three conditions
+must be met: 
+
+(a) You must have a Etherlink III card model whose hardware supports full-
+duplex operations. Currently, the only members of the 3c509 family that are
+positively known to support full-duplex are the 3c509B (ISA bus) and 3c589B
+(PCMCIA) cards. Cards without the "B" model designation do *not* support
+full-duplex mode; these include the original 3c509 (no "B"), the original
+3c589, the 3c529 (MCA bus), and the 3c579 (EISA bus).
+
+(b) You must be using your card's 10baseT transceiver (i.e., the RJ-45
+connector), not its AUI (thick-net) or 10base2 (thin-net/coax) interfaces.
+AUI and 10base2 network cabling is physically incapable of full-duplex
+operation.
+
+(c) Most importantly, your 3c509B must be connected to a link partner that is
+itself full-duplex capable. This is almost certainly one of two things: a full-
+duplex-capable  Ethernet switch (*not* a hub), or a full-duplex-capable NIC on
+another system that's connected directly to the 3c509B via a crossover cable.
+
+Full-duplex mode can be enabled using 'ethtool'.
+ 
+/////Extremely important caution concerning full-duplex mode/////
+Understand that the 3c509B's hardware's full-duplex support is much more
+limited than that provide by more modern network interface cards. Although
+at the physical layer of the network it fully supports full-duplex operation,
+the card was designed before the current Ethernet auto-negotiation (N-way)
+spec was written. This means that the 3c509B family ***cannot and will not
+auto-negotiate a full-duplex connection with its link partner under any
+circumstances, no matter how it is initialized***. If the full-duplex mode
+of the 3c509B is enabled, its link partner will very likely need to be
+independently _forced_ into full-duplex mode as well; otherwise various nasty
+failures will occur - at the very least, you'll see massive numbers of packet
+collisions. This is one of very rare circumstances where disabling auto-
+negotiation and forcing the duplex mode of a network interface card or switch
+would ever be necessary or desirable.
+
+
+(3) Available Transceiver Types
+
+For versions of the driver v1.18c and above, the available transceiver types are:
+ 
+0  transceiver type from EEPROM config (normally 10baseT); force half-duplex
+1  AUI (thick-net / DB15 connector)
+2  (undefined)
+3  10base2 (thin-net == coax / BNC connector)
+4  10baseT (RJ-45 connector); force half-duplex mode
+8  transceiver type and duplex mode taken from card's EEPROM config settings
+12 10baseT (RJ-45 connector); force full-duplex mode
+
+Prior to driver version 1.18c, only transceiver codes 0-4 were supported. Note
+that the new transceiver codes 8 and 12 are the *only* ones that will enable
+full-duplex mode, no matter what the card's detected EEPROM settings might be.
+This insured that merely upgrading the driver from an earlier version would
+never automatically enable full-duplex mode in an existing installation;
+it must always be explicitly enabled via one of these code in order to be
+activated.
+
+The transceiver type can be changed using 'ethtool'.
+  
+
+(4a) Interpretation of error messages and common problems
+
+Error Messages
+
+eth0: Infinite loop in interrupt, status 2011. 
+These are "mostly harmless" message indicating that the driver had too much
+work during that interrupt cycle. With a status of 0x2011 you are receiving
+packets faster than they can be removed from the card. This should be rare
+or impossible in normal operation. Possible causes of this error report are:
+ 
+   - a "green" mode enabled that slows the processor down when there is no
+     keyboard activity. 
+
+   - some other device or device driver hogging the bus or disabling interrupts.
+     Check /proc/interrupts for excessive interrupt counts. The timer tick
+     interrupt should always be incrementing faster than the others. 
+
+No received packets 
+If a 3c509, 3c562 or 3c589 can successfully transmit packets, but never
+receives packets (as reported by /proc/net/dev or 'ifconfig') you likely
+have an interrupt line problem. Check /proc/interrupts to verify that the
+card is actually generating interrupts. If the interrupt count is not
+increasing you likely have a physical conflict with two devices trying to
+use the same ISA IRQ line. The common conflict is with a sound card on IRQ10
+or IRQ5, and the easiest solution is to move the 3c509 to a different
+interrupt line. If the device is receiving packets but 'ping' doesn't work,
+you have a routing problem.
+
+Tx Carrier Errors Reported in /proc/net/dev 
+If an EtherLink III appears to transmit packets, but the "Tx carrier errors"
+field in /proc/net/dev increments as quickly as the Tx packet count, you
+likely have an unterminated network or the incorrect media transceiver selected. 
+
+3c509B card is not detected on machines with an ISA PnP BIOS. 
+While the updated driver works with most PnP BIOS programs, it does not work
+with all. This can be fixed by disabling PnP support using the 3Com-supplied
+setup program. 
+
+3c509 card is not detected on overclocked machines 
+Increase the delay time in id_read_eeprom() from the current value, 500,
+to an absurdly high value, such as 5000. 
+
+
+(4b) Decoding Status and Error Messages
+
+The bits in the main status register are: 
+
+value 	description
+0x01 	Interrupt latch
+0x02 	Tx overrun, or Rx underrun
+0x04 	Tx complete
+0x08 	Tx FIFO room available
+0x10 	A complete Rx packet has arrived
+0x20 	A Rx packet has started to arrive
+0x40 	The driver has requested an interrupt
+0x80 	Statistics counter nearly full
+
+The bits in the transmit (Tx) status word are: 
+
+value 	description
+0x02 	Out-of-window collision.
+0x04 	Status stack overflow (normally impossible).
+0x08 	16 collisions.
+0x10 	Tx underrun (not enough PCI bus bandwidth).
+0x20 	Tx jabber.
+0x40 	Tx interrupt requested.
+0x80 	Status is valid (this should always be set).
+
+
+When a transmit error occurs the driver produces a status message such as 
+
+   eth0: Transmit error, Tx status register 82
+
+The two values typically seen here are:
+
+0x82 
+Out of window collision. This typically occurs when some other Ethernet
+host is incorrectly set to full duplex on a half duplex network. 
+
+0x88 
+16 collisions. This typically occurs when the network is exceptionally busy
+or when another host doesn't correctly back off after a collision. If this
+error is mixed with 0x82 errors it is the result of a host incorrectly set
+to full duplex (see above).
+
+Both of these errors are the result of network problems that should be
+corrected. They do not represent driver malfunction.
+
+
+(5) Revision history (this file)
+
+28Feb02 v1.0  DR   New; major portions based on Becker original 3c509 docs
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/6pack.txt b/Documentation/networking/6pack.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8f339428fdf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/6pack.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+This is the 6pack-mini-HOWTO, written by
+
+Andreas Könsgen DG3KQ
+Internet: ajk@comnets.uni-bremen.de
+AMPR-net: dg3kq@db0pra.ampr.org
+AX.25:    dg3kq@db0ach.#nrw.deu.eu
+
+Last update: April 7, 1998
+
+1. What is 6pack, and what are the advantages to KISS?
+
+6pack is a transmission protocol for data exchange between the PC and
+the TNC over a serial line. It can be used as an alternative to KISS.
+
+6pack has two major advantages:
+- The PC is given full control over the radio
+  channel. Special control data is exchanged between the PC and the TNC so
+  that the PC knows at any time if the TNC is receiving data, if a TNC
+  buffer underrun or overrun has occurred, if the PTT is
+  set and so on. This control data is processed at a higher priority than
+  normal data, so a data stream can be interrupted at any time to issue an
+  important event. This helps to improve the channel access and timing 
+  algorithms as everything is computed in the PC. It would even be possible 
+  to experiment with something completely different from the known CSMA and 
+  DAMA channel access methods.
+  This kind of real-time control is especially important to supply several
+  TNCs that are connected between each other and the PC by a daisy chain
+  (however, this feature is not supported yet by the Linux 6pack driver).
+
+- Each packet transferred over the serial line is supplied with a checksum,
+  so it is easy to detect errors due to problems on the serial line.
+  Received packets that are corrupt are not passed on to the AX.25 layer.
+  Damaged packets that the TNC has received from the PC are not transmitted.
+
+More details about 6pack are described in the file 6pack.ps that is located
+in the doc directory of the AX.25 utilities package.
+
+2. Who has developed the 6pack protocol?
+
+The 6pack protocol has been developed by Ekki Plicht DF4OR, Henning Rech
+DF9IC and Gunter Jost DK7WJ. A driver for 6pack, written by Gunter Jost and
+Matthias Welwarsky DG2FEF, comes along with the PC version of FlexNet.
+They have also written a firmware for TNCs to perform the 6pack
+protocol (see section 4 below).
+
+3. Where can I get the latest version of 6pack for LinuX?
+
+At the moment, the 6pack stuff can obtained via anonymous ftp from
+db0bm.automation.fh-aachen.de. In the directory /incoming/dg3kq,
+there is a file named 6pack.tgz.
+
+4. Preparing the TNC for 6pack operation
+
+To be able to use 6pack, a special firmware for the TNC is needed. The EPROM
+of a newly bought TNC does not contain 6pack, so you will have to
+program an EPROM yourself. The image file for 6pack EPROMs should be
+available on any packet radio box where PC/FlexNet can be found. The name of
+the file is 6pack.bin. This file is copyrighted and maintained by the FlexNet
+team. It can be used under the terms of the license that comes along
+with PC/FlexNet. Please do not ask me about the internals of this file as I
+don't know anything about it. I used a textual description of the 6pack
+protocol to program the Linux driver.
+
+TNCs contain a 64kByte EPROM, the lower half of which is used for
+the firmware/KISS. The upper half is either empty or is sometimes
+programmed with software called TAPR. In the latter case, the TNC
+is supplied with a DIP switch so you can easily change between the
+two systems. When programming a new EPROM, one of the systems is replaced
+by 6pack. It is useful to replace TAPR, as this software is rarely used
+nowadays. If your TNC is not equipped with the switch mentioned above, you
+can build in one yourself that switches over the highest address pin
+of the EPROM between HIGH and LOW level. After having inserted the new EPROM
+and switched to 6pack, apply power to the TNC for a first test. The connect
+and the status LED are lit for about a second if the firmware initialises
+the TNC correctly.
+
+5. Building and installing the 6pack driver
+
+The driver has been tested with kernel version 2.1.90. Use with older
+kernels may lead to a compilation error because the interface to a kernel
+function has been changed in the 2.1.8x kernels.
+
+How to turn on 6pack support:
+
+- In the linux kernel configuration program, select the code maturity level
+  options menu and turn on the prompting for development drivers.
+
+- Select the amateur radio support menu and turn on the serial port 6pack
+  driver.
+
+- Compile and install the kernel and the modules.
+
+To use the driver, the kissattach program delivered with the AX.25 utilities
+has to be modified.
+
+- Do a cd to the directory that holds the kissattach sources. Edit the
+  kissattach.c file. At the top, insert the following lines:
+
+  #ifndef N_6PACK
+  #define N_6PACK (N_AX25+1)
+  #endif
+
+  Then find the line
+   
+  int disc = N_AX25;
+
+  and replace N_AX25 by N_6PACK.
+
+- Recompile kissattach. Rename it to spattach to avoid confusions.
+
+Installing the driver:
+
+- Do an insmod 6pack. Look at your /var/log/messages file to check if the 
+  module has printed its initialization message.
+
+- Do a spattach as you would launch kissattach when starting a KISS port.
+  Check if the kernel prints the message '6pack: TNC found'. 
+
+- From here, everything should work as if you were setting up a KISS port.
+  The only difference is that the network device that represents
+  the 6pack port is called sp instead of sl or ax. So, sp0 would be the
+  first 6pack port.
+
+Although the driver has been tested on various platforms, I still declare it
+ALPHA. BE CAREFUL! Sync your disks before insmoding the 6pack module
+and spattaching. Watch out if your computer behaves strangely. Read section
+6 of this file about known problems.
+
+Note that the connect and status LEDs of the TNC are controlled in a
+different way than they are when the TNC is used with PC/FlexNet. When using
+FlexNet, the connect LED is on if there is a connection; the status LED is
+on if there is data in the buffer of the PC's AX.25 engine that has to be
+transmitted. Under Linux, the 6pack layer is beyond the AX.25 layer,
+so the 6pack driver doesn't know anything about connects or data that
+has not yet been transmitted. Therefore the LEDs are controlled
+as they are in KISS mode: The connect LED is turned on if data is transferred
+from the PC to the TNC over the serial line, the status LED if data is
+sent to the PC.
+
+6. Known problems
+
+When testing the driver with 2.0.3x kernels and
+operating with data rates on the radio channel of 9600 Baud or higher,
+the driver may, on certain systems, sometimes print the message '6pack:
+bad checksum', which is due to data loss if the other station sends two
+or more subsequent packets. I have been told that this is due to a problem
+with the serial driver of 2.0.3x kernels. I don't know yet if the problem
+still exists with 2.1.x kernels, as I have heard that the serial driver
+code has been changed with 2.1.x.
+
+When shutting down the sp interface with ifconfig, the kernel crashes if
+there is still an AX.25 connection left over which an IP connection was
+running, even if that IP connection is already closed. The problem does not
+occur when there is a bare AX.25 connection still running. I don't know if
+this is a problem of the 6pack driver or something else in the kernel.
+
+The driver has been tested as a module, not yet as a kernel-builtin driver.
+
+The 6pack protocol supports daisy-chaining of TNCs in a token ring, which is
+connected to one serial port of the PC. This feature is not implemented
+and at least at the moment I won't be able to do it because I do not have
+the opportunity to build a TNC daisy-chain and test it.
+
+Some of the comments in the source code are inaccurate. They are left from
+the SLIP/KISS driver, from which the 6pack driver has been derived.
+I haven't modified or removed them yet -- sorry! The code itself needs
+some cleaning and optimizing. This will be done in a later release.
+
+If you encounter a bug or if you have a question or suggestion concerning the
+driver, feel free to mail me, using the addresses given at the beginning of
+this file.
+
+Have fun!
+
+Andreas
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/DLINK.txt b/Documentation/networking/DLINK.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..55d24433d15
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/DLINK.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,203 @@
+Released 1994-06-13
+
+
+	CONTENTS:
+
+	1. Introduction.
+	2. License.
+	3. Files in this release.
+	4. Installation.
+	5. Problems and tuning.
+	6. Using the drivers with earlier releases.
+	7. Acknowledgments.
+
+
+	1. INTRODUCTION.
+
+	This is a set of Ethernet drivers for the D-Link DE-600/DE-620
+	pocket adapters, for the parallel port on a Linux based machine.
+	Some adapter "clones" will also work.  Xircom is _not_ a clone...
+	These drivers _can_ be used as loadable modules,
+	and were developed for use on Linux 1.1.13 and above.
+	For use on Linux 1.0.X, or earlier releases, see below.
+
+	I have used these drivers for NFS, ftp, telnet and X-clients on
+	remote machines. Transmissions with ftp seems to work as
+	good as can be expected (i.e. > 80k bytes/sec) from a
+	parallel port...:-)  Receive speeds will be about 60-80% of this.
+	Depending on your machine, somewhat higher speeds can be achieved.
+
+	All comments/fixes to Bjorn Ekwall (bj0rn@blox.se).
+
+
+	2. LICENSE.
+
+	This program is free software; you can redistribute it
+	and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
+	License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+	version 2, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+	This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
+	useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
+	warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+	PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more
+	details.
+
+	You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
+	License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
+	Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA
+	02139, USA.
+
+
+	3. FILES IN THIS RELEASE.
+
+	README.DLINK  This file.
+	de600.c       The Source (may it be with You :-) for the DE-600
+	de620.c       ditto for the DE-620
+	de620.h       Macros for de620.c
+
+	If you are upgrading from the d-link tar release, there will
+	also be a "dlink-patches" file that will patch Linux 1.1.18:
+		linux/drivers/net/Makefile
+		linux/drivers/net/CONFIG
+		linux/drivers/net/MODULES
+		linux/drivers/net/Space.c
+		linux/config.in
+	Apply the patch by:
+	"cd /usr/src; patch -p0 < linux/drivers/net/dlink-patches"
+	The old source, "linux/drivers/net/d_link.c", can be removed.
+
+
+	4. INSTALLATION.
+
+	o Get the latest net binaries, according to current net.wisdom.
+
+	o Read the NET-2 and Ethernet HOWTOs and modify your setup.
+
+	o If your parallel port has a strange address or irq,
+	  modify "linux/drivers/net/CONFIG" accordingly, or adjust
+	  the parameters in the "tuning" section in the sources.
+
+	If you are going to use the drivers as loadable modules, do _not_
+	enable them while doing "make config", but instead make sure that
+	the drivers are included in "linux/drivers/net/MODULES".
+
+	If you are _not_ going to use the driver(s) as loadable modules,
+	but instead have them included in the kernel, remember to enable
+	the drivers while doing "make config".
+
+	o To include networking and DE600/DE620 support in your kernel:
+	  # cd /linux
+	  (as modules:)
+	  #  make config (answer yes on CONFIG_NET and CONFIG_INET)
+	  (else included in the kernel:)
+	  #  make config (answer yes on CONFIG _NET, _INET and _DE600 or _DE620)
+	  # make clean
+	  # make zImage (or whatever magic you usually do)
+
+	o I use lilo to boot multiple kernels, so that I at least
+	  can have one working kernel :-). If you do too, append
+	  these lines to /etc/lilo/config:
+
+		image = /linux/zImage
+		label = newlinux
+		root = /dev/hda2 (or whatever YOU have...)
+
+	  # /etc/lilo/install
+
+	o Do "sync" and reboot the new kernel with a D-Link
+	  DE-600/DE-620 pocket adapter connected.
+
+	o The adapter can be configured with ifconfig eth?
+	  where the actual number is decided by the kernel
+	  when the drivers are initialized.
+
+
+	5. "PROBLEMS" AND TUNING,
+
+	o If you see error messages from the driver, and if the traffic
+	  stops on the adapter, try to do "ifconfig" and "route" once
+	  more, just as in "rc.inet1".  This should take care of most
+	  problems, including effects from power loss, or adapters that
+	  aren't connected to the printer port in some way or another.
+	  You can somewhat change the behaviour by enabling/disabling
+	  the macro  SHUTDOWN_WHEN_LOST  in the "tuning" section.
+	  For the DE-600 there is another macro, CHECK_LOST_DE600,
+	  that you might want to read about in the "tuning" section.
+
+	o Some machines have trouble handling the parallel port and
+	  the adapter at high speed. If you experience problems:
+
+	  DE-600:
+	  - The adapter is not recognized at boot, i.e. an Ethernet
+	    address of 00:80:c8:... is not shown, try to add another
+	      "; SLOW_DOWN_IO"
+	    at DE600_SLOW_DOWN in the "tuning" section. As a last resort,
+	    uncomment: "#define REALLY_SLOW_IO" (see <asm/io.h> for hints).
+
+	  - You experience "timeout" messages: first try to add another
+	      "; SLOW_DOWN_IO"
+	    at DE600_SLOW_DOWN in the "tuning" section, _then_ try to
+	    increase the value (original value: 5) at
+	    "if (tickssofar < 5)" near line 422.
+
+	  DE-620:
+	  - Your parallel port might be "sluggish".  To cater for
+	    this, there are the macros LOWSPEED and READ_DELAY/WRITE_DELAY
+	    in the "tuning" section. Your first step should be to enable
+	    LOWSPEED, and after that you can "tune" the XXX_DELAY values.
+
+	o If the adapter _is_ recognized at boot but you get messages
+	  about "Network Unreachable", then the problem is probably
+	  _not_ with the driver.  Check your net configuration instead
+	  (ifconfig and route) in "rc.inet1".
+
+	o There is some rudimentary support for debugging, look at
+	  the source. Use "-DDE600_DEBUG=3" or "-DDE620_DEBUG=3"
+	  when compiling, or include it in "linux/drivers/net/CONFIG".
+	  IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS YOU CAN'T SOLVE: PLEASE COMPILE THE DRIVER
+	  WITH DEBUGGING ENABLED, AND SEND ME THE RESULTING OUTPUT!
+
+
+	6. USING THE DRIVERS WITH EARLIER RELEASES.
+
+	The later 1.1.X releases of the Linux kernel include some
+	changes in the networking layer (a.k.a. NET3). This affects
+	these drivers in a few places.  The hints that follow are
+	_not_ tested by me, since I don't have the disk space to keep
+	all releases on-line.
+	Known needed changes to date:
+	- release patchfile: some patches will fail, but they should
+	  be easy to apply "by hand", since they are trivial.
+	  (Space.c: d_link_init() is now called de600_probe())
+	- de600.c: change  "mark_bh(NET_BH)" to  "mark_bh(INET_BH)".
+	- de620.c: (maybe) change the code around "netif_rx(skb);" to be
+		   similar to the code around "dev_rint(...)" in de600.c
+
+
+	7. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.
+
+	These drivers wouldn't have been done without the base
+	(and support) from Ross Biro, and D-Link Systems Inc.
+	The driver relies upon GPL-ed source from D-Link Systems Inc.
+	and from Russel Nelson at Crynwr Software <nelson@crynwr.com>.
+
+	Additional input also from:
+	Donald Becker <becker@super.org>, Alan Cox <A.Cox@swansea.ac.uk>
+	and Fred N. van Kempen <waltje@uWalt.NL.Mugnet.ORG>
+
+	DE-600 alpha release primary victim^H^H^H^H^H^Htester:
+	- Erik Proper <erikp@cs.kun.nl>.
+	Good input also from several users, most notably
+	- Mark Burton <markb@ordern.demon.co.uk>.
+
+	DE-620 alpha release victims^H^H^H^H^H^H^Htesters:
+	- J. Joshua Kopper <kopper@rtsg.mot.com>
+	- Olav Kvittem <Olav.Kvittem@uninett.no>
+	- Germano Caronni <caronni@nessie.cs.id.ethz.ch>
+	- Jeremy Fitzhardinge <jeremy@suite.sw.oz.au>
+
+
+	Happy hacking!
+
+	Bjorn Ekwall == bj0rn@blox.se
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qla3xxx b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qla3xxx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2f2077e34d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qla3xxx
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+Copyright (c)  2003-2006 QLogic Corporation
+QLogic Linux Networking HBA Driver
+
+This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be
+distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file.
+You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the
+GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+Foundation (version 2 or a later version).
+
+You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file
+under the following terms:
+
+	1. Redistribution of source code (only if applicable),
+	   must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
+	   conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
+	2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above
+	   copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
+	   following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
+	   materials provided with the distribution.
+
+	3. The name of QLogic Corporation may not be used to
+	   endorse or promote products derived from this software
+	   without specific prior written permission
+
+REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE,
+THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY
+EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
+PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
+BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
+EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
+ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+
+USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT
+CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR
+OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT,
+TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN
+ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN
+COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e7fb2c6023b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic
@@ -0,0 +1,288 @@
+Copyright (c) 2009-2011 QLogic Corporation
+QLogic Linux qlcnic NIC Driver
+
+You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the
+GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as
+Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2).
+
+
+EXHIBIT A
+
+		    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+		       Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+			    Preamble
+
+  The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.  This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it.  (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.)  You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code.  And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+  We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+  Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software.  If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+  Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents.  We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary.  To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+		    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+   TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+  0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License.  The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language.  (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".)  Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+  1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+  2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+    a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+    stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+    b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+    whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+    part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+    parties under the terms of this License.
+
+    c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+    when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+    interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+    announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+    notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+    a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+    these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+    License.  (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+    does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+    the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+  3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+    a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+    source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+    1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+    b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+    years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+    cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+    machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+    distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+    customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+    c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+    to distribute corresponding source code.  (This alternative is
+    allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+    received the program in object code or executable form with such
+    an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it.  For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable.  However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+  4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+  5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works.  These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+  6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+  7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all.  For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices.  Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+  8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded.  In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+  9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+  10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission.  For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this.  Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+			    NO WARRANTY
+
+  11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+  12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..123b6edd7f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+Copyright (c)  2003-2008 QLogic Corporation
+QLogic Linux Networking HBA Driver
+
+This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be
+distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file.
+You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the
+GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+Foundation (version 2 or a later version).
+
+You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file
+under the following terms:
+
+	1. Redistribution of source code (only if applicable),
+	   must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
+	   conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
+	2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above
+	   copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
+	   following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
+	   materials provided with the distribution.
+
+	3. The name of QLogic Corporation may not be used to
+	   endorse or promote products derived from this software
+	   without specific prior written permission
+
+REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE,
+THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY
+EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
+PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
+BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
+EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
+ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+
+USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT
+CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR
+OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT,
+TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN
+ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN
+COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/Makefile b/Documentation/networking/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..24c308dd3fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := ifenslave
+
+HOSTCFLAGS_ifenslave.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
+
+obj-m := timestamping/
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/PLIP.txt b/Documentation/networking/PLIP.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ad7e3f7c3bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/PLIP.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,215 @@
+PLIP: The Parallel Line Internet Protocol Device
+
+Donald Becker (becker@super.org)
+I.D.A. Supercomputing Research Center, Bowie MD 20715
+
+At some point T. Thorn will probably contribute text,
+Tommy Thorn (tthorn@daimi.aau.dk)
+
+PLIP Introduction
+-----------------
+
+This document describes the parallel port packet pusher for Net/LGX.
+This device interface allows a point-to-point connection between two
+parallel ports to appear as a IP network interface.
+
+What is PLIP?
+=============
+
+PLIP is Parallel Line IP, that is, the transportation of IP packages
+over a parallel port. In the case of a PC, the obvious choice is the
+printer port.  PLIP is a non-standard, but [can use] uses the standard
+LapLink null-printer cable [can also work in turbo mode, with a PLIP
+cable]. [The protocol used to pack IP packages, is a simple one
+initiated by Crynwr.]
+
+Advantages of PLIP
+==================
+
+It's cheap, it's available everywhere, and it's easy.
+
+The PLIP cable is all that's needed to connect two Linux boxes, and it
+can be built for very few bucks.
+
+Connecting two Linux boxes takes only a second's decision and a few
+minutes' work, no need to search for a [supported] netcard. This might
+even be especially important in the case of notebooks, where netcards
+are not easily available.
+
+Not requiring a netcard also means that apart from connecting the
+cables, everything else is software configuration [which in principle
+could be made very easy.]
+
+Disadvantages of PLIP
+=====================
+
+Doesn't work over a modem, like SLIP and PPP. Limited range, 15 m.
+Can only be used to connect three (?) Linux boxes. Doesn't connect to
+an existing Ethernet. Isn't standard (not even de facto standard, like
+SLIP).
+
+Performance
+===========
+
+PLIP easily outperforms Ethernet cards....(ups, I was dreaming, but
+it *is* getting late. EOB)
+
+PLIP driver details
+-------------------
+
+The Linux PLIP driver is an implementation of the original Crynwr protocol,
+that uses the parallel port subsystem of the kernel in order to properly
+share parallel ports between PLIP and other services.
+
+IRQs and trigger timeouts
+=========================
+
+When a parallel port used for a PLIP driver has an IRQ configured to it, the
+PLIP driver is signaled whenever data is sent to it via the cable, such that
+when no data is available, the driver isn't being used.
+
+However, on some machines it is hard, if not impossible, to configure an IRQ
+to a certain parallel port, mainly because it is used by some other device.
+On these machines, the PLIP driver can be used in IRQ-less mode, where
+the PLIP driver would constantly poll the parallel port for data waiting,
+and if such data is available, process it. This mode is less efficient than
+the IRQ mode, because the driver has to check the parallel port many times
+per second, even when no data at all is sent. Some rough measurements
+indicate that there isn't a noticeable performance drop when using IRQ-less
+mode as compared to IRQ mode as far as the data transfer speed is involved.
+There is a performance drop on the machine hosting the driver.
+
+When the PLIP driver is used in IRQ mode, the timeout used for triggering a
+data transfer (the maximal time the PLIP driver would allow the other side
+before announcing a timeout, when trying to handshake a transfer of some
+data) is, by default, 500usec. As IRQ delivery is more or less immediate,
+this timeout is quite sufficient. 
+
+When in IRQ-less mode, the PLIP driver polls the parallel port HZ times
+per second (where HZ is typically 100 on most platforms, and 1024 on an
+Alpha, as of this writing). Between two such polls, there are 10^6/HZ usecs.
+On an i386, for example, 10^6/100 = 10000usec. It is easy to see that it is
+quite possible for the trigger timeout to expire between two such polls, as
+the timeout is only 500usec long. As a result, it is required to change the
+trigger timeout on the *other* side of a PLIP connection, to about
+10^6/HZ usecs. If both sides of a PLIP connection are used in IRQ-less mode,
+this timeout is required on both sides.
+
+It appears that in practice, the trigger timeout can be shorter than in the
+above calculation. It isn't an important issue, unless the wire is faulty,
+in which case a long timeout would stall the machine when, for whatever
+reason, bits are dropped.
+
+A utility that can perform this change in Linux is plipconfig, which is part
+of the net-tools package (its location can be found in the
+Documentation/Changes file). An example command would be
+'plipconfig plipX trigger 10000', where plipX is the appropriate
+PLIP device.
+
+PLIP hardware interconnection
+-----------------------------
+
+PLIP uses several different data transfer methods.  The first (and the
+only one implemented in the early version of the code) uses a standard
+printer "null" cable to transfer data four bits at a time using
+data bit outputs connected to status bit inputs.
+
+The second data transfer method relies on both machines having
+bi-directional parallel ports, rather than output-only ``printer''
+ports.  This allows byte-wide transfers and avoids reconstructing
+nibbles into bytes, leading to much faster transfers.
+
+Parallel Transfer Mode 0 Cable
+==============================
+
+The cable for the first transfer mode is a standard
+printer "null" cable which transfers data four bits at a time using
+data bit outputs of the first port (machine T) connected to the
+status bit inputs of the second port (machine R).  There are five
+status inputs, and they are used as four data inputs and a clock (data
+strobe) input, arranged so that the data input bits appear as contiguous
+bits with standard status register implementation.
+
+A cable that implements this protocol is available commercially as a
+"Null Printer" or "Turbo Laplink" cable.  It can be constructed with
+two DB-25 male connectors symmetrically connected as follows:
+
+    STROBE output	1*
+    D0->ERROR	2 - 15		15 - 2
+    D1->SLCT	3 - 13		13 - 3
+    D2->PAPOUT	4 - 12		12 - 4
+    D3->ACK	5 - 10		10 - 5
+    D4->BUSY	6 - 11		11 - 6
+    D5,D6,D7 are   7*, 8*, 9*
+    AUTOFD output 14*
+    INIT   output 16*
+    SLCTIN	17 - 17
+    extra grounds are 18*,19*,20*,21*,22*,23*,24*
+    GROUND	25 - 25
+* Do not connect these pins on either end
+
+If the cable you are using has a metallic shield it should be
+connected to the metallic DB-25 shell at one end only.
+
+Parallel Transfer Mode 1
+========================
+
+The second data transfer method relies on both machines having
+bi-directional parallel ports, rather than output-only ``printer''
+ports.  This allows byte-wide transfers, and avoids reconstructing
+nibbles into bytes.  This cable should not be used on unidirectional
+``printer'' (as opposed to ``parallel'') ports or when the machine
+isn't configured for PLIP, as it will result in output driver
+conflicts and the (unlikely) possibility of damage.
+
+The cable for this transfer mode should be constructed as follows:
+
+    STROBE->BUSY 1 - 11
+    D0->D0	2 - 2
+    D1->D1	3 - 3
+    D2->D2	4 - 4
+    D3->D3	5 - 5
+    D4->D4	6 - 6
+    D5->D5	7 - 7
+    D6->D6	8 - 8
+    D7->D7	9 - 9
+    INIT -> ACK  16 - 10
+    AUTOFD->PAPOUT 14 - 12
+    SLCT->SLCTIN 13 - 17
+    GND->ERROR	18 - 15
+    extra grounds are 19*,20*,21*,22*,23*,24*
+    GROUND	25 - 25
+* Do not connect these pins on either end
+
+Once again, if the cable you are using has a metallic shield it should
+be connected to the metallic DB-25 shell at one end only.
+
+PLIP Mode 0 transfer protocol
+=============================
+
+The PLIP driver is compatible with the "Crynwr" parallel port transfer
+standard in Mode 0.  That standard specifies the following protocol:
+
+   send header nibble '0x8'
+   count-low octet
+   count-high octet
+   ... data octets
+   checksum octet
+
+Each octet is sent as
+	<wait for rx. '0x1?'>	<send 0x10+(octet&0x0F)>
+	<wait for rx. '0x0?'>	<send 0x00+((octet>>4)&0x0F)>
+
+To start a transfer the transmitting machine outputs a nibble 0x08.
+That raises the ACK line, triggering an interrupt in the receiving
+machine.  The receiving machine disables interrupts and raises its own ACK
+line. 
+
+Restated:
+
+(OUT is bit 0-4, OUT.j is bit j from OUT. IN likewise)
+Send_Byte:
+   OUT := low nibble, OUT.4 := 1
+   WAIT FOR IN.4 = 1
+   OUT := high nibble, OUT.4 := 0
+   WAIT FOR IN.4 = 0
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2100 b/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2100
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6f85e1d0603
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2100
@@ -0,0 +1,293 @@
+
+Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2100 Driver for Linux in support of:
+
+Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2100 Network Connection
+
+Copyright (C) 2003-2006, Intel Corporation
+
+README.ipw2100
+
+Version: git-1.1.5
+Date   : January 25, 2006
+
+Index
+-----------------------------------------------
+0. IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER
+1. Introduction
+2. Release git-1.1.5 Current Features
+3. Command Line Parameters
+4. Sysfs Helper Files
+5. Radio Kill Switch
+6. Dynamic Firmware
+7. Power Management
+8. Support
+9. License
+
+
+0.   IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+Important Notice FOR ALL USERS OR DISTRIBUTORS!!!!
+
+Intel wireless LAN adapters are engineered, manufactured, tested, and
+quality checked to ensure that they meet all necessary local and
+governmental regulatory agency requirements for the regions that they
+are designated and/or marked to ship into. Since wireless LANs are
+generally unlicensed devices that share spectrum with radars,
+satellites, and other licensed and unlicensed devices, it is sometimes
+necessary to dynamically detect, avoid, and limit usage to avoid
+interference with these devices. In many instances Intel is required to
+provide test data to prove regional and local compliance to regional and
+governmental regulations before certification or approval to use the
+product is granted. Intel's wireless LAN's EEPROM, firmware, and
+software driver are designed to carefully control parameters that affect
+radio operation and to ensure electromagnetic compliance (EMC). These
+parameters include, without limitation, RF power, spectrum usage,
+channel scanning, and human exposure.
+
+For these reasons Intel cannot permit any manipulation by third parties
+of the software provided in binary format with the wireless WLAN
+adapters (e.g., the EEPROM and firmware). Furthermore, if you use any
+patches, utilities, or code with the Intel wireless LAN adapters that
+have been manipulated by an unauthorized party (i.e., patches,
+utilities, or code (including open source code modifications) which have
+not been validated by Intel), (i) you will be solely responsible for
+ensuring the regulatory compliance of the products, (ii) Intel will bear
+no liability, under any theory of liability for any issues associated
+with the modified products, including without limitation, claims under
+the warranty and/or issues arising from regulatory non-compliance, and
+(iii) Intel will not provide or be required to assist in providing
+support to any third parties for such modified products.
+
+Note: Many regulatory agencies consider Wireless LAN adapters to be
+modules, and accordingly, condition system-level regulatory approval
+upon receipt and review of test data documenting that the antennas and
+system configuration do not cause the EMC and radio operation to be
+non-compliant.
+
+The drivers available for download from SourceForge are provided as a
+part of a development project.  Conformance to local regulatory
+requirements is the responsibility of the individual developer.  As
+such, if you are interested in deploying or shipping a driver as part of
+solution intended to be used for purposes other than development, please
+obtain a tested driver from Intel Customer Support at:
+
+http://www.intel.com/support/wireless/sb/CS-006408.htm
+
+1. Introduction
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+This document provides a brief overview of the features supported by the 
+IPW2100 driver project.  The main project website, where the latest 
+development version of the driver can be found, is:
+
+	http://ipw2100.sourceforge.net
+
+There you can find the not only the latest releases, but also information about
+potential fixes and patches, as well as links to the development mailing list
+for the driver project.
+
+
+2. Release git-1.1.5 Current Supported Features
+-----------------------------------------------
+- Managed (BSS) and Ad-Hoc (IBSS)
+- WEP (shared key and open)
+- Wireless Tools support 
+- 802.1x (tested with XSupplicant 1.0.1)
+
+Enabled (but not supported) features:
+- Monitor/RFMon mode
+- WPA/WPA2
+
+The distinction between officially supported and enabled is a reflection
+on the amount of validation and interoperability testing that has been
+performed on a given feature.
+
+
+3. Command Line Parameters
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are used
+by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using this
+syntax:
+
+	modprobe ipw2100 [<option>=<VAL1><,VAL2>...]
+
+For example, to disable the radio on driver loading, enter:
+
+	modprobe ipw2100 disable=1
+
+The ipw2100 driver supports the following module parameters:
+
+Name		Value		Example:
+debug		0x0-0xffffffff	debug=1024
+mode		0,1,2		mode=1   /* AdHoc */
+channel		int		channel=3 /* Only valid in AdHoc or Monitor */
+associate	boolean		associate=0 /* Do NOT auto associate */
+disable		boolean		disable=1 /* Do not power the HW */
+
+
+4. Sysfs Helper Files
+---------------------------     
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+There are several ways to control the behavior of the driver.  Many of the 
+general capabilities are exposed through the Wireless Tools (iwconfig).  There
+are a few capabilities that are exposed through entries in the Linux Sysfs.
+
+
+----- Driver Level ------
+For the driver level files, look in /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100/
+
+  debug_level  
+	
+	This controls the same global as the 'debug' module parameter.  For 
+        information on the various debugging levels available, run the 'dvals'
+	script found in the driver source directory.
+
+	NOTE:  'debug_level' is only enabled if CONFIG_IPW2100_DEBUG is turn
+	       on.
+
+----- Device Level ------
+For the device level files look in
+	
+	/sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100/{PCI-ID}/
+
+For example:
+	/sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100/0000:02:01.0
+
+For the device level files, see /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100:
+
+  rf_kill
+	read - 
+	0 = RF kill not enabled (radio on)
+	1 = SW based RF kill active (radio off)
+	2 = HW based RF kill active (radio off)
+	3 = Both HW and SW RF kill active (radio off)
+	write -
+	0 = If SW based RF kill active, turn the radio back on
+	1 = If radio is on, activate SW based RF kill
+
+	NOTE: If you enable the SW based RF kill and then toggle the HW
+  	based RF kill from ON -> OFF -> ON, the radio will NOT come back on
+
+
+5. Radio Kill Switch
+-----------------------------------------------
+Most laptops provide the ability for the user to physically disable the radio.
+Some vendors have implemented this as a physical switch that requires no
+software to turn the radio off and on.  On other laptops, however, the switch
+is controlled through a button being pressed and a software driver then making
+calls to turn the radio off and on.  This is referred to as a "software based
+RF kill switch"
+
+See the Sysfs helper file 'rf_kill' for determining the state of the RF switch
+on your system.
+
+
+6. Dynamic Firmware
+-----------------------------------------------
+As the firmware is licensed under a restricted use license, it can not be 
+included within the kernel sources.  To enable the IPW2100 you will need a 
+firmware image to load into the wireless NIC's processors.
+
+You can obtain these images from <http://ipw2100.sf.net/firmware.php>.
+
+See INSTALL for instructions on installing the firmware.
+
+
+7. Power Management
+-----------------------------------------------
+The IPW2100 supports the configuration of the Power Save Protocol 
+through a private wireless extension interface.  The IPW2100 supports 
+the following different modes:
+
+	off	No power management.  Radio is always on.
+	on	Automatic power management
+	1-5	Different levels of power management.  The higher the 
+		number the greater the power savings, but with an impact to 
+		packet latencies. 
+
+Power management works by powering down the radio after a certain 
+interval of time has passed where no packets are passed through the 
+radio.  Once powered down, the radio remains in that state for a given 
+period of time.  For higher power savings, the interval between last 
+packet processed to sleep is shorter and the sleep period is longer.
+
+When the radio is asleep, the access point sending data to the station 
+must buffer packets at the AP until the station wakes up and requests 
+any buffered packets.  If you have an AP that does not correctly support 
+the PSP protocol you may experience packet loss or very poor performance 
+while power management is enabled.  If this is the case, you will need 
+to try and find a firmware update for your AP, or disable power 
+management (via `iwconfig eth1 power off`)
+
+To configure the power level on the IPW2100 you use a combination of 
+iwconfig and iwpriv.  iwconfig is used to turn power management on, off, 
+and set it to auto.
+
+	iwconfig eth1 power off    Disables radio power down
+	iwconfig eth1 power on     Enables radio power management to 
+				   last set level (defaults to AUTO)
+	iwpriv eth1 set_power 0    Sets power level to AUTO and enables 
+				   power management if not previously 
+				   enabled.
+	iwpriv eth1 set_power 1-5  Set the power level as specified, 
+				   enabling power management if not 
+				   previously enabled.
+
+You can view the current power level setting via:
+	
+	iwpriv eth1 get_power
+
+It will return the current period or timeout that is configured as a string
+in the form of xxxx/yyyy (z) where xxxx is the timeout interval (amount of
+time after packet processing), yyyy is the period to sleep (amount of time to 
+wait before powering the radio and querying the access point for buffered
+packets), and z is the 'power level'.  If power management is turned off the
+xxxx/yyyy will be replaced with 'off' -- the level reported will be the active
+level if `iwconfig eth1 power on` is invoked.
+
+
+8. Support
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+For general development information and support,
+go to:
+	
+    http://ipw2100.sf.net/
+
+The ipw2100 1.1.0 driver and firmware can be downloaded from:  
+
+    http://support.intel.com
+
+For installation support on the ipw2100 1.1.0 driver on Linux kernels 
+2.6.8 or greater, email support is available from:  
+
+    http://supportmail.intel.com
+
+9. License
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+  Copyright(c) 2003 - 2006 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.
+
+  This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it 
+  under the terms of the GNU General Public License (version 2) as 
+  published by the Free Software Foundation.
+  
+  This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT 
+  ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or 
+  FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for 
+  more details.
+  
+  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+  this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 
+  Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307, USA.
+  
+  The full GNU General Public License is included in this distribution in the
+  file called LICENSE.
+  
+  License Contact Information:
+  James P. Ketrenos <ipw2100-admin@linux.intel.com>
+  Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200 b/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b7658bed490
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200
@@ -0,0 +1,472 @@
+
+Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux in support of:
+
+Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection
+Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection
+
+Note: The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux and Intel(R)
+PRO/Wireless 2200BG Driver for Linux is a unified driver that works on
+both hardware adapters listed above. In this document the Intel(R)
+PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux will be used to reference the
+unified driver.
+
+Copyright (C) 2004-2006, Intel Corporation
+
+README.ipw2200
+
+Version: 1.1.2
+Date   : March 30, 2006
+
+
+Index
+-----------------------------------------------
+0.   IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER
+1.   Introduction
+1.1. Overview of features
+1.2. Module parameters
+1.3. Wireless Extension Private Methods
+1.4. Sysfs Helper Files
+1.5. Supported channels
+2.   Ad-Hoc Networking
+3.   Interacting with Wireless Tools
+3.1. iwconfig mode
+3.2. iwconfig sens
+4.   About the Version Numbers
+5.   Firmware installation
+6.   Support
+7.   License
+
+
+0.   IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+Important Notice FOR ALL USERS OR DISTRIBUTORS!!!! 
+
+Intel wireless LAN adapters are engineered, manufactured, tested, and
+quality checked to ensure that they meet all necessary local and
+governmental regulatory agency requirements for the regions that they
+are designated and/or marked to ship into. Since wireless LANs are
+generally unlicensed devices that share spectrum with radars,
+satellites, and other licensed and unlicensed devices, it is sometimes
+necessary to dynamically detect, avoid, and limit usage to avoid
+interference with these devices. In many instances Intel is required to
+provide test data to prove regional and local compliance to regional and
+governmental regulations before certification or approval to use the
+product is granted. Intel's wireless LAN's EEPROM, firmware, and
+software driver are designed to carefully control parameters that affect
+radio operation and to ensure electromagnetic compliance (EMC). These
+parameters include, without limitation, RF power, spectrum usage,
+channel scanning, and human exposure. 
+
+For these reasons Intel cannot permit any manipulation by third parties
+of the software provided in binary format with the wireless WLAN
+adapters (e.g., the EEPROM and firmware). Furthermore, if you use any
+patches, utilities, or code with the Intel wireless LAN adapters that
+have been manipulated by an unauthorized party (i.e., patches,
+utilities, or code (including open source code modifications) which have
+not been validated by Intel), (i) you will be solely responsible for
+ensuring the regulatory compliance of the products, (ii) Intel will bear
+no liability, under any theory of liability for any issues associated
+with the modified products, including without limitation, claims under
+the warranty and/or issues arising from regulatory non-compliance, and
+(iii) Intel will not provide or be required to assist in providing
+support to any third parties for such modified products.  
+
+Note: Many regulatory agencies consider Wireless LAN adapters to be
+modules, and accordingly, condition system-level regulatory approval
+upon receipt and review of test data documenting that the antennas and
+system configuration do not cause the EMC and radio operation to be
+non-compliant.
+
+The drivers available for download from SourceForge are provided as a 
+part of a development project.  Conformance to local regulatory 
+requirements is the responsibility of the individual developer.  As 
+such, if you are interested in deploying or shipping a driver as part of 
+solution intended to be used for purposes other than development, please 
+obtain a tested driver from Intel Customer Support at:
+
+http://support.intel.com
+
+
+1.   Introduction
+-----------------------------------------------
+The following sections attempt to provide a brief introduction to using 
+the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux.
+
+This document is not meant to be a comprehensive manual on 
+understanding or using wireless technologies, but should be sufficient 
+to get you moving without wires on Linux.
+
+For information on building and installing the driver, see the INSTALL
+file.
+
+
+1.1. Overview of Features
+-----------------------------------------------
+The current release (1.1.2) supports the following features:
+
++ BSS mode (Infrastructure, Managed)
++ IBSS mode (Ad-Hoc)
++ WEP (OPEN and SHARED KEY mode)
++ 802.1x EAP via wpa_supplicant and xsupplicant
++ Wireless Extension support 
++ Full B and G rate support (2200 and 2915)
++ Full A rate support (2915 only)
++ Transmit power control
++ S state support (ACPI suspend/resume)
+
+The following features are currently enabled, but not officially
+supported:
+
++ WPA
++ long/short preamble support
++ Monitor mode (aka RFMon)
+
+The distinction between officially supported and enabled is a reflection 
+on the amount of validation and interoperability testing that has been
+performed on a given feature. 
+
+
+
+1.2. Command Line Parameters
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+Like many modules used in the Linux kernel, the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless
+2915ABG Driver for Linux allows configuration options to be provided 
+as module parameters.  The most common way to specify a module parameter 
+is via the command line.  
+
+The general form is:
+
+% modprobe ipw2200 parameter=value
+
+Where the supported parameter are:
+
+  associate
+	Set to 0 to disable the auto scan-and-associate functionality of the
+	driver.  If disabled, the driver will not attempt to scan 
+	for and associate to a network until it has been configured with 
+	one or more properties for the target network, for example configuring 
+	the network SSID.  Default is 0 (do not auto-associate)
+	
+	Example: % modprobe ipw2200 associate=0
+
+  auto_create
+	Set to 0 to disable the auto creation of an Ad-Hoc network 
+	matching the channel and network name parameters provided.  
+	Default is 1.
+
+  channel
+	channel number for association.  The normal method for setting
+        the channel would be to use the standard wireless tools
+        (i.e. `iwconfig eth1 channel 10`), but it is useful sometimes
+	to set this while debugging.  Channel 0 means 'ANY'
+
+  debug
+	If using a debug build, this is used to control the amount of debug
+	info is logged.  See the 'dvals' and 'load' script for more info on
+	how to use this (the dvals and load scripts are provided as part 
+	of the ipw2200 development snapshot releases available from the 
+	SourceForge project at http://ipw2200.sf.net)
+  
+  led
+	Can be used to turn on experimental LED code.
+	0 = Off, 1 = On.  Default is 1.
+
+  mode
+	Can be used to set the default mode of the adapter.  
+	0 = Managed, 1 = Ad-Hoc, 2 = Monitor
+
+
+1.3. Wireless Extension Private Methods
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+As an interface designed to handle generic hardware, there are certain 
+capabilities not exposed through the normal Wireless Tool interface.  As 
+such, a provision is provided for a driver to declare custom, or 
+private, methods.  The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux 
+defines several of these to configure various settings.
+
+The general form of using the private wireless methods is:
+
+	% iwpriv $IFNAME method parameters
+
+Where $IFNAME is the interface name the device is registered with 
+(typically eth1, customized via one of the various network interface
+name managers, such as ifrename)
+
+The supported private methods are:
+
+  get_mode
+	Can be used to report out which IEEE mode the driver is 
+	configured to support.  Example:
+	
+	% iwpriv eth1 get_mode
+	eth1	get_mode:802.11bg (6)
+
+  set_mode
+	Can be used to configure which IEEE mode the driver will 
+	support.  
+
+	Usage:
+	% iwpriv eth1 set_mode {mode}
+	Where {mode} is a number in the range 1-7:
+	1	802.11a (2915 only)
+	2	802.11b
+	3	802.11ab (2915 only)
+	4	802.11g 
+	5	802.11ag (2915 only)
+	6	802.11bg
+	7	802.11abg (2915 only)
+
+  get_preamble
+	Can be used to report configuration of preamble length.
+
+  set_preamble
+	Can be used to set the configuration of preamble length:
+
+	Usage:
+	% iwpriv eth1 set_preamble {mode}
+	Where {mode} is one of:
+	1	Long preamble only
+	0	Auto (long or short based on connection)
+	
+
+1.4. Sysfs Helper Files:
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+The Linux kernel provides a pseudo file system that can be used to 
+access various components of the operating system.  The Intel(R)
+PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux exposes several configuration
+parameters through this mechanism.
+
+An entry in the sysfs can support reading and/or writing.  You can 
+typically query the contents of a sysfs entry through the use of cat, 
+and can set the contents via echo.  For example:
+
+% cat /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/debug_level
+
+Will report the current debug level of the driver's logging subsystem 
+(only available if CONFIG_IPW2200_DEBUG was configured when the driver
+was built).
+
+You can set the debug level via:
+
+% echo $VALUE > /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/debug_level
+
+Where $VALUE would be a number in the case of this sysfs entry.  The 
+input to sysfs files does not have to be a number.  For example, the 
+firmware loader used by hotplug utilizes sysfs entries for transferring 
+the firmware image from user space into the driver.
+
+The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux exposes sysfs entries 
+at two levels -- driver level, which apply to all instances of the driver 
+(in the event that there are more than one device installed) and device 
+level, which applies only to the single specific instance.
+
+
+1.4.1 Driver Level Sysfs Helper Files
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+For the driver level files, look in /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/
+
+  debug_level  
+	
+	This controls the same global as the 'debug' module parameter
+
+
+
+1.4.2 Device Level Sysfs Helper Files
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+For the device level files, look in
+	
+	/sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/{PCI-ID}/
+
+For example:
+	/sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/0000:02:01.0
+
+For the device level files, see /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200:
+
+  rf_kill
+	read - 
+	0 = RF kill not enabled (radio on)
+	1 = SW based RF kill active (radio off)
+	2 = HW based RF kill active (radio off)
+	3 = Both HW and SW RF kill active (radio off)
+	write -
+	0 = If SW based RF kill active, turn the radio back on
+	1 = If radio is on, activate SW based RF kill
+
+	NOTE: If you enable the SW based RF kill and then toggle the HW
+  	based RF kill from ON -> OFF -> ON, the radio will NOT come back on
+	
+  ucode 
+	read-only access to the ucode version number
+
+  led
+	read -
+	0 = LED code disabled
+	1 = LED code enabled
+	write -
+	0 = Disable LED code
+	1 = Enable LED code
+
+	NOTE: The LED code has been reported to hang some systems when 
+	running ifconfig and is therefore disabled by default.
+
+
+1.5. Supported channels
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+Upon loading the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux, a
+message stating the detected geography code and the number of 802.11
+channels supported by the card will be displayed in the log.
+
+The geography code corresponds to a regulatory domain as shown in the
+table below.
+
+					  Supported channels
+Code	Geography			802.11bg	802.11a
+
+---	Restricted			11 	 	 0
+ZZF	Custom US/Canada		11	 	 8
+ZZD	Rest of World			13	 	 0
+ZZA	Custom USA & Europe & High	11		13
+ZZB	Custom NA & Europe    		11		13
+ZZC	Custom Japan			11	 	 4
+ZZM	Custom 				11	 	 0
+ZZE	Europe				13		19
+ZZJ	Custom Japan			14	 	 4
+ZZR	Rest of World			14	 	 0
+ZZH	High Band			13	 	 4
+ZZG	Custom Europe			13	 	 4
+ZZK	Europe 				13		24
+ZZL	Europe				11		13
+
+
+2.   Ad-Hoc Networking
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+When using a device in an Ad-Hoc network, it is useful to understand the 
+sequence and requirements for the driver to be able to create, join, or 
+merge networks.
+
+The following attempts to provide enough information so that you can 
+have a consistent experience while using the driver as a member of an 
+Ad-Hoc network.
+
+2.1. Joining an Ad-Hoc Network
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+The easiest way to get onto an Ad-Hoc network is to join one that 
+already exists.
+
+2.2. Creating an Ad-Hoc Network
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+An Ad-Hoc networks is created using the syntax of the Wireless tool.
+
+For Example:
+iwconfig eth1 mode ad-hoc essid testing channel 2
+
+2.3. Merging Ad-Hoc Networks
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+
+3.  Interaction with Wireless Tools
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+3.1 iwconfig mode
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+When configuring the mode of the adapter, all run-time configured parameters
+are reset to the value used when the module was loaded.  This includes
+channels, rates, ESSID, etc.
+
+3.2 iwconfig sens
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+The 'iwconfig ethX sens XX' command will not set the signal sensitivity
+threshold, as described in iwconfig documentation, but rather the number
+of consecutive missed beacons that will trigger handover, i.e. roaming
+to another access point. At the same time, it will set the disassociation
+threshold to 3 times the given value.
+
+
+4.   About the Version Numbers
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+Due to the nature of open source development projects, there are 
+frequently changes being incorporated that have not gone through 
+a complete validation process.  These changes are incorporated into 
+development snapshot releases.
+
+Releases are numbered with a three level scheme: 
+
+	major.minor.development
+
+Any version where the 'development' portion is 0 (for example
+1.0.0, 1.1.0, etc.) indicates a stable version that will be made 
+available for kernel inclusion.
+
+Any version where the 'development' portion is not a 0 (for
+example 1.0.1, 1.1.5, etc.) indicates a development version that is
+being made available for testing and cutting edge users.  The stability 
+and functionality of the development releases are not know.  We make
+efforts to try and keep all snapshots reasonably stable, but due to the
+frequency of their release, and the desire to get those releases 
+available as quickly as possible, unknown anomalies should be expected.
+
+The major version number will be incremented when significant changes
+are made to the driver.  Currently, there are no major changes planned.
+
+5.  Firmware installation
+----------------------------------------------
+
+The driver requires a firmware image, download it and extract the
+files under /lib/firmware (or wherever your hotplug's firmware.agent
+will look for firmware files)
+
+The firmware can be downloaded from the following URL:
+
+    http://ipw2200.sf.net/
+
+
+6.  Support
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+For direct support of the 1.0.0 version, you can contact 
+http://supportmail.intel.com, or you can use the open source project
+support.
+
+For general information and support, go to:
+	
+    http://ipw2200.sf.net/
+
+
+7.  License
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+  Copyright(c) 2003 - 2006 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.
+
+  This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it 
+  under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as 
+  published by the Free Software Foundation.
+  
+  This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT 
+  ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or 
+  FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for 
+  more details.
+  
+  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+  this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 
+  Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307, USA.
+  
+  The full GNU General Public License is included in this distribution in the
+  file called LICENSE.
+  
+  Contact Information:
+  James P. Ketrenos <ipw2100-admin@linux.intel.com>
+  Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/README.sb1000 b/Documentation/networking/README.sb1000
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f92c2aac56a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/README.sb1000
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+sb1000 is a module network device driver for the General Instrument (also known
+as NextLevel) SURFboard1000 internal cable modem board.  This is an ISA card
+which is used by a number of cable TV companies to provide cable modem access.
+It's a one-way downstream-only cable modem, meaning that your upstream net link
+is provided by your regular phone modem.
+
+This driver was written by Franco Venturi <fventuri@mediaone.net>.  He deserves
+a great deal of thanks for this wonderful piece of code!
+
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Support for this device is now a part of the standard Linux kernel.  The
+driver source code file is drivers/net/sb1000.c.  In addition to this
+you will need:
+
+1.) The "cmconfig" program.  This is a utility which supplements "ifconfig"
+to configure the cable modem and network interface (usually called "cm0");
+and
+
+2.) Several PPP scripts which live in /etc/ppp to make connecting via your
+cable modem easy.
+
+   These utilities can be obtained from:
+
+      http://www.jacksonville.net/~fventuri/
+
+   in Franco's original source code distribution .tar.gz file.  Support for
+   the sb1000 driver can be found at:
+
+      http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://home.adelphia.net/~siglercm/sb1000.html
+      http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://linuxpower.cx/~cable/
+
+   along with these utilities.
+
+3.) The standard isapnp tools.  These are necessary to configure your SB1000
+card at boot time (or afterwards by hand) since it's a PnP card.
+
+   If you don't have these installed as a standard part of your Linux
+   distribution, you can find them at:
+
+      http://www.roestock.demon.co.uk/isapnptools/
+
+   or check your Linux distribution binary CD or their web site.  For help with
+   isapnp, pnpdump, or /etc/isapnp.conf, go to:
+
+      http://www.roestock.demon.co.uk/isapnptools/isapnpfaq.html
+
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+To make the SB1000 card work, follow these steps:
+
+1.) Run `make config', or `make menuconfig', or `make xconfig', whichever
+you prefer, in the top kernel tree directory to set up your kernel
+configuration.  Make sure to say "Y" to "Prompt for development drivers"
+and to say "M" to the sb1000 driver.  Also say "Y" or "M" to all the standard
+networking questions to get TCP/IP and PPP networking support.
+
+2.) *BEFORE* you build the kernel, edit drivers/net/sb1000.c.  Make sure
+to redefine the value of READ_DATA_PORT to match the I/O address used
+by isapnp to access your PnP cards.  This is the value of READPORT in
+/etc/isapnp.conf or given by the output of pnpdump.
+
+3.) Build and install the kernel and modules as usual.
+
+4.) Boot your new kernel following the usual procedures.
+
+5.) Set up to configure the new SB1000 PnP card by capturing the output
+of "pnpdump" to a file and editing this file to set the correct I/O ports,
+IRQ, and DMA settings for all your PnP cards.  Make sure none of the settings
+conflict with one another.  Then test this configuration by running the
+"isapnp" command with your new config file as the input.  Check for
+errors and fix as necessary.  (As an aside, I use I/O ports 0x110 and
+0x310 and IRQ 11 for my SB1000 card and these work well for me.  YMMV.)
+Then save the finished config file as /etc/isapnp.conf for proper configuration
+on subsequent reboots.
+
+6.) Download the original file sb1000-1.1.2.tar.gz from Franco's site or one of
+the others referenced above.  As root, unpack it into a temporary directory and
+do a `make cmconfig' and then `install -c cmconfig /usr/local/sbin'.  Don't do
+`make install' because it expects to find all the utilities built and ready for
+installation, not just cmconfig.
+
+7.) As root, copy all the files under the ppp/ subdirectory in Franco's
+tar file into /etc/ppp, being careful not to overwrite any files that are
+already in there.  Then modify ppp@gi-on to set the correct login name,
+phone number, and frequency for the cable modem.  Also edit pap-secrets
+to specify your login name and password and any site-specific information
+you need.
+
+8.) Be sure to modify /etc/ppp/firewall to use ipchains instead of
+the older ipfwadm commands from the 2.0.x kernels.  There's a neat utility to
+convert ipfwadm commands to ipchains commands:
+
+   http://users.dhp.com/~whisper/ipfwadm2ipchains/
+
+You may also wish to modify the firewall script to implement a different
+firewalling scheme.
+
+9.) Start the PPP connection via the script /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on.  You must be
+root to do this.  It's better to use a utility like sudo to execute
+frequently used commands like this with root permissions if possible.  If you
+connect successfully the cable modem interface will come up and you'll see a
+driver message like this at the console:
+
+         cm0: sb1000 at (0x110,0x310), csn 1, S/N 0x2a0d16d8, IRQ 11.
+         sb1000.c:v1.1.2 6/01/98 (fventuri@mediaone.net)
+
+The "ifconfig" command should show two new interfaces, ppp0 and cm0.
+The command "cmconfig cm0" will give you information about the cable modem
+interface.
+
+10.) Try pinging a site via `ping -c 5 www.yahoo.com', for example.  You should
+see packets received.
+
+11.) If you can't get site names (like www.yahoo.com) to resolve into
+IP addresses (like 204.71.200.67), be sure your /etc/resolv.conf file
+has no syntax errors and has the right nameserver IP addresses in it.
+If this doesn't help, try something like `ping -c 5 204.71.200.67' to
+see if the networking is running but the DNS resolution is where the
+problem lies.
+
+12.) If you still have problems, go to the support web sites mentioned above
+and read the information and documentation there.
+
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Common problems:
+
+1.) Packets go out on the ppp0 interface but don't come back on the cm0
+interface.  It looks like I'm connected but I can't even ping any
+numerical IP addresses.  (This happens predominantly on Debian systems due
+to a default boot-time configuration script.)
+
+Solution -- As root `echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/cm0/rp_filter' so it
+can share the same IP address as the ppp0 interface.  Note that this
+command should probably be added to the /etc/ppp/cablemodem script
+*right*between* the "/sbin/ifconfig" and "/sbin/cmconfig" commands.
+You may need to do this to /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/ppp0/rp_filter as well.
+If you do this to /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/default/rp_filter on each reboot
+(in rc.local or some such) then any interfaces can share the same IP
+addresses.
+
+2.) I get "unresolved symbol" error messages on executing `insmod sb1000.o'.
+
+Solution -- You probably have a non-matching kernel source tree and
+/usr/include/linux and /usr/include/asm header files.  Make sure you
+install the correct versions of the header files in these two directories.
+Then rebuild and reinstall the kernel.
+
+3.) When isapnp runs it reports an error, and my SB1000 card isn't working.
+
+Solution -- There's a problem with later versions of isapnp using the "(CHECK)"
+option in the lines that allocate the two I/O addresses for the SB1000 card.
+This first popped up on RH 6.0.  Delete "(CHECK)" for the SB1000 I/O addresses.
+Make sure they don't conflict with any other pieces of hardware first!  Then
+rerun isapnp and go from there.
+
+4.) I can't execute the /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on file.
+
+Solution -- As root do `chmod ug+x /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on'.
+
+5.) The firewall script isn't working (with 2.2.x and higher kernels).
+
+Solution -- Use the ipfwadm2ipchains script referenced above to convert the
+/etc/ppp/firewall script from the deprecated ipfwadm commands to ipchains.
+
+6.) I'm getting *tons* of firewall deny messages in the /var/kern.log,
+/var/messages, and/or /var/syslog files, and they're filling up my /var
+partition!!!
+
+Solution -- First, tell your ISP that you're receiving DoS (Denial of Service)
+and/or portscanning (UDP connection attempts) attacks!  Look over the deny
+messages to figure out what the attack is and where it's coming from.  Next,
+edit /etc/ppp/cablemodem and make sure the ",nobroadcast" option is turned on
+to the "cmconfig" command (uncomment that line).  If you're not receiving these
+denied packets on your broadcast interface (IP address xxx.yyy.zzz.255
+typically), then someone is attacking your machine in particular.  Be careful
+out there....
+
+7.) Everything seems to work fine but my computer locks up after a while
+(and typically during a lengthy download through the cable modem)!
+
+Solution -- You may need to add a short delay in the driver to 'slow down' the
+SURFboard because your PC might not be able to keep up with the transfer rate
+of the SB1000. To do this, it's probably best to download Franco's
+sb1000-1.1.2.tar.gz archive and build and install sb1000.o manually.  You'll
+want to edit the 'Makefile' and look for the 'SB1000_DELAY'
+define.  Uncomment those 'CFLAGS' lines (and comment out the default ones)
+and try setting the delay to something like 60 microseconds with:
+'-DSB1000_DELAY=60'.  Then do `make' and as root `make install' and try
+it out.  If it still doesn't work or you like playing with the driver, you may
+try other numbers.  Remember though that the higher the delay, the slower the
+driver (which slows down the rest of the PC too when it is actively
+used). Thanks to Ed Daiga for this tip!
+
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Credits:  This README came from Franco Venturi's original README file which is
+still supplied with his driver .tar.gz archive.  I and all other sb1000 users
+owe Franco a tremendous "Thank you!"  Additional thanks goes to Carl Patten
+and Ralph Bonnell who are now managing the Linux SB1000 web site, and to
+the SB1000 users who reported and helped debug the common problems listed
+above.
+
+
+					Clemmitt Sigler
+					csigler@vt.edu
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/alias.txt b/Documentation/networking/alias.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..85046f53fcf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/alias.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+
+IP-Aliasing:
+============
+
+IP-aliases are an obsolete way to manage multiple IP-addresses/masks
+per interface. Newer tools such as iproute2 support multiple
+address/prefixes per interface, but aliases are still supported
+for backwards compatibility.
+
+An alias is formed by adding a colon and a string when running ifconfig.
+This string is usually numeric, but this is not a must.
+
+o Alias creation.
+  Alias creation is done by 'magic' interface naming: eg. to create a
+  200.1.1.1 alias for eth0 ...
+  
+    # ifconfig eth0:0 200.1.1.1  etc,etc....
+                   ~~ -> request alias #0 creation (if not yet exists) for eth0
+
+    The corresponding route is also set up by this command. 
+    Please note: The route always points to the base interface.
+	
+
+o Alias deletion.
+  The alias is removed by shutting the alias down:
+
+    # ifconfig eth0:0 down
+                 ~~~~~~~~~~ -> will delete alias
+
+  		   		   
+o Alias (re-)configuring
+
+  Aliases are not real devices, but programs should be able to configure and
+  refer to them as usual (ifconfig, route, etc).
+
+
+o Relationship with main device
+
+  If the base device is shut down the added aliases will be deleted 
+  too.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/arcnet-hardware.txt b/Documentation/networking/arcnet-hardware.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..731de411513
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/arcnet-hardware.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3133 @@
+ 
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+1) This file is a supplement to arcnet.txt.  Please read that for general
+   driver configuration help.
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+2) This file is no longer Linux-specific.  It should probably be moved out of
+   the kernel sources.  Ideas?
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Because so many people (myself included) seem to have obtained ARCnet cards
+without manuals, this file contains a quick introduction to ARCnet hardware,
+some cabling tips, and a listing of all jumper settings I can find. Please
+e-mail apenwarr@worldvisions.ca with any settings for your particular card,
+or any other information you have!
+
+
+INTRODUCTION TO ARCNET
+----------------------
+
+ARCnet is a network type which works in a way similar to popular Ethernet
+networks but which is also different in some very important ways.
+
+First of all, you can get ARCnet cards in at least two speeds: 2.5 Mbps
+(slower than Ethernet) and 100 Mbps (faster than normal Ethernet).  In fact,
+there are others as well, but these are less common.  The different hardware
+types, as far as I'm aware, are not compatible and so you cannot wire a
+100 Mbps card to a 2.5 Mbps card, and so on.  From what I hear, my driver does
+work with 100 Mbps cards, but I haven't been able to verify this myself,
+since I only have the 2.5 Mbps variety.  It is probably not going to saturate
+your 100 Mbps card.  Stop complaining. :)
+
+You also cannot connect an ARCnet card to any kind of Ethernet card and
+expect it to work.  
+
+There are two "types" of ARCnet - STAR topology and BUS topology.  This
+refers to how the cards are meant to be wired together.  According to most
+available documentation, you can only connect STAR cards to STAR cards and
+BUS cards to BUS cards.  That makes sense, right?  Well, it's not quite
+true; see below under "Cabling."
+
+Once you get past these little stumbling blocks, ARCnet is actually quite a
+well-designed standard.  It uses something called "modified token passing"
+which makes it completely incompatible with so-called "Token Ring" cards,
+but which makes transfers much more reliable than Ethernet does.  In fact,
+ARCnet will guarantee that a packet arrives safely at the destination, and
+even if it can't possibly be delivered properly (ie. because of a cable
+break, or because the destination computer does not exist) it will at least
+tell the sender about it.
+
+Because of the carefully defined action of the "token", it will always make
+a pass around the "ring" within a maximum length of time.  This makes it
+useful for realtime networks.
+
+In addition, all known ARCnet cards have an (almost) identical programming
+interface.  This means that with one ARCnet driver you can support any
+card, whereas with Ethernet each manufacturer uses what is sometimes a
+completely different programming interface, leading to a lot of different,
+sometimes very similar, Ethernet drivers.  Of course, always using the same
+programming interface also means that when high-performance hardware
+facilities like PCI bus mastering DMA appear, it's hard to take advantage of
+them.  Let's not go into that.
+
+One thing that makes ARCnet cards difficult to program for, however, is the
+limit on their packet sizes; standard ARCnet can only send packets that are
+up to 508 bytes in length.  This is smaller than the Internet "bare minimum"
+of 576 bytes, let alone the Ethernet MTU of 1500.  To compensate, an extra
+level of encapsulation is defined by RFC1201, which I call "packet
+splitting," that allows "virtual packets" to grow as large as 64K each,
+although they are generally kept down to the Ethernet-style 1500 bytes.
+
+For more information on the advantages and disadvantages (mostly the
+advantages) of ARCnet networks, you might try the "ARCnet Trade Association"
+WWW page:
+	http://www.arcnet.com
+
+
+CABLING ARCNET NETWORKS
+-----------------------
+
+This section was rewritten by 
+        Vojtech Pavlik     <vojtech@suse.cz>
+using information from several people, including:
+        Avery Pennraun     <apenwarr@worldvisions.ca>
+ 	Stephen A. Wood    <saw@hallc1.cebaf.gov>
+ 	John Paul Morrison <jmorriso@bogomips.ee.ubc.ca>
+ 	Joachim Koenig     <jojo@repas.de>
+and Avery touched it up a bit, at Vojtech's request.
+
+ARCnet (the classic 2.5 Mbps version) can be connected by two different
+types of cabling: coax and twisted pair.  The other ARCnet-type networks
+(100 Mbps TCNS and 320 kbps - 32 Mbps ARCnet Plus) use different types of
+cabling (Type1, Fiber, C1, C4, C5).
+
+For a coax network, you "should" use 93 Ohm RG-62 cable.  But other cables
+also work fine, because ARCnet is a very stable network. I personally use 75
+Ohm TV antenna cable.
+
+Cards for coax cabling are shipped in two different variants: for BUS and
+STAR network topologies.  They are mostly the same.  The only difference
+lies in the hybrid chip installed.  BUS cards use high impedance output,
+while STAR use low impedance.  Low impedance card (STAR) is electrically
+equal to a high impedance one with a terminator installed.
+
+Usually, the ARCnet networks are built up from STAR cards and hubs.  There
+are two types of hubs - active and passive.  Passive hubs are small boxes
+with four BNC connectors containing four 47 Ohm resistors:
+
+   |         | wires
+   R         + junction
+-R-+-R-      R 47 Ohm resistors
+   R
+   |
+
+The shielding is connected together.  Active hubs are much more complicated;
+they are powered and contain electronics to amplify the signal and send it
+to other segments of the net.  They usually have eight connectors.  Active
+hubs come in two variants - dumb and smart.  The dumb variant just
+amplifies, but the smart one decodes to digital and encodes back all packets
+coming through.  This is much better if you have several hubs in the net,
+since many dumb active hubs may worsen the signal quality.
+
+And now to the cabling.  What you can connect together:
+
+1. A card to a card.  This is the simplest way of creating a 2-computer
+   network.
+
+2. A card to a passive hub.  Remember that all unused connectors on the hub
+   must be properly terminated with 93 Ohm (or something else if you don't
+   have the right ones) terminators.
+   	(Avery's note: oops, I didn't know that.  Mine (TV cable) works
+	anyway, though.)
+
+3. A card to an active hub.  Here is no need to terminate the unused
+   connectors except some kind of aesthetic feeling.  But, there may not be
+   more than eleven active hubs between any two computers.  That of course
+   doesn't limit the number of active hubs on the network.
+   
+4. An active hub to another.
+
+5. An active hub to passive hub.
+
+Remember that you cannot connect two passive hubs together.  The power loss
+implied by such a connection is too high for the net to operate reliably.
+
+An example of a typical ARCnet network:
+
+           R                     S - STAR type card              
+    S------H--------A-------S    R - Terminator
+           |        |            H - Hub                         
+           |        |            A - Active hub                  
+           |   S----H----S                                       
+           S        |                                            
+                    |                                            
+                    S                                            
+                                                                          
+The BUS topology is very similar to the one used by Ethernet.  The only
+difference is in cable and terminators: they should be 93 Ohm.  Ethernet
+uses 50 Ohm impedance. You use T connectors to put the computers on a single
+line of cable, the bus. You have to put terminators at both ends of the
+cable. A typical BUS ARCnet network looks like:
+
+    RT----T------T------T------T------TR
+     B    B      B      B      B      B
+
+  B - BUS type card
+  R - Terminator
+  T - T connector
+
+But that is not all! The two types can be connected together.  According to
+the official documentation the only way of connecting them is using an active
+hub:
+
+         A------T------T------TR
+         |      B      B      B
+     S---H---S
+         |
+         S
+
+The official docs also state that you can use STAR cards at the ends of
+BUS network in place of a BUS card and a terminator:
+
+     S------T------T------S
+            B      B
+
+But, according to my own experiments, you can simply hang a BUS type card
+anywhere in middle of a cable in a STAR topology network.  And more - you
+can use the bus card in place of any star card if you use a terminator. Then
+you can build very complicated networks fulfilling all your needs!  An
+example:
+
+                                  S
+                                  |
+           RT------T-------T------H------S
+            B      B       B      |
+                                  |       R
+    S------A------T-------T-------A-------H------TR                    
+           |      B       B       |       |      B                         
+           |   S                 BT       |                                 
+           |   |                  |  S----A-----S
+    S------H---A----S             |       | 
+           |   |      S------T----H---S   |
+           S   S             B    R       S  
+                                                               
+A basically different cabling scheme is used with Twisted Pair cabling. Each
+of the TP cards has two RJ (phone-cord style) connectors.  The cards are
+then daisy-chained together using a cable connecting every two neighboring
+cards.  The ends are terminated with RJ 93 Ohm terminators which plug into
+the empty connectors of cards on the ends of the chain.  An example:
+
+          ___________   ___________
+      _R_|_         _|_|_         _|_R_  
+     |     |       |     |       |     |      
+     |Card |       |Card |       |Card |     
+     |_____|       |_____|       |_____|          
+
+
+There are also hubs for the TP topology.  There is nothing difficult
+involved in using them; you just connect a TP chain to a hub on any end or
+even at both.  This way you can create almost any network configuration. 
+The maximum of 11 hubs between any two computers on the net applies here as
+well.  An example:
+
+    RP-------P--------P--------H-----P------P-----PR
+                               |
+      RP-----H--------P--------H-----P------PR
+             |                 |
+             PR                PR
+
+    R - RJ Terminator
+    P - TP Card
+    H - TP Hub
+
+Like any network, ARCnet has a limited cable length.  These are the maximum
+cable lengths between two active ends (an active end being an active hub or
+a STAR card).
+
+		RG-62       93 Ohm up to 650 m
+		RG-59/U     75 Ohm up to 457 m
+		RG-11/U     75 Ohm up to 533 m
+		IBM Type 1 150 Ohm up to 200 m
+		IBM Type 3 100 Ohm up to 100 m
+
+The maximum length of all cables connected to a passive hub is limited to 65
+meters for RG-62 cabling; less for others.  You can see that using passive
+hubs in a large network is a bad idea. The maximum length of a single "BUS
+Trunk" is about 300 meters for RG-62. The maximum distance between the two
+most distant points of the net is limited to 3000 meters. The maximum length
+of a TP cable between two cards/hubs is 650 meters.
+
+
+SETTING THE JUMPERS
+-------------------
+
+All ARCnet cards should have a total of four or five different settings:
+
+  - the I/O address:  this is the "port" your ARCnet card is on.  Probed
+    values in the Linux ARCnet driver are only from 0x200 through 0x3F0. (If
+    your card has additional ones, which is possible, please tell me.) This
+    should not be the same as any other device on your system.  According to
+    a doc I got from Novell, MS Windows prefers values of 0x300 or more,
+    eating net connections on my system (at least) otherwise.  My guess is
+    this may be because, if your card is at 0x2E0, probing for a serial port
+    at 0x2E8 will reset the card and probably mess things up royally.
+	- Avery's favourite: 0x300.
+
+  - the IRQ: on  8-bit cards, it might be 2 (9), 3, 4, 5, or 7.
+             on 16-bit cards, it might be 2 (9), 3, 4, 5, 7, or 10-15.
+             
+    Make sure this is different from any other card on your system.  Note
+    that IRQ2 is the same as IRQ9, as far as Linux is concerned.  You can
+    "cat /proc/interrupts" for a somewhat complete list of which ones are in
+    use at any given time.  Here is a list of common usages from Vojtech
+    Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz>:
+    	("Not on bus" means there is no way for a card to generate this
+	interrupt)
+	IRQ  0 - Timer 0 (Not on bus)
+	IRQ  1 - Keyboard (Not on bus)
+	IRQ  2 - IRQ Controller 2 (Not on bus, nor does interrupt the CPU)
+	IRQ  3 - COM2
+	IRQ  4 - COM1
+	IRQ  5 - FREE (LPT2 if you have it; sometimes COM3; maybe PLIP)
+	IRQ  6 - Floppy disk controller
+	IRQ  7 - FREE (LPT1 if you don't use the polling driver; PLIP) 
+	IRQ  8 - Realtime Clock Interrupt (Not on bus)
+	IRQ  9 - FREE (VGA vertical sync interrupt if enabled)
+	IRQ 10 - FREE
+	IRQ 11 - FREE
+	IRQ 12 - FREE
+	IRQ 13 - Numeric Coprocessor (Not on bus)
+	IRQ 14 - Fixed Disk Controller
+	IRQ 15 - FREE (Fixed Disk Controller 2 if you have it) 
+	
+	Note: IRQ 9 is used on some video cards for the "vertical retrace"
+	interrupt.  This interrupt would have been handy for things like
+	video games, as it occurs exactly once per screen refresh, but
+	unfortunately IBM cancelled this feature starting with the original
+	VGA and thus many VGA/SVGA cards do not support it.  For this
+	reason, no modern software uses this interrupt and it can almost
+	always be safely disabled, if your video card supports it at all.
+	
+	If your card for some reason CANNOT disable this IRQ (usually there
+	is a jumper), one solution would be to clip the printed circuit
+	contact on the board: it's the fourth contact from the left on the
+	back side.  I take no responsibility if you try this.
+
+	- Avery's favourite: IRQ2 (actually IRQ9).  Watch that VGA, though.
+
+  - the memory address:  Unlike most cards, ARCnets use "shared memory" for
+    copying buffers around.  Make SURE it doesn't conflict with any other
+    used memory in your system!
+	A0000		- VGA graphics memory (ok if you don't have VGA)
+        B0000		- Monochrome text mode
+        C0000		\  One of these is your VGA BIOS - usually C0000.
+        E0000		/
+        F0000		- System BIOS
+
+    Anything less than 0xA0000 is, well, a BAD idea since it isn't above
+    640k.
+	- Avery's favourite: 0xD0000
+
+  - the station address:  Every ARCnet card has its own "unique" network
+    address from 0 to 255.  Unlike Ethernet, you can set this address
+    yourself with a jumper or switch (or on some cards, with special
+    software).  Since it's only 8 bits, you can only have 254 ARCnet cards
+    on a network.  DON'T use 0 or 255, since these are reserved (although
+    neat stuff will probably happen if you DO use them).  By the way, if you
+    haven't already guessed, don't set this the same as any other ARCnet on
+    your network!
+	- Avery's favourite:  3 and 4.  Not that it matters.
+
+  - There may be ETS1 and ETS2 settings.  These may or may not make a
+    difference on your card (many manuals call them "reserved"), but are
+    used to change the delays used when powering up a computer on the
+    network.  This is only necessary when wiring VERY long range ARCnet
+    networks, on the order of 4km or so; in any case, the only real
+    requirement here is that all cards on the network with ETS1 and ETS2
+    jumpers have them in the same position.  Chris Hindy <chrish@io.org>
+    sent in a chart with actual values for this:
+	ET1	ET2	Response Time	Reconfiguration Time
+	---	---	-------------	--------------------
+	open	open	74.7us		840us
+	open	closed	283.4us		1680us
+	closed	open	561.8us		1680us
+	closed	closed	1118.6us	1680us
+    
+    Make sure you set ETS1 and ETS2 to the SAME VALUE for all cards on your
+    network.
+    
+Also, on many cards (not mine, though) there are red and green LED's. 
+Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz> tells me this is what they mean:
+	GREEN           RED             Status
+	-----		---		------
+	OFF             OFF             Power off
+	OFF             Short flashes   Cabling problems (broken cable or not
+					  terminated)
+	OFF (short)     ON              Card init
+	ON              ON              Normal state - everything OK, nothing
+					  happens
+	ON              Long flashes    Data transfer
+	ON              OFF             Never happens (maybe when wrong ID)
+
+
+The following is all the specific information people have sent me about
+their own particular ARCnet cards.  It is officially a mess, and contains
+huge amounts of duplicated information.  I have no time to fix it.  If you
+want to, PLEASE DO!  Just send me a 'diff -u' of all your changes.
+
+The model # is listed right above specifics for that card, so you should be
+able to use your text viewer's "search" function to find the entry you want. 
+If you don't KNOW what kind of card you have, try looking through the
+various diagrams to see if you can tell.
+
+If your model isn't listed and/or has different settings, PLEASE PLEASE
+tell me.  I had to figure mine out without the manual, and it WASN'T FUN!
+
+Even if your ARCnet model isn't listed, but has the same jumpers as another
+model that is, please e-mail me to say so.
+
+Cards Listed in this file (in this order, mostly):
+
+	Manufacturer	Model #			Bits
+	------------	-------			----
+	SMC		PC100			8
+	SMC		PC110			8
+	SMC		PC120			8
+	SMC		PC130			8
+	SMC		PC270E			8
+	SMC		PC500			16
+	SMC		PC500Longboard		16
+	SMC		PC550Longboard		16
+	SMC		PC600			16
+	SMC		PC710			8
+	SMC?		LCS-8830(-T)		8/16
+	Puredata	PDI507			8
+	CNet Tech	CN120-Series		8
+	CNet Tech	CN160-Series		16
+	Lantech?	UM9065L chipset		8
+	Acer		5210-003		8
+	Datapoint?	LAN-ARC-8		8
+	Topware		TA-ARC/10		8
+	Thomas-Conrad	500-6242-0097 REV A	8
+	Waterloo?	(C)1985 Waterloo Micro. 8
+	No Name		--			8/16
+	No Name		Taiwan R.O.C?		8
+	No Name		Model 9058		8
+	Tiara		Tiara Lancard?		8
+	
+
+** SMC = Standard Microsystems Corp.
+** CNet Tech = CNet Technology, Inc.
+
+
+Unclassified Stuff
+------------------
+  - Please send any other information you can find.
+  
+  - And some other stuff (more info is welcome!):
+     From: root@ultraworld.xs4all.nl (Timo Hilbrink)
+     To: apenwarr@foxnet.net (Avery Pennarun)
+     Date: Wed, 26 Oct 1994 02:10:32 +0000 (GMT)
+     Reply-To: timoh@xs4all.nl
+
+     [...parts deleted...]
+
+     About the jumpers: On my PC130 there is one more jumper, located near the
+     cable-connector and it's for changing to star or bus topology; 
+     closed: star - open: bus
+     On the PC500 are some more jumper-pins, one block labeled with RX,PDN,TXI
+     and another with ALE,LA17,LA18,LA19 these are undocumented..
+
+     [...more parts deleted...]
+
+     --- CUT ---
+
+
+** Standard Microsystems Corp (SMC) **
+PC100, PC110, PC120, PC130 (8-bit cards)
+PC500, PC600 (16-bit cards)
+---------------------------------
+  - mainly from Avery Pennarun <apenwarr@worldvisions.ca>.  Values depicted
+    are from Avery's setup.
+  - special thanks to Timo Hilbrink <timoh@xs4all.nl> for noting that PC120,
+    130, 500, and 600 all have the same switches as Avery's PC100. 
+    PC500/600 have several extra, undocumented pins though. (?)
+  - PC110 settings were verified by Stephen A. Wood <saw@cebaf.gov>
+  - Also, the JP- and S-numbers probably don't match your card exactly.  Try
+    to find jumpers/switches with the same number of settings - it's
+    probably more reliable.
+  
+
+     JP5		       [|]    :    :    :    :
+(IRQ Setting)		      IRQ2  IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ7
+		Put exactly one jumper on exactly one set of pins.
+
+
+                          1  2   3  4  5  6   7  8  9 10
+     S1                /----------------------------------\
+(I/O and Memory        |  1  1 * 0  0  0  0 * 1  1  0  1  |
+ addresses)            \----------------------------------/
+                          |--|   |--------|   |--------|
+                          (a)       (b)           (m)
+                          
+                WARNING.  It's very important when setting these which way
+                you're holding the card, and which way you think is '1'!
+                
+                If you suspect that your settings are not being made
+		correctly, try reversing the direction or inverting the
+		switch positions.
+
+		a: The first digit of the I/O address.
+			Setting		Value
+			-------		-----
+			00		0
+			01		1
+			10		2
+			11		3
+
+		b: The second digit of the I/O address.
+			Setting		Value
+			-------		-----
+			0000		0
+			0001		1
+			0010		2
+			...		...
+			1110		E
+			1111		F
+
+		The I/O address is in the form ab0.  For example, if
+		a is 0x2 and b is 0xE, the address will be 0x2E0.
+
+		DO NOT SET THIS LESS THAN 0x200!!!!!
+
+
+		m: The first digit of the memory address.
+			Setting		Value
+			-------		-----
+			0000		0
+			0001		1
+			0010		2
+			...		...
+			1110		E
+			1111		F
+
+		The memory address is in the form m0000.  For example, if
+		m is D, the address will be 0xD0000.
+
+		DO NOT SET THIS TO C0000, F0000, OR LESS THAN A0000!
+
+                          1  2  3  4  5  6  7  8
+     S2                /--------------------------\
+(Station Address)      |  1  1  0  0  0  0  0  0  |
+                       \--------------------------/
+
+			Setting		Value
+			-------		-----
+			00000000	00
+			10000000	01
+			01000000	02
+			...
+			01111111	FE
+			11111111	FF
+
+		Note that this is binary with the digits reversed!
+
+		DO NOT SET THIS TO 0 OR 255 (0xFF)!
+
+
+*****************************************************************************
+
+** Standard Microsystems Corp (SMC) **
+PC130E/PC270E (8-bit cards)
+---------------------------
+  - from Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de>
+
+
+STANDARD MICROSYSTEMS CORPORATION (SMC) ARCNET(R)-PC130E/PC270E
+===============================================================
+
+This description has been written by Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de>
+using information from the following Original SMC Manual 
+
+             "Configuration Guide for
+             ARCNET(R)-PC130E/PC270
+            Network Controller Boards
+                Pub. # 900.044A
+                   June, 1989"
+
+ARCNET is a registered trademark of the Datapoint Corporation
+SMC is a registered trademark of the Standard Microsystems Corporation  
+
+The PC130E is an enhanced version of the PC130 board, is equipped with a 
+standard BNC female connector for connection to RG-62/U coax cable.
+Since this board is designed both for point-to-point connection in star
+networks and for connection to bus networks, it is downwardly compatible 
+with all the other standard boards designed for coax networks (that is,
+the PC120, PC110 and PC100 star topology boards and the PC220, PC210 and 
+PC200 bus topology boards).
+
+The PC270E is an enhanced version of the PC260 board, is equipped with two 
+modular RJ11-type jacks for connection to twisted pair wiring.
+It can be used in a star or a daisy-chained network.
+
+
+         8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
+    ________________________________________________________________
+   |   |       S1        |                                          |
+   |   |_________________|                                          |
+   |    Offs|Base |I/O Addr                                         |
+   |     RAM Addr |                                              ___|
+   |         ___  ___                                       CR3 |___|
+   |        |   \/   |                                      CR4 |___|
+   |        |  PROM  |                                           ___|
+   |        |        |                                        N |   | 8
+   |        | SOCKET |                                        o |   | 7
+   |        |________|                                        d |   | 6
+   |                   ___________________                    e |   | 5
+   |                  |                   |                   A | S | 4
+   |       |oo| EXT2  |                   |                   d | 2 | 3
+   |       |oo| EXT1  |       SMC         |                   d |   | 2
+   |       |oo| ROM   |      90C63        |                   r |___| 1
+   |       |oo| IRQ7  |                   |               |o|  _____|
+   |       |oo| IRQ5  |                   |               |o| | J1  |
+   |       |oo| IRQ4  |                   |              STAR |_____|
+   |       |oo| IRQ3  |                   |                   | J2  |
+   |       |oo| IRQ2  |___________________|                   |_____|
+   |___                                               ______________|
+       |                                             |
+       |_____________________________________________|
+
+Legend:
+
+SMC 90C63	ARCNET Controller / Transceiver /Logic
+S1	1-3:	I/O Base Address Select
+	4-6:	Memory Base Address Select
+	7-8:	RAM Offset Select
+S2	1-8:	Node ID Select
+EXT		Extended Timeout Select
+ROM		ROM Enable Select
+STAR		Selected - Star Topology	(PC130E only)
+		Deselected - Bus Topology	(PC130E only)
+CR3/CR4		Diagnostic LEDs
+J1		BNC RG62/U Connector		(PC130E only)
+J1		6-position Telephone Jack	(PC270E only)
+J2		6-position Telephone Jack	(PC270E only)
+
+Setting one of the switches to Off/Open means "1", On/Closed means "0".
+
+
+Setting the Node ID
+-------------------
+
+The eight switches in group S2 are used to set the node ID.
+These switches work in a way similar to the PC100-series cards; see that
+entry for more information.
+
+
+Setting the I/O Base Address
+----------------------------
+
+The first three switches in switch group S1 are used to select one
+of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table
+
+
+   Switch | Hex I/O
+   1 2 3  | Address
+   -------|--------
+   0 0 0  |  260
+   0 0 1  |  290
+   0 1 0  |  2E0  (Manufacturer's default)
+   0 1 1  |  2F0
+   1 0 0  |  300
+   1 0 1  |  350
+   1 1 0  |  380
+   1 1 1  |  3E0
+
+
+Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address
+--------------------------------------------
+
+The memory buffer requires 2K of a 16K block of RAM. The base of this
+16K block can be located in any of eight positions.
+Switches 4-6 of switch group S1 select the Base of the 16K block.
+Within that 16K address space, the buffer may be assigned any one of four 
+positions, determined by the offset, switches 7 and 8 of group S1.
+
+   Switch     | Hex RAM | Hex ROM
+   4 5 6  7 8 | Address | Address *)
+   -----------|---------|-----------
+   0 0 0  0 0 |  C0000  |  C2000
+   0 0 0  0 1 |  C0800  |  C2000
+   0 0 0  1 0 |  C1000  |  C2000
+   0 0 0  1 1 |  C1800  |  C2000
+              |         |
+   0 0 1  0 0 |  C4000  |  C6000
+   0 0 1  0 1 |  C4800  |  C6000
+   0 0 1  1 0 |  C5000  |  C6000
+   0 0 1  1 1 |  C5800  |  C6000
+              |         |
+   0 1 0  0 0 |  CC000  |  CE000
+   0 1 0  0 1 |  CC800  |  CE000
+   0 1 0  1 0 |  CD000  |  CE000
+   0 1 0  1 1 |  CD800  |  CE000
+              |         |
+   0 1 1  0 0 |  D0000  |  D2000  (Manufacturer's default)
+   0 1 1  0 1 |  D0800  |  D2000
+   0 1 1  1 0 |  D1000  |  D2000
+   0 1 1  1 1 |  D1800  |  D2000
+              |         |
+   1 0 0  0 0 |  D4000  |  D6000
+   1 0 0  0 1 |  D4800  |  D6000
+   1 0 0  1 0 |  D5000  |  D6000
+   1 0 0  1 1 |  D5800  |  D6000
+              |         |
+   1 0 1  0 0 |  D8000  |  DA000
+   1 0 1  0 1 |  D8800  |  DA000
+   1 0 1  1 0 |  D9000  |  DA000
+   1 0 1  1 1 |  D9800  |  DA000
+              |         |
+   1 1 0  0 0 |  DC000  |  DE000
+   1 1 0  0 1 |  DC800  |  DE000
+   1 1 0  1 0 |  DD000  |  DE000
+   1 1 0  1 1 |  DD800  |  DE000
+              |         |
+   1 1 1  0 0 |  E0000  |  E2000
+   1 1 1  0 1 |  E0800  |  E2000
+   1 1 1  1 0 |  E1000  |  E2000
+   1 1 1  1 1 |  E1800  |  E2000
+  
+*) To enable the 8K Boot PROM install the jumper ROM.
+   The default is jumper ROM not installed.
+
+
+Setting the Timeouts and Interrupt
+----------------------------------
+
+The jumpers labeled EXT1 and EXT2 are used to determine the timeout 
+parameters. These two jumpers are normally left open.
+
+To select a hardware interrupt level set one (only one!) of the jumpers
+IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQ5, IRQ7. The Manufacturer's default is IRQ2.
+ 
+
+Configuring the PC130E for Star or Bus Topology
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+The single jumper labeled STAR is used to configure the PC130E board for 
+star or bus topology.
+When the jumper is installed, the board may be used in a star network, when 
+it is removed, the board can be used in a bus topology.
+
+
+Diagnostic LEDs
+---------------
+
+Two diagnostic LEDs are visible on the rear bracket of the board.
+The green LED monitors the network activity: the red one shows the
+board activity:
+
+ Green  | Status               Red      | Status
+ -------|-------------------   ---------|-------------------
+  on    | normal activity      flash/on | data transfer
+  blink | reconfiguration      off      | no data transfer;
+  off   | defective board or            | incorrect memory or
+        | node ID is zero               | I/O address
+
+
+*****************************************************************************
+
+** Standard Microsystems Corp (SMC) **
+PC500/PC550 Longboard (16-bit cards)
+-------------------------------------
+  - from Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de>
+
+
+STANDARD MICROSYSTEMS CORPORATION (SMC) ARCNET-PC500/PC550 Long Board
+=====================================================================
+
+Note: There is another Version of the PC500 called Short Version, which 
+      is different in hard- and software! The most important differences
+      are:
+      - The long board has no Shared memory.
+      - On the long board the selection of the interrupt is done by binary
+        coded switch, on the short board directly by jumper.
+        
+[Avery's note: pay special attention to that: the long board HAS NO SHARED
+MEMORY.  This means the current Linux-ARCnet driver can't use these cards. 
+I have obtained a PC500Longboard and will be doing some experiments on it in
+the future, but don't hold your breath.  Thanks again to Juergen Seifert for
+his advice about this!]
+
+This description has been written by Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de>
+using information from the following Original SMC Manual 
+
+             "Configuration Guide for
+             SMC ARCNET-PC500/PC550
+         Series Network Controller Boards
+             Pub. # 900.033 Rev. A
+                November, 1989"
+
+ARCNET is a registered trademark of the Datapoint Corporation
+SMC is a registered trademark of the Standard Microsystems Corporation  
+
+The PC500 is equipped with a standard BNC female connector for connection
+to RG-62/U coax cable.
+The board is designed both for point-to-point connection in star networks
+and for connection to bus networks.
+
+The PC550 is equipped with two modular RJ11-type jacks for connection
+to twisted pair wiring.
+It can be used in a star or a daisy-chained (BUS) network.
+
+       1 
+       0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1     6 5 4 3 2 1
+    ____________________________________________________________________
+   < |         SW1         | |     SW2     |                            |
+   > |_____________________| |_____________|                            |
+   <   IRQ    |I/O Addr                                                 |
+   >                                                                 ___|
+   <                                                            CR4 |___|
+   >                                                            CR3 |___|
+   <                                                                 ___|
+   >                                                              N |   | 8
+   <                                                              o |   | 7
+   >                                                              d | S | 6
+   <                                                              e | W | 5
+   >                                                              A | 3 | 4
+   <                                                              d |   | 3
+   >                                                              d |   | 2
+   <                                                              r |___| 1
+   >                                                        |o|    _____|
+   <                                                        |o|   | J1  |
+   >  3 1                                                   JP6   |_____|
+   < |o|o| JP2                                                    | J2  |
+   > |o|o|                                                        |_____|
+   <  4 2__                                               ______________|
+   >    |  |                                             |
+   <____|  |_____________________________________________|
+
+Legend:
+
+SW1	1-6:	I/O Base Address Select
+	7-10:	Interrupt Select
+SW2	1-6:	Reserved for Future Use
+SW3	1-8:	Node ID Select
+JP2	1-4:	Extended Timeout Select
+JP6		Selected - Star Topology	(PC500 only)
+		Deselected - Bus Topology	(PC500 only)
+CR3	Green	Monitors Network Activity
+CR4	Red	Monitors Board Activity
+J1		BNC RG62/U Connector		(PC500 only)
+J1		6-position Telephone Jack	(PC550 only)
+J2		6-position Telephone Jack	(PC550 only)
+
+Setting one of the switches to Off/Open means "1", On/Closed means "0".
+
+
+Setting the Node ID
+-------------------
+
+The eight switches in group SW3 are used to set the node ID. Each node
+attached to the network must have an unique node ID which must be 
+different from 0.
+Switch 1 serves as the least significant bit (LSB).
+
+The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1"  
+These values are:
+
+    Switch | Value
+    -------|-------
+      1    |   1
+      2    |   2
+      3    |   4
+      4    |   8
+      5    |  16
+      6    |  32
+      7    |  64
+      8    | 128
+
+Some Examples:
+
+    Switch         | Hex     | Decimal 
+   8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 | Node ID | Node ID
+   ----------------|---------|---------
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 |    not allowed
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 |    1    |    1 
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 |    2    |    2
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 |    3    |    3
+       . . .       |         |
+   0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 |   55    |   85
+       . . .       |         |
+   1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 |   AA    |  170
+       . . .       |         |  
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 |   FD    |  253
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 |   FE    |  254
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 |   FF    |  255 
+
+
+Setting the I/O Base Address
+----------------------------
+
+The first six switches in switch group SW1 are used to select one
+of 32 possible I/O Base addresses using the following table
+
+   Switch       | Hex I/O
+   6 5  4 3 2 1 | Address
+   -------------|--------
+   0 1  0 0 0 0 |  200
+   0 1  0 0 0 1 |  210
+   0 1  0 0 1 0 |  220
+   0 1  0 0 1 1 |  230
+   0 1  0 1 0 0 |  240
+   0 1  0 1 0 1 |  250
+   0 1  0 1 1 0 |  260
+   0 1  0 1 1 1 |  270
+   0 1  1 0 0 0 |  280
+   0 1  1 0 0 1 |  290
+   0 1  1 0 1 0 |  2A0
+   0 1  1 0 1 1 |  2B0
+   0 1  1 1 0 0 |  2C0
+   0 1  1 1 0 1 |  2D0
+   0 1  1 1 1 0 |  2E0 (Manufacturer's default)
+   0 1  1 1 1 1 |  2F0
+   1 1  0 0 0 0 |  300
+   1 1  0 0 0 1 |  310
+   1 1  0 0 1 0 |  320
+   1 1  0 0 1 1 |  330
+   1 1  0 1 0 0 |  340
+   1 1  0 1 0 1 |  350
+   1 1  0 1 1 0 |  360
+   1 1  0 1 1 1 |  370
+   1 1  1 0 0 0 |  380
+   1 1  1 0 0 1 |  390
+   1 1  1 0 1 0 |  3A0
+   1 1  1 0 1 1 |  3B0
+   1 1  1 1 0 0 |  3C0
+   1 1  1 1 0 1 |  3D0
+   1 1  1 1 1 0 |  3E0
+   1 1  1 1 1 1 |  3F0
+
+
+Setting the Interrupt
+---------------------
+
+Switches seven through ten of switch group SW1 are used to select the 
+interrupt level. The interrupt level is binary coded, so selections 
+from 0 to 15 would be possible, but only the following eight values will
+be supported: 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12.
+
+   Switch   | IRQ
+   10 9 8 7 | 
+   ---------|-------- 
+    0 0 1 1 |  3
+    0 1 0 0 |  4
+    0 1 0 1 |  5
+    0 1 1 1 |  7
+    1 0 0 1 |  9 (=2) (default)
+    1 0 1 0 | 10
+    1 0 1 1 | 11
+    1 1 0 0 | 12
+
+
+Setting the Timeouts 
+--------------------
+
+The two jumpers JP2 (1-4) are used to determine the timeout parameters. 
+These two jumpers are normally left open.
+Refer to the COM9026 Data Sheet for alternate configurations.
+
+
+Configuring the PC500 for Star or Bus Topology
+----------------------------------------------
+
+The single jumper labeled JP6 is used to configure the PC500 board for 
+star or bus topology.
+When the jumper is installed, the board may be used in a star network, when 
+it is removed, the board can be used in a bus topology.
+
+
+Diagnostic LEDs
+---------------
+
+Two diagnostic LEDs are visible on the rear bracket of the board.
+The green LED monitors the network activity: the red one shows the
+board activity:
+
+ Green  | Status               Red      | Status
+ -------|-------------------   ---------|-------------------
+  on    | normal activity      flash/on | data transfer
+  blink | reconfiguration      off      | no data transfer;
+  off   | defective board or            | incorrect memory or
+        | node ID is zero               | I/O address
+
+
+*****************************************************************************
+
+** SMC **
+PC710 (8-bit card)
+------------------
+  - from J.S. van Oosten <jvoosten@compiler.tdcnet.nl>
+  
+Note: this data is gathered by experimenting and looking at info of other
+cards. However, I'm sure I got 99% of the settings right.
+
+The SMC710 card resembles the PC270 card, but is much more basic (i.e. no
+LEDs, RJ11 jacks, etc.) and 8 bit. Here's a little drawing:
+
+    _______________________________________   
+   | +---------+  +---------+              |____
+   | |   S2    |  |   S1    |              |
+   | +---------+  +---------+              |
+   |                                       |
+   |  +===+    __                          |
+   |  | R |   |  | X-tal                 ###___
+   |  | O |   |__|                      ####__'|
+   |  | M |    ||                        ###
+   |  +===+                                |
+   |                                       |
+   |   .. JP1   +----------+               |
+   |   ..       | big chip |               |   
+   |   ..       |  90C63   |               |
+   |   ..       |          |               |
+   |   ..       +----------+               |
+    -------                     -----------
+           |||||||||||||||||||||
+
+The row of jumpers at JP1 actually consists of 8 jumpers, (sometimes
+labelled) the same as on the PC270, from top to bottom: EXT2, EXT1, ROM,
+IRQ7, IRQ5, IRQ4, IRQ3, IRQ2 (gee, wonder what they would do? :-) )
+
+S1 and S2 perform the same function as on the PC270, only their numbers
+are swapped (S1 is the nodeaddress, S2 sets IO- and RAM-address).
+
+I know it works when connected to a PC110 type ARCnet board.
+
+	
+*****************************************************************************
+
+** Possibly SMC **
+LCS-8830(-T) (8 and 16-bit cards)
+---------------------------------
+  - from Mathias Katzer <mkatzer@HRZ.Uni-Bielefeld.DE>
+  - Marek Michalkiewicz <marekm@i17linuxb.ists.pwr.wroc.pl> says the
+    LCS-8830 is slightly different from LCS-8830-T.  These are 8 bit, BUS
+    only (the JP0 jumper is hardwired), and BNC only.
+	
+This is a LCS-8830-T made by SMC, I think ('SMC' only appears on one PLCC,
+nowhere else, not even on the few Xeroxed sheets from the manual).
+
+SMC ARCnet Board Type LCS-8830-T
+
+   ------------------------------------
+  |                                    |
+  |              JP3 88  8 JP2         |
+  |       #####      | \               |
+  |       #####    ET1 ET2          ###|
+  |                              8  ###|
+  |  U3   SW 1                  JP0 ###|  Phone Jacks
+  |  --                             ###|
+  | |  |                               |
+  | |  |   SW2                         |
+  | |  |                               |
+  | |  |  #####                        |
+  |  --   #####                       ####  BNC Connector 
+  |                                   ####
+  |   888888 JP1                       |
+  |   234567                           |
+   --                           -------
+     |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
+      --------------------------
+
+
+SW1: DIP-Switches for Station Address
+SW2: DIP-Switches for Memory Base and I/O Base addresses
+
+JP0: If closed, internal termination on (default open)
+JP1: IRQ Jumpers
+JP2: Boot-ROM enabled if closed
+JP3: Jumpers for response timeout
+ 
+U3: Boot-ROM Socket          
+
+
+ET1 ET2     Response Time     Idle Time    Reconfiguration Time
+
+               78                86               840
+ X            285               316              1680
+     X        563               624              1680
+ X   X       1130              1237              1680
+
+(X means closed jumper)
+
+(DIP-Switch downwards means "0")
+
+The station address is binary-coded with SW1.
+
+The I/O base address is coded with DIP-Switches 6,7 and 8 of SW2:
+
+Switches        Base
+678             Address
+000		260-26f
+100		290-29f
+010		2e0-2ef
+110		2f0-2ff
+001		300-30f
+101		350-35f
+011		380-38f
+111 		3e0-3ef
+
+
+DIP Switches 1-5 of SW2 encode the RAM and ROM Address Range:
+
+Switches        RAM           ROM
+12345           Address Range  Address Range
+00000		C:0000-C:07ff	C:2000-C:3fff
+10000		C:0800-C:0fff
+01000		C:1000-C:17ff
+11000		C:1800-C:1fff
+00100		C:4000-C:47ff	C:6000-C:7fff
+10100		C:4800-C:4fff
+01100		C:5000-C:57ff 
+11100		C:5800-C:5fff
+00010		C:C000-C:C7ff	C:E000-C:ffff
+10010		C:C800-C:Cfff
+01010		C:D000-C:D7ff
+11010		C:D800-C:Dfff
+00110		D:0000-D:07ff	D:2000-D:3fff
+10110		D:0800-D:0fff
+01110		D:1000-D:17ff
+11110		D:1800-D:1fff
+00001		D:4000-D:47ff	D:6000-D:7fff
+10001		D:4800-D:4fff
+01001		D:5000-D:57ff
+11001		D:5800-D:5fff
+00101		D:8000-D:87ff	D:A000-D:bfff
+10101		D:8800-D:8fff
+01101		D:9000-D:97ff
+11101		D:9800-D:9fff 
+00011		D:C000-D:c7ff	D:E000-D:ffff
+10011		D:C800-D:cfff
+01011		D:D000-D:d7ff
+11011		D:D800-D:dfff
+00111		E:0000-E:07ff	E:2000-E:3fff
+10111		E:0800-E:0fff
+01111		E:1000-E:17ff
+11111		E:1800-E:1fff
+
+
+*****************************************************************************
+
+** PureData Corp **
+PDI507 (8-bit card)
+--------------------
+  - from Mark Rejhon <mdrejhon@magi.com> (slight modifications by Avery)
+  - Avery's note: I think PDI508 cards (but definitely NOT PDI508Plus cards)
+    are mostly the same as this.  PDI508Plus cards appear to be mainly
+    software-configured.
+
+Jumpers:
+	There is a jumper array at the bottom of the card, near the edge
+        connector.  This array is labelled J1.  They control the IRQs and
+        something else.  Put only one jumper on the IRQ pins.
+
+	ETS1, ETS2 are for timing on very long distance networks.  See the
+	more general information near the top of this file.
+
+	There is a J2 jumper on two pins.  A jumper should be put on them,
+        since it was already there when I got the card.  I don't know what
+        this jumper is for though.
+
+	There is a two-jumper array for J3.  I don't know what it is for,
+        but there were already two jumpers on it when I got the card.  It's
+        a six pin grid in a two-by-three fashion.  The jumpers were
+        configured as follows:
+
+	   .-------.
+	 o | o   o |
+	   :-------:    ------> Accessible end of card with connectors
+	 o | o   o |             in this direction ------->
+	   `-------'
+
+Carl de Billy <CARL@carainfo.com> explains J3 and J4:
+
+	J3 Diagram:
+
+           .-------.
+         o | o   o |
+           :-------:    TWIST Technology
+         o | o   o |
+           `-------'
+           .-------.
+           | o   o | o
+           :-------:    COAX Technology
+           | o   o | o
+           `-------'
+
+  - If using coax cable in a bus topology the J4 jumper must be removed;
+    place it on one pin.
+
+  - If using bus topology with twisted pair wiring move the J3 
+    jumpers so they connect the middle pin and the pins closest to the RJ11
+    Connectors.  Also the J4 jumper must be removed; place it on one pin of
+    J4 jumper for storage.
+
+  - If using  star topology with twisted pair wiring move the J3 
+    jumpers so they connect the middle pin and the pins closest to the RJ11
+    connectors.
+
+
+DIP Switches:
+
+	The DIP switches accessible on the accessible end of the card while
+        it is installed, is used to set the ARCnet address.  There are 8
+        switches.  Use an address from 1 to 254.
+
+	Switch No.
+	12345678	ARCnet address
+	-----------------------------------------
+	00000000	FF  	(Don't use this!)
+	00000001	FE
+	00000010	FD
+	....
+	11111101	2	
+	11111110	1
+	11111111	0	(Don't use this!)
+
+	There is another array of eight DIP switches at the top of the
+        card.  There are five labelled MS0-MS4 which seem to control the
+        memory address, and another three labelled IO0-IO2 which seem to
+        control the base I/O address of the card.
+
+	This was difficult to test by trial and error, and the I/O addresses
+        are in a weird order.  This was tested by setting the DIP switches,
+        rebooting the computer, and attempting to load ARCETHER at various
+        addresses (mostly between 0x200 and 0x400).  The address that caused
+        the red transmit LED to blink, is the one that I thought works.
+
+	Also, the address 0x3D0 seem to have a special meaning, since the
+        ARCETHER packet driver loaded fine, but without the red LED
+        blinking.  I don't know what 0x3D0 is for though.  I recommend using
+        an address of 0x300 since Windows may not like addresses below
+        0x300.
+
+	IO Switch No.
+	210             I/O address
+	-------------------------------
+	111             0x260
+	110             0x290
+	101             0x2E0
+	100             0x2F0
+	011             0x300
+	010             0x350
+	001             0x380
+	000             0x3E0
+
+	The memory switches set a reserved address space of 0x1000 bytes
+        (0x100 segment units, or 4k).  For example if I set an address of
+        0xD000, it will use up addresses 0xD000 to 0xD100.
+
+	The memory switches were tested by booting using QEMM386 stealth,
+        and using LOADHI to see what address automatically became excluded
+        from the upper memory regions, and then attempting to load ARCETHER
+        using these addresses.
+
+	I recommend using an ARCnet memory address of 0xD000, and putting
+        the EMS page frame at 0xC000 while using QEMM stealth mode.  That
+        way, you get contiguous high memory from 0xD100 almost all the way
+        the end of the megabyte.
+
+	Memory Switch 0 (MS0) didn't seem to work properly when set to OFF
+        on my card.  It could be malfunctioning on my card.  Experiment with
+        it ON first, and if it doesn't work, set it to OFF.  (It may be a
+        modifier for the 0x200 bit?)
+
+	MS Switch No.
+	43210           Memory address
+	--------------------------------
+	00001           0xE100  (guessed - was not detected by QEMM)
+	00011           0xE000  (guessed - was not detected by QEMM)
+	00101           0xDD00
+	00111           0xDC00
+	01001           0xD900
+	01011           0xD800
+	01101           0xD500
+	01111           0xD400
+	10001           0xD100
+	10011           0xD000
+	10101           0xCD00
+	10111           0xCC00
+	11001           0xC900 (guessed - crashes tested system)
+	11011           0xC800 (guessed - crashes tested system)
+	11101           0xC500 (guessed - crashes tested system)
+	11111           0xC400 (guessed - crashes tested system)
+	
+	
+*****************************************************************************
+
+** CNet Technology Inc. **
+120 Series (8-bit cards)
+------------------------
+  - from Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de>
+
+
+CNET TECHNOLOGY INC. (CNet) ARCNET 120A SERIES
+==============================================
+
+This description has been written by Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de>
+using information from the following Original CNet Manual 
+
+              "ARCNET
+            USER'S MANUAL 
+                for
+               CN120A
+               CN120AB
+               CN120TP
+               CN120ST
+               CN120SBT
+             P/N:12-01-0007
+             Revision 3.00"
+
+ARCNET is a registered trademark of the Datapoint Corporation
+
+P/N 120A   ARCNET 8 bit XT/AT Star
+P/N 120AB  ARCNET 8 bit XT/AT Bus
+P/N 120TP  ARCNET 8 bit XT/AT Twisted Pair
+P/N 120ST  ARCNET 8 bit XT/AT Star, Twisted Pair
+P/N 120SBT ARCNET 8 bit XT/AT Star, Bus, Twisted Pair
+
+    __________________________________________________________________
+   |                                                                  |
+   |                                                               ___|
+   |                                                          LED |___|
+   |                                                               ___|
+   |                                                            N |   | ID7
+   |                                                            o |   | ID6
+   |                                                            d | S | ID5
+   |                                                            e | W | ID4
+   |                     ___________________                    A | 2 | ID3
+   |                    |                   |                   d |   | ID2
+   |                    |                   |  1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  d |   | ID1
+   |                    |                   | _________________ r |___| ID0
+   |                    |      90C65        ||       SW1       |  ____|
+   |  JP 8 7            |                   ||_________________| |    |
+   |    |o|o|  JP1      |                   |                    | J2 |
+   |    |o|o|  |oo|     |                   |         JP 1 1 1   |    |
+   |   ______________   |                   |            0 1 2   |____|
+   |  |  PROM        |  |___________________|           |o|o|o|  _____|
+   |  >  SOCKET      |  JP 6 5 4 3 2                    |o|o|o| | J1  |
+   |  |______________|    |o|o|o|o|o|                   |o|o|o| |_____|
+   |_____                 |o|o|o|o|o|                   ______________|
+         |                                             |
+         |_____________________________________________|
+
+Legend:
+
+90C65       ARCNET Probe
+S1  1-5:    Base Memory Address Select
+    6-8:    Base I/O Address Select
+S2  1-8:    Node ID Select (ID0-ID7)
+JP1     ROM Enable Select
+JP2     IRQ2
+JP3     IRQ3
+JP4     IRQ4
+JP5     IRQ5
+JP6     IRQ7
+JP7/JP8     ET1, ET2 Timeout Parameters
+JP10/JP11   Coax / Twisted Pair Select  (CN120ST/SBT only)
+JP12        Terminator Select       (CN120AB/ST/SBT only)
+J1      BNC RG62/U Connector        (all except CN120TP)
+J2      Two 6-position Telephone Jack   (CN120TP/ST/SBT only)
+
+Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0".
+
+
+Setting the Node ID
+-------------------
+
+The eight switches in SW2 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached
+to the network must have an unique node ID which must be different from 0.
+Switch 1 (ID0) serves as the least significant bit (LSB).
+
+The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1"  
+These values are:
+
+   Switch | Label | Value
+   -------|-------|-------
+     1    | ID0   |   1
+     2    | ID1   |   2
+     3    | ID2   |   4
+     4    | ID3   |   8
+     5    | ID4   |  16
+     6    | ID5   |  32
+     7    | ID6   |  64
+     8    | ID7   | 128
+
+Some Examples:
+
+    Switch         | Hex     | Decimal 
+   8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 | Node ID | Node ID
+   ----------------|---------|---------
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 |    not allowed
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 |    1    |    1 
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 |    2    |    2
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 |    3    |    3
+       . . .       |         |
+   0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 |   55    |   85
+       . . .       |         |
+   1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 |   AA    |  170
+       . . .       |         |  
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 |   FD    |  253
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 |   FE    |  254
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 |   FF    |  255
+
+
+Setting the I/O Base Address
+----------------------------
+
+The last three switches in switch block SW1 are used to select one
+of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table
+
+
+   Switch      | Hex I/O
+    6   7   8  | Address
+   ------------|--------
+   ON  ON  ON  |  260
+   OFF ON  ON  |  290
+   ON  OFF ON  |  2E0  (Manufacturer's default)
+   OFF OFF ON  |  2F0
+   ON  ON  OFF |  300
+   OFF ON  OFF |  350
+   ON  OFF OFF |  380
+   OFF OFF OFF |  3E0
+
+
+Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address
+--------------------------------------------
+
+The memory buffer (RAM) requires 2K. The base of this buffer can be 
+located in any of eight positions. The address of the Boot Prom is
+memory base + 8K or memory base + 0x2000.
+Switches 1-5 of switch block SW1 select the Memory Base address.
+
+   Switch              | Hex RAM | Hex ROM
+    1   2   3   4   5  | Address | Address *)
+   --------------------|---------|-----------
+   ON  ON  ON  ON  ON  |  C0000  |  C2000
+   ON  ON  OFF ON  ON  |  C4000  |  C6000
+   ON  ON  ON  OFF ON  |  CC000  |  CE000
+   ON  ON  OFF OFF ON  |  D0000  |  D2000  (Manufacturer's default)
+   ON  ON  ON  ON  OFF |  D4000  |  D6000
+   ON  ON  OFF ON  OFF |  D8000  |  DA000
+   ON  ON  ON  OFF OFF |  DC000  |  DE000
+   ON  ON  OFF OFF OFF |  E0000  |  E2000
+  
+*) To enable the Boot ROM install the jumper JP1
+
+Note: Since the switches 1 and 2 are always set to ON it may be possible
+      that they can be used to add an offset of 2K, 4K or 6K to the base
+      address, but this feature is not documented in the manual and I
+      haven't tested it yet.
+
+
+Setting the Interrupt Line
+--------------------------
+
+To select a hardware interrupt level install one (only one!) of the jumpers
+JP2, JP3, JP4, JP5, JP6. JP2 is the default.
+
+   Jumper | IRQ     
+   -------|-----
+     2    |  2
+     3    |  3
+     4    |  4
+     5    |  5
+     6    |  7
+
+
+Setting the Internal Terminator on CN120AB/TP/SBT
+--------------------------------------------------
+
+The jumper JP12 is used to enable the internal terminator. 
+
+                         -----
+       0                |  0  |     
+     -----   ON         |     |  ON
+    |  0  |             |  0  |
+    |     |  OFF         -----   OFF
+    |  0  |                0
+     -----
+   Terminator          Terminator 
+    disabled            enabled
+  
+
+Selecting the Connector Type on CN120ST/SBT
+-------------------------------------------
+
+     JP10    JP11        JP10    JP11
+                         -----   -----
+       0       0        |  0  | |  0  |       
+     -----   -----      |     | |     |
+    |  0  | |  0  |     |  0  | |  0  |
+    |     | |     |      -----   -----
+    |  0  | |  0  |        0       0 
+     -----   -----
+     Coaxial Cable       Twisted Pair Cable 
+       (Default)
+
+
+Setting the Timeout Parameters
+------------------------------
+
+The jumpers labeled EXT1 and EXT2 are used to determine the timeout 
+parameters. These two jumpers are normally left open.
+
+
+
+*****************************************************************************
+
+** CNet Technology Inc. **
+160 Series (16-bit cards)
+-------------------------
+  - from Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de>
+
+CNET TECHNOLOGY INC. (CNet) ARCNET 160A SERIES
+==============================================
+
+This description has been written by Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de>
+using information from the following Original CNet Manual 
+
+              "ARCNET
+            USER'S MANUAL 
+                for
+               CN160A
+               CN160AB
+               CN160TP
+             P/N:12-01-0006
+             Revision 3.00"
+
+ARCNET is a registered trademark of the Datapoint Corporation
+
+P/N 160A   ARCNET 16 bit XT/AT Star
+P/N 160AB  ARCNET 16 bit XT/AT Bus
+P/N 160TP  ARCNET 16 bit XT/AT Twisted Pair
+
+   ___________________________________________________________________
+  <                             _________________________          ___|
+  >               |oo| JP2     |                         |    LED |___|
+  <               |oo| JP1     |        9026             |    LED |___|
+  >                            |_________________________|         ___|
+  <                                                             N |   | ID7
+  >                                                      1      o |   | ID6
+  <                                    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0      d | S | ID5
+  >         _______________           _____________________     e | W | ID4
+  <        |     PROM      |         |         SW1         |    A | 2 | ID3
+  >        >    SOCKET     |         |_____________________|    d |   | ID2
+  <        |_______________|          | IO-Base   | MEM   |     d |   | ID1
+  >                                                             r |___| ID0
+  <                                                               ____|
+  >                                                              |    |
+  <                                                              | J1 |
+  >                                                              |    |
+  <                                                              |____|
+  >                            1 1 1 1                                |
+  <  3 4 5 6 7      JP     8 9 0 1 2 3                                |
+  > |o|o|o|o|o|           |o|o|o|o|o|o|                               |
+  < |o|o|o|o|o| __        |o|o|o|o|o|o|                    ___________|
+  >            |  |                                       |
+  <____________|  |_______________________________________|
+
+Legend:
+
+9026            ARCNET Probe
+SW1 1-6:    Base I/O Address Select
+    7-10:   Base Memory Address Select
+SW2 1-8:    Node ID Select (ID0-ID7)
+JP1/JP2     ET1, ET2 Timeout Parameters
+JP3-JP13    Interrupt Select
+J1      BNC RG62/U Connector        (CN160A/AB only)
+J1      Two 6-position Telephone Jack   (CN160TP only)
+LED
+
+Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0".
+
+
+Setting the Node ID
+-------------------
+
+The eight switches in SW2 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached
+to the network must have an unique node ID which must be different from 0.
+Switch 1 (ID0) serves as the least significant bit (LSB).
+
+The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1"  
+These values are:
+
+   Switch | Label | Value
+   -------|-------|-------
+     1    | ID0   |   1
+     2    | ID1   |   2
+     3    | ID2   |   4
+     4    | ID3   |   8
+     5    | ID4   |  16
+     6    | ID5   |  32
+     7    | ID6   |  64
+     8    | ID7   | 128
+
+Some Examples:
+
+    Switch         | Hex     | Decimal 
+   8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 | Node ID | Node ID
+   ----------------|---------|---------
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 |    not allowed
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 |    1    |    1 
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 |    2    |    2
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 |    3    |    3
+       . . .       |         |
+   0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 |   55    |   85
+       . . .       |         |
+   1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 |   AA    |  170
+       . . .       |         |  
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 |   FD    |  253
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 |   FE    |  254
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 |   FF    |  255
+
+
+Setting the I/O Base Address
+----------------------------
+
+The first six switches in switch block SW1 are used to select the I/O Base
+address using the following table:
+
+             Switch        | Hex I/O
+    1   2   3   4   5   6  | Address
+   ------------------------|--------
+   OFF ON  ON  OFF OFF ON  |  260
+   OFF ON  OFF ON  ON  OFF |  290
+   OFF ON  OFF OFF OFF ON  |  2E0  (Manufacturer's default)
+   OFF ON  OFF OFF OFF OFF |  2F0
+   OFF OFF ON  ON  ON  ON  |  300
+   OFF OFF ON  OFF ON  OFF |  350
+   OFF OFF OFF ON  ON  ON  |  380
+   OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON  |  3E0
+
+Note: Other IO-Base addresses seem to be selectable, but only the above
+      combinations are documented.
+
+
+Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address
+--------------------------------------------
+
+The switches 7-10 of switch block SW1 are used to select the Memory
+Base address of the RAM (2K) and the PROM.
+
+   Switch          | Hex RAM | Hex ROM
+    7   8   9  10  | Address | Address
+   ----------------|---------|-----------
+   OFF OFF ON  ON  |  C0000  |  C8000
+   OFF OFF ON  OFF |  D0000  |  D8000 (Default)
+   OFF OFF OFF ON  |  E0000  |  E8000
+
+Note: Other MEM-Base addresses seem to be selectable, but only the above
+      combinations are documented.
+
+
+Setting the Interrupt Line
+--------------------------
+
+To select a hardware interrupt level install one (only one!) of the jumpers
+JP3 through JP13 using the following table:
+
+   Jumper | IRQ     
+   -------|-----------------
+     3    |  14
+     4    |  15
+     5    |  12
+     6    |  11
+     7    |  10
+     8    |   3
+     9    |   4
+    10    |   5
+    11    |   6
+    12    |   7
+    13    |   2 (=9) Default!
+
+Note:  - Do not use JP11=IRQ6, it may conflict with your Floppy Disk
+         Controller
+       - Use JP3=IRQ14 only, if you don't have an IDE-, MFM-, or RLL-
+         Hard Disk, it may conflict with their controllers
+
+
+Setting the Timeout Parameters
+------------------------------
+
+The jumpers labeled JP1 and JP2 are used to determine the timeout
+parameters. These two jumpers are normally left open.
+
+
+*****************************************************************************
+
+** Lantech **
+8-bit card, unknown model
+-------------------------
+  - from Vlad Lungu <vlungu@ugal.ro> - his e-mail address seemed broken at
+    the time I tried to reach him.  Sorry Vlad, if you didn't get my reply.
+
+   ________________________________________________________________
+   |   1         8                                                 |
+   |   ___________                                               __|
+   |   |   SW1    |                                         LED |__|
+   |   |__________|                                                |
+   |                                                            ___|
+   |                _____________________                       |S | 8
+   |                |                   |                       |W |
+   |                |                   |                       |2 |
+   |                |                   |                       |__| 1
+   |                |      UM9065L      |     |o|  JP4         ____|____
+   |                |                   |     |o|              |  CN    |
+   |                |                   |                      |________|
+   |                |                   |                          |
+   |                |___________________|                          |
+   |                                                               |
+   |                                                               |
+   |      _____________                                            |
+   |      |            |                                           |
+   |      |    PROM    |        |ooooo|  JP6                       |
+   |      |____________|        |ooooo|                            |
+   |_____________                                             _   _|
+                |____________________________________________| |__|
+
+
+UM9065L : ARCnet Controller
+
+SW 1    : Shared Memory Address and I/O Base
+
+        ON=0
+
+        12345|Memory Address
+        -----|--------------
+        00001|  D4000
+        00010|  CC000
+        00110|  D0000
+        01110|  D1000
+        01101|  D9000
+        10010|  CC800
+        10011|  DC800
+        11110|  D1800
+
+It seems that the bits are considered in reverse order.  Also, you must
+observe that some of those addresses are unusual and I didn't probe them; I
+used a memory dump in DOS to identify them.  For the 00000 configuration and
+some others that I didn't write here the card seems to conflict with the
+video card (an S3 GENDAC). I leave the full decoding of those addresses to
+you.
+
+        678| I/O Address
+        ---|------------
+        000|    260
+        001|    failed probe
+        010|    2E0
+        011|    380
+        100|    290
+        101|    350
+        110|    failed probe
+        111|    3E0
+
+SW 2  : Node ID (binary coded)
+
+JP 4  : Boot PROM enable   CLOSE - enabled
+                           OPEN  - disabled
+
+JP 6  : IRQ set (ONLY ONE jumper on 1-5 for IRQ 2-6)
+
+
+*****************************************************************************
+
+** Acer **
+8-bit card, Model 5210-003
+--------------------------
+  - from Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz> using portions of the existing
+    arcnet-hardware file.
+
+This is a 90C26 based card.  Its configuration seems similar to the SMC
+PC100, but has some additional jumpers I don't know the meaning of.
+
+               __
+              |  |
+   ___________|__|_________________________
+  |         |      |                       |
+  |         | BNC  |                       |
+  |         |______|                    ___|
+  |  _____________________             |___  
+  | |                     |                |
+  | | Hybrid IC           |                |
+  | |                     |       o|o J1   |
+  | |_____________________|       8|8      |
+  |                               8|8 J5   |
+  |                               o|o      |
+  |                               8|8      |
+  |__                             8|8      |
+ (|__| LED                        o|o      |
+  |                               8|8      |
+  |                               8|8 J15  |
+  |                                        |
+  |                    _____               |
+  |                   |     |   _____      |
+  |                   |     |  |     |  ___|
+  |                   |     |  |     | |    
+  |  _____            | ROM |  | UFS | |    
+  | |     |           |     |  |     | |   
+  | |     |     ___   |     |  |     | |   
+  | |     |    |   |  |__.__|  |__.__| |   
+  | | NCR |    |XTL|   _____    _____  |   
+  | |     |    |___|  |     |  |     | |   
+  | |90C26|           |     |  |     | |   
+  | |     |           | RAM |  | UFS | |   
+  | |     | J17 o|o   |     |  |     | |   
+  | |     | J16 o|o   |     |  |     | |   
+  | |__.__|           |__.__|  |__.__| |   
+  |  ___                               |   
+  | |   |8                             |   
+  | |SW2|                              |   
+  | |   |                              |   
+  | |___|1                             |   
+  |  ___                               |   
+  | |   |10           J18 o|o          |   
+  | |   |                 o|o          |   
+  | |SW1|                 o|o          |   
+  | |   |             J21 o|o          |   
+  | |___|1                             |   
+  |                                    |   
+  |____________________________________|   
+
+
+Legend:
+
+90C26       ARCNET Chip
+XTL         20 MHz Crystal
+SW1 1-6     Base I/O Address Select
+    7-10    Memory Address Select
+SW2 1-8     Node ID Select (ID0-ID7)
+J1-J5       IRQ Select
+J6-J21      Unknown (Probably extra timeouts & ROM enable ...)
+LED1        Activity LED 
+BNC         Coax connector (STAR ARCnet)
+RAM         2k of SRAM
+ROM         Boot ROM socket
+UFS         Unidentified Flying Sockets
+
+
+Setting the Node ID
+-------------------
+
+The eight switches in SW2 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached
+to the network must have an unique node ID which must not be 0.
+Switch 1 (ID0) serves as the least significant bit (LSB).
+
+Setting one of the switches to OFF means "1", ON means "0".
+
+The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1"
+These values are:
+
+   Switch | Value
+   -------|-------
+     1    |   1
+     2    |   2
+     3    |   4
+     4    |   8
+     5    |  16
+     6    |  32
+     7    |  64
+     8    | 128
+
+Don't set this to 0 or 255; these values are reserved.
+
+
+Setting the I/O Base Address
+----------------------------
+
+The switches 1 to 6 of switch block SW1 are used to select one
+of 32 possible I/O Base addresses using the following tables
+   
+          | Hex
+   Switch | Value
+   -------|-------
+     1    | 200  
+     2    | 100  
+     3    |  80  
+     4    |  40  
+     5    |  20  
+     6    |  10 
+
+The I/O address is sum of all switches set to "1". Remember that
+the I/O address space bellow 0x200 is RESERVED for mainboard, so
+switch 1 should be ALWAYS SET TO OFF. 
+
+
+Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address
+--------------------------------------------
+
+The memory buffer (RAM) requires 2K. The base of this buffer can be
+located in any of sixteen positions. However, the addresses below
+A0000 are likely to cause system hang because there's main RAM.
+
+Jumpers 7-10 of switch block SW1 select the Memory Base address.
+
+   Switch          | Hex RAM
+    7   8   9  10  | Address
+   ----------------|---------
+   OFF OFF OFF OFF |  F0000 (conflicts with main BIOS)
+   OFF OFF OFF ON  |  E0000 
+   OFF OFF ON  OFF |  D0000
+   OFF OFF ON  ON  |  C0000 (conflicts with video BIOS)
+   OFF ON  OFF OFF |  B0000 (conflicts with mono video)
+   OFF ON  OFF ON  |  A0000 (conflicts with graphics)
+
+
+Setting the Interrupt Line
+--------------------------
+
+Jumpers 1-5 of the jumper block J1 control the IRQ level. ON means 
+shorted, OFF means open.
+
+    Jumper              |  IRQ
+    1   2   3   4   5   |
+   ----------------------------
+    ON  OFF OFF OFF OFF |  7
+    OFF ON  OFF OFF OFF |  5
+    OFF OFF ON  OFF OFF |  4
+    OFF OFF OFF ON  OFF |  3
+    OFF OFF OFF OFF ON  |  2
+
+
+Unknown jumpers & sockets
+-------------------------
+
+I know nothing about these. I just guess that J16&J17 are timeout
+jumpers and maybe one of J18-J21 selects ROM. Also J6-J10 and
+J11-J15 are connecting IRQ2-7 to some pins on the UFSs. I can't
+guess the purpose.
+
+
+*****************************************************************************
+
+** Datapoint? **
+LAN-ARC-8, an 8-bit card
+------------------------
+  - from Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz>
+
+This is another SMC 90C65-based ARCnet card. I couldn't identify the
+manufacturer, but it might be DataPoint, because the card has the
+original arcNet logo in its upper right corner.
+
+          _______________________________________________________
+         |                         _________                     |
+         |                        |   SW2   | ON      arcNet     |
+         |                        |_________| OFF             ___|
+         |  _____________         1 ______  8                |   | 8  
+         | |             | SW1     | XTAL | ____________     | S |    
+         | > RAM (2k)    |         |______||            |    | W |    
+         | |_____________|                 |      H     |    | 3 |    
+         |                        _________|_____ y     |    |___| 1  
+         |  _________            |         |     |b     |        |    
+         | |_________|           |         |     |r     |        |    
+         |                       |     SMC |     |i     |        |    
+         |                       |    90C65|     |d     |        |      
+         |  _________            |         |     |      |        |
+         | |   SW1   | ON        |         |     |I     |        |
+         | |_________| OFF       |_________|_____/C     |   _____|
+         |  1       8                      |            |  |     |___
+         |  ______________                 |            |  | BNC |___|
+         | |              |                |____________|  |_____|
+         | > EPROM SOCKET |              _____________           |
+         | |______________|             |_____________|          |
+         |                                         ______________|
+         |                                        | 
+         |________________________________________|
+
+Legend:
+
+90C65       ARCNET Chip 
+SW1 1-5:    Base Memory Address Select
+    6-8:    Base I/O Address Select
+SW2 1-8:    Node ID Select
+SW3 1-5:    IRQ Select   
+    6-7:    Extra Timeout
+    8  :    ROM Enable   
+BNC         Coax connector
+XTAL        20 MHz Crystal
+
+
+Setting the Node ID
+-------------------
+
+The eight switches in SW3 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached
+to the network must have an unique node ID which must not be 0.
+Switch 1 serves as the least significant bit (LSB).
+
+Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0".
+
+The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1"  
+These values are:
+
+   Switch | Value
+   -------|-------
+     1    |   1
+     2    |   2
+     3    |   4
+     4    |   8
+     5    |  16
+     6    |  32
+     7    |  64
+     8    | 128
+
+
+Setting the I/O Base Address
+----------------------------
+
+The last three switches in switch block SW1 are used to select one
+of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table
+
+
+   Switch      | Hex I/O
+    6   7   8  | Address
+   ------------|--------
+   ON  ON  ON  |  260
+   OFF ON  ON  |  290
+   ON  OFF ON  |  2E0  (Manufacturer's default)
+   OFF OFF ON  |  2F0
+   ON  ON  OFF |  300
+   OFF ON  OFF |  350
+   ON  OFF OFF |  380
+   OFF OFF OFF |  3E0
+
+
+Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address
+--------------------------------------------
+
+The memory buffer (RAM) requires 2K. The base of this buffer can be 
+located in any of eight positions. The address of the Boot Prom is
+memory base + 0x2000.
+Jumpers 3-5 of switch block SW1 select the Memory Base address.
+
+   Switch              | Hex RAM | Hex ROM
+    1   2   3   4   5  | Address | Address *)
+   --------------------|---------|-----------
+   ON  ON  ON  ON  ON  |  C0000  |  C2000
+   ON  ON  OFF ON  ON  |  C4000  |  C6000
+   ON  ON  ON  OFF ON  |  CC000  |  CE000
+   ON  ON  OFF OFF ON  |  D0000  |  D2000  (Manufacturer's default)
+   ON  ON  ON  ON  OFF |  D4000  |  D6000
+   ON  ON  OFF ON  OFF |  D8000  |  DA000
+   ON  ON  ON  OFF OFF |  DC000  |  DE000
+   ON  ON  OFF OFF OFF |  E0000  |  E2000
+  
+*) To enable the Boot ROM set the switch 8 of switch block SW3 to position ON.
+
+The switches 1 and 2 probably add 0x0800 and 0x1000 to RAM base address.
+
+
+Setting the Interrupt Line
+--------------------------
+
+Switches 1-5 of the switch block SW3 control the IRQ level.
+
+    Jumper              |  IRQ
+    1   2   3   4   5   |
+   ----------------------------
+    ON  OFF OFF OFF OFF |  3
+    OFF ON  OFF OFF OFF |  4
+    OFF OFF ON  OFF OFF |  5
+    OFF OFF OFF ON  OFF |  7
+    OFF OFF OFF OFF ON  |  2
+
+
+Setting the Timeout Parameters
+------------------------------
+
+The switches 6-7 of the switch block SW3 are used to determine the timeout
+parameters.  These two switches are normally left in the OFF position.
+
+
+*****************************************************************************
+
+** Topware **
+8-bit card, TA-ARC/10
+-------------------------
+  - from Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz>
+
+This is another very similar 90C65 card. Most of the switches and jumpers
+are the same as on other clones.
+
+ _____________________________________________________________________
+|  ___________   |                         |            ______        |
+| |SW2 NODE ID|  |                         |           | XTAL |       |
+| |___________|  |  Hybrid IC              |           |______|       |
+|  ___________   |                         |                        __|    
+| |SW1 MEM+I/O|  |_________________________|                   LED1|__|)   
+| |___________|           1 2                                         |     
+|                     J3 |o|o| TIMEOUT                          ______|    
+|     ______________     |o|o|                                 |      |    
+|    |              |  ___________________                     | RJ   |    
+|    > EPROM SOCKET | |                   \                    |------|     
+|J2  |______________| |                    |                   |      |    
+||o|                  |                    |                   |______|
+||o| ROM ENABLE       |        SMC         |    _________             |
+|     _____________   |       90C65        |   |_________|       _____|    
+|    |             |  |                    |                    |     |___ 
+|    > RAM (2k)    |  |                    |                    | BNC |___|
+|    |_____________|  |                    |                    |_____|    
+|                     |____________________|                          |    
+| ________ IRQ 2 3 4 5 7                  ___________                 |
+||________|   |o|o|o|o|o|                |___________|                |
+|________   J1|o|o|o|o|o|                               ______________|
+         |                                             |
+         |_____________________________________________|
+
+Legend:
+
+90C65       ARCNET Chip
+XTAL        20 MHz Crystal
+SW1 1-5     Base Memory Address Select
+    6-8     Base I/O Address Select
+SW2 1-8     Node ID Select (ID0-ID7)
+J1          IRQ Select
+J2          ROM Enable
+J3          Extra Timeout
+LED1        Activity LED 
+BNC         Coax connector (BUS ARCnet)
+RJ          Twisted Pair Connector (daisy chain)
+
+
+Setting the Node ID
+-------------------
+
+The eight switches in SW2 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached to
+the network must have an unique node ID which must not be 0.  Switch 1 (ID0)
+serves as the least significant bit (LSB).
+
+Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0".
+
+The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1"
+These values are:
+
+   Switch | Label | Value
+   -------|-------|-------
+     1    | ID0   |   1
+     2    | ID1   |   2
+     3    | ID2   |   4
+     4    | ID3   |   8
+     5    | ID4   |  16
+     6    | ID5   |  32
+     7    | ID6   |  64
+     8    | ID7   | 128
+
+Setting the I/O Base Address
+----------------------------
+
+The last three switches in switch block SW1 are used to select one
+of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table:
+
+
+   Switch      | Hex I/O
+    6   7   8  | Address
+   ------------|--------
+   ON  ON  ON  |  260  (Manufacturer's default)
+   OFF ON  ON  |  290
+   ON  OFF ON  |  2E0                         
+   OFF OFF ON  |  2F0
+   ON  ON  OFF |  300
+   OFF ON  OFF |  350
+   ON  OFF OFF |  380
+   OFF OFF OFF |  3E0
+
+
+Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address
+--------------------------------------------
+
+The memory buffer (RAM) requires 2K. The base of this buffer can be
+located in any of eight positions. The address of the Boot Prom is
+memory base + 0x2000.
+Jumpers 3-5 of switch block SW1 select the Memory Base address.
+
+   Switch              | Hex RAM | Hex ROM
+    1   2   3   4   5  | Address | Address *)
+   --------------------|---------|-----------
+   ON  ON  ON  ON  ON  |  C0000  |  C2000
+   ON  ON  OFF ON  ON  |  C4000  |  C6000  (Manufacturer's default) 
+   ON  ON  ON  OFF ON  |  CC000  |  CE000
+   ON  ON  OFF OFF ON  |  D0000  |  D2000  
+   ON  ON  ON  ON  OFF |  D4000  |  D6000
+   ON  ON  OFF ON  OFF |  D8000  |  DA000
+   ON  ON  ON  OFF OFF |  DC000  |  DE000
+   ON  ON  OFF OFF OFF |  E0000  |  E2000
+
+*) To enable the Boot ROM short the jumper J2.
+
+The jumpers 1 and 2 probably add 0x0800 and 0x1000 to RAM address.
+
+
+Setting the Interrupt Line
+--------------------------
+
+Jumpers 1-5 of the jumper block J1 control the IRQ level.  ON means
+shorted, OFF means open.
+
+    Jumper              |  IRQ
+    1   2   3   4   5   |
+   ----------------------------
+    ON  OFF OFF OFF OFF |  2
+    OFF ON  OFF OFF OFF |  3
+    OFF OFF ON  OFF OFF |  4
+    OFF OFF OFF ON  OFF |  5
+    OFF OFF OFF OFF ON  |  7
+
+
+Setting the Timeout Parameters
+------------------------------
+
+The jumpers J3 are used to set the timeout parameters. These two 
+jumpers are normally left open.
+
+  
+*****************************************************************************
+
+** Thomas-Conrad **
+Model #500-6242-0097 REV A (8-bit card)
+---------------------------------------
+  - from Lars Karlsson <100617.3473@compuserve.com>
+
+     ________________________________________________________
+   |          ________   ________                           |_____
+   |         |........| |........|                            |
+   |         |________| |________|                         ___|
+   |            SW 3       SW 1                           |   |
+   |         Base I/O   Base Addr.                Station |   |
+   |                                              address |   |
+   |    ______                                    switch  |   |
+   |   |      |                                           |   |
+   |   |      |                                           |___|    
+   |   |      |                                 ______        |___._
+   |   |______|                                |______|         ____| BNC
+   |                                            Jumper-        _____| Connector
+   |   Main chip                                block  _    __|   '  
+   |                                                  | |  |    RJ Connector
+   |                                                  |_|  |    with 110 Ohm
+   |                                                       |__  Terminator
+   |    ___________                                         __|
+   |   |...........|                                       |    RJ-jack
+   |   |...........|    _____                              |    (unused)
+   |   |___________|   |_____|                             |__
+   |  Boot PROM socket IRQ-jumpers                            |_  Diagnostic
+   |________                                       __          _| LED (red)
+            | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |  |        |
+            | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |  |________|
+                                                              |
+                                                              |
+
+And here are the settings for some of the switches and jumpers on the cards.
+
+
+          I/O
+
+         1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+
+2E0----- 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
+2F0----- 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
+300----- 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
+350----- 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
+
+"0" in the above example means switch is off "1" means that it is on.
+
+
+    ShMem address.
+
+      1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+
+CX00--0 0 1 1 | |   |
+DX00--0 0 1 0       |
+X000--------- 1 1   |
+X400--------- 1 0   |
+X800--------- 0 1   |
+XC00--------- 0 0   
+ENHANCED----------- 1
+COMPATIBLE--------- 0
+
+
+       IRQ
+
+
+   3 4 5 7 2
+   . . . . .
+   . . . . .
+
+
+There is a DIP-switch with 8 switches, used to set the shared memory address
+to be used. The first 6 switches set the address, the 7th doesn't have any
+function, and the 8th switch is used to select "compatible" or "enhanced".
+When I got my two cards, one of them had this switch set to "enhanced". That
+card didn't work at all, it wasn't even recognized by the driver. The other
+card had this switch set to "compatible" and it behaved absolutely normally. I
+guess that the switch on one of the cards, must have been changed accidentally
+when the card was taken out of its former host. The question remains
+unanswered, what is the purpose of the "enhanced" position?
+
+[Avery's note: "enhanced" probably either disables shared memory (use IO
+ports instead) or disables IO ports (use memory addresses instead).  This
+varies by the type of card involved.  I fail to see how either of these
+enhance anything.  Send me more detailed information about this mode, or
+just use "compatible" mode instead.]
+
+
+*****************************************************************************
+
+** Waterloo Microsystems Inc. ?? **
+8-bit card (C) 1985
+-------------------
+  - from Robert Michael Best <rmb117@cs.usask.ca>
+
+[Avery's note: these don't work with my driver for some reason.  These cards
+SEEM to have settings similar to the PDI508Plus, which is
+software-configured and doesn't work with my driver either.  The "Waterloo
+chip" is a boot PROM, probably designed specifically for the University of
+Waterloo.  If you have any further information about this card, please
+e-mail me.]
+
+The probe has not been able to detect the card on any of the J2 settings,
+and I tried them again with the "Waterloo" chip removed.
+ 
+ _____________________________________________________________________
+| \/  \/              ___  __ __                                      |
+| C4  C4     |^|     | M ||  ^  ||^|                                  |
+| --  --     |_|     | 5 ||     || | C3                               |
+| \/  \/      C10    |___||     ||_|                                  | 
+| C4  C4             _  _ |     |                 ??                  | 
+| --  --            | \/ ||     |                                     | 
+|                   |    ||     |                                     | 
+|                   |    ||  C1 |                                     | 
+|                   |    ||     |  \/                            _____|    
+|                   | C6 ||     |  C9                           |     |___ 
+|                   |    ||     |  --                           | BNC |___| 
+|                   |    ||     |          >C7|                 |_____|
+|                   |    ||     |                                     |
+| __ __             |____||_____|       1 2 3     6                   |
+||  ^  |     >C4|                      |o|o|o|o|o|o| J2    >C4|       |
+||     |                               |o|o|o|o|o|o|                  |
+|| C2  |     >C4|                                          >C4|       |
+||     |                                   >C8|                       |
+||     |       2 3 4 5 6 7  IRQ                            >C4|       |
+||_____|      |o|o|o|o|o|o| J3                                        |
+|_______      |o|o|o|o|o|o|                            _______________|
+        |                                             |
+        |_____________________________________________|
+
+C1 -- "COM9026
+       SMC 8638"
+      In a chip socket.
+
+C2 -- "@Copyright
+       Waterloo Microsystems Inc.
+       1985"
+      In a chip Socket with info printed on a label covering a round window
+      showing the circuit inside. (The window indicates it is an EPROM chip.)
+
+C3 -- "COM9032
+       SMC 8643"
+      In a chip socket.
+
+C4 -- "74LS"
+      9 total no sockets.
+
+M5 -- "50006-136
+       20.000000 MHZ
+       MTQ-T1-S3
+       0 M-TRON 86-40"
+      Metallic case with 4 pins, no socket.
+
+C6 -- "MOSTEK@TC8643
+       MK6116N-20
+       MALAYSIA"
+      No socket.
+
+C7 -- No stamp or label but in a 20 pin chip socket.
+
+C8 -- "PAL10L8CN
+       8623"
+      In a 20 pin socket.
+
+C9 -- "PAl16R4A-2CN
+       8641"
+      In a 20 pin socket.
+
+C10 -- "M8640
+          NMC
+        9306N"
+       In an 8 pin socket.
+
+?? -- Some components on a smaller board and attached with 20 pins all 
+      along the side closest to the BNC connector.  The are coated in a dark 
+      resin.
+
+On the board there are two jumper banks labeled J2 and J3. The 
+manufacturer didn't put a J1 on the board. The two boards I have both 
+came with a jumper box for each bank.
+
+J2 -- Numbered 1 2 3 4 5 6. 
+      4 and 5 are not stamped due to solder points.
+       
+J3 -- IRQ 2 3 4 5 6 7
+
+The board itself has a maple leaf stamped just above the irq jumpers 
+and "-2 46-86" beside C2. Between C1 and C6 "ASS 'Y 300163" and "@1986 
+CORMAN CUSTOM ELECTRONICS CORP." stamped just below the BNC connector.
+Below that "MADE IN CANADA"
+
+  
+*****************************************************************************
+
+** No Name **
+8-bit cards, 16-bit cards
+-------------------------
+  - from Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de>
+  
+NONAME 8-BIT ARCNET
+===================
+
+I have named this ARCnet card "NONAME", since there is no name of any
+manufacturer on the Installation manual nor on the shipping box. The only
+hint to the existence of a manufacturer at all is written in copper,
+it is "Made in Taiwan"
+
+This description has been written by Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de>
+using information from the Original
+                    "ARCnet Installation Manual"
+
+
+    ________________________________________________________________
+   | |STAR| BUS| T/P|                                               |
+   | |____|____|____|                                               |
+   |                            _____________________               |
+   |                           |                     |              |
+   |                           |                     |              |
+   |                           |                     |              |
+   |                           |        SMC          |              |
+   |                           |                     |              |
+   |                           |       COM90C65      |              |
+   |                           |                     |              |
+   |                           |                     |              |
+   |                           |__________-__________|              |
+   |                                                           _____|
+   |      _______________                                     |  CN |
+   |     | PROM          |                                    |_____|
+   |     > SOCKET        |                                          |
+   |     |_______________|         1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 |
+   |                               _______________  _______________ |
+   |           |o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o|  |      SW1      ||      SW2      ||
+   |           |o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o|  |_______________||_______________||
+   |___         2 3 4 5 7 E E R        Node ID       IOB__|__MEM____|
+       |        \ IRQ   / T T O                      |
+       |__________________1_2_M______________________|
+
+Legend:
+
+COM90C65:       ARCnet Probe
+S1  1-8:    Node ID Select
+S2  1-3:    I/O Base Address Select
+    4-6:    Memory Base Address Select
+    7-8:    RAM Offset Select
+ET1, ET2    Extended Timeout Select
+ROM     ROM Enable Select
+CN              RG62 Coax Connector
+STAR| BUS | T/P Three fields for placing a sign (colored circle)
+                indicating the topology of the card
+
+Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0".
+
+
+Setting the Node ID
+-------------------
+
+The eight switches in group SW1 are used to set the node ID.
+Each node attached to the network must have an unique node ID which
+must be different from 0.
+Switch 8 serves as the least significant bit (LSB).
+
+The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1"  
+These values are:
+
+    Switch | Value
+    -------|-------
+      8    |   1
+      7    |   2
+      6    |   4
+      5    |   8
+      4    |  16
+      3    |  32
+      2    |  64
+      1    | 128
+
+Some Examples:
+
+    Switch         | Hex     | Decimal 
+   1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | Node ID | Node ID
+   ----------------|---------|---------
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 |    not allowed
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 |    1    |    1 
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 |    2    |    2
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 |    3    |    3
+       . . .       |         |
+   0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 |   55    |   85
+       . . .       |         |
+   1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 |   AA    |  170
+       . . .       |         |  
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 |   FD    |  253
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 |   FE    |  254
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 |   FF    |  255
+
+
+Setting the I/O Base Address
+----------------------------
+
+The first three switches in switch group SW2 are used to select one
+of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table
+
+   Switch      | Hex I/O
+    1   2   3  | Address
+   ------------|--------
+   ON  ON  ON  |  260
+   ON  ON  OFF |  290
+   ON  OFF ON  |  2E0  (Manufacturer's default)
+   ON  OFF OFF |  2F0
+   OFF ON  ON  |  300
+   OFF ON  OFF |  350
+   OFF OFF ON  |  380
+   OFF OFF OFF |  3E0
+
+
+Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address
+--------------------------------------------
+
+The memory buffer requires 2K of a 16K block of RAM. The base of this
+16K block can be located in any of eight positions.
+Switches 4-6 of switch group SW2 select the Base of the 16K block.
+Within that 16K address space, the buffer may be assigned any one of four
+positions, determined by the offset, switches 7 and 8 of group SW2.
+
+   Switch     | Hex RAM | Hex ROM
+   4 5 6  7 8 | Address | Address *)
+   -----------|---------|-----------
+   0 0 0  0 0 |  C0000  |  C2000
+   0 0 0  0 1 |  C0800  |  C2000
+   0 0 0  1 0 |  C1000  |  C2000
+   0 0 0  1 1 |  C1800  |  C2000
+              |         |
+   0 0 1  0 0 |  C4000  |  C6000
+   0 0 1  0 1 |  C4800  |  C6000
+   0 0 1  1 0 |  C5000  |  C6000
+   0 0 1  1 1 |  C5800  |  C6000
+              |         |
+   0 1 0  0 0 |  CC000  |  CE000
+   0 1 0  0 1 |  CC800  |  CE000
+   0 1 0  1 0 |  CD000  |  CE000
+   0 1 0  1 1 |  CD800  |  CE000
+              |         |
+   0 1 1  0 0 |  D0000  |  D2000  (Manufacturer's default)
+   0 1 1  0 1 |  D0800  |  D2000
+   0 1 1  1 0 |  D1000  |  D2000
+   0 1 1  1 1 |  D1800  |  D2000
+              |         |
+   1 0 0  0 0 |  D4000  |  D6000
+   1 0 0  0 1 |  D4800  |  D6000
+   1 0 0  1 0 |  D5000  |  D6000
+   1 0 0  1 1 |  D5800  |  D6000
+              |         |
+   1 0 1  0 0 |  D8000  |  DA000
+   1 0 1  0 1 |  D8800  |  DA000
+   1 0 1  1 0 |  D9000  |  DA000
+   1 0 1  1 1 |  D9800  |  DA000
+              |         |
+   1 1 0  0 0 |  DC000  |  DE000
+   1 1 0  0 1 |  DC800  |  DE000
+   1 1 0  1 0 |  DD000  |  DE000
+   1 1 0  1 1 |  DD800  |  DE000
+              |         |
+   1 1 1  0 0 |  E0000  |  E2000
+   1 1 1  0 1 |  E0800  |  E2000
+   1 1 1  1 0 |  E1000  |  E2000
+   1 1 1  1 1 |  E1800  |  E2000
+  
+*) To enable the 8K Boot PROM install the jumper ROM.
+   The default is jumper ROM not installed.
+
+
+Setting Interrupt Request Lines (IRQ)
+-------------------------------------
+
+To select a hardware interrupt level set one (only one!) of the jumpers
+IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQ5 or IRQ7. The manufacturer's default is IRQ2.
+ 
+
+Setting the Timeouts
+--------------------
+
+The two jumpers labeled ET1 and ET2 are used to determine the timeout
+parameters (response and reconfiguration time). Every node in a network
+must be set to the same timeout values.
+
+   ET1 ET2 | Response Time (us) | Reconfiguration Time (ms)
+   --------|--------------------|--------------------------
+   Off Off |        78          |          840   (Default)
+   Off On  |       285          |         1680
+   On  Off |       563          |         1680
+   On  On  |      1130          |         1680
+
+On means jumper installed, Off means jumper not installed
+
+
+NONAME 16-BIT ARCNET
+====================
+
+The manual of my 8-Bit NONAME ARCnet Card contains another description
+of a 16-Bit Coax / Twisted Pair Card. This description is incomplete,
+because there are missing two pages in the manual booklet. (The table
+of contents reports pages ... 2-9, 2-11, 2-12, 3-1, ... but inside
+the booklet there is a different way of counting ... 2-9, 2-10, A-1,
+(empty page), 3-1, ..., 3-18, A-1 (again), A-2)
+Also the picture of the board layout is not as good as the picture of
+8-Bit card, because there isn't any letter like "SW1" written to the
+picture.
+Should somebody have such a board, please feel free to complete this
+description or to send a mail to me!
+
+This description has been written by Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de>
+using information from the Original
+                    "ARCnet Installation Manual"
+
+
+   ___________________________________________________________________
+  <                    _________________  _________________           |
+  >                   |       SW?       ||      SW?        |          |
+  <                   |_________________||_________________|          |
+  >                       ____________________                        |
+  <                      |                    |                       |
+  >                      |                    |                       |
+  <                      |                    |                       |
+  >                      |                    |                       |
+  <                      |                    |                       |
+  >                      |                    |                       |
+  <                      |                    |                       |
+  >                      |____________________|                       |
+  <                                                               ____|
+  >                       ____________________                   |    |
+  <                      |                    |                  | J1 |
+  >                      |                    <                  |    |
+  <                      |____________________|  ? ? ? ? ? ?     |____|
+  >                                             |o|o|o|o|o|o|         |
+  <                                             |o|o|o|o|o|o|         |
+  >                                                                   |
+  <             __                                         ___________|
+  >            |  |                                       |
+  <____________|  |_______________________________________|
+
+
+Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0".
+
+
+Setting the Node ID
+-------------------
+
+The eight switches in group SW2 are used to set the node ID.
+Each node attached to the network must have an unique node ID which
+must be different from 0.
+Switch 8 serves as the least significant bit (LSB).
+
+The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1"  
+These values are:
+
+    Switch | Value
+    -------|-------
+      8    |   1
+      7    |   2
+      6    |   4
+      5    |   8
+      4    |  16
+      3    |  32
+      2    |  64
+      1    | 128
+
+Some Examples:
+
+    Switch         | Hex     | Decimal 
+   1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | Node ID | Node ID
+   ----------------|---------|---------
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 |    not allowed
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 |    1    |    1 
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 |    2    |    2
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 |    3    |    3
+       . . .       |         |
+   0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 |   55    |   85
+       . . .       |         |
+   1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 |   AA    |  170
+       . . .       |         |  
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 |   FD    |  253
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 |   FE    |  254
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 |   FF    |  255
+
+
+Setting the I/O Base Address
+----------------------------
+
+The first three switches in switch group SW1 are used to select one
+of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table
+
+   Switch      | Hex I/O
+    3   2   1  | Address
+   ------------|--------
+   ON  ON  ON  |  260
+   ON  ON  OFF |  290
+   ON  OFF ON  |  2E0  (Manufacturer's default)
+   ON  OFF OFF |  2F0
+   OFF ON  ON  |  300
+   OFF ON  OFF |  350
+   OFF OFF ON  |  380
+   OFF OFF OFF |  3E0
+
+
+Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address
+--------------------------------------------
+
+The memory buffer requires 2K of a 16K block of RAM. The base of this
+16K block can be located in any of eight positions.
+Switches 6-8 of switch group SW1 select the Base of the 16K block.
+Within that 16K address space, the buffer may be assigned any one of four
+positions, determined by the offset, switches 4 and 5 of group SW1.
+
+   Switch     | Hex RAM | Hex ROM
+   8 7 6  5 4 | Address | Address
+   -----------|---------|-----------
+   0 0 0  0 0 |  C0000  |  C2000
+   0 0 0  0 1 |  C0800  |  C2000
+   0 0 0  1 0 |  C1000  |  C2000
+   0 0 0  1 1 |  C1800  |  C2000
+              |         |
+   0 0 1  0 0 |  C4000  |  C6000
+   0 0 1  0 1 |  C4800  |  C6000
+   0 0 1  1 0 |  C5000  |  C6000
+   0 0 1  1 1 |  C5800  |  C6000
+              |         |
+   0 1 0  0 0 |  CC000  |  CE000
+   0 1 0  0 1 |  CC800  |  CE000
+   0 1 0  1 0 |  CD000  |  CE000
+   0 1 0  1 1 |  CD800  |  CE000
+              |         |
+   0 1 1  0 0 |  D0000  |  D2000  (Manufacturer's default)
+   0 1 1  0 1 |  D0800  |  D2000
+   0 1 1  1 0 |  D1000  |  D2000
+   0 1 1  1 1 |  D1800  |  D2000
+              |         |
+   1 0 0  0 0 |  D4000  |  D6000
+   1 0 0  0 1 |  D4800  |  D6000
+   1 0 0  1 0 |  D5000  |  D6000
+   1 0 0  1 1 |  D5800  |  D6000
+              |         |
+   1 0 1  0 0 |  D8000  |  DA000
+   1 0 1  0 1 |  D8800  |  DA000
+   1 0 1  1 0 |  D9000  |  DA000
+   1 0 1  1 1 |  D9800  |  DA000
+              |         |
+   1 1 0  0 0 |  DC000  |  DE000
+   1 1 0  0 1 |  DC800  |  DE000
+   1 1 0  1 0 |  DD000  |  DE000
+   1 1 0  1 1 |  DD800  |  DE000
+              |         |
+   1 1 1  0 0 |  E0000  |  E2000
+   1 1 1  0 1 |  E0800  |  E2000
+   1 1 1  1 0 |  E1000  |  E2000
+   1 1 1  1 1 |  E1800  |  E2000
+  
+
+Setting Interrupt Request Lines (IRQ)
+-------------------------------------
+
+??????????????????????????????????????
+
+
+Setting the Timeouts
+--------------------
+
+??????????????????????????????????????
+
+
+*****************************************************************************
+
+** No Name **
+8-bit cards ("Made in Taiwan R.O.C.")
+-----------
+  - from Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz>
+
+I have named this ARCnet card "NONAME", since I got only the card with
+no manual at all and the only text identifying the manufacturer is 
+"MADE IN TAIWAN R.O.C" printed on the card.
+
+          ____________________________________________________________
+         |                 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8                            |
+         | |o|o| JP1       o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| ON                        |
+         |  +              o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o|                        ___|
+         |  _____________  o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| OFF         _____     |   | ID7
+         | |             | SW1                         |     |    |   | ID6
+         | > RAM (2k)    |        ____________________ |  H  |    | S | ID5
+         | |_____________|       |                    ||  y  |    | W | ID4
+         |                       |                    ||  b  |    | 2 | ID3
+         |                       |                    ||  r  |    |   | ID2
+         |                       |                    ||  i  |    |   | ID1
+         |                       |       90C65        ||  d  |    |___| ID0
+         |      SW3              |                    ||     |        |      
+         | |o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| ON  |                    ||  I  |        |
+         | |o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o|     |                    ||  C  |        |
+         | |o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| OFF |____________________||     |   _____|
+         |  1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8                            |     |  |     |___
+         |  ______________                             |     |  | BNC |___|
+         | |              |                            |_____|  |_____|
+         | > EPROM SOCKET |                                           |
+         | |______________|                                           |
+         |                                              ______________|
+         |                                             |
+         |_____________________________________________|
+
+Legend:
+
+90C65       ARCNET Chip 
+SW1 1-5:    Base Memory Address Select
+    6-8:    Base I/O Address Select
+SW2 1-8:    Node ID Select (ID0-ID7)
+SW3 1-5:    IRQ Select   
+    6-7:    Extra Timeout
+    8  :    ROM Enable   
+JP1         Led connector
+BNC         Coax connector
+
+Although the jumpers SW1 and SW3 are marked SW, not JP, they are jumpers, not 
+switches.
+
+Setting the jumpers to ON means connecting the upper two pins, off the bottom 
+two - or - in case of IRQ setting, connecting none of them at all.
+
+Setting the Node ID
+-------------------
+
+The eight switches in SW2 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached
+to the network must have an unique node ID which must not be 0.
+Switch 1 (ID0) serves as the least significant bit (LSB).
+
+Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0".
+
+The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1"  
+These values are:
+
+   Switch | Label | Value
+   -------|-------|-------
+     1    | ID0   |   1
+     2    | ID1   |   2
+     3    | ID2   |   4
+     4    | ID3   |   8
+     5    | ID4   |  16
+     6    | ID5   |  32
+     7    | ID6   |  64
+     8    | ID7   | 128
+
+Some Examples:
+
+    Switch         | Hex     | Decimal 
+   8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 | Node ID | Node ID
+   ----------------|---------|---------
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 |    not allowed
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 |    1    |    1 
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 |    2    |    2
+   0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 |    3    |    3
+       . . .       |         |
+   0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 |   55    |   85
+       . . .       |         |
+   1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 |   AA    |  170
+       . . .       |         |  
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 |   FD    |  253
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 |   FE    |  254
+   1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 |   FF    |  255
+
+
+Setting the I/O Base Address
+----------------------------
+
+The last three switches in switch block SW1 are used to select one
+of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table
+
+
+   Switch      | Hex I/O
+    6   7   8  | Address
+   ------------|--------
+   ON  ON  ON  |  260
+   OFF ON  ON  |  290
+   ON  OFF ON  |  2E0  (Manufacturer's default)
+   OFF OFF ON  |  2F0
+   ON  ON  OFF |  300
+   OFF ON  OFF |  350
+   ON  OFF OFF |  380
+   OFF OFF OFF |  3E0
+
+
+Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address
+--------------------------------------------
+
+The memory buffer (RAM) requires 2K. The base of this buffer can be 
+located in any of eight positions. The address of the Boot Prom is
+memory base + 0x2000.
+Jumpers 3-5 of jumper block SW1 select the Memory Base address.
+
+   Switch              | Hex RAM | Hex ROM
+    1   2   3   4   5  | Address | Address *)
+   --------------------|---------|-----------
+   ON  ON  ON  ON  ON  |  C0000  |  C2000
+   ON  ON  OFF ON  ON  |  C4000  |  C6000
+   ON  ON  ON  OFF ON  |  CC000  |  CE000
+   ON  ON  OFF OFF ON  |  D0000  |  D2000  (Manufacturer's default)
+   ON  ON  ON  ON  OFF |  D4000  |  D6000
+   ON  ON  OFF ON  OFF |  D8000  |  DA000
+   ON  ON  ON  OFF OFF |  DC000  |  DE000
+   ON  ON  OFF OFF OFF |  E0000  |  E2000
+  
+*) To enable the Boot ROM set the jumper 8 of jumper block SW3 to position ON.
+
+The jumpers 1 and 2 probably add 0x0800, 0x1000 and 0x1800 to RAM adders.
+
+Setting the Interrupt Line
+--------------------------
+
+Jumpers 1-5 of the jumper block SW3 control the IRQ level.
+
+    Jumper              |  IRQ
+    1   2   3   4   5   |
+   ----------------------------
+    ON  OFF OFF OFF OFF |  2
+    OFF ON  OFF OFF OFF |  3
+    OFF OFF ON  OFF OFF |  4
+    OFF OFF OFF ON  OFF |  5
+    OFF OFF OFF OFF ON  |  7
+
+
+Setting the Timeout Parameters
+------------------------------
+
+The jumpers 6-7 of the jumper block SW3 are used to determine the timeout 
+parameters. These two jumpers are normally left in the OFF position.
+
+
+*****************************************************************************
+
+** No Name **
+(Generic Model 9058)
+--------------------
+  - from Andrew J. Kroll <ag784@freenet.buffalo.edu>
+  - Sorry this sat in my to-do box for so long, Andrew! (yikes - over a
+    year!)
+                                                                      _____
+                                                                     |    <
+                                                                     | .---'
+    ________________________________________________________________ | |
+   |                           |     SW2     |                      |  |
+   |   ___________             |_____________|                      |  |
+   |  |           |              1 2 3 4 5 6                     ___|  |
+   |  >  6116 RAM |         _________                         8 |   |  |
+   |  |___________|        |20MHzXtal|                        7 |   |  |
+   |                       |_________|       __________       6 | S |  |
+   |    74LS373                             |          |-     5 | W |  |
+   |   _________                            |      E   |-     4 |   |  |
+   |   >_______|              ______________|..... P   |-     3 | 3 |  |
+   |                         |              |    : O   |-     2 |   |  |
+   |                         |              |    : X   |-     1 |___|  |
+   |   ________________      |              |    : Y   |-           |  |
+   |  |      SW1       |     |      SL90C65 |    :     |-           |  |
+   |  |________________|     |              |    : B   |-           |  |
+   |    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8      |              |    : O   |-           |  |
+   |                         |_________o____|..../ A   |-    _______|  |
+   |    ____________________                |      R   |-   |       |------,   
+   |   |                    |               |      D   |-   |  BNC  |   #  |
+   |   > 2764 PROM SOCKET   |               |__________|-   |_______|------'
+   |   |____________________|              _________                |  |
+   |                                       >________| <- 74LS245    |  |
+   |                                                                |  |
+   |___                                               ______________|  |
+       |H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H|               | |
+       |U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U|               | |
+                                                                      \|
+Legend:
+
+SL90C65 	ARCNET Controller / Transceiver /Logic
+SW1	1-5:	IRQ Select
+	  6:	ET1
+	  7:	ET2
+	  8:	ROM ENABLE 
+SW2	1-3:    Memory Buffer/PROM Address
+	3-6:	I/O Address Map
+SW3	1-8:	Node ID Select
+BNC		BNC RG62/U Connection 
+		*I* have had success using RG59B/U with *NO* terminators!
+		What gives?!
+
+SW1: Timeouts, Interrupt and ROM
+---------------------------------
+
+To select a hardware interrupt level set one (only one!) of the dip switches
+up (on) SW1...(switches 1-5)
+IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ2. The Manufacturer's default is IRQ2.
+
+The switches on SW1 labeled EXT1 (switch 6) and EXT2 (switch 7)
+are used to determine the timeout parameters. These two dip switches
+are normally left off (down).
+
+   To enable the 8K Boot PROM position SW1 switch 8 on (UP) labeled ROM.
+   The default is jumper ROM not installed.
+
+
+Setting the I/O Base Address
+----------------------------
+
+The last three switches in switch group SW2 are used to select one
+of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table
+
+
+   Switch | Hex I/O
+   4 5 6  | Address
+   -------|--------
+   0 0 0  |  260
+   0 0 1  |  290
+   0 1 0  |  2E0  (Manufacturer's default)
+   0 1 1  |  2F0
+   1 0 0  |  300
+   1 0 1  |  350
+   1 1 0  |  380
+   1 1 1  |  3E0
+
+
+Setting the Base Memory Address (RAM & ROM)
+-------------------------------------------
+
+The memory buffer requires 2K of a 16K block of RAM. The base of this
+16K block can be located in any of eight positions.
+Switches 1-3 of switch group SW2 select the Base of the 16K block.
+(0 = DOWN, 1 = UP)
+I could, however, only verify two settings...
+
+   Switch| Hex RAM | Hex ROM
+   1 2 3 | Address | Address
+   ------|---------|-----------
+   0 0 0 |  E0000  |  E2000
+   0 0 1 |  D0000  |  D2000  (Manufacturer's default)
+   0 1 0 |  ?????  |  ?????
+   0 1 1 |  ?????  |  ?????  
+   1 0 0 |  ?????  |  ?????
+   1 0 1 |  ?????  |  ?????
+   1 1 0 |  ?????  |  ?????
+   1 1 1 |  ?????  |  ?????
+
+
+Setting the Node ID
+-------------------
+
+The eight switches in group SW3 are used to set the node ID.
+Each node attached to the network must have an unique node ID which
+must be different from 0.
+Switch 1 serves as the least significant bit (LSB).
+switches in the DOWN position are OFF (0) and in the UP position are ON (1)
+
+The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1"  
+These values are:
+    Switch | Value
+    -------|-------
+      1    |   1
+      2    |   2
+      3    |   4
+      4    |   8
+      5    |  16
+      6    |  32
+      7    |  64
+      8    | 128
+
+Some Examples:
+
+    Switch#     |   Hex   | Decimal 
+8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 | Node ID | Node ID
+----------------|---------|---------
+0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 |    not allowed  <-.
+0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 |    1    |    1    | 
+0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 |    2    |    2    |
+0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 |    3    |    3    |
+    . . .       |         |         |
+0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 |   55    |   85    |
+    . . .       |         |         + Don't use 0 or 255!
+1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 |   AA    |  170    |
+    . . .       |         |         |
+1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 |   FD    |  253    |
+1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 |   FE    |  254    |
+1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 |   FF    |  255  <-'
+  
+
+*****************************************************************************
+
+** Tiara **
+(model unknown)
+-------------------------
+  - from Christoph Lameter <christoph@lameter.com>
+  
+
+Here is information about my card as far as I could figure it out:
+----------------------------------------------- tiara
+Tiara LanCard of Tiara Computer Systems.
+
++----------------------------------------------+
+!           ! Transmitter Unit !               !
+!           +------------------+             -------
+!          MEM                              Coax Connector
+!  ROM    7654321 <- I/O                     -------
+!  :  :   +--------+                           !
+!  :  :   ! 90C66LJ!                         +++
+!  :  :   !        !                         !D  Switch to set
+!  :  :   !        !                         !I  the Nodenumber
+!  :  :   +--------+                         !P
+!                                            !++
+!         234567 <- IRQ                      !
++------------!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!--------+
+             !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
+
+0 = Jumper Installed
+1 = Open
+
+Top Jumper line Bit 7 = ROM Enable 654=Memory location 321=I/O
+
+Settings for Memory Location (Top Jumper Line)
+456     Address selected
+000	C0000
+001     C4000
+010     CC000
+011     D0000
+100     D4000
+101     D8000
+110     DC000     
+111     E0000
+
+Settings for I/O Address (Top Jumper Line)
+123     Port
+000	260
+001	290
+010	2E0
+011	2F0
+100	300
+101	350
+110	380
+111	3E0
+
+Settings for IRQ Selection (Lower Jumper Line)
+234567
+011111 IRQ 2
+101111 IRQ 3
+110111 IRQ 4
+111011 IRQ 5
+111110 IRQ 7
+
+*****************************************************************************
+
+
+Other Cards
+-----------
+
+I have no information on other models of ARCnet cards at the moment.  Please
+send any and all info to:
+	apenwarr@worldvisions.ca
+
+Thanks.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt b/Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9ff57950215
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,555 @@
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+NOTE:  See also arcnet-hardware.txt in this directory for jumper-setting
+and cabling information if you're like many of us and didn't happen to get a
+manual with your ARCnet card.
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Since no one seems to listen to me otherwise, perhaps a poem will get your
+attention:
+		This driver's getting fat and beefy,
+		But my cat is still named Fifi.
+
+Hmm, I think I'm allowed to call that a poem, even though it's only two
+lines.  Hey, I'm in Computer Science, not English.  Give me a break.
+
+The point is:  I REALLY REALLY REALLY REALLY REALLY want to hear from you if
+you test this and get it working.  Or if you don't.  Or anything.
+
+ARCnet 0.32 ALPHA first made it into the Linux kernel 1.1.80 - this was
+nice, but after that even FEWER people started writing to me because they
+didn't even have to install the patch.  <sigh>
+
+Come on, be a sport!  Send me a success report!
+
+(hey, that was even better than my original poem... this is getting bad!)
+
+
+--------
+WARNING:
+--------
+
+If you don't e-mail me about your success/failure soon, I may be forced to
+start SINGING.  And we don't want that, do we?
+
+(You know, it might be argued that I'm pushing this point a little too much. 
+If you think so, why not flame me in a quick little e-mail?  Please also
+include the type of card(s) you're using, software, size of network, and
+whether it's working or not.)
+
+My e-mail address is: apenwarr@worldvisions.ca
+
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+			
+These are the ARCnet drivers for Linux.
+
+
+This new release (2.91) has been put together by David Woodhouse 
+<dwmw2@infradead.org>, in an attempt to tidy up the driver after adding support
+for yet another chipset. Now the generic support has been separated from the
+individual chipset drivers, and the source files aren't quite so packed with
+#ifdefs! I've changed this file a bit, but kept it in the first person from
+Avery, because I didn't want to completely rewrite it.
+
+The previous release resulted from many months of on-and-off effort from me
+(Avery Pennarun), many bug reports/fixes and suggestions from others, and in
+particular a lot of input and coding from Tomasz Motylewski.  Starting with
+ARCnet 2.10 ALPHA, Tomasz's all-new-and-improved RFC1051 support has been
+included and seems to be working fine!
+
+
+Where do I discuss these drivers?
+---------------------------------
+
+Tomasz has been so kind as to set up a new and improved mailing list. 
+Subscribe by sending a message with the BODY "subscribe linux-arcnet YOUR
+REAL NAME" to listserv@tichy.ch.uj.edu.pl.  Then, to submit messages to the
+list, mail to linux-arcnet@tichy.ch.uj.edu.pl.
+
+There are archives of the mailing list at:
+	http://epistolary.org/mailman/listinfo.cgi/arcnet
+
+The people on linux-net@vger.kernel.org have also been known to be very
+helpful, especially when we're talking about ALPHA Linux kernels that may or
+may not work right in the first place.
+
+
+Other Drivers and Info
+----------------------
+
+You can try my ARCNET page on the World Wide Web at:
+	http://www.qis.net/~jschmitz/arcnet/	
+
+Also, SMC (one of the companies that makes ARCnet cards) has a WWW site you
+might be interested in, which includes several drivers for various cards
+including ARCnet.  Try:
+	http://www.smc.com/
+	
+Performance Technologies makes various network software that supports
+ARCnet:
+	http://www.perftech.com/ or ftp to ftp.perftech.com.
+	
+Novell makes a networking stack for DOS which includes ARCnet drivers.  Try
+FTPing to ftp.novell.com.
+
+You can get the Crynwr packet driver collection (including arcether.com, the
+one you'll want to use with ARCnet cards) from
+oak.oakland.edu:/simtel/msdos/pktdrvr. It won't work perfectly on a 386+
+without patches, though, and also doesn't like several cards.  Fixed
+versions are available on my WWW page, or via e-mail if you don't have WWW
+access. 
+
+
+Installing the Driver
+---------------------
+
+All you will need to do in order to install the driver is:
+	make config
+		(be sure to choose ARCnet in the network devices 
+		and at least one chipset driver.)
+	make clean
+	make zImage
+	
+If you obtained this ARCnet package as an upgrade to the ARCnet driver in
+your current kernel, you will need to first copy arcnet.c over the one in
+the linux/drivers/net directory.
+
+You will know the driver is installed properly if you get some ARCnet
+messages when you reboot into the new Linux kernel.
+
+There are four chipset options:
+
+ 1. Standard ARCnet COM90xx chipset.
+
+This is the normal ARCnet card, which you've probably got. This is the only
+chipset driver which will autoprobe if not told where the card is.
+It following options on the command line:
+ com90xx=[<io>[,<irq>[,<shmem>]]][,<name>] | <name>
+
+If you load the chipset support as a module, the options are:
+ io=<io> irq=<irq> shmem=<shmem> device=<name>
+
+To disable the autoprobe, just specify "com90xx=" on the kernel command line.
+To specify the name alone, but allow autoprobe, just put "com90xx=<name>"
+
+ 2. ARCnet COM20020 chipset.
+
+This is the new chipset from SMC with support for promiscuous mode (packet 
+sniffing), extra diagnostic information, etc. Unfortunately, there is no
+sensible method of autoprobing for these cards. You must specify the I/O
+address on the kernel command line.
+The command line options are:
+ com20020=<io>[,<irq>[,<node_ID>[,backplane[,CKP[,timeout]]]]][,name]
+
+If you load the chipset support as a module, the options are:
+ io=<io> irq=<irq> node=<node_ID> backplane=<backplane> clock=<CKP>
+ timeout=<timeout> device=<name>
+
+The COM20020 chipset allows you to set the node ID in software, overriding the
+default which is still set in DIP switches on the card. If you don't have the
+COM20020 data sheets, and you don't know what the other three options refer
+to, then they won't interest you - forget them.
+
+ 3. ARCnet COM90xx chipset in IO-mapped mode.
+
+This will also work with the normal ARCnet cards, but doesn't use the shared
+memory. It performs less well than the above driver, but is provided in case
+you have a card which doesn't support shared memory, or (strangely) in case
+you have so many ARCnet cards in your machine that you run out of shmem slots.
+If you don't give the IO address on the kernel command line, then the driver
+will not find the card.
+The command line options are:
+ com90io=<io>[,<irq>][,<name>] 
+
+If you load the chipset support as a module, the options are:
+ io=<io> irq=<irq> device=<name>
+
+ 4. ARCnet RIM I cards.
+
+These are COM90xx chips which are _completely_ memory mapped. The support for
+these is not tested. If you have one, please mail the author with a success 
+report. All options must be specified, except the device name.
+Command line options:
+ arcrimi=<shmem>,<irq>,<node_ID>[,<name>]
+
+If you load the chipset support as a module, the options are:
+ shmem=<shmem> irq=<irq> node=<node_ID> device=<name>
+
+
+Loadable Module Support
+-----------------------
+
+Configure and rebuild Linux.  When asked, answer 'm' to "Generic ARCnet 
+support" and to support for your ARCnet chipset if you want to use the
+loadable module. You can also say 'y' to "Generic ARCnet support" and 'm' 
+to the chipset support if you wish.
+
+	make config
+	make clean	
+	make zImage
+	make modules
+	
+If you're using a loadable module, you need to use insmod to load it, and
+you can specify various characteristics of your card on the command
+line.  (In recent versions of the driver, autoprobing is much more reliable
+and works as a module, so most of this is now unnecessary.)
+
+For example:
+	cd /usr/src/linux/modules
+	insmod arcnet.o
+	insmod com90xx.o
+	insmod com20020.o io=0x2e0 device=eth1
+	
+
+Using the Driver
+----------------
+
+If you build your kernel with ARCnet COM90xx support included, it should 
+probe for your card automatically when you boot. If you use a different
+chipset driver complied into the kernel, you must give the necessary options
+on the kernel command line, as detailed above.
+
+Go read the NET-2-HOWTO and ETHERNET-HOWTO for Linux; they should be
+available where you picked up this driver.  Think of your ARCnet as a
+souped-up (or down, as the case may be) Ethernet card.
+
+By the way, be sure to change all references from "eth0" to "arc0" in the
+HOWTOs.  Remember that ARCnet isn't a "true" Ethernet, and the device name
+is DIFFERENT.
+
+
+Multiple Cards in One Computer
+------------------------------
+
+Linux has pretty good support for this now, but since I've been busy, the
+ARCnet driver has somewhat suffered in this respect. COM90xx support, if 
+compiled into the kernel, will (try to) autodetect all the installed cards. 
+
+If you have other cards, with support compiled into the kernel, then you can 
+just repeat the options on the kernel command line, e.g.:
+LILO: linux com20020=0x2e0 com20020=0x380 com90io=0x260
+
+If you have the chipset support built as a loadable module, then you need to 
+do something like this:
+	insmod -o arc0 com90xx
+	insmod -o arc1 com20020 io=0x2e0
+	insmod -o arc2 com90xx
+The ARCnet drivers will now sort out their names automatically.
+
+
+How do I get it to work with...?
+--------------------------------
+
+NFS: Should be fine linux->linux, just pretend you're using Ethernet cards. 
+        oak.oakland.edu:/simtel/msdos/nfs has some nice DOS clients.  There
+        is also a DOS-based NFS server called SOSS.  It doesn't multitask
+        quite the way Linux does (actually, it doesn't multitask AT ALL) but
+        you never know what you might need.
+        
+        With AmiTCP (and possibly others), you may need to set the following
+        options in your Amiga nfstab:  MD 1024 MR 1024 MW 1024
+        (Thanks to Christian Gottschling <ferksy@indigo.tng.oche.de>
+	for this.)
+	
+	Probably these refer to maximum NFS data/read/write block sizes.  I
+	don't know why the defaults on the Amiga didn't work; write to me if
+	you know more.
+
+DOS: If you're using the freeware arcether.com, you might want to install
+        the driver patch from my web page.  It helps with PC/TCP, and also
+        can get arcether to load if it timed out too quickly during
+        initialization.  In fact, if you use it on a 386+ you REALLY need
+        the patch, really.
+	
+Windows:  See DOS :)  Trumpet Winsock works fine with either the Novell or
+	Arcether client, assuming you remember to load winpkt of course.
+
+LAN Manager and Windows for Workgroups: These programs use protocols that
+        are incompatible with the Internet standard.  They try to pretend
+        the cards are Ethernet, and confuse everyone else on the network. 
+        
+        However, v2.00 and higher of the Linux ARCnet driver supports this
+        protocol via the 'arc0e' device.  See the section on "Multiprotocol
+        Support" for more information.
+
+	Using the freeware Samba server and clients for Linux, you can now
+	interface quite nicely with TCP/IP-based WfWg or Lan Manager
+	networks.
+	
+Windows 95: Tools are included with Win95 that let you use either the LANMAN
+	style network drivers (NDIS) or Novell drivers (ODI) to handle your
+	ARCnet packets.  If you use ODI, you'll need to use the 'arc0'
+	device with Linux.  If you use NDIS, then try the 'arc0e' device. 
+	See the "Multiprotocol Support" section below if you need arc0e,
+	you're completely insane, and/or you need to build some kind of
+	hybrid network that uses both encapsulation types.
+
+OS/2: I've been told it works under Warp Connect with an ARCnet driver from
+	SMC.  You need to use the 'arc0e' interface for this.  If you get
+	the SMC driver to work with the TCP/IP stuff included in the
+	"normal" Warp Bonus Pack, let me know.
+
+	ftp.microsoft.com also has a freeware "Lan Manager for OS/2" client
+	which should use the same protocol as WfWg does.  I had no luck
+	installing it under Warp, however.  Please mail me with any results.
+
+NetBSD/AmiTCP: These use an old version of the Internet standard ARCnet
+	protocol (RFC1051) which is compatible with the Linux driver v2.10
+	ALPHA and above using the arc0s device. (See "Multiprotocol ARCnet"
+	below.)  ** Newer versions of NetBSD apparently support RFC1201.
+
+
+Using Multiprotocol ARCnet
+--------------------------
+
+The ARCnet driver v2.10 ALPHA supports three protocols, each on its own
+"virtual network device":
+
+	arc0  - RFC1201 protocol, the official Internet standard which just
+		happens to be 100% compatible with Novell's TRXNET driver. 
+		Version 1.00 of the ARCnet driver supported _only_ this
+		protocol.  arc0 is the fastest of the three protocols (for
+		whatever reason), and allows larger packets to be used
+		because it supports RFC1201 "packet splitting" operations. 
+		Unless you have a specific need to use a different protocol,
+		I strongly suggest that you stick with this one.
+		
+	arc0e - "Ethernet-Encapsulation" which sends packets over ARCnet
+		that are actually a lot like Ethernet packets, including the
+		6-byte hardware addresses.  This protocol is compatible with
+		Microsoft's NDIS ARCnet driver, like the one in WfWg and
+		LANMAN.  Because the MTU of 493 is actually smaller than the
+		one "required" by TCP/IP (576), there is a chance that some
+		network operations will not function properly.  The Linux
+		TCP/IP layer can compensate in most cases, however, by
+		automatically fragmenting the TCP/IP packets to make them
+		fit.  arc0e also works slightly more slowly than arc0, for
+		reasons yet to be determined.  (Probably it's the smaller
+		MTU that does it.)
+		
+	arc0s - The "[s]imple" RFC1051 protocol is the "previous" Internet
+		standard that is completely incompatible with the new
+		standard.  Some software today, however, continues to
+		support the old standard (and only the old standard)
+		including NetBSD and AmiTCP.  RFC1051 also does not support
+		RFC1201's packet splitting, and the MTU of 507 is still
+		smaller than the Internet "requirement," so it's quite
+		possible that you may run into problems.  It's also slower
+		than RFC1201 by about 25%, for the same reason as arc0e.
+		
+		The arc0s support was contributed by Tomasz Motylewski
+		and modified somewhat by me.  Bugs are probably my fault.
+
+You can choose not to compile arc0e and arc0s into the driver if you want -
+this will save you a bit of memory and avoid confusion when eg. trying to
+use the "NFS-root" stuff in recent Linux kernels.
+
+The arc0e and arc0s devices are created automatically when you first
+ifconfig the arc0 device.  To actually use them, though, you need to also
+ifconfig the other virtual devices you need.  There are a number of ways you
+can set up your network then:
+
+
+1. Single Protocol.
+
+   This is the simplest way to configure your network: use just one of the
+   two available protocols.  As mentioned above, it's a good idea to use
+   only arc0 unless you have a good reason (like some other software, ie.
+   WfWg, that only works with arc0e).
+   
+   If you need only arc0, then the following commands should get you going:
+   	ifconfig arc0 MY.IP.ADD.RESS
+   	route add MY.IP.ADD.RESS arc0
+   	route add -net SUB.NET.ADD.RESS arc0
+   	[add other local routes here]
+   	
+   If you need arc0e (and only arc0e), it's a little different:
+   	ifconfig arc0 MY.IP.ADD.RESS
+   	ifconfig arc0e MY.IP.ADD.RESS
+   	route add MY.IP.ADD.RESS arc0e
+   	route add -net SUB.NET.ADD.RESS arc0e
+   
+   arc0s works much the same way as arc0e.
+
+
+2. More than one protocol on the same wire.
+
+   Now things start getting confusing.  To even try it, you may need to be
+   partly crazy.  Here's what *I* did. :) Note that I don't include arc0s in
+   my home network; I don't have any NetBSD or AmiTCP computers, so I only
+   use arc0s during limited testing.
+
+   I have three computers on my home network; two Linux boxes (which prefer
+   RFC1201 protocol, for reasons listed above), and one XT that can't run
+   Linux but runs the free Microsoft LANMAN Client instead.
+
+   Worse, one of the Linux computers (freedom) also has a modem and acts as
+   a router to my Internet provider.  The other Linux box (insight) also has
+   its own IP address and needs to use freedom as its default gateway.  The
+   XT (patience), however, does not have its own Internet IP address and so
+   I assigned it one on a "private subnet" (as defined by RFC1597).
+
+   To start with, take a simple network with just insight and freedom. 
+   Insight needs to:
+   	- talk to freedom via RFC1201 (arc0) protocol, because I like it
+	  more and it's faster.
+	- use freedom as its Internet gateway.
+	
+   That's pretty easy to do.  Set up insight like this:
+   	ifconfig arc0 insight
+   	route add insight arc0
+   	route add freedom arc0	/* I would use the subnet here (like I said
+					to to in "single protocol" above),
+   					but the rest of the subnet
+   					unfortunately lies across the PPP
+   					link on freedom, which confuses
+   					things. */
+   	route add default gw freedom
+   	
+   And freedom gets configured like so:
+   	ifconfig arc0 freedom
+   	route add freedom arc0
+   	route add insight arc0
+   	/* and default gateway is configured by pppd */
+   	
+   Great, now insight talks to freedom directly on arc0, and sends packets
+   to the Internet through freedom.  If you didn't know how to do the above,
+   you should probably stop reading this section now because it only gets
+   worse.
+
+   Now, how do I add patience into the network?  It will be using LANMAN
+   Client, which means I need the arc0e device.  It needs to be able to talk
+   to both insight and freedom, and also use freedom as a gateway to the
+   Internet.  (Recall that patience has a "private IP address" which won't
+   work on the Internet; that's okay, I configured Linux IP masquerading on
+   freedom for this subnet).
+   
+   So patience (necessarily; I don't have another IP number from my
+   provider) has an IP address on a different subnet than freedom and
+   insight, but needs to use freedom as an Internet gateway.  Worse, most
+   DOS networking programs, including LANMAN, have braindead networking
+   schemes that rely completely on the netmask and a 'default gateway' to
+   determine how to route packets.  This means that to get to freedom or
+   insight, patience WILL send through its default gateway, regardless of
+   the fact that both freedom and insight (courtesy of the arc0e device)
+   could understand a direct transmission.
+   
+   I compensate by giving freedom an extra IP address - aliased 'gatekeeper'
+   - that is on my private subnet, the same subnet that patience is on.  I
+   then define gatekeeper to be the default gateway for patience.
+   
+   To configure freedom (in addition to the commands above):
+   	ifconfig arc0e gatekeeper
+   	route add gatekeeper arc0e
+   	route add patience arc0e
+   
+   This way, freedom will send all packets for patience through arc0e,
+   giving its IP address as gatekeeper (on the private subnet).  When it
+   talks to insight or the Internet, it will use its "freedom" Internet IP
+   address.
+   
+   You will notice that we haven't configured the arc0e device on insight. 
+   This would work, but is not really necessary, and would require me to
+   assign insight another special IP number from my private subnet.  Since
+   both insight and patience are using freedom as their default gateway, the
+   two can already talk to each other.
+   
+   It's quite fortunate that I set things up like this the first time (cough
+   cough) because it's really handy when I boot insight into DOS.  There, it
+   runs the Novell ODI protocol stack, which only works with RFC1201 ARCnet. 
+   In this mode it would be impossible for insight to communicate directly
+   with patience, since the Novell stack is incompatible with Microsoft's
+   Ethernet-Encap.  Without changing any settings on freedom or patience, I
+   simply set freedom as the default gateway for insight (now in DOS,
+   remember) and all the forwarding happens "automagically" between the two
+   hosts that would normally not be able to communicate at all.
+   
+   For those who like diagrams, I have created two "virtual subnets" on the
+   same physical ARCnet wire.  You can picture it like this:
+   
+                                                    
+          [RFC1201 NETWORK]                   [ETHER-ENCAP NETWORK]
+      (registered Internet subnet)           (RFC1597 private subnet)
+  
+                             (IP Masquerade)
+          /---------------\         *            /---------------\
+          |               |         *            |               |
+          |               +-Freedom-*-Gatekeeper-+               |
+          |               |    |    *            |               |
+          \-------+-------/    |    *            \-------+-------/
+                  |            |                         |
+               Insight         |                      Patience
+                           (Internet)
+
+
+
+It works: what now?
+-------------------
+
+Send mail describing your setup, preferably including driver version, kernel
+version, ARCnet card model, CPU type, number of systems on your network, and
+list of software in use to me at the following address:
+	apenwarr@worldvisions.ca
+
+I do send (sometimes automated) replies to all messages I receive.  My email
+can be weird (and also usually gets forwarded all over the place along the
+way to me), so if you don't get a reply within a reasonable time, please
+resend.
+
+
+It doesn't work: what now?
+--------------------------
+
+Do the same as above, but also include the output of the ifconfig and route
+commands, as well as any pertinent log entries (ie. anything that starts
+with "arcnet:" and has shown up since the last reboot) in your mail.
+
+If you want to try fixing it yourself (I strongly recommend that you mail me
+about the problem first, since it might already have been solved) you may
+want to try some of the debug levels available.  For heavy testing on
+D_DURING or more, it would be a REALLY good idea to kill your klogd daemon
+first!  D_DURING displays 4-5 lines for each packet sent or received.  D_TX,
+D_RX, and D_SKB actually DISPLAY each packet as it is sent or received,
+which is obviously quite big.
+
+Starting with v2.40 ALPHA, the autoprobe routines have changed
+significantly.  In particular, they won't tell you why the card was not
+found unless you turn on the D_INIT_REASONS debugging flag.
+
+Once the driver is running, you can run the arcdump shell script (available
+from me or in the full ARCnet package, if you have it) as root to list the
+contents of the arcnet buffers at any time.  To make any sense at all out of
+this, you should grab the pertinent RFCs. (some are listed near the top of
+arcnet.c).  arcdump assumes your card is at 0xD0000.  If it isn't, edit the
+script.
+
+Buffers 0 and 1 are used for receiving, and Buffers 2 and 3 are for sending. 
+Ping-pong buffers are implemented both ways.
+
+If your debug level includes D_DURING and you did NOT define SLOW_XMIT_COPY,
+the buffers are cleared to a constant value of 0x42 every time the card is
+reset (which should only happen when you do an ifconfig up, or when Linux
+decides that the driver is broken).  During a transmit, unused parts of the
+buffer will be cleared to 0x42 as well.  This is to make it easier to figure
+out which bytes are being used by a packet.
+
+You can change the debug level without recompiling the kernel by typing:
+	ifconfig arc0 down metric 1xxx
+	/etc/rc.d/rc.inet1
+where "xxx" is the debug level you want.  For example, "metric 1015" would put
+you at debug level 15.  Debug level 7 is currently the default.
+
+Note that the debug level is (starting with v1.90 ALPHA) a binary
+combination of different debug flags; so debug level 7 is really 1+2+4 or
+D_NORMAL+D_EXTRA+D_INIT.  To include D_DURING, you would add 16 to this,
+resulting in debug level 23.
+
+If you don't understand that, you probably don't want to know anyway. 
+E-mail me about your problem.
+
+
+I want to send money: what now?
+-------------------------------
+
+Go take a nap or something.  You'll feel better in the morning.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/atm.txt b/Documentation/networking/atm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..82921cee77f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/atm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+In order to use anything but the most primitive functions of ATM,
+several user-mode programs are required to assist the kernel. These
+programs and related material can be found via the ATM on Linux Web
+page at http://linux-atm.sourceforge.net/
+
+If you encounter problems with ATM, please report them on the ATM
+on Linux mailing list. Subscription information, archives, etc.,
+can be found on http://linux-atm.sourceforge.net/
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ax25.txt b/Documentation/networking/ax25.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8257dbf9be5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ax25.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+To use the amateur radio protocols within Linux you will need to get a
+suitable copy of the AX.25 Utilities. More detailed information about
+AX.25, NET/ROM and ROSE, associated programs and and utilities can be
+found on http://www.linux-ax25.org.
+
+There is an active mailing list for discussing Linux amateur radio matters
+called linux-hams@vger.kernel.org. To subscribe to it, send a message to
+majordomo@vger.kernel.org with the words "subscribe linux-hams" in the body
+of the message, the subject field is ignored.  You don't need to be
+subscribed to post but of course that means you might miss an answer.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..221ad0cdf11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,242 @@
+[state: 21-08-2011]
+
+BATMAN-ADV
+----------
+
+Batman  advanced  is  a new approach to wireless networking which
+does no longer operate on the IP basis. Unlike the batman daemon,
+which  exchanges  information  using UDP packets and sets routing
+tables, batman-advanced operates on ISO/OSI Layer 2 only and uses
+and  routes  (or  better: bridges) Ethernet Frames. It emulates a
+virtual network switch of all nodes participating.  Therefore all
+nodes  appear  to be link local, thus all higher operating proto-
+cols won't be affected by any changes within the network. You can
+run almost any protocol above batman advanced, prominent examples
+are: IPv4, IPv6, DHCP, IPX.
+
+Batman advanced was implemented as a Linux kernel driver  to  re-
+duce the overhead to a minimum. It does not depend on any (other)
+network driver, and can be used on wifi as well as ethernet  lan,
+vpn,  etc ... (anything with ethernet-style layer 2).
+
+
+CONFIGURATION
+-------------
+
+Load the batman-adv module into your kernel:
+
+# insmod batman-adv.ko
+
+The  module  is now waiting for activation. You must add some in-
+terfaces on which batman can operate. After  loading  the  module
+batman  advanced  will scan your systems interfaces to search for
+compatible interfaces. Once found, it will create  subfolders  in
+the /sys directories of each supported interface, e.g.
+
+# ls /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/
+# iface_status  mesh_iface
+
+If an interface does not have the "batman_adv" subfolder it prob-
+ably is not supported. Not supported  interfaces  are:  loopback,
+non-ethernet and batman's own interfaces.
+
+Note:  After the module was loaded it will continuously watch for
+new interfaces to verify the compatibility. There is no  need  to
+reload the module if you plug your USB wifi adapter into your ma-
+chine after batman advanced was initially loaded.
+
+To activate a  given  interface  simply  write  "bat0"  into  its
+"mesh_iface" file inside the batman_adv subfolder:
+
+# echo bat0 > /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/mesh_iface
+
+Repeat  this step for all interfaces you wish to add.  Now batman
+starts using/broadcasting on this/these interface(s).
+
+By reading the "iface_status" file you can check its status:
+
+# cat /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/iface_status
+# active
+
+To deactivate an interface you have  to  write  "none"  into  its
+"mesh_iface" file:
+
+# echo none > /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/mesh_iface
+
+
+All  mesh  wide  settings  can be found in batman's own interface
+folder:
+
+#  ls  /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/
+# aggregated_ogms   fragmentation gw_sel_class   vis_mode
+# ap_isolation      gw_bandwidth  hop_penalty
+# bonding           gw_mode       orig_interval
+
+
+There is a special folder for debugging information:
+
+#  ls /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/
+#  gateways     socket        transtable_global  vis_data
+#  originators  softif_neigh  transtable_local
+
+
+Some of the files contain all sort of status information  regard-
+ing  the  mesh  network.  For  example, you can view the table of
+originators (mesh participants) with:
+
+# cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/originators
+
+Other files allow to change batman's behaviour to better fit your
+requirements.  For instance, you can check the current originator
+interval (value in milliseconds which determines how often batman
+sends its broadcast packets):
+
+# cat /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/orig_interval
+# 1000
+
+and also change its value:
+
+# echo 3000 > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/orig_interval
+
+In very mobile scenarios, you might want to adjust the originator
+interval to a lower value. This will make the mesh  more  respon-
+sive to topology changes, but will also increase the overhead.
+
+
+USAGE
+-----
+
+To  make use of your newly created mesh, batman advanced provides
+a new interface "bat0" which you should use from this  point  on.
+All  interfaces  added  to  batman  advanced are not relevant any
+longer because batman handles them for you. Basically, one "hands
+over" the data by using the batman interface and batman will make
+sure it reaches its destination.
+
+The "bat0" interface can be used like any  other  regular  inter-
+face.  It needs an IP address which can be either statically con-
+figured or dynamically (by using DHCP or similar services):
+
+# NodeA: ifconfig bat0 192.168.0.1
+# NodeB: ifconfig bat0 192.168.0.2
+# NodeB: ping 192.168.0.1
+
+Note:  In  order to avoid problems remove all IP addresses previ-
+ously assigned to interfaces now used by batman advanced, e.g.
+
+# ifconfig eth0 0.0.0.0
+
+
+VISUALIZATION
+-------------
+
+If you want topology visualization, at least one mesh  node  must
+be configured as VIS-server:
+
+# echo "server" > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/vis_mode
+
+Each  node  is  either configured as "server" or as "client" (de-
+fault: "client").  Clients send their topology data to the server
+next to them, and server synchronize with other servers. If there
+is no server configured (default) within the  mesh,  no  topology
+information   will  be  transmitted.  With  these  "synchronizing
+servers", there can be 1 or more vis servers sharing the same (or
+at least very similar) data.
+
+When  configured  as  server,  you can get a topology snapshot of
+your mesh:
+
+# cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/vis_data
+
+This raw output is intended to be easily parsable and convertable
+with  other tools. Have a look at the batctl README if you want a
+vis output in dot or json format for instance and how those  out-
+puts could then be visualised in an image.
+
+The raw format consists of comma separated values per entry where
+each entry is giving information about a  certain  source  inter-
+face.  Each  entry can/has to have the following values:
+-> "mac" - mac address of an originator's source interface
+           (each line begins with it)
+-> "TQ mac  value"  -  src mac's link quality towards mac address
+                       of a neighbor originator's interface which
+                       is being used for routing
+-> "TT mac" - TT announced by source mac
+-> "PRIMARY" - this  is a primary interface
+-> "SEC mac" - secondary mac address of source
+               (requires preceding PRIMARY)
+
+The TQ value has a range from 4 to 255 with 255 being  the  best.
+The TT entries are showing which hosts are connected to the mesh
+via bat0 or being bridged into the mesh network.  The PRIMARY/SEC
+values are only applied on primary interfaces
+
+
+LOGGING/DEBUGGING
+-----------------
+
+All error messages, warnings and information messages are sent to
+the kernel log. Depending on your operating  system  distribution
+this  can  be read in one of a number of ways. Try using the com-
+mands: dmesg, logread, or looking in the files  /var/log/kern.log
+or  /var/log/syslog.  All  batman-adv  messages are prefixed with
+"batman-adv:" So to see just these messages try
+
+# dmesg | grep batman-adv
+
+When investigating problems with your mesh network  it  is  some-
+times  necessary  to see more detail debug messages. This must be
+enabled when compiling the batman-adv module. When building  bat-
+man-adv  as  part of kernel, use "make menuconfig" and enable the
+option "B.A.T.M.A.N. debugging".
+
+Those additional  debug messages can be accessed  using a special
+file in debugfs
+
+# cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/log
+
+The additional debug output is by default disabled. It can be en-
+abled  during run time. Following log_levels are defined:
+
+0 - All  debug  output  disabled
+1 - Enable messages related to routing / flooding / broadcasting
+2 - Enable messages related to route added / changed / deleted
+4 - Enable messages related to translation table operations
+7 - Enable all messages
+
+The debug output can be changed at runtime  using  the  file
+/sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/log_level. e.g.
+
+# echo 2 > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/log_level
+
+will enable debug messages for when routes change.
+
+
+BATCTL
+------
+
+As batman advanced operates on layer 2 all hosts participating in
+the  virtual switch are completely transparent for all  protocols
+above layer 2. Therefore the common diagnosis tools do  not  work
+as  expected.  To  overcome these problems batctl was created. At
+the  moment the  batctl contains ping,  traceroute,  tcpdump  and
+interfaces to the kernel module settings.
+
+For more information, please see the manpage (man batctl).
+
+batctl is available on http://www.open-mesh.org/
+
+
+CONTACT
+-------
+
+Please send us comments, experiences, questions, anything :)
+
+IRC:            #batman   on   irc.freenode.org
+Mailing-list:   b.a.t.m.a.n@open-mesh.org (optional  subscription
+          at https://lists.open-mesh.org/mm/listinfo/b.a.t.m.a.n)
+
+You can also contact the Authors:
+
+Marek  Lindner  <lindner_marek@yahoo.de>
+Simon  Wunderlich  <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/baycom.txt b/Documentation/networking/baycom.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4e68849d563
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/baycom.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+		    LINUX DRIVERS FOR BAYCOM MODEMS
+
+       Thomas M. Sailer, HB9JNX/AE4WA, <sailer@ife.ee.ethz.ch>
+
+!!NEW!! (04/98) The drivers for the baycom modems have been split into
+separate drivers as they did not share any code, and the driver
+and device names have changed.
+
+This document describes the Linux Kernel Drivers for simple Baycom style
+amateur radio modems. 
+
+The following drivers are available:
+
+baycom_ser_fdx:
+  This driver supports the SER12 modems either full or half duplex.
+  Its baud rate may be changed via the `baud' module parameter,
+  therefore it supports just about every bit bang modem on a
+  serial port. Its devices are called bcsf0 through bcsf3.
+  This is the recommended driver for SER12 type modems,
+  however if you have a broken UART clone that does not have working
+  delta status bits, you may try baycom_ser_hdx. 
+
+baycom_ser_hdx: 
+  This is an alternative driver for SER12 type modems.
+  It only supports half duplex, and only 1200 baud. Its devices
+  are called bcsh0 through bcsh3. Use this driver only if baycom_ser_fdx
+  does not work with your UART.
+
+baycom_par:
+  This driver supports the par96 and picpar modems.
+  Its devices are called bcp0 through bcp3.
+
+baycom_epp:
+  This driver supports the EPP modem.
+  Its devices are called bce0 through bce3.
+  This driver is work-in-progress.
+
+The following modems are supported:
+
+ser12:  This is a very simple 1200 baud AFSK modem. The modem consists only
+        of a modulator/demodulator chip, usually a TI TCM3105. The computer
+        is responsible for regenerating the receiver bit clock, as well as
+        for handling the HDLC protocol. The modem connects to a serial port,
+        hence the name. Since the serial port is not used as an async serial
+        port, the kernel driver for serial ports cannot be used, and this
+        driver only supports standard serial hardware (8250, 16450, 16550)
+
+par96:  This is a modem for 9600 baud FSK compatible to the G3RUH standard.
+        The modem does all the filtering and regenerates the receiver clock.
+        Data is transferred from and to the PC via a shift register.
+        The shift register is filled with 16 bits and an interrupt is signalled.
+        The PC then empties the shift register in a burst. This modem connects
+        to the parallel port, hence the name. The modem leaves the 
+        implementation of the HDLC protocol and the scrambler polynomial to
+        the PC.
+
+picpar: This is a redesign of the par96 modem by Henning Rech, DF9IC. The modem
+        is protocol compatible to par96, but uses only three low power ICs
+        and can therefore be fed from the parallel port and does not require
+        an additional power supply. Furthermore, it incorporates a carrier
+        detect circuitry.
+
+EPP:    This is a high-speed modem adaptor that connects to an enhanced parallel port.
+        Its target audience is users working over a high speed hub (76.8kbit/s).
+
+eppfpga: This is a redesign of the EPP adaptor.
+
+
+
+All of the above modems only support half duplex communications. However,
+the driver supports the KISS (see below) fullduplex command. It then simply
+starts to send as soon as there's a packet to transmit and does not care
+about DCD, i.e. it starts to send even if there's someone else on the channel.
+This command is required by some implementations of the DAMA channel 
+access protocol.
+
+
+The Interface of the drivers
+
+Unlike previous drivers, these drivers are no longer character devices,
+but they are now true kernel network interfaces. Installation is therefore
+simple. Once installed, four interfaces named bc{sf,sh,p,e}[0-3] are available.
+sethdlc from the ax25 utilities may be used to set driver states etc.
+Users of userland AX.25 stacks may use the net2kiss utility (also available
+in the ax25 utilities package) to convert packets of a network interface
+to a KISS stream on a pseudo tty. There's also a patch available from
+me for WAMPES which allows attaching a kernel network interface directly.
+
+
+Configuring the driver
+
+Every time a driver is inserted into the kernel, it has to know which
+modems it should access at which ports. This can be done with the setbaycom
+utility. If you are only using one modem, you can also configure the
+driver from the insmod command line (or by means of an option line in
+/etc/modprobe.conf).
+
+Examples:
+  modprobe baycom_ser_fdx mode="ser12*" iobase=0x3f8 irq=4
+  sethdlc -i bcsf0 -p mode "ser12*" io 0x3f8 irq 4
+
+Both lines configure the first port to drive a ser12 modem at the first
+serial port (COM1 under DOS). The * in the mode parameter instructs the driver to use
+the software DCD algorithm (see below).
+
+  insmod baycom_par mode="picpar" iobase=0x378
+  sethdlc -i bcp0 -p mode "picpar" io 0x378
+
+Both lines configure the first port to drive a picpar modem at the
+first parallel port (LPT1 under DOS). (Note: picpar implies
+hardware DCD, par96 implies software DCD).
+
+The channel access parameters can be set with sethdlc -a or kissparms.
+Note that both utilities interpret the values slightly differently.
+
+
+Hardware DCD versus Software DCD
+
+To avoid collisions on the air, the driver must know when the channel is
+busy. This is the task of the DCD circuitry/software. The driver may either
+utilise a software DCD algorithm (options=1) or use a DCD signal from
+the hardware (options=0).
+
+ser12:  if software DCD is utilised, the radio's squelch should always be
+        open. It is highly recommended to use the software DCD algorithm,
+        as it is much faster than most hardware squelch circuitry. The
+        disadvantage is a slightly higher load on the system.
+
+par96:  the software DCD algorithm for this type of modem is rather poor.
+        The modem simply does not provide enough information to implement
+        a reasonable DCD algorithm in software. Therefore, if your radio
+        feeds the DCD input of the PAR96 modem, the use of the hardware
+        DCD circuitry is recommended.
+
+picpar: the picpar modem features a builtin DCD hardware, which is highly
+        recommended.
+
+
+
+Compatibility with the rest of the Linux kernel
+
+The serial driver and the baycom serial drivers compete
+for the same hardware resources. Of course only one driver can access a given
+interface at a time. The serial driver grabs all interfaces it can find at
+startup time. Therefore the baycom drivers subsequently won't be able to
+access a serial port. You might therefore find it necessary to release
+a port owned by the serial driver with 'setserial /dev/ttyS# uart none', where
+# is the number of the interface. The baycom drivers do not reserve any
+ports at startup, unless one is specified on the 'insmod' command line. Another
+method to solve the problem is to compile all drivers as modules and
+leave it to kmod to load the correct driver depending on the application.
+
+The parallel port drivers (baycom_par, baycom_epp) now use the parport subsystem
+to arbitrate the ports between different client drivers.
+
+vy 73s de
+Tom Sailer, sailer@ife.ee.ethz.ch
+hb9jnx @ hb9w.ampr.org
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..080ad26690a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2648 @@
+
+		Linux Ethernet Bonding Driver HOWTO
+
+		Latest update: 27 April 2011
+
+Initial release : Thomas Davis <tadavis at lbl.gov>
+Corrections, HA extensions : 2000/10/03-15 :
+  - Willy Tarreau <willy at meta-x.org>
+  - Constantine Gavrilov <const-g at xpert.com>
+  - Chad N. Tindel <ctindel at ieee dot org>
+  - Janice Girouard <girouard at us dot ibm dot com>
+  - Jay Vosburgh <fubar at us dot ibm dot com>
+
+Reorganized and updated Feb 2005 by Jay Vosburgh
+Added Sysfs information: 2006/04/24
+  - Mitch Williams <mitch.a.williams at intel.com>
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+	The Linux bonding driver provides a method for aggregating
+multiple network interfaces into a single logical "bonded" interface.
+The behavior of the bonded interfaces depends upon the mode; generally
+speaking, modes provide either hot standby or load balancing services.
+Additionally, link integrity monitoring may be performed.
+	
+	The bonding driver originally came from Donald Becker's
+beowulf patches for kernel 2.0. It has changed quite a bit since, and
+the original tools from extreme-linux and beowulf sites will not work
+with this version of the driver.
+
+	For new versions of the driver, updated userspace tools, and
+who to ask for help, please follow the links at the end of this file.
+
+Table of Contents
+=================
+
+1. Bonding Driver Installation
+
+2. Bonding Driver Options
+
+3. Configuring Bonding Devices
+3.1	Configuration with Sysconfig Support
+3.1.1		Using DHCP with Sysconfig
+3.1.2		Configuring Multiple Bonds with Sysconfig
+3.2	Configuration with Initscripts Support
+3.2.1		Using DHCP with Initscripts
+3.2.2		Configuring Multiple Bonds with Initscripts
+3.3	Configuring Bonding Manually with Ifenslave
+3.3.1		Configuring Multiple Bonds Manually
+3.4	Configuring Bonding Manually via Sysfs
+3.5	Configuration with Interfaces Support
+3.6	Overriding Configuration for Special Cases
+
+4. Querying Bonding Configuration
+4.1	Bonding Configuration
+4.2	Network Configuration
+
+5. Switch Configuration
+
+6. 802.1q VLAN Support
+
+7. Link Monitoring
+7.1	ARP Monitor Operation
+7.2	Configuring Multiple ARP Targets
+7.3	MII Monitor Operation
+
+8. Potential Trouble Sources
+8.1	Adventures in Routing
+8.2	Ethernet Device Renaming
+8.3	Painfully Slow Or No Failed Link Detection By Miimon
+
+9. SNMP agents
+
+10. Promiscuous mode
+
+11. Configuring Bonding for High Availability
+11.1	High Availability in a Single Switch Topology
+11.2	High Availability in a Multiple Switch Topology
+11.2.1		HA Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
+11.2.2		HA Link Monitoring for Multiple Switch Topology
+
+12. Configuring Bonding for Maximum Throughput
+12.1	Maximum Throughput in a Single Switch Topology
+12.1.1		MT Bonding Mode Selection for Single Switch Topology
+12.1.2		MT Link Monitoring for Single Switch Topology
+12.2	Maximum Throughput in a Multiple Switch Topology
+12.2.1		MT Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
+12.2.2		MT Link Monitoring for Multiple Switch Topology
+
+13. Switch Behavior Issues
+13.1	Link Establishment and Failover Delays
+13.2	Duplicated Incoming Packets
+
+14. Hardware Specific Considerations
+14.1	IBM BladeCenter
+
+15. Frequently Asked Questions
+
+16. Resources and Links
+
+
+1. Bonding Driver Installation
+==============================
+
+	Most popular distro kernels ship with the bonding driver
+already available as a module and the ifenslave user level control
+program installed and ready for use. If your distro does not, or you
+have need to compile bonding from source (e.g., configuring and
+installing a mainline kernel from kernel.org), you'll need to perform
+the following steps:
+
+1.1 Configure and build the kernel with bonding
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+	The current version of the bonding driver is available in the
+drivers/net/bonding subdirectory of the most recent kernel source
+(which is available on http://kernel.org).  Most users "rolling their
+own" will want to use the most recent kernel from kernel.org.
+
+	Configure kernel with "make menuconfig" (or "make xconfig" or
+"make config"), then select "Bonding driver support" in the "Network
+device support" section.  It is recommended that you configure the
+driver as module since it is currently the only way to pass parameters
+to the driver or configure more than one bonding device.
+
+	Build and install the new kernel and modules, then continue
+below to install ifenslave.
+
+1.2 Install ifenslave Control Utility
+-------------------------------------
+
+	The ifenslave user level control program is included in the
+kernel source tree, in the file Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c.
+It is generally recommended that you use the ifenslave that
+corresponds to the kernel that you are using (either from the same
+source tree or supplied with the distro), however, ifenslave
+executables from older kernels should function (but features newer
+than the ifenslave release are not supported).  Running an ifenslave
+that is newer than the kernel is not supported, and may or may not
+work.
+
+	To install ifenslave, do the following:
+
+# gcc -Wall -O -I/usr/src/linux/include ifenslave.c -o ifenslave
+# cp ifenslave /sbin/ifenslave
+
+	If your kernel source is not in "/usr/src/linux," then replace
+"/usr/src/linux/include" in the above with the location of your kernel
+source include directory.
+
+	You may wish to back up any existing /sbin/ifenslave, or, for
+testing or informal use, tag the ifenslave to the kernel version
+(e.g., name the ifenslave executable /sbin/ifenslave-2.6.10).
+
+IMPORTANT NOTE:
+
+	If you omit the "-I" or specify an incorrect directory, you
+may end up with an ifenslave that is incompatible with the kernel
+you're trying to build it for.  Some distros (e.g., Red Hat from 7.1
+onwards) do not have /usr/include/linux symbolically linked to the
+default kernel source include directory.
+
+SECOND IMPORTANT NOTE:
+	If you plan to configure bonding using sysfs or using the
+/etc/network/interfaces file, you do not need to use ifenslave.
+
+2. Bonding Driver Options
+=========================
+
+	Options for the bonding driver are supplied as parameters to the
+bonding module at load time, or are specified via sysfs.
+
+	Module options may be given as command line arguments to the
+insmod or modprobe command, but are usually specified in either the
+/etc/modules.conf or /etc/modprobe.conf configuration file, or in a
+distro-specific configuration file (some of which are detailed in the next
+section).
+
+	Details on bonding support for sysfs is provided in the
+"Configuring Bonding Manually via Sysfs" section, below.
+
+	The available bonding driver parameters are listed below. If a
+parameter is not specified the default value is used.  When initially
+configuring a bond, it is recommended "tail -f /var/log/messages" be
+run in a separate window to watch for bonding driver error messages.
+
+	It is critical that either the miimon or arp_interval and
+arp_ip_target parameters be specified, otherwise serious network
+degradation will occur during link failures.  Very few devices do not
+support at least miimon, so there is really no reason not to use it.
+
+	Options with textual values will accept either the text name
+or, for backwards compatibility, the option value.  E.g.,
+"mode=802.3ad" and "mode=4" set the same mode.
+
+	The parameters are as follows:
+
+active_slave
+
+	Specifies the new active slave for modes that support it
+	(active-backup, balance-alb and balance-tlb).  Possible values
+	are the name of any currently enslaved interface, or an empty
+	string.  If a name is given, the slave and its link must be up in order
+	to be selected as the new active slave.  If an empty string is
+	specified, the current active slave is cleared, and a new active
+	slave is selected automatically.
+
+	Note that this is only available through the sysfs interface. No module
+	parameter by this name exists.
+
+	The normal value of this option is the name of the currently
+	active slave, or the empty string if there is no active slave or
+	the current mode does not use an active slave.
+
+ad_select
+
+	Specifies the 802.3ad aggregation selection logic to use.  The
+	possible values and their effects are:
+
+	stable or 0
+
+		The active aggregator is chosen by largest aggregate
+		bandwidth.
+
+		Reselection of the active aggregator occurs only when all
+		slaves of the active aggregator are down or the active
+		aggregator has no slaves.
+
+		This is the default value.
+
+	bandwidth or 1
+
+		The active aggregator is chosen by largest aggregate
+		bandwidth.  Reselection occurs if:
+
+		- A slave is added to or removed from the bond
+
+		- Any slave's link state changes
+
+		- Any slave's 802.3ad association state changes
+
+		- The bond's administrative state changes to up
+
+	count or 2
+
+		The active aggregator is chosen by the largest number of
+		ports (slaves).  Reselection occurs as described under the
+		"bandwidth" setting, above.
+
+	The bandwidth and count selection policies permit failover of
+	802.3ad aggregations when partial failure of the active aggregator
+	occurs.  This keeps the aggregator with the highest availability
+	(either in bandwidth or in number of ports) active at all times.
+
+	This option was added in bonding version 3.4.0.
+
+all_slaves_active
+
+	Specifies that duplicate frames (received on inactive ports) should be
+	dropped (0) or delivered (1).
+
+	Normally, bonding will drop duplicate frames (received on inactive
+	ports), which is desirable for most users. But there are some times
+	it is nice to allow duplicate frames to be delivered.
+
+	The default value is 0 (drop duplicate frames received on inactive
+	ports).
+
+arp_interval
+
+	Specifies the ARP link monitoring frequency in milliseconds.
+
+	The ARP monitor works by periodically checking the slave
+	devices to determine whether they have sent or received
+	traffic recently (the precise criteria depends upon the
+	bonding mode, and the state of the slave).  Regular traffic is
+	generated via ARP probes issued for the addresses specified by
+	the arp_ip_target option.
+
+	This behavior can be modified by the arp_validate option,
+	below.
+
+	If ARP monitoring is used in an etherchannel compatible mode
+	(modes 0 and 2), the switch should be configured in a mode
+	that evenly distributes packets across all links. If the
+	switch is configured to distribute the packets in an XOR
+	fashion, all replies from the ARP targets will be received on
+	the same link which could cause the other team members to
+	fail.  ARP monitoring should not be used in conjunction with
+	miimon.  A value of 0 disables ARP monitoring.  The default
+	value is 0.
+
+arp_ip_target
+
+	Specifies the IP addresses to use as ARP monitoring peers when
+	arp_interval is > 0.  These are the targets of the ARP request
+	sent to determine the health of the link to the targets.
+	Specify these values in ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd format.  Multiple IP
+	addresses must be separated by a comma.  At least one IP
+	address must be given for ARP monitoring to function.  The
+	maximum number of targets that can be specified is 16.  The
+	default value is no IP addresses.
+
+arp_validate
+
+	Specifies whether or not ARP probes and replies should be
+	validated in the active-backup mode.  This causes the ARP
+	monitor to examine the incoming ARP requests and replies, and
+	only consider a slave to be up if it is receiving the
+	appropriate ARP traffic.
+
+	Possible values are:
+
+	none or 0
+
+		No validation is performed.  This is the default.
+
+	active or 1
+
+		Validation is performed only for the active slave.
+
+	backup or 2
+
+		Validation is performed only for backup slaves.
+
+	all or 3
+
+		Validation is performed for all slaves.
+
+	For the active slave, the validation checks ARP replies to
+	confirm that they were generated by an arp_ip_target.  Since
+	backup slaves do not typically receive these replies, the
+	validation performed for backup slaves is on the ARP request
+	sent out via the active slave.  It is possible that some
+	switch or network configurations may result in situations
+	wherein the backup slaves do not receive the ARP requests; in
+	such a situation, validation of backup slaves must be
+	disabled.
+
+	This option is useful in network configurations in which
+	multiple bonding hosts are concurrently issuing ARPs to one or
+	more targets beyond a common switch.  Should the link between
+	the switch and target fail (but not the switch itself), the
+	probe traffic generated by the multiple bonding instances will
+	fool the standard ARP monitor into considering the links as
+	still up.  Use of the arp_validate option can resolve this, as
+	the ARP monitor will only consider ARP requests and replies
+	associated with its own instance of bonding.
+
+	This option was added in bonding version 3.1.0.
+
+downdelay
+
+	Specifies the time, in milliseconds, to wait before disabling
+	a slave after a link failure has been detected.  This option
+	is only valid for the miimon link monitor.  The downdelay
+	value should be a multiple of the miimon value; if not, it
+	will be rounded down to the nearest multiple.  The default
+	value is 0.
+
+fail_over_mac
+
+	Specifies whether active-backup mode should set all slaves to
+	the same MAC address at enslavement (the traditional
+	behavior), or, when enabled, perform special handling of the
+	bond's MAC address in accordance with the selected policy.
+
+	Possible values are:
+
+	none or 0
+
+		This setting disables fail_over_mac, and causes
+		bonding to set all slaves of an active-backup bond to
+		the same MAC address at enslavement time.  This is the
+		default.
+
+	active or 1
+
+		The "active" fail_over_mac policy indicates that the
+		MAC address of the bond should always be the MAC
+		address of the currently active slave.  The MAC
+		address of the slaves is not changed; instead, the MAC
+		address of the bond changes during a failover.
+
+		This policy is useful for devices that cannot ever
+		alter their MAC address, or for devices that refuse
+		incoming broadcasts with their own source MAC (which
+		interferes with the ARP monitor).
+
+		The down side of this policy is that every device on
+		the network must be updated via gratuitous ARP,
+		vs. just updating a switch or set of switches (which
+		often takes place for any traffic, not just ARP
+		traffic, if the switch snoops incoming traffic to
+		update its tables) for the traditional method.  If the
+		gratuitous ARP is lost, communication may be
+		disrupted.
+
+		When this policy is used in conjunction with the mii
+		monitor, devices which assert link up prior to being
+		able to actually transmit and receive are particularly
+		susceptible to loss of the gratuitous ARP, and an
+		appropriate updelay setting may be required.
+
+	follow or 2
+
+		The "follow" fail_over_mac policy causes the MAC
+		address of the bond to be selected normally (normally
+		the MAC address of the first slave added to the bond).
+		However, the second and subsequent slaves are not set
+		to this MAC address while they are in a backup role; a
+		slave is programmed with the bond's MAC address at
+		failover time (and the formerly active slave receives
+		the newly active slave's MAC address).
+
+		This policy is useful for multiport devices that
+		either become confused or incur a performance penalty
+		when multiple ports are programmed with the same MAC
+		address.
+
+
+	The default policy is none, unless the first slave cannot
+	change its MAC address, in which case the active policy is
+	selected by default.
+
+	This option may be modified via sysfs only when no slaves are
+	present in the bond.
+
+	This option was added in bonding version 3.2.0.  The "follow"
+	policy was added in bonding version 3.3.0.
+
+lacp_rate
+
+	Option specifying the rate in which we'll ask our link partner
+	to transmit LACPDU packets in 802.3ad mode.  Possible values
+	are:
+
+	slow or 0
+		Request partner to transmit LACPDUs every 30 seconds
+
+	fast or 1
+		Request partner to transmit LACPDUs every 1 second
+
+	The default is slow.
+
+max_bonds
+
+	Specifies the number of bonding devices to create for this
+	instance of the bonding driver.  E.g., if max_bonds is 3, and
+	the bonding driver is not already loaded, then bond0, bond1
+	and bond2 will be created.  The default value is 1.  Specifying
+	a value of 0 will load bonding, but will not create any devices.
+
+miimon
+
+	Specifies the MII link monitoring frequency in milliseconds.
+	This determines how often the link state of each slave is
+	inspected for link failures.  A value of zero disables MII
+	link monitoring.  A value of 100 is a good starting point.
+	The use_carrier option, below, affects how the link state is
+	determined.  See the High Availability section for additional
+	information.  The default value is 0.
+
+min_links
+
+	Specifies the minimum number of links that must be active before
+	asserting carrier. It is similar to the Cisco EtherChannel min-links
+	feature. This allows setting the minimum number of member ports that
+	must be up (link-up state) before marking the bond device as up
+	(carrier on). This is useful for situations where higher level services
+	such as clustering want to ensure a minimum number of low bandwidth
+	links are active before switchover. This option only affect 802.3ad
+	mode.
+
+	The default value is 0. This will cause carrier to be asserted (for
+	802.3ad mode) whenever there is an active aggregator, regardless of the
+	number of available links in that aggregator. Note that, because an
+	aggregator cannot be active without at least one available link,
+	setting this option to 0 or to 1 has the exact same effect.
+
+mode
+
+	Specifies one of the bonding policies. The default is
+	balance-rr (round robin).  Possible values are:
+
+	balance-rr or 0
+
+		Round-robin policy: Transmit packets in sequential
+		order from the first available slave through the
+		last.  This mode provides load balancing and fault
+		tolerance.
+
+	active-backup or 1
+
+		Active-backup policy: Only one slave in the bond is
+		active.  A different slave becomes active if, and only
+		if, the active slave fails.  The bond's MAC address is
+		externally visible on only one port (network adapter)
+		to avoid confusing the switch.
+
+		In bonding version 2.6.2 or later, when a failover
+		occurs in active-backup mode, bonding will issue one
+		or more gratuitous ARPs on the newly active slave.
+		One gratuitous ARP is issued for the bonding master
+		interface and each VLAN interfaces configured above
+		it, provided that the interface has at least one IP
+		address configured.  Gratuitous ARPs issued for VLAN
+		interfaces are tagged with the appropriate VLAN id.
+
+		This mode provides fault tolerance.  The primary
+		option, documented below, affects the behavior of this
+		mode.
+
+	balance-xor or 2
+
+		XOR policy: Transmit based on the selected transmit
+		hash policy.  The default policy is a simple [(source
+		MAC address XOR'd with destination MAC address) modulo
+		slave count].  Alternate transmit policies may be
+		selected via the xmit_hash_policy option, described
+		below.
+
+		This mode provides load balancing and fault tolerance.
+
+	broadcast or 3
+
+		Broadcast policy: transmits everything on all slave
+		interfaces.  This mode provides fault tolerance.
+
+	802.3ad or 4
+
+		IEEE 802.3ad Dynamic link aggregation.  Creates
+		aggregation groups that share the same speed and
+		duplex settings.  Utilizes all slaves in the active
+		aggregator according to the 802.3ad specification.
+
+		Slave selection for outgoing traffic is done according
+		to the transmit hash policy, which may be changed from
+		the default simple XOR policy via the xmit_hash_policy
+		option, documented below.  Note that not all transmit
+		policies may be 802.3ad compliant, particularly in
+		regards to the packet mis-ordering requirements of
+		section 43.2.4 of the 802.3ad standard.  Differing
+		peer implementations will have varying tolerances for
+		noncompliance.
+
+		Prerequisites:
+
+		1. Ethtool support in the base drivers for retrieving
+		the speed and duplex of each slave.
+
+		2. A switch that supports IEEE 802.3ad Dynamic link
+		aggregation.
+
+		Most switches will require some type of configuration
+		to enable 802.3ad mode.
+
+	balance-tlb or 5
+
+		Adaptive transmit load balancing: channel bonding that
+		does not require any special switch support.  The
+		outgoing traffic is distributed according to the
+		current load (computed relative to the speed) on each
+		slave.  Incoming traffic is received by the current
+		slave.  If the receiving slave fails, another slave
+		takes over the MAC address of the failed receiving
+		slave.
+
+		Prerequisite:
+
+		Ethtool support in the base drivers for retrieving the
+		speed of each slave.
+
+	balance-alb or 6
+
+		Adaptive load balancing: includes balance-tlb plus
+		receive load balancing (rlb) for IPV4 traffic, and
+		does not require any special switch support.  The
+		receive load balancing is achieved by ARP negotiation.
+		The bonding driver intercepts the ARP Replies sent by
+		the local system on their way out and overwrites the
+		source hardware address with the unique hardware
+		address of one of the slaves in the bond such that
+		different peers use different hardware addresses for
+		the server.
+
+		Receive traffic from connections created by the server
+		is also balanced.  When the local system sends an ARP
+		Request the bonding driver copies and saves the peer's
+		IP information from the ARP packet.  When the ARP
+		Reply arrives from the peer, its hardware address is
+		retrieved and the bonding driver initiates an ARP
+		reply to this peer assigning it to one of the slaves
+		in the bond.  A problematic outcome of using ARP
+		negotiation for balancing is that each time that an
+		ARP request is broadcast it uses the hardware address
+		of the bond.  Hence, peers learn the hardware address
+		of the bond and the balancing of receive traffic
+		collapses to the current slave.  This is handled by
+		sending updates (ARP Replies) to all the peers with
+		their individually assigned hardware address such that
+		the traffic is redistributed.  Receive traffic is also
+		redistributed when a new slave is added to the bond
+		and when an inactive slave is re-activated.  The
+		receive load is distributed sequentially (round robin)
+		among the group of highest speed slaves in the bond.
+
+		When a link is reconnected or a new slave joins the
+		bond the receive traffic is redistributed among all
+		active slaves in the bond by initiating ARP Replies
+		with the selected MAC address to each of the
+		clients. The updelay parameter (detailed below) must
+		be set to a value equal or greater than the switch's
+		forwarding delay so that the ARP Replies sent to the
+		peers will not be blocked by the switch.
+
+		Prerequisites:
+
+		1. Ethtool support in the base drivers for retrieving
+		the speed of each slave.
+
+		2. Base driver support for setting the hardware
+		address of a device while it is open.  This is
+		required so that there will always be one slave in the
+		team using the bond hardware address (the
+		curr_active_slave) while having a unique hardware
+		address for each slave in the bond.  If the
+		curr_active_slave fails its hardware address is
+		swapped with the new curr_active_slave that was
+		chosen.
+
+num_grat_arp
+num_unsol_na
+
+	Specify the number of peer notifications (gratuitous ARPs and
+	unsolicited IPv6 Neighbor Advertisements) to be issued after a
+	failover event.  As soon as the link is up on the new slave
+	(possibly immediately) a peer notification is sent on the
+	bonding device and each VLAN sub-device.  This is repeated at
+	each link monitor interval (arp_interval or miimon, whichever
+	is active) if the number is greater than 1.
+
+	The valid range is 0 - 255; the default value is 1.  These options
+	affect only the active-backup mode.  These options were added for
+	bonding versions 3.3.0 and 3.4.0 respectively.
+
+	From Linux 3.0 and bonding version 3.7.1, these notifications
+	are generated by the ipv4 and ipv6 code and the numbers of
+	repetitions cannot be set independently.
+
+primary
+
+	A string (eth0, eth2, etc) specifying which slave is the
+	primary device.  The specified device will always be the
+	active slave while it is available.  Only when the primary is
+	off-line will alternate devices be used.  This is useful when
+	one slave is preferred over another, e.g., when one slave has
+	higher throughput than another.
+
+	The primary option is only valid for active-backup mode.
+
+primary_reselect
+
+	Specifies the reselection policy for the primary slave.  This
+	affects how the primary slave is chosen to become the active slave
+	when failure of the active slave or recovery of the primary slave
+	occurs.  This option is designed to prevent flip-flopping between
+	the primary slave and other slaves.  Possible values are:
+
+	always or 0 (default)
+
+		The primary slave becomes the active slave whenever it
+		comes back up.
+
+	better or 1
+
+		The primary slave becomes the active slave when it comes
+		back up, if the speed and duplex of the primary slave is
+		better than the speed and duplex of the current active
+		slave.
+
+	failure or 2
+
+		The primary slave becomes the active slave only if the
+		current active slave fails and the primary slave is up.
+
+	The primary_reselect setting is ignored in two cases:
+
+		If no slaves are active, the first slave to recover is
+		made the active slave.
+
+		When initially enslaved, the primary slave is always made
+		the active slave.
+
+	Changing the primary_reselect policy via sysfs will cause an
+	immediate selection of the best active slave according to the new
+	policy.  This may or may not result in a change of the active
+	slave, depending upon the circumstances.
+
+	This option was added for bonding version 3.6.0.
+
+updelay
+
+	Specifies the time, in milliseconds, to wait before enabling a
+	slave after a link recovery has been detected.  This option is
+	only valid for the miimon link monitor.  The updelay value
+	should be a multiple of the miimon value; if not, it will be
+	rounded down to the nearest multiple.  The default value is 0.
+
+use_carrier
+
+	Specifies whether or not miimon should use MII or ETHTOOL
+	ioctls vs. netif_carrier_ok() to determine the link
+	status. The MII or ETHTOOL ioctls are less efficient and
+	utilize a deprecated calling sequence within the kernel.  The
+	netif_carrier_ok() relies on the device driver to maintain its
+	state with netif_carrier_on/off; at this writing, most, but
+	not all, device drivers support this facility.
+
+	If bonding insists that the link is up when it should not be,
+	it may be that your network device driver does not support
+	netif_carrier_on/off.  The default state for netif_carrier is
+	"carrier on," so if a driver does not support netif_carrier,
+	it will appear as if the link is always up.  In this case,
+	setting use_carrier to 0 will cause bonding to revert to the
+	MII / ETHTOOL ioctl method to determine the link state.
+
+	A value of 1 enables the use of netif_carrier_ok(), a value of
+	0 will use the deprecated MII / ETHTOOL ioctls.  The default
+	value is 1.
+
+xmit_hash_policy
+
+	Selects the transmit hash policy to use for slave selection in
+	balance-xor and 802.3ad modes.  Possible values are:
+
+	layer2
+
+		Uses XOR of hardware MAC addresses to generate the
+		hash.  The formula is
+
+		(source MAC XOR destination MAC) modulo slave count
+
+		This algorithm will place all traffic to a particular
+		network peer on the same slave.
+
+		This algorithm is 802.3ad compliant.
+
+	layer2+3
+
+		This policy uses a combination of layer2 and layer3
+		protocol information to generate the hash.
+
+		Uses XOR of hardware MAC addresses and IP addresses to
+		generate the hash.  The formula is
+
+		(((source IP XOR dest IP) AND 0xffff) XOR
+			( source MAC XOR destination MAC ))
+				modulo slave count
+
+		This algorithm will place all traffic to a particular
+		network peer on the same slave.  For non-IP traffic,
+		the formula is the same as for the layer2 transmit
+		hash policy.
+
+		This policy is intended to provide a more balanced
+		distribution of traffic than layer2 alone, especially
+		in environments where a layer3 gateway device is
+		required to reach most destinations.
+
+		This algorithm is 802.3ad compliant.
+
+	layer3+4
+
+		This policy uses upper layer protocol information,
+		when available, to generate the hash.  This allows for
+		traffic to a particular network peer to span multiple
+		slaves, although a single connection will not span
+		multiple slaves.
+
+		The formula for unfragmented TCP and UDP packets is
+
+		((source port XOR dest port) XOR
+			 ((source IP XOR dest IP) AND 0xffff)
+				modulo slave count
+
+		For fragmented TCP or UDP packets and all other IP
+		protocol traffic, the source and destination port
+		information is omitted.  For non-IP traffic, the
+		formula is the same as for the layer2 transmit hash
+		policy.
+
+		This policy is intended to mimic the behavior of
+		certain switches, notably Cisco switches with PFC2 as
+		well as some Foundry and IBM products.
+
+		This algorithm is not fully 802.3ad compliant.  A
+		single TCP or UDP conversation containing both
+		fragmented and unfragmented packets will see packets
+		striped across two interfaces.  This may result in out
+		of order delivery.  Most traffic types will not meet
+		this criteria, as TCP rarely fragments traffic, and
+		most UDP traffic is not involved in extended
+		conversations.  Other implementations of 802.3ad may
+		or may not tolerate this noncompliance.
+
+	The default value is layer2.  This option was added in bonding
+	version 2.6.3.  In earlier versions of bonding, this parameter
+	does not exist, and the layer2 policy is the only policy.  The
+	layer2+3 value was added for bonding version 3.2.2.
+
+resend_igmp
+
+	Specifies the number of IGMP membership reports to be issued after
+	a failover event. One membership report is issued immediately after
+	the failover, subsequent packets are sent in each 200ms interval.
+
+	The valid range is 0 - 255; the default value is 1. A value of 0
+	prevents the IGMP membership report from being issued in response
+	to the failover event.
+
+	This option is useful for bonding modes balance-rr (0), active-backup
+	(1), balance-tlb (5) and balance-alb (6), in which a failover can
+	switch the IGMP traffic from one slave to another.  Therefore a fresh
+	IGMP report must be issued to cause the switch to forward the incoming
+	IGMP traffic over the newly selected slave.
+
+	This option was added for bonding version 3.7.0.
+
+3. Configuring Bonding Devices
+==============================
+
+	You can configure bonding using either your distro's network
+initialization scripts, or manually using either ifenslave or the
+sysfs interface.  Distros generally use one of three packages for the
+network initialization scripts: initscripts, sysconfig or interfaces.
+Recent versions of these packages have support for bonding, while older
+versions do not.
+
+	We will first describe the options for configuring bonding for
+distros using versions of initscripts, sysconfig and interfaces with full
+or partial support for bonding, then provide information on enabling
+bonding without support from the network initialization scripts (i.e.,
+older versions of initscripts or sysconfig).
+
+	If you're unsure whether your distro uses sysconfig,
+initscripts or interfaces, or don't know if it's new enough, have no fear.
+Determining this is fairly straightforward.
+
+	First, look for a file called interfaces in /etc/network directory.
+If this file is present in your system, then your system use interfaces. See
+Configuration with Interfaces Support.
+
+	Else, issue the command:
+
+$ rpm -qf /sbin/ifup
+
+	It will respond with a line of text starting with either
+"initscripts" or "sysconfig," followed by some numbers.  This is the
+package that provides your network initialization scripts.
+
+	Next, to determine if your installation supports bonding,
+issue the command:
+
+$ grep ifenslave /sbin/ifup
+
+	If this returns any matches, then your initscripts or
+sysconfig has support for bonding.
+
+3.1 Configuration with Sysconfig Support
+----------------------------------------
+
+	This section applies to distros using a version of sysconfig
+with bonding support, for example, SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9.
+
+	SuSE SLES 9's networking configuration system does support
+bonding, however, at this writing, the YaST system configuration
+front end does not provide any means to work with bonding devices.
+Bonding devices can be managed by hand, however, as follows.
+
+	First, if they have not already been configured, configure the
+slave devices.  On SLES 9, this is most easily done by running the
+yast2 sysconfig configuration utility.  The goal is for to create an
+ifcfg-id file for each slave device.  The simplest way to accomplish
+this is to configure the devices for DHCP (this is only to get the
+file ifcfg-id file created; see below for some issues with DHCP).  The
+name of the configuration file for each device will be of the form:
+
+ifcfg-id-xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
+
+	Where the "xx" portion will be replaced with the digits from
+the device's permanent MAC address.
+
+	Once the set of ifcfg-id-xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx files has been
+created, it is necessary to edit the configuration files for the slave
+devices (the MAC addresses correspond to those of the slave devices).
+Before editing, the file will contain multiple lines, and will look
+something like this:
+
+BOOTPROTO='dhcp'
+STARTMODE='on'
+USERCTL='no'
+UNIQUE='XNzu.WeZGOGF+4wE'
+_nm_name='bus-pci-0001:61:01.0'
+
+	Change the BOOTPROTO and STARTMODE lines to the following:
+
+BOOTPROTO='none'
+STARTMODE='off'
+
+	Do not alter the UNIQUE or _nm_name lines.  Remove any other
+lines (USERCTL, etc).
+
+	Once the ifcfg-id-xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx files have been modified,
+it's time to create the configuration file for the bonding device
+itself.  This file is named ifcfg-bondX, where X is the number of the
+bonding device to create, starting at 0.  The first such file is
+ifcfg-bond0, the second is ifcfg-bond1, and so on.  The sysconfig
+network configuration system will correctly start multiple instances
+of bonding.
+
+	The contents of the ifcfg-bondX file is as follows:
+
+BOOTPROTO="static"
+BROADCAST="10.0.2.255"
+IPADDR="10.0.2.10"
+NETMASK="255.255.0.0"
+NETWORK="10.0.2.0"
+REMOTE_IPADDR=""
+STARTMODE="onboot"
+BONDING_MASTER="yes"
+BONDING_MODULE_OPTS="mode=active-backup miimon=100"
+BONDING_SLAVE0="eth0"
+BONDING_SLAVE1="bus-pci-0000:06:08.1"
+
+	Replace the sample BROADCAST, IPADDR, NETMASK and NETWORK
+values with the appropriate values for your network.
+
+	The STARTMODE specifies when the device is brought online.
+The possible values are:
+
+	onboot:	 The device is started at boot time.  If you're not
+		 sure, this is probably what you want.
+
+	manual:	 The device is started only when ifup is called
+		 manually.  Bonding devices may be configured this
+		 way if you do not wish them to start automatically
+		 at boot for some reason.
+
+	hotplug: The device is started by a hotplug event.  This is not
+		 a valid choice for a bonding device.
+
+	off or ignore: The device configuration is ignored.
+
+	The line BONDING_MASTER='yes' indicates that the device is a
+bonding master device.  The only useful value is "yes."
+
+	The contents of BONDING_MODULE_OPTS are supplied to the
+instance of the bonding module for this device.  Specify the options
+for the bonding mode, link monitoring, and so on here.  Do not include
+the max_bonds bonding parameter; this will confuse the configuration
+system if you have multiple bonding devices.
+
+	Finally, supply one BONDING_SLAVEn="slave device" for each
+slave.  where "n" is an increasing value, one for each slave.  The
+"slave device" is either an interface name, e.g., "eth0", or a device
+specifier for the network device.  The interface name is easier to
+find, but the ethN names are subject to change at boot time if, e.g.,
+a device early in the sequence has failed.  The device specifiers
+(bus-pci-0000:06:08.1 in the example above) specify the physical
+network device, and will not change unless the device's bus location
+changes (for example, it is moved from one PCI slot to another).  The
+example above uses one of each type for demonstration purposes; most
+configurations will choose one or the other for all slave devices.
+
+	When all configuration files have been modified or created,
+networking must be restarted for the configuration changes to take
+effect.  This can be accomplished via the following:
+
+# /etc/init.d/network restart
+
+	Note that the network control script (/sbin/ifdown) will
+remove the bonding module as part of the network shutdown processing,
+so it is not necessary to remove the module by hand if, e.g., the
+module parameters have changed.
+
+	Also, at this writing, YaST/YaST2 will not manage bonding
+devices (they do not show bonding interfaces on its list of network
+devices).  It is necessary to edit the configuration file by hand to
+change the bonding configuration.
+
+	Additional general options and details of the ifcfg file
+format can be found in an example ifcfg template file:
+
+/etc/sysconfig/network/ifcfg.template
+
+	Note that the template does not document the various BONDING_
+settings described above, but does describe many of the other options.
+
+3.1.1 Using DHCP with Sysconfig
+-------------------------------
+
+	Under sysconfig, configuring a device with BOOTPROTO='dhcp'
+will cause it to query DHCP for its IP address information.  At this
+writing, this does not function for bonding devices; the scripts
+attempt to obtain the device address from DHCP prior to adding any of
+the slave devices.  Without active slaves, the DHCP requests are not
+sent to the network.
+
+3.1.2 Configuring Multiple Bonds with Sysconfig
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+	The sysconfig network initialization system is capable of
+handling multiple bonding devices.  All that is necessary is for each
+bonding instance to have an appropriately configured ifcfg-bondX file
+(as described above).  Do not specify the "max_bonds" parameter to any
+instance of bonding, as this will confuse sysconfig.  If you require
+multiple bonding devices with identical parameters, create multiple
+ifcfg-bondX files.
+
+	Because the sysconfig scripts supply the bonding module
+options in the ifcfg-bondX file, it is not necessary to add them to
+the system /etc/modules.conf or /etc/modprobe.conf configuration file.
+
+3.2 Configuration with Initscripts Support
+------------------------------------------
+
+	This section applies to distros using a recent version of
+initscripts with bonding support, for example, Red Hat Enterprise Linux
+version 3 or later, Fedora, etc.  On these systems, the network
+initialization scripts have knowledge of bonding, and can be configured to
+control bonding devices.  Note that older versions of the initscripts
+package have lower levels of support for bonding; this will be noted where
+applicable.
+
+	These distros will not automatically load the network adapter
+driver unless the ethX device is configured with an IP address.
+Because of this constraint, users must manually configure a
+network-script file for all physical adapters that will be members of
+a bondX link.  Network script files are located in the directory:
+
+/etc/sysconfig/network-scripts
+
+	The file name must be prefixed with "ifcfg-eth" and suffixed
+with the adapter's physical adapter number.  For example, the script
+for eth0 would be named /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth0.
+Place the following text in the file:
+
+DEVICE=eth0
+USERCTL=no
+ONBOOT=yes
+MASTER=bond0
+SLAVE=yes
+BOOTPROTO=none
+
+	The DEVICE= line will be different for every ethX device and
+must correspond with the name of the file, i.e., ifcfg-eth1 must have
+a device line of DEVICE=eth1.  The setting of the MASTER= line will
+also depend on the final bonding interface name chosen for your bond.
+As with other network devices, these typically start at 0, and go up
+one for each device, i.e., the first bonding instance is bond0, the
+second is bond1, and so on.
+
+	Next, create a bond network script.  The file name for this
+script will be /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-bondX where X is
+the number of the bond.  For bond0 the file is named "ifcfg-bond0",
+for bond1 it is named "ifcfg-bond1", and so on.  Within that file,
+place the following text:
+
+DEVICE=bond0
+IPADDR=192.168.1.1
+NETMASK=255.255.255.0
+NETWORK=192.168.1.0
+BROADCAST=192.168.1.255
+ONBOOT=yes
+BOOTPROTO=none
+USERCTL=no
+
+	Be sure to change the networking specific lines (IPADDR,
+NETMASK, NETWORK and BROADCAST) to match your network configuration.
+
+	For later versions of initscripts, such as that found with Fedora
+7 (or later) and Red Hat Enterprise Linux version 5 (or later), it is possible,
+and, indeed, preferable, to specify the bonding options in the ifcfg-bond0
+file, e.g. a line of the format:
+
+BONDING_OPTS="mode=active-backup arp_interval=60 arp_ip_target=192.168.1.254"
+
+	will configure the bond with the specified options.  The options
+specified in BONDING_OPTS are identical to the bonding module parameters
+except for the arp_ip_target field when using versions of initscripts older
+than and 8.57 (Fedora 8) and 8.45.19 (Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.2).  When
+using older versions each target should be included as a separate option and
+should be preceded by a '+' to indicate it should be added to the list of
+queried targets, e.g.,
+
+	arp_ip_target=+192.168.1.1 arp_ip_target=+192.168.1.2
+
+	is the proper syntax to specify multiple targets.  When specifying
+options via BONDING_OPTS, it is not necessary to edit /etc/modules.conf or
+/etc/modprobe.conf.
+
+	For even older versions of initscripts that do not support
+BONDING_OPTS, it is necessary to edit /etc/modules.conf (or
+/etc/modprobe.conf, depending upon your distro) to load the bonding module
+with your desired options when the bond0 interface is brought up.  The
+following lines in /etc/modules.conf (or modprobe.conf) will load the
+bonding module, and select its options:
+
+alias bond0 bonding
+options bond0 mode=balance-alb miimon=100
+
+	Replace the sample parameters with the appropriate set of
+options for your configuration.
+
+	Finally run "/etc/rc.d/init.d/network restart" as root.  This
+will restart the networking subsystem and your bond link should be now
+up and running.
+
+3.2.1 Using DHCP with Initscripts
+---------------------------------
+
+	Recent versions of initscripts (the versions supplied with Fedora
+Core 3 and Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4, or later versions, are reported to
+work) have support for assigning IP information to bonding devices via
+DHCP.
+
+	To configure bonding for DHCP, configure it as described
+above, except replace the line "BOOTPROTO=none" with "BOOTPROTO=dhcp"
+and add a line consisting of "TYPE=Bonding".  Note that the TYPE value
+is case sensitive.
+
+3.2.2 Configuring Multiple Bonds with Initscripts
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+	Initscripts packages that are included with Fedora 7 and Red Hat
+Enterprise Linux 5 support multiple bonding interfaces by simply
+specifying the appropriate BONDING_OPTS= in ifcfg-bondX where X is the
+number of the bond.  This support requires sysfs support in the kernel,
+and a bonding driver of version 3.0.0 or later.  Other configurations may
+not support this method for specifying multiple bonding interfaces; for
+those instances, see the "Configuring Multiple Bonds Manually" section,
+below.
+
+3.3 Configuring Bonding Manually with Ifenslave
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+	This section applies to distros whose network initialization
+scripts (the sysconfig or initscripts package) do not have specific
+knowledge of bonding.  One such distro is SuSE Linux Enterprise Server
+version 8.
+
+	The general method for these systems is to place the bonding
+module parameters into /etc/modules.conf or /etc/modprobe.conf (as
+appropriate for the installed distro), then add modprobe and/or
+ifenslave commands to the system's global init script.  The name of
+the global init script differs; for sysconfig, it is
+/etc/init.d/boot.local and for initscripts it is /etc/rc.d/rc.local.
+
+	For example, if you wanted to make a simple bond of two e100
+devices (presumed to be eth0 and eth1), and have it persist across
+reboots, edit the appropriate file (/etc/init.d/boot.local or
+/etc/rc.d/rc.local), and add the following:
+
+modprobe bonding mode=balance-alb miimon=100
+modprobe e100
+ifconfig bond0 192.168.1.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 up
+ifenslave bond0 eth0
+ifenslave bond0 eth1
+
+	Replace the example bonding module parameters and bond0
+network configuration (IP address, netmask, etc) with the appropriate
+values for your configuration.
+
+	Unfortunately, this method will not provide support for the
+ifup and ifdown scripts on the bond devices.  To reload the bonding
+configuration, it is necessary to run the initialization script, e.g.,
+
+# /etc/init.d/boot.local
+
+	or
+
+# /etc/rc.d/rc.local
+
+	It may be desirable in such a case to create a separate script
+which only initializes the bonding configuration, then call that
+separate script from within boot.local.  This allows for bonding to be
+enabled without re-running the entire global init script.
+
+	To shut down the bonding devices, it is necessary to first
+mark the bonding device itself as being down, then remove the
+appropriate device driver modules.  For our example above, you can do
+the following:
+
+# ifconfig bond0 down
+# rmmod bonding
+# rmmod e100
+
+	Again, for convenience, it may be desirable to create a script
+with these commands.
+
+
+3.3.1 Configuring Multiple Bonds Manually
+-----------------------------------------
+
+	This section contains information on configuring multiple
+bonding devices with differing options for those systems whose network
+initialization scripts lack support for configuring multiple bonds.
+
+	If you require multiple bonding devices, but all with the same
+options, you may wish to use the "max_bonds" module parameter,
+documented above.
+
+	To create multiple bonding devices with differing options, it is
+preferrable to use bonding parameters exported by sysfs, documented in the
+section below.
+
+	For versions of bonding without sysfs support, the only means to
+provide multiple instances of bonding with differing options is to load
+the bonding driver multiple times.  Note that current versions of the
+sysconfig network initialization scripts handle this automatically; if
+your distro uses these scripts, no special action is needed.  See the
+section Configuring Bonding Devices, above, if you're not sure about your
+network initialization scripts.
+
+	To load multiple instances of the module, it is necessary to
+specify a different name for each instance (the module loading system
+requires that every loaded module, even multiple instances of the same
+module, have a unique name).  This is accomplished by supplying multiple
+sets of bonding options in /etc/modprobe.conf, for example:
+
+alias bond0 bonding
+options bond0 -o bond0 mode=balance-rr miimon=100
+
+alias bond1 bonding
+options bond1 -o bond1 mode=balance-alb miimon=50
+
+	will load the bonding module two times.  The first instance is
+named "bond0" and creates the bond0 device in balance-rr mode with an
+miimon of 100.  The second instance is named "bond1" and creates the
+bond1 device in balance-alb mode with an miimon of 50.
+
+	In some circumstances (typically with older distributions),
+the above does not work, and the second bonding instance never sees
+its options.  In that case, the second options line can be substituted
+as follows:
+
+install bond1 /sbin/modprobe --ignore-install bonding -o bond1 \
+	mode=balance-alb miimon=50
+
+	This may be repeated any number of times, specifying a new and
+unique name in place of bond1 for each subsequent instance.
+
+	It has been observed that some Red Hat supplied kernels are unable
+to rename modules at load time (the "-o bond1" part).  Attempts to pass
+that option to modprobe will produce an "Operation not permitted" error.
+This has been reported on some Fedora Core kernels, and has been seen on
+RHEL 4 as well.  On kernels exhibiting this problem, it will be impossible
+to configure multiple bonds with differing parameters (as they are older
+kernels, and also lack sysfs support).
+
+3.4 Configuring Bonding Manually via Sysfs
+------------------------------------------
+
+	Starting with version 3.0.0, Channel Bonding may be configured
+via the sysfs interface.  This interface allows dynamic configuration
+of all bonds in the system without unloading the module.  It also
+allows for adding and removing bonds at runtime.  Ifenslave is no
+longer required, though it is still supported.
+
+	Use of the sysfs interface allows you to use multiple bonds
+with different configurations without having to reload the module.
+It also allows you to use multiple, differently configured bonds when
+bonding is compiled into the kernel.
+
+	You must have the sysfs filesystem mounted to configure
+bonding this way.  The examples in this document assume that you
+are using the standard mount point for sysfs, e.g. /sys.  If your
+sysfs filesystem is mounted elsewhere, you will need to adjust the
+example paths accordingly.
+
+Creating and Destroying Bonds
+-----------------------------
+To add a new bond foo:
+# echo +foo > /sys/class/net/bonding_masters
+
+To remove an existing bond bar:
+# echo -bar > /sys/class/net/bonding_masters
+
+To show all existing bonds:
+# cat /sys/class/net/bonding_masters
+
+NOTE: due to 4K size limitation of sysfs files, this list may be
+truncated if you have more than a few hundred bonds.  This is unlikely
+to occur under normal operating conditions.
+
+Adding and Removing Slaves
+--------------------------
+	Interfaces may be enslaved to a bond using the file
+/sys/class/net/<bond>/bonding/slaves.  The semantics for this file
+are the same as for the bonding_masters file.
+
+To enslave interface eth0 to bond bond0:
+# ifconfig bond0 up
+# echo +eth0 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/slaves
+
+To free slave eth0 from bond bond0:
+# echo -eth0 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/slaves
+
+	When an interface is enslaved to a bond, symlinks between the
+two are created in the sysfs filesystem.  In this case, you would get
+/sys/class/net/bond0/slave_eth0 pointing to /sys/class/net/eth0, and
+/sys/class/net/eth0/master pointing to /sys/class/net/bond0.
+
+	This means that you can tell quickly whether or not an
+interface is enslaved by looking for the master symlink.  Thus:
+# echo -eth0 > /sys/class/net/eth0/master/bonding/slaves
+will free eth0 from whatever bond it is enslaved to, regardless of
+the name of the bond interface.
+
+Changing a Bond's Configuration
+-------------------------------
+	Each bond may be configured individually by manipulating the
+files located in /sys/class/net/<bond name>/bonding
+
+	The names of these files correspond directly with the command-
+line parameters described elsewhere in this file, and, with the
+exception of arp_ip_target, they accept the same values.  To see the
+current setting, simply cat the appropriate file.
+
+	A few examples will be given here; for specific usage
+guidelines for each parameter, see the appropriate section in this
+document.
+
+To configure bond0 for balance-alb mode:
+# ifconfig bond0 down
+# echo 6 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/mode
+ - or -
+# echo balance-alb > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/mode
+	NOTE: The bond interface must be down before the mode can be
+changed.
+
+To enable MII monitoring on bond0 with a 1 second interval:
+# echo 1000 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/miimon
+	NOTE: If ARP monitoring is enabled, it will disabled when MII
+monitoring is enabled, and vice-versa.
+
+To add ARP targets:
+# echo +192.168.0.100 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/arp_ip_target
+# echo +192.168.0.101 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/arp_ip_target
+	NOTE:  up to 16 target addresses may be specified.
+
+To remove an ARP target:
+# echo -192.168.0.100 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/arp_ip_target
+
+Example Configuration
+---------------------
+	We begin with the same example that is shown in section 3.3,
+executed with sysfs, and without using ifenslave.
+
+	To make a simple bond of two e100 devices (presumed to be eth0
+and eth1), and have it persist across reboots, edit the appropriate
+file (/etc/init.d/boot.local or /etc/rc.d/rc.local), and add the
+following:
+
+modprobe bonding
+modprobe e100
+echo balance-alb > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/mode
+ifconfig bond0 192.168.1.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 up
+echo 100 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/miimon
+echo +eth0 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/slaves
+echo +eth1 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/slaves
+
+	To add a second bond, with two e1000 interfaces in
+active-backup mode, using ARP monitoring, add the following lines to
+your init script:
+
+modprobe e1000
+echo +bond1 > /sys/class/net/bonding_masters
+echo active-backup > /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/mode
+ifconfig bond1 192.168.2.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 up
+echo +192.168.2.100 /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/arp_ip_target
+echo 2000 > /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/arp_interval
+echo +eth2 > /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/slaves
+echo +eth3 > /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/slaves
+
+3.5 Configuration with Interfaces Support
+-----------------------------------------
+
+        This section applies to distros which use /etc/network/interfaces file
+to describe network interface configuration, most notably Debian and it's
+derivatives.
+
+	The ifup and ifdown commands on Debian don't support bonding out of
+the box. The ifenslave-2.6 package should be installed to provide bonding
+support.  Once installed, this package will provide bond-* options to be used
+into /etc/network/interfaces.
+
+	Note that ifenslave-2.6 package will load the bonding module and use
+the ifenslave command when appropriate.
+
+Example Configurations
+----------------------
+
+In /etc/network/interfaces, the following stanza will configure bond0, in
+active-backup mode, with eth0 and eth1 as slaves.
+
+auto bond0
+iface bond0 inet dhcp
+	bond-slaves eth0 eth1
+	bond-mode active-backup
+	bond-miimon 100
+	bond-primary eth0 eth1
+
+If the above configuration doesn't work, you might have a system using
+upstart for system startup. This is most notably true for recent
+Ubuntu versions. The following stanza in /etc/network/interfaces will
+produce the same result on those systems.
+
+auto bond0
+iface bond0 inet dhcp
+	bond-slaves none
+	bond-mode active-backup
+	bond-miimon 100
+
+auto eth0
+iface eth0 inet manual
+	bond-master bond0
+	bond-primary eth0 eth1
+
+auto eth1
+iface eth1 inet manual
+	bond-master bond0
+	bond-primary eth0 eth1
+
+For a full list of bond-* supported options in /etc/network/interfaces and some
+more advanced examples tailored to you particular distros, see the files in
+/usr/share/doc/ifenslave-2.6.
+
+3.6 Overriding Configuration for Special Cases
+----------------------------------------------
+
+When using the bonding driver, the physical port which transmits a frame is
+typically selected by the bonding driver, and is not relevant to the user or
+system administrator.  The output port is simply selected using the policies of
+the selected bonding mode.  On occasion however, it is helpful to direct certain
+classes of traffic to certain physical interfaces on output to implement
+slightly more complex policies.  For example, to reach a web server over a
+bonded interface in which eth0 connects to a private network, while eth1
+connects via a public network, it may be desirous to bias the bond to send said
+traffic over eth0 first, using eth1 only as a fall back, while all other traffic
+can safely be sent over either interface.  Such configurations may be achieved
+using the traffic control utilities inherent in linux.
+
+By default the bonding driver is multiqueue aware and 16 queues are created
+when the driver initializes (see Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt
+for details).  If more or less queues are desired the module parameter
+tx_queues can be used to change this value.  There is no sysfs parameter
+available as the allocation is done at module init time.
+
+The output of the file /proc/net/bonding/bondX has changed so the output Queue
+ID is now printed for each slave:
+
+Bonding Mode: fault-tolerance (active-backup)
+Primary Slave: None
+Currently Active Slave: eth0
+MII Status: up
+MII Polling Interval (ms): 0
+Up Delay (ms): 0
+Down Delay (ms): 0
+
+Slave Interface: eth0
+MII Status: up
+Link Failure Count: 0
+Permanent HW addr: 00:1a:a0:12:8f:cb
+Slave queue ID: 0
+
+Slave Interface: eth1
+MII Status: up
+Link Failure Count: 0
+Permanent HW addr: 00:1a:a0:12:8f:cc
+Slave queue ID: 2
+
+The queue_id for a slave can be set using the command:
+
+# echo "eth1:2" > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/queue_id
+
+Any interface that needs a queue_id set should set it with multiple calls
+like the one above until proper priorities are set for all interfaces.  On
+distributions that allow configuration via initscripts, multiple 'queue_id'
+arguments can be added to BONDING_OPTS to set all needed slave queues.
+
+These queue id's can be used in conjunction with the tc utility to configure
+a multiqueue qdisc and filters to bias certain traffic to transmit on certain
+slave devices.  For instance, say we wanted, in the above configuration to
+force all traffic bound to 192.168.1.100 to use eth1 in the bond as its output
+device. The following commands would accomplish this:
+
+# tc qdisc add dev bond0 handle 1 root multiq
+
+# tc filter add dev bond0 protocol ip parent 1: prio 1 u32 match ip dst \
+	192.168.1.100 action skbedit queue_mapping 2
+
+These commands tell the kernel to attach a multiqueue queue discipline to the
+bond0 interface and filter traffic enqueued to it, such that packets with a dst
+ip of 192.168.1.100 have their output queue mapping value overwritten to 2.
+This value is then passed into the driver, causing the normal output path
+selection policy to be overridden, selecting instead qid 2, which maps to eth1.
+
+Note that qid values begin at 1.  Qid 0 is reserved to initiate to the driver
+that normal output policy selection should take place.  One benefit to simply
+leaving the qid for a slave to 0 is the multiqueue awareness in the bonding
+driver that is now present.  This awareness allows tc filters to be placed on
+slave devices as well as bond devices and the bonding driver will simply act as
+a pass-through for selecting output queues on the slave device rather than 
+output port selection.
+
+This feature first appeared in bonding driver version 3.7.0 and support for
+output slave selection was limited to round-robin and active-backup modes.
+
+4 Querying Bonding Configuration
+=================================
+
+4.1 Bonding Configuration
+-------------------------
+
+	Each bonding device has a read-only file residing in the
+/proc/net/bonding directory.  The file contents include information
+about the bonding configuration, options and state of each slave.
+
+	For example, the contents of /proc/net/bonding/bond0 after the
+driver is loaded with parameters of mode=0 and miimon=1000 is
+generally as follows:
+
+	Ethernet Channel Bonding Driver: 2.6.1 (October 29, 2004)
+        Bonding Mode: load balancing (round-robin)
+        Currently Active Slave: eth0
+        MII Status: up
+        MII Polling Interval (ms): 1000
+        Up Delay (ms): 0
+        Down Delay (ms): 0
+
+        Slave Interface: eth1
+        MII Status: up
+        Link Failure Count: 1
+
+        Slave Interface: eth0
+        MII Status: up
+        Link Failure Count: 1
+
+	The precise format and contents will change depending upon the
+bonding configuration, state, and version of the bonding driver.
+
+4.2 Network configuration
+-------------------------
+
+	The network configuration can be inspected using the ifconfig
+command.  Bonding devices will have the MASTER flag set; Bonding slave
+devices will have the SLAVE flag set.  The ifconfig output does not
+contain information on which slaves are associated with which masters.
+
+	In the example below, the bond0 interface is the master
+(MASTER) while eth0 and eth1 are slaves (SLAVE). Notice all slaves of
+bond0 have the same MAC address (HWaddr) as bond0 for all modes except
+TLB and ALB that require a unique MAC address for each slave.
+
+# /sbin/ifconfig
+bond0     Link encap:Ethernet  HWaddr 00:C0:F0:1F:37:B4
+          inet addr:XXX.XXX.XXX.YYY  Bcast:XXX.XXX.XXX.255  Mask:255.255.252.0
+          UP BROADCAST RUNNING MASTER MULTICAST  MTU:1500  Metric:1
+          RX packets:7224794 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
+          TX packets:3286647 errors:1 dropped:0 overruns:1 carrier:0
+          collisions:0 txqueuelen:0
+
+eth0      Link encap:Ethernet  HWaddr 00:C0:F0:1F:37:B4
+          UP BROADCAST RUNNING SLAVE MULTICAST  MTU:1500  Metric:1
+          RX packets:3573025 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
+          TX packets:1643167 errors:1 dropped:0 overruns:1 carrier:0
+          collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
+          Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1080
+
+eth1      Link encap:Ethernet  HWaddr 00:C0:F0:1F:37:B4
+          UP BROADCAST RUNNING SLAVE MULTICAST  MTU:1500  Metric:1
+          RX packets:3651769 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
+          TX packets:1643480 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
+          collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
+          Interrupt:9 Base address:0x1400
+
+5. Switch Configuration
+=======================
+
+	For this section, "switch" refers to whatever system the
+bonded devices are directly connected to (i.e., where the other end of
+the cable plugs into).  This may be an actual dedicated switch device,
+or it may be another regular system (e.g., another computer running
+Linux),
+
+	The active-backup, balance-tlb and balance-alb modes do not
+require any specific configuration of the switch.
+
+	The 802.3ad mode requires that the switch have the appropriate
+ports configured as an 802.3ad aggregation.  The precise method used
+to configure this varies from switch to switch, but, for example, a
+Cisco 3550 series switch requires that the appropriate ports first be
+grouped together in a single etherchannel instance, then that
+etherchannel is set to mode "lacp" to enable 802.3ad (instead of
+standard EtherChannel).
+
+	The balance-rr, balance-xor and broadcast modes generally
+require that the switch have the appropriate ports grouped together.
+The nomenclature for such a group differs between switches, it may be
+called an "etherchannel" (as in the Cisco example, above), a "trunk
+group" or some other similar variation.  For these modes, each switch
+will also have its own configuration options for the switch's transmit
+policy to the bond.  Typical choices include XOR of either the MAC or
+IP addresses.  The transmit policy of the two peers does not need to
+match.  For these three modes, the bonding mode really selects a
+transmit policy for an EtherChannel group; all three will interoperate
+with another EtherChannel group.
+
+
+6. 802.1q VLAN Support
+======================
+
+	It is possible to configure VLAN devices over a bond interface
+using the 8021q driver.  However, only packets coming from the 8021q
+driver and passing through bonding will be tagged by default.  Self
+generated packets, for example, bonding's learning packets or ARP
+packets generated by either ALB mode or the ARP monitor mechanism, are
+tagged internally by bonding itself.  As a result, bonding must
+"learn" the VLAN IDs configured above it, and use those IDs to tag
+self generated packets.
+
+	For reasons of simplicity, and to support the use of adapters
+that can do VLAN hardware acceleration offloading, the bonding
+interface declares itself as fully hardware offloading capable, it gets
+the add_vid/kill_vid notifications to gather the necessary
+information, and it propagates those actions to the slaves.  In case
+of mixed adapter types, hardware accelerated tagged packets that
+should go through an adapter that is not offloading capable are
+"un-accelerated" by the bonding driver so the VLAN tag sits in the
+regular location.
+
+	VLAN interfaces *must* be added on top of a bonding interface
+only after enslaving at least one slave.  The bonding interface has a
+hardware address of 00:00:00:00:00:00 until the first slave is added.
+If the VLAN interface is created prior to the first enslavement, it
+would pick up the all-zeroes hardware address.  Once the first slave
+is attached to the bond, the bond device itself will pick up the
+slave's hardware address, which is then available for the VLAN device.
+
+	Also, be aware that a similar problem can occur if all slaves
+are released from a bond that still has one or more VLAN interfaces on
+top of it.  When a new slave is added, the bonding interface will
+obtain its hardware address from the first slave, which might not
+match the hardware address of the VLAN interfaces (which was
+ultimately copied from an earlier slave).
+
+	There are two methods to insure that the VLAN device operates
+with the correct hardware address if all slaves are removed from a
+bond interface:
+
+	1. Remove all VLAN interfaces then recreate them
+
+	2. Set the bonding interface's hardware address so that it
+matches the hardware address of the VLAN interfaces.
+
+	Note that changing a VLAN interface's HW address would set the
+underlying device -- i.e. the bonding interface -- to promiscuous
+mode, which might not be what you want.
+
+
+7. Link Monitoring
+==================
+
+	The bonding driver at present supports two schemes for
+monitoring a slave device's link state: the ARP monitor and the MII
+monitor.
+
+	At the present time, due to implementation restrictions in the
+bonding driver itself, it is not possible to enable both ARP and MII
+monitoring simultaneously.
+
+7.1 ARP Monitor Operation
+-------------------------
+
+	The ARP monitor operates as its name suggests: it sends ARP
+queries to one or more designated peer systems on the network, and
+uses the response as an indication that the link is operating.  This
+gives some assurance that traffic is actually flowing to and from one
+or more peers on the local network.
+
+	The ARP monitor relies on the device driver itself to verify
+that traffic is flowing.  In particular, the driver must keep up to
+date the last receive time, dev->last_rx, and transmit start time,
+dev->trans_start.  If these are not updated by the driver, then the
+ARP monitor will immediately fail any slaves using that driver, and
+those slaves will stay down.  If networking monitoring (tcpdump, etc)
+shows the ARP requests and replies on the network, then it may be that
+your device driver is not updating last_rx and trans_start.
+
+7.2 Configuring Multiple ARP Targets
+------------------------------------
+
+	While ARP monitoring can be done with just one target, it can
+be useful in a High Availability setup to have several targets to
+monitor.  In the case of just one target, the target itself may go
+down or have a problem making it unresponsive to ARP requests.  Having
+an additional target (or several) increases the reliability of the ARP
+monitoring.
+
+	Multiple ARP targets must be separated by commas as follows:
+
+# example options for ARP monitoring with three targets
+alias bond0 bonding
+options bond0 arp_interval=60 arp_ip_target=192.168.0.1,192.168.0.3,192.168.0.9
+
+	For just a single target the options would resemble:
+
+# example options for ARP monitoring with one target
+alias bond0 bonding
+options bond0 arp_interval=60 arp_ip_target=192.168.0.100
+
+
+7.3 MII Monitor Operation
+-------------------------
+
+	The MII monitor monitors only the carrier state of the local
+network interface.  It accomplishes this in one of three ways: by
+depending upon the device driver to maintain its carrier state, by
+querying the device's MII registers, or by making an ethtool query to
+the device.
+
+	If the use_carrier module parameter is 1 (the default value),
+then the MII monitor will rely on the driver for carrier state
+information (via the netif_carrier subsystem).  As explained in the
+use_carrier parameter information, above, if the MII monitor fails to
+detect carrier loss on the device (e.g., when the cable is physically
+disconnected), it may be that the driver does not support
+netif_carrier.
+
+	If use_carrier is 0, then the MII monitor will first query the
+device's (via ioctl) MII registers and check the link state.  If that
+request fails (not just that it returns carrier down), then the MII
+monitor will make an ethtool ETHOOL_GLINK request to attempt to obtain
+the same information.  If both methods fail (i.e., the driver either
+does not support or had some error in processing both the MII register
+and ethtool requests), then the MII monitor will assume the link is
+up.
+
+8. Potential Sources of Trouble
+===============================
+
+8.1 Adventures in Routing
+-------------------------
+
+	When bonding is configured, it is important that the slave
+devices not have routes that supersede routes of the master (or,
+generally, not have routes at all).  For example, suppose the bonding
+device bond0 has two slaves, eth0 and eth1, and the routing table is
+as follows:
+
+Kernel IP routing table
+Destination     Gateway         Genmask         Flags   MSS Window  irtt Iface
+10.0.0.0        0.0.0.0         255.255.0.0     U        40 0          0 eth0
+10.0.0.0        0.0.0.0         255.255.0.0     U        40 0          0 eth1
+10.0.0.0        0.0.0.0         255.255.0.0     U        40 0          0 bond0
+127.0.0.0       0.0.0.0         255.0.0.0       U        40 0          0 lo
+
+	This routing configuration will likely still update the
+receive/transmit times in the driver (needed by the ARP monitor), but
+may bypass the bonding driver (because outgoing traffic to, in this
+case, another host on network 10 would use eth0 or eth1 before bond0).
+
+	The ARP monitor (and ARP itself) may become confused by this
+configuration, because ARP requests (generated by the ARP monitor)
+will be sent on one interface (bond0), but the corresponding reply
+will arrive on a different interface (eth0).  This reply looks to ARP
+as an unsolicited ARP reply (because ARP matches replies on an
+interface basis), and is discarded.  The MII monitor is not affected
+by the state of the routing table.
+
+	The solution here is simply to insure that slaves do not have
+routes of their own, and if for some reason they must, those routes do
+not supersede routes of their master.  This should generally be the
+case, but unusual configurations or errant manual or automatic static
+route additions may cause trouble.
+
+8.2 Ethernet Device Renaming
+----------------------------
+
+	On systems with network configuration scripts that do not
+associate physical devices directly with network interface names (so
+that the same physical device always has the same "ethX" name), it may
+be necessary to add some special logic to either /etc/modules.conf or
+/etc/modprobe.conf (depending upon which is installed on the system).
+
+	For example, given a modules.conf containing the following:
+
+alias bond0 bonding
+options bond0 mode=some-mode miimon=50
+alias eth0 tg3
+alias eth1 tg3
+alias eth2 e1000
+alias eth3 e1000
+
+	If neither eth0 and eth1 are slaves to bond0, then when the
+bond0 interface comes up, the devices may end up reordered.  This
+happens because bonding is loaded first, then its slave device's
+drivers are loaded next.  Since no other drivers have been loaded,
+when the e1000 driver loads, it will receive eth0 and eth1 for its
+devices, but the bonding configuration tries to enslave eth2 and eth3
+(which may later be assigned to the tg3 devices).
+
+	Adding the following:
+
+add above bonding e1000 tg3
+
+	causes modprobe to load e1000 then tg3, in that order, when
+bonding is loaded.  This command is fully documented in the
+modules.conf manual page.
+
+	On systems utilizing modprobe.conf (or modprobe.conf.local),
+an equivalent problem can occur.  In this case, the following can be
+added to modprobe.conf (or modprobe.conf.local, as appropriate), as
+follows (all on one line; it has been split here for clarity):
+
+install bonding /sbin/modprobe tg3; /sbin/modprobe e1000;
+	/sbin/modprobe --ignore-install bonding
+
+	This will, when loading the bonding module, rather than
+performing the normal action, instead execute the provided command.
+This command loads the device drivers in the order needed, then calls
+modprobe with --ignore-install to cause the normal action to then take
+place.  Full documentation on this can be found in the modprobe.conf
+and modprobe manual pages.
+
+8.3. Painfully Slow Or No Failed Link Detection By Miimon
+---------------------------------------------------------
+
+	By default, bonding enables the use_carrier option, which
+instructs bonding to trust the driver to maintain carrier state.
+
+	As discussed in the options section, above, some drivers do
+not support the netif_carrier_on/_off link state tracking system.
+With use_carrier enabled, bonding will always see these links as up,
+regardless of their actual state.
+
+	Additionally, other drivers do support netif_carrier, but do
+not maintain it in real time, e.g., only polling the link state at
+some fixed interval.  In this case, miimon will detect failures, but
+only after some long period of time has expired.  If it appears that
+miimon is very slow in detecting link failures, try specifying
+use_carrier=0 to see if that improves the failure detection time.  If
+it does, then it may be that the driver checks the carrier state at a
+fixed interval, but does not cache the MII register values (so the
+use_carrier=0 method of querying the registers directly works).  If
+use_carrier=0 does not improve the failover, then the driver may cache
+the registers, or the problem may be elsewhere.
+
+	Also, remember that miimon only checks for the device's
+carrier state.  It has no way to determine the state of devices on or
+beyond other ports of a switch, or if a switch is refusing to pass
+traffic while still maintaining carrier on.
+
+9. SNMP agents
+===============
+
+	If running SNMP agents, the bonding driver should be loaded
+before any network drivers participating in a bond.  This requirement
+is due to the interface index (ipAdEntIfIndex) being associated to
+the first interface found with a given IP address.  That is, there is
+only one ipAdEntIfIndex for each IP address.  For example, if eth0 and
+eth1 are slaves of bond0 and the driver for eth0 is loaded before the
+bonding driver, the interface for the IP address will be associated
+with the eth0 interface.  This configuration is shown below, the IP
+address 192.168.1.1 has an interface index of 2 which indexes to eth0
+in the ifDescr table (ifDescr.2).
+
+     interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.1 = lo
+     interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.2 = eth0
+     interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.3 = eth1
+     interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.4 = eth2
+     interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.5 = eth3
+     interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.6 = bond0
+     ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.10.10.10.10 = 5
+     ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.192.168.1.1 = 2
+     ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.10.74.20.94 = 4
+     ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.127.0.0.1 = 1
+
+	This problem is avoided by loading the bonding driver before
+any network drivers participating in a bond.  Below is an example of
+loading the bonding driver first, the IP address 192.168.1.1 is
+correctly associated with ifDescr.2.
+
+     interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.1 = lo
+     interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.2 = bond0
+     interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.3 = eth0
+     interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.4 = eth1
+     interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.5 = eth2
+     interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.6 = eth3
+     ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.10.10.10.10 = 6
+     ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.192.168.1.1 = 2
+     ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.10.74.20.94 = 5
+     ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.127.0.0.1 = 1
+
+	While some distributions may not report the interface name in
+ifDescr, the association between the IP address and IfIndex remains
+and SNMP functions such as Interface_Scan_Next will report that
+association.
+
+10. Promiscuous mode
+====================
+
+	When running network monitoring tools, e.g., tcpdump, it is
+common to enable promiscuous mode on the device, so that all traffic
+is seen (instead of seeing only traffic destined for the local host).
+The bonding driver handles promiscuous mode changes to the bonding
+master device (e.g., bond0), and propagates the setting to the slave
+devices.
+
+	For the balance-rr, balance-xor, broadcast, and 802.3ad modes,
+the promiscuous mode setting is propagated to all slaves.
+
+	For the active-backup, balance-tlb and balance-alb modes, the
+promiscuous mode setting is propagated only to the active slave.
+
+	For balance-tlb mode, the active slave is the slave currently
+receiving inbound traffic.
+
+	For balance-alb mode, the active slave is the slave used as a
+"primary."  This slave is used for mode-specific control traffic, for
+sending to peers that are unassigned or if the load is unbalanced.
+
+	For the active-backup, balance-tlb and balance-alb modes, when
+the active slave changes (e.g., due to a link failure), the
+promiscuous setting will be propagated to the new active slave.
+
+11. Configuring Bonding for High Availability
+=============================================
+
+	High Availability refers to configurations that provide
+maximum network availability by having redundant or backup devices,
+links or switches between the host and the rest of the world.  The
+goal is to provide the maximum availability of network connectivity
+(i.e., the network always works), even though other configurations
+could provide higher throughput.
+
+11.1 High Availability in a Single Switch Topology
+--------------------------------------------------
+
+	If two hosts (or a host and a single switch) are directly
+connected via multiple physical links, then there is no availability
+penalty to optimizing for maximum bandwidth.  In this case, there is
+only one switch (or peer), so if it fails, there is no alternative
+access to fail over to.  Additionally, the bonding load balance modes
+support link monitoring of their members, so if individual links fail,
+the load will be rebalanced across the remaining devices.
+
+	See Section 13, "Configuring Bonding for Maximum Throughput"
+for information on configuring bonding with one peer device.
+
+11.2 High Availability in a Multiple Switch Topology
+----------------------------------------------------
+
+	With multiple switches, the configuration of bonding and the
+network changes dramatically.  In multiple switch topologies, there is
+a trade off between network availability and usable bandwidth.
+
+	Below is a sample network, configured to maximize the
+availability of the network:
+
+                |                                     |
+                |port3                           port3|
+          +-----+----+                          +-----+----+
+          |          |port2       ISL      port2|          |
+          | switch A +--------------------------+ switch B |
+          |          |                          |          |
+          +-----+----+                          +-----++---+
+                |port1                           port1|
+                |             +-------+               |
+                +-------------+ host1 +---------------+
+                         eth0 +-------+ eth1
+
+	In this configuration, there is a link between the two
+switches (ISL, or inter switch link), and multiple ports connecting to
+the outside world ("port3" on each switch).  There is no technical
+reason that this could not be extended to a third switch.
+
+11.2.1 HA Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
+-------------------------------------------------------------
+
+	In a topology such as the example above, the active-backup and
+broadcast modes are the only useful bonding modes when optimizing for
+availability; the other modes require all links to terminate on the
+same peer for them to behave rationally.
+
+active-backup: This is generally the preferred mode, particularly if
+	the switches have an ISL and play together well.  If the
+	network configuration is such that one switch is specifically
+	a backup switch (e.g., has lower capacity, higher cost, etc),
+	then the primary option can be used to insure that the
+	preferred link is always used when it is available.
+
+broadcast: This mode is really a special purpose mode, and is suitable
+	only for very specific needs.  For example, if the two
+	switches are not connected (no ISL), and the networks beyond
+	them are totally independent.  In this case, if it is
+	necessary for some specific one-way traffic to reach both
+	independent networks, then the broadcast mode may be suitable.
+
+11.2.2 HA Link Monitoring Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+	The choice of link monitoring ultimately depends upon your
+switch.  If the switch can reliably fail ports in response to other
+failures, then either the MII or ARP monitors should work.  For
+example, in the above example, if the "port3" link fails at the remote
+end, the MII monitor has no direct means to detect this.  The ARP
+monitor could be configured with a target at the remote end of port3,
+thus detecting that failure without switch support.
+
+	In general, however, in a multiple switch topology, the ARP
+monitor can provide a higher level of reliability in detecting end to
+end connectivity failures (which may be caused by the failure of any
+individual component to pass traffic for any reason).  Additionally,
+the ARP monitor should be configured with multiple targets (at least
+one for each switch in the network).  This will insure that,
+regardless of which switch is active, the ARP monitor has a suitable
+target to query.
+
+	Note, also, that of late many switches now support a functionality
+generally referred to as "trunk failover."  This is a feature of the
+switch that causes the link state of a particular switch port to be set
+down (or up) when the state of another switch port goes down (or up).
+Its purpose is to propagate link failures from logically "exterior" ports
+to the logically "interior" ports that bonding is able to monitor via
+miimon.  Availability and configuration for trunk failover varies by
+switch, but this can be a viable alternative to the ARP monitor when using
+suitable switches.
+
+12. Configuring Bonding for Maximum Throughput
+==============================================
+
+12.1 Maximizing Throughput in a Single Switch Topology
+------------------------------------------------------
+
+	In a single switch configuration, the best method to maximize
+throughput depends upon the application and network environment.  The
+various load balancing modes each have strengths and weaknesses in
+different environments, as detailed below.
+
+	For this discussion, we will break down the topologies into
+two categories.  Depending upon the destination of most traffic, we
+categorize them into either "gatewayed" or "local" configurations.
+
+	In a gatewayed configuration, the "switch" is acting primarily
+as a router, and the majority of traffic passes through this router to
+other networks.  An example would be the following:
+
+
+     +----------+                     +----------+
+     |          |eth0            port1|          | to other networks
+     | Host A   +---------------------+ router   +------------------->
+     |          +---------------------+          | Hosts B and C are out
+     |          |eth1            port2|          | here somewhere
+     +----------+                     +----------+
+
+	The router may be a dedicated router device, or another host
+acting as a gateway.  For our discussion, the important point is that
+the majority of traffic from Host A will pass through the router to
+some other network before reaching its final destination.
+
+	In a gatewayed network configuration, although Host A may
+communicate with many other systems, all of its traffic will be sent
+and received via one other peer on the local network, the router.
+
+	Note that the case of two systems connected directly via
+multiple physical links is, for purposes of configuring bonding, the
+same as a gatewayed configuration.  In that case, it happens that all
+traffic is destined for the "gateway" itself, not some other network
+beyond the gateway.
+
+	In a local configuration, the "switch" is acting primarily as
+a switch, and the majority of traffic passes through this switch to
+reach other stations on the same network.  An example would be the
+following:
+
+    +----------+            +----------+       +--------+
+    |          |eth0   port1|          +-------+ Host B |
+    |  Host A  +------------+  switch  |port3  +--------+
+    |          +------------+          |                  +--------+
+    |          |eth1   port2|          +------------------+ Host C |
+    +----------+            +----------+port4             +--------+
+
+
+	Again, the switch may be a dedicated switch device, or another
+host acting as a gateway.  For our discussion, the important point is
+that the majority of traffic from Host A is destined for other hosts
+on the same local network (Hosts B and C in the above example).
+
+	In summary, in a gatewayed configuration, traffic to and from
+the bonded device will be to the same MAC level peer on the network
+(the gateway itself, i.e., the router), regardless of its final
+destination.  In a local configuration, traffic flows directly to and
+from the final destinations, thus, each destination (Host B, Host C)
+will be addressed directly by their individual MAC addresses.
+
+	This distinction between a gatewayed and a local network
+configuration is important because many of the load balancing modes
+available use the MAC addresses of the local network source and
+destination to make load balancing decisions.  The behavior of each
+mode is described below.
+
+
+12.1.1 MT Bonding Mode Selection for Single Switch Topology
+-----------------------------------------------------------
+
+	This configuration is the easiest to set up and to understand,
+although you will have to decide which bonding mode best suits your
+needs.  The trade offs for each mode are detailed below:
+
+balance-rr: This mode is the only mode that will permit a single
+	TCP/IP connection to stripe traffic across multiple
+	interfaces. It is therefore the only mode that will allow a
+	single TCP/IP stream to utilize more than one interface's
+	worth of throughput.  This comes at a cost, however: the
+	striping generally results in peer systems receiving packets out
+	of order, causing TCP/IP's congestion control system to kick
+	in, often by retransmitting segments.
+
+	It is possible to adjust TCP/IP's congestion limits by
+	altering the net.ipv4.tcp_reordering sysctl parameter.  The
+	usual default value is 3, and the maximum useful value is 127.
+	For a four interface balance-rr bond, expect that a single
+	TCP/IP stream will utilize no more than approximately 2.3
+	interface's worth of throughput, even after adjusting
+	tcp_reordering.
+
+	Note that the fraction of packets that will be delivered out of
+	order is highly variable, and is unlikely to be zero.  The level
+	of reordering depends upon a variety of factors, including the
+	networking interfaces, the switch, and the topology of the
+	configuration.  Speaking in general terms, higher speed network
+	cards produce more reordering (due to factors such as packet
+	coalescing), and a "many to many" topology will reorder at a
+	higher rate than a "many slow to one fast" configuration.
+
+	Many switches do not support any modes that stripe traffic
+	(instead choosing a port based upon IP or MAC level addresses);
+	for those devices, traffic for a particular connection flowing
+	through the switch to a balance-rr bond will not utilize greater
+	than one interface's worth of bandwidth.
+
+	If you are utilizing protocols other than TCP/IP, UDP for
+	example, and your application can tolerate out of order
+	delivery, then this mode can allow for single stream datagram
+	performance that scales near linearly as interfaces are added
+	to the bond.
+
+	This mode requires the switch to have the appropriate ports
+	configured for "etherchannel" or "trunking."
+
+active-backup: There is not much advantage in this network topology to
+	the active-backup mode, as the inactive backup devices are all
+	connected to the same peer as the primary.  In this case, a
+	load balancing mode (with link monitoring) will provide the
+	same level of network availability, but with increased
+	available bandwidth.  On the plus side, active-backup mode
+	does not require any configuration of the switch, so it may
+	have value if the hardware available does not support any of
+	the load balance modes.
+
+balance-xor: This mode will limit traffic such that packets destined
+	for specific peers will always be sent over the same
+	interface.  Since the destination is determined by the MAC
+	addresses involved, this mode works best in a "local" network
+	configuration (as described above), with destinations all on
+	the same local network.  This mode is likely to be suboptimal
+	if all your traffic is passed through a single router (i.e., a
+	"gatewayed" network configuration, as described above).
+
+	As with balance-rr, the switch ports need to be configured for
+	"etherchannel" or "trunking."
+
+broadcast: Like active-backup, there is not much advantage to this
+	mode in this type of network topology.
+
+802.3ad: This mode can be a good choice for this type of network
+	topology.  The 802.3ad mode is an IEEE standard, so all peers
+	that implement 802.3ad should interoperate well.  The 802.3ad
+	protocol includes automatic configuration of the aggregates,
+	so minimal manual configuration of the switch is needed
+	(typically only to designate that some set of devices is
+	available for 802.3ad).  The 802.3ad standard also mandates
+	that frames be delivered in order (within certain limits), so
+	in general single connections will not see misordering of
+	packets.  The 802.3ad mode does have some drawbacks: the
+	standard mandates that all devices in the aggregate operate at
+	the same speed and duplex.  Also, as with all bonding load
+	balance modes other than balance-rr, no single connection will
+	be able to utilize more than a single interface's worth of
+	bandwidth.  
+
+	Additionally, the linux bonding 802.3ad implementation
+	distributes traffic by peer (using an XOR of MAC addresses),
+	so in a "gatewayed" configuration, all outgoing traffic will
+	generally use the same device.  Incoming traffic may also end
+	up on a single device, but that is dependent upon the
+	balancing policy of the peer's 8023.ad implementation.  In a
+	"local" configuration, traffic will be distributed across the
+	devices in the bond.
+
+	Finally, the 802.3ad mode mandates the use of the MII monitor,
+	therefore, the ARP monitor is not available in this mode.
+
+balance-tlb: The balance-tlb mode balances outgoing traffic by peer.
+	Since the balancing is done according to MAC address, in a
+	"gatewayed" configuration (as described above), this mode will
+	send all traffic across a single device.  However, in a
+	"local" network configuration, this mode balances multiple
+	local network peers across devices in a vaguely intelligent
+	manner (not a simple XOR as in balance-xor or 802.3ad mode),
+	so that mathematically unlucky MAC addresses (i.e., ones that
+	XOR to the same value) will not all "bunch up" on a single
+	interface.
+
+	Unlike 802.3ad, interfaces may be of differing speeds, and no
+	special switch configuration is required.  On the down side,
+	in this mode all incoming traffic arrives over a single
+	interface, this mode requires certain ethtool support in the
+	network device driver of the slave interfaces, and the ARP
+	monitor is not available.
+
+balance-alb: This mode is everything that balance-tlb is, and more.
+	It has all of the features (and restrictions) of balance-tlb,
+	and will also balance incoming traffic from local network
+	peers (as described in the Bonding Module Options section,
+	above).
+
+	The only additional down side to this mode is that the network
+	device driver must support changing the hardware address while
+	the device is open.
+
+12.1.2 MT Link Monitoring for Single Switch Topology
+----------------------------------------------------
+
+	The choice of link monitoring may largely depend upon which
+mode you choose to use.  The more advanced load balancing modes do not
+support the use of the ARP monitor, and are thus restricted to using
+the MII monitor (which does not provide as high a level of end to end
+assurance as the ARP monitor).
+
+12.2 Maximum Throughput in a Multiple Switch Topology
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+	Multiple switches may be utilized to optimize for throughput
+when they are configured in parallel as part of an isolated network
+between two or more systems, for example:
+
+                       +-----------+
+                       |  Host A   | 
+                       +-+---+---+-+
+                         |   |   |
+                +--------+   |   +---------+
+                |            |             |
+         +------+---+  +-----+----+  +-----+----+
+         | Switch A |  | Switch B |  | Switch C |
+         +------+---+  +-----+----+  +-----+----+
+                |            |             |
+                +--------+   |   +---------+
+                         |   |   |
+                       +-+---+---+-+
+                       |  Host B   | 
+                       +-----------+
+
+	In this configuration, the switches are isolated from one
+another.  One reason to employ a topology such as this is for an
+isolated network with many hosts (a cluster configured for high
+performance, for example), using multiple smaller switches can be more
+cost effective than a single larger switch, e.g., on a network with 24
+hosts, three 24 port switches can be significantly less expensive than
+a single 72 port switch.
+
+	If access beyond the network is required, an individual host
+can be equipped with an additional network device connected to an
+external network; this host then additionally acts as a gateway.
+
+12.2.1 MT Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
+-------------------------------------------------------------
+
+	In actual practice, the bonding mode typically employed in
+configurations of this type is balance-rr.  Historically, in this
+network configuration, the usual caveats about out of order packet
+delivery are mitigated by the use of network adapters that do not do
+any kind of packet coalescing (via the use of NAPI, or because the
+device itself does not generate interrupts until some number of
+packets has arrived).  When employed in this fashion, the balance-rr
+mode allows individual connections between two hosts to effectively
+utilize greater than one interface's bandwidth.
+
+12.2.2 MT Link Monitoring for Multiple Switch Topology
+------------------------------------------------------
+
+	Again, in actual practice, the MII monitor is most often used
+in this configuration, as performance is given preference over
+availability.  The ARP monitor will function in this topology, but its
+advantages over the MII monitor are mitigated by the volume of probes
+needed as the number of systems involved grows (remember that each
+host in the network is configured with bonding).
+
+13. Switch Behavior Issues
+==========================
+
+13.1 Link Establishment and Failover Delays
+-------------------------------------------
+
+	Some switches exhibit undesirable behavior with regard to the
+timing of link up and down reporting by the switch.
+
+	First, when a link comes up, some switches may indicate that
+the link is up (carrier available), but not pass traffic over the
+interface for some period of time.  This delay is typically due to
+some type of autonegotiation or routing protocol, but may also occur
+during switch initialization (e.g., during recovery after a switch
+failure).  If you find this to be a problem, specify an appropriate
+value to the updelay bonding module option to delay the use of the
+relevant interface(s).
+
+	Second, some switches may "bounce" the link state one or more
+times while a link is changing state.  This occurs most commonly while
+the switch is initializing.  Again, an appropriate updelay value may
+help.
+
+	Note that when a bonding interface has no active links, the
+driver will immediately reuse the first link that goes up, even if the
+updelay parameter has been specified (the updelay is ignored in this
+case).  If there are slave interfaces waiting for the updelay timeout
+to expire, the interface that first went into that state will be
+immediately reused.  This reduces down time of the network if the
+value of updelay has been overestimated, and since this occurs only in
+cases with no connectivity, there is no additional penalty for
+ignoring the updelay.
+
+	In addition to the concerns about switch timings, if your
+switches take a long time to go into backup mode, it may be desirable
+to not activate a backup interface immediately after a link goes down.
+Failover may be delayed via the downdelay bonding module option.
+
+13.2 Duplicated Incoming Packets
+--------------------------------
+
+	NOTE: Starting with version 3.0.2, the bonding driver has logic to
+suppress duplicate packets, which should largely eliminate this problem.
+The following description is kept for reference.
+
+	It is not uncommon to observe a short burst of duplicated
+traffic when the bonding device is first used, or after it has been
+idle for some period of time.  This is most easily observed by issuing
+a "ping" to some other host on the network, and noticing that the
+output from ping flags duplicates (typically one per slave).
+
+	For example, on a bond in active-backup mode with five slaves
+all connected to one switch, the output may appear as follows:
+
+# ping -n 10.0.4.2
+PING 10.0.4.2 (10.0.4.2) from 10.0.3.10 : 56(84) bytes of data.
+64 bytes from 10.0.4.2: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=13.7 ms
+64 bytes from 10.0.4.2: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=13.8 ms (DUP!)
+64 bytes from 10.0.4.2: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=13.8 ms (DUP!)
+64 bytes from 10.0.4.2: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=13.8 ms (DUP!)
+64 bytes from 10.0.4.2: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=13.8 ms (DUP!)
+64 bytes from 10.0.4.2: icmp_seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.216 ms
+64 bytes from 10.0.4.2: icmp_seq=3 ttl=64 time=0.267 ms
+64 bytes from 10.0.4.2: icmp_seq=4 ttl=64 time=0.222 ms
+
+	This is not due to an error in the bonding driver, rather, it
+is a side effect of how many switches update their MAC forwarding
+tables.  Initially, the switch does not associate the MAC address in
+the packet with a particular switch port, and so it may send the
+traffic to all ports until its MAC forwarding table is updated.  Since
+the interfaces attached to the bond may occupy multiple ports on a
+single switch, when the switch (temporarily) floods the traffic to all
+ports, the bond device receives multiple copies of the same packet
+(one per slave device).
+
+	The duplicated packet behavior is switch dependent, some
+switches exhibit this, and some do not.  On switches that display this
+behavior, it can be induced by clearing the MAC forwarding table (on
+most Cisco switches, the privileged command "clear mac address-table
+dynamic" will accomplish this).
+
+14. Hardware Specific Considerations
+====================================
+
+	This section contains additional information for configuring
+bonding on specific hardware platforms, or for interfacing bonding
+with particular switches or other devices.
+
+14.1 IBM BladeCenter
+--------------------
+
+	This applies to the JS20 and similar systems.
+
+	On the JS20 blades, the bonding driver supports only
+balance-rr, active-backup, balance-tlb and balance-alb modes.  This is
+largely due to the network topology inside the BladeCenter, detailed
+below.
+
+JS20 network adapter information
+--------------------------------
+
+	All JS20s come with two Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet ports
+integrated on the planar (that's "motherboard" in IBM-speak).  In the
+BladeCenter chassis, the eth0 port of all JS20 blades is hard wired to
+I/O Module #1; similarly, all eth1 ports are wired to I/O Module #2.
+An add-on Broadcom daughter card can be installed on a JS20 to provide
+two more Gigabit Ethernet ports.  These ports, eth2 and eth3, are
+wired to I/O Modules 3 and 4, respectively.
+
+	Each I/O Module may contain either a switch or a passthrough
+module (which allows ports to be directly connected to an external
+switch).  Some bonding modes require a specific BladeCenter internal
+network topology in order to function; these are detailed below.
+
+	Additional BladeCenter-specific networking information can be
+found in two IBM Redbooks (www.ibm.com/redbooks):
+
+"IBM eServer BladeCenter Networking Options"
+"IBM eServer BladeCenter Layer 2-7 Network Switching"
+
+BladeCenter networking configuration
+------------------------------------
+
+	Because a BladeCenter can be configured in a very large number
+of ways, this discussion will be confined to describing basic
+configurations.
+
+	Normally, Ethernet Switch Modules (ESMs) are used in I/O
+modules 1 and 2.  In this configuration, the eth0 and eth1 ports of a
+JS20 will be connected to different internal switches (in the
+respective I/O modules).
+
+	A passthrough module (OPM or CPM, optical or copper,
+passthrough module) connects the I/O module directly to an external
+switch.  By using PMs in I/O module #1 and #2, the eth0 and eth1
+interfaces of a JS20 can be redirected to the outside world and
+connected to a common external switch.
+
+	Depending upon the mix of ESMs and PMs, the network will
+appear to bonding as either a single switch topology (all PMs) or as a
+multiple switch topology (one or more ESMs, zero or more PMs).  It is
+also possible to connect ESMs together, resulting in a configuration
+much like the example in "High Availability in a Multiple Switch
+Topology," above.
+
+Requirements for specific modes
+-------------------------------
+
+	The balance-rr mode requires the use of passthrough modules
+for devices in the bond, all connected to an common external switch.
+That switch must be configured for "etherchannel" or "trunking" on the
+appropriate ports, as is usual for balance-rr.
+
+	The balance-alb and balance-tlb modes will function with
+either switch modules or passthrough modules (or a mix).  The only
+specific requirement for these modes is that all network interfaces
+must be able to reach all destinations for traffic sent over the
+bonding device (i.e., the network must converge at some point outside
+the BladeCenter).
+
+	The active-backup mode has no additional requirements.
+
+Link monitoring issues
+----------------------
+
+	When an Ethernet Switch Module is in place, only the ARP
+monitor will reliably detect link loss to an external switch.  This is
+nothing unusual, but examination of the BladeCenter cabinet would
+suggest that the "external" network ports are the ethernet ports for
+the system, when it fact there is a switch between these "external"
+ports and the devices on the JS20 system itself.  The MII monitor is
+only able to detect link failures between the ESM and the JS20 system.
+
+	When a passthrough module is in place, the MII monitor does
+detect failures to the "external" port, which is then directly
+connected to the JS20 system.
+
+Other concerns
+--------------
+
+	The Serial Over LAN (SoL) link is established over the primary
+ethernet (eth0) only, therefore, any loss of link to eth0 will result
+in losing your SoL connection.  It will not fail over with other
+network traffic, as the SoL system is beyond the control of the
+bonding driver.
+
+	It may be desirable to disable spanning tree on the switch
+(either the internal Ethernet Switch Module, or an external switch) to
+avoid fail-over delay issues when using bonding.
+
+	
+15. Frequently Asked Questions
+==============================
+
+1.  Is it SMP safe?
+
+	Yes. The old 2.0.xx channel bonding patch was not SMP safe.
+The new driver was designed to be SMP safe from the start.
+
+2.  What type of cards will work with it?
+
+	Any Ethernet type cards (you can even mix cards - a Intel
+EtherExpress PRO/100 and a 3com 3c905b, for example).  For most modes,
+devices need not be of the same speed.
+
+	Starting with version 3.2.1, bonding also supports Infiniband
+slaves in active-backup mode.
+
+3.  How many bonding devices can I have?
+
+	There is no limit.
+
+4.  How many slaves can a bonding device have?
+
+	This is limited only by the number of network interfaces Linux
+supports and/or the number of network cards you can place in your
+system.
+
+5.  What happens when a slave link dies?
+
+	If link monitoring is enabled, then the failing device will be
+disabled.  The active-backup mode will fail over to a backup link, and
+other modes will ignore the failed link.  The link will continue to be
+monitored, and should it recover, it will rejoin the bond (in whatever
+manner is appropriate for the mode). See the sections on High
+Availability and the documentation for each mode for additional
+information.
+	
+	Link monitoring can be enabled via either the miimon or
+arp_interval parameters (described in the module parameters section,
+above).  In general, miimon monitors the carrier state as sensed by
+the underlying network device, and the arp monitor (arp_interval)
+monitors connectivity to another host on the local network.
+
+	If no link monitoring is configured, the bonding driver will
+be unable to detect link failures, and will assume that all links are
+always available.  This will likely result in lost packets, and a
+resulting degradation of performance.  The precise performance loss
+depends upon the bonding mode and network configuration.
+
+6.  Can bonding be used for High Availability?
+
+	Yes.  See the section on High Availability for details.
+
+7.  Which switches/systems does it work with?
+
+	The full answer to this depends upon the desired mode.
+
+	In the basic balance modes (balance-rr and balance-xor), it
+works with any system that supports etherchannel (also called
+trunking).  Most managed switches currently available have such
+support, and many unmanaged switches as well.
+
+	The advanced balance modes (balance-tlb and balance-alb) do
+not have special switch requirements, but do need device drivers that
+support specific features (described in the appropriate section under
+module parameters, above).
+
+	In 802.3ad mode, it works with systems that support IEEE
+802.3ad Dynamic Link Aggregation.  Most managed and many unmanaged
+switches currently available support 802.3ad.
+
+        The active-backup mode should work with any Layer-II switch.
+
+8.  Where does a bonding device get its MAC address from?
+
+	When using slave devices that have fixed MAC addresses, or when
+the fail_over_mac option is enabled, the bonding device's MAC address is
+the MAC address of the active slave.
+
+	For other configurations, if not explicitly configured (with
+ifconfig or ip link), the MAC address of the bonding device is taken from
+its first slave device.  This MAC address is then passed to all following
+slaves and remains persistent (even if the first slave is removed) until
+the bonding device is brought down or reconfigured.
+
+	If you wish to change the MAC address, you can set it with
+ifconfig or ip link:
+
+# ifconfig bond0 hw ether 00:11:22:33:44:55
+
+# ip link set bond0 address 66:77:88:99:aa:bb
+
+	The MAC address can be also changed by bringing down/up the
+device and then changing its slaves (or their order):
+
+# ifconfig bond0 down ; modprobe -r bonding
+# ifconfig bond0 .... up
+# ifenslave bond0 eth...
+
+	This method will automatically take the address from the next
+slave that is added.
+
+	To restore your slaves' MAC addresses, you need to detach them
+from the bond (`ifenslave -d bond0 eth0'). The bonding driver will
+then restore the MAC addresses that the slaves had before they were
+enslaved.
+
+16. Resources and Links
+=======================
+
+	The latest version of the bonding driver can be found in the latest
+version of the linux kernel, found on http://kernel.org
+
+	The latest version of this document can be found in the latest kernel
+source (named Documentation/networking/bonding.txt).
+
+	Discussions regarding the usage of the bonding driver take place on the
+bonding-devel mailing list, hosted at sourceforge.net. If you have questions or
+problems, post them to the list.  The list address is:
+
+bonding-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
+
+	The administrative interface (to subscribe or unsubscribe) can
+be found at:
+
+https://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/bonding-devel
+
+	Discussions regarding the developpement of the bonding driver take place
+on the main Linux network mailing list, hosted at vger.kernel.org. The list
+address is:
+
+netdev@vger.kernel.org
+
+	The administrative interface (to subscribe or unsubscribe) can
+be found at:
+
+http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#netdev
+
+Donald Becker's Ethernet Drivers and diag programs may be found at :
+ - http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://www.scyld.com/network/ 
+
+You will also find a lot of information regarding Ethernet, NWay, MII,
+etc. at www.scyld.com.
+
+-- END --
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt b/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a7ba5e4e2c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+In order to use the Ethernet bridging functionality, you'll need the
+userspace tools. These programs and documentation are available
+at http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/Net:Bridge.  The download page is
+http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/bridge.
+
+If you still have questions, don't hesitate to post to the mailing list 
+(more info https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bridge).
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt b/Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e52fd62bef3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,212 @@
+Linux CAIF
+===========
+copyright (C) ST-Ericsson AB 2010
+Author: Sjur Brendeland/ sjur.brandeland@stericsson.com
+License terms: GNU General Public License (GPL) version 2
+
+
+Introduction
+------------
+CAIF is a MUX protocol used by ST-Ericsson cellular modems for
+communication between Modem and host. The host processes can open virtual AT
+channels, initiate GPRS Data connections, Video channels and Utility Channels.
+The Utility Channels are general purpose pipes between modem and host.
+
+ST-Ericsson modems support a number of transports between modem
+and host. Currently, UART and Loopback are available for Linux.
+
+
+Architecture:
+------------
+The implementation of CAIF is divided into:
+* CAIF Socket Layer, Kernel API, and  Net Device.
+* CAIF Core Protocol Implementation
+* CAIF Link Layer, implemented as NET devices.
+
+
+  RTNL
+   !
+   !	 +------+   +------+   +------+
+   !	+------+!  +------+!  +------+!
+   !	! Sock !!  !Kernel!!  ! Net  !!
+   !	! API  !+  ! API  !+  ! Dev  !+	  <- CAIF Client APIs
+   !	+------+   +------!   +------+
+   !	   !	      !		 !
+   !	   +----------!----------+
+   !		   +------+		  <- CAIF Protocol Implementation
+   +------->	   ! CAIF !
+		   ! Core !
+		   +------+
+	     +--------!--------+
+	     !		       !
+	  +------+	    +-----+
+	  !    	 !	    ! TTY !	  <- Link Layer (Net Devices)
+	  +------+	    +-----+
+
+
+Using the Kernel API
+----------------------
+The Kernel API is used for accessing CAIF channels from the
+kernel.
+The user of the API has to implement two callbacks for receive
+and control.
+The receive callback gives a CAIF packet as a SKB. The control
+callback will
+notify of channel initialization complete, and flow-on/flow-
+off.
+
+
+  struct caif_device caif_dev = {
+    .caif_config = {
+     .name = "MYDEV"
+     .type = CAIF_CHTY_AT
+    }
+   .receive_cb = my_receive,
+   .control_cb = my_control,
+  };
+  caif_add_device(&caif_dev);
+  caif_transmit(&caif_dev, skb);
+
+See the caif_kernel.h for details about the CAIF kernel API.
+
+
+I M P L E M E N T A T I O N
+===========================
+===========================
+
+CAIF Core Protocol Layer
+=========================================
+
+CAIF Core layer implements the CAIF protocol as defined by ST-Ericsson.
+It implements the CAIF protocol stack in a layered approach, where
+each layer described in the specification is implemented as a separate layer.
+The architecture is inspired by the design patterns "Protocol Layer" and
+"Protocol Packet".
+
+== CAIF structure ==
+The Core CAIF implementation contains:
+      -	Simple implementation of CAIF.
+      -	Layered architecture (a la Streams), each layer in the CAIF
+	specification is implemented in a separate c-file.
+      -	Clients must implement PHY layer to access physical HW
+	with receive and transmit functions.
+      -	Clients must call configuration function to add PHY layer.
+      -	Clients must implement CAIF layer to consume/produce
+	CAIF payload with receive and transmit functions.
+      -	Clients must call configuration function to add and connect the
+	Client layer.
+      - When receiving / transmitting CAIF Packets (cfpkt), ownership is passed
+	to the called function (except for framing layers' receive functions
+	or if a transmit function returns an error, in which case the caller
+	must free the packet).
+
+Layered Architecture
+--------------------
+The CAIF protocol can be divided into two parts: Support functions and Protocol
+Implementation. The support functions include:
+
+      - CFPKT CAIF Packet. Implementation of CAIF Protocol Packet. The
+	CAIF Packet has functions for creating, destroying and adding content
+	and for adding/extracting header and trailers to protocol packets.
+
+      - CFLST CAIF list implementation.
+
+      - CFGLUE CAIF Glue. Contains OS Specifics, such as memory
+	allocation, endianness, etc.
+
+The CAIF Protocol implementation contains:
+
+      - CFCNFG CAIF Configuration layer. Configures the CAIF Protocol
+	Stack and provides a Client interface for adding Link-Layer and
+	Driver interfaces on top of the CAIF Stack.
+
+      - CFCTRL CAIF Control layer. Encodes and Decodes control messages
+	such as enumeration and channel setup. Also matches request and
+	response messages.
+
+      - CFSERVL General CAIF Service Layer functionality; handles flow
+	control and remote shutdown requests.
+
+      - CFVEI CAIF VEI layer. Handles CAIF AT Channels on VEI (Virtual
+        External Interface). This layer encodes/decodes VEI frames.
+
+      - CFDGML CAIF Datagram layer. Handles CAIF Datagram layer (IP
+	traffic), encodes/decodes Datagram frames.
+
+      - CFMUX CAIF Mux layer. Handles multiplexing between multiple
+	physical bearers and multiple channels such as VEI, Datagram, etc.
+	The MUX keeps track of the existing CAIF Channels and
+	Physical Instances and selects the appropriate instance based
+	on Channel-Id and Physical-ID.
+
+      - CFFRML CAIF Framing layer. Handles Framing i.e. Frame length
+	and frame checksum.
+
+      - CFSERL CAIF Serial layer. Handles concatenation/split of frames
+	into CAIF Frames with correct length.
+
+
+
+		    +---------+
+		    | Config  |
+		    | CFCNFG  |
+		    +---------+
+			 !
+    +---------+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+    |	AT    |	    | Control |	    | Datagram|
+    | CFVEIL  |	    | CFCTRL  |	    | CFDGML  |
+    +---------+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+	   \_____________!______________/
+			 !
+		    +---------+
+		    |	MUX   |
+		    |	      |
+		    +---------+
+		    _____!_____
+		   /	       \
+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+	    | CFFRML  |	    | CFFRML  |
+	    | Framing |	    | Framing |
+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+		 !		!
+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+	    |         |	    | Serial  |
+	    |	      |	    | CFSERL  |
+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+
+
+In this layered approach the following "rules" apply.
+      - All layers embed the same structure "struct cflayer"
+      - A layer does not depend on any other layer's private data.
+      - Layers are stacked by setting the pointers
+		  layer->up , layer->dn
+      -	In order to send data upwards, each layer should do
+		 layer->up->receive(layer->up, packet);
+      - In order to send data downwards, each layer should do
+		 layer->dn->transmit(layer->dn, packet);
+
+
+Linux Driver Implementation
+===========================
+
+Linux GPRS Net Device and CAIF socket are implemented on top of the
+CAIF Core protocol. The Net device and CAIF socket have an instance of
+'struct cflayer', just like the CAIF Core protocol stack.
+Net device and Socket implement the 'receive()' function defined by
+'struct cflayer', just like the rest of the CAIF stack. In this way, transmit and
+receive of packets is handled as by the rest of the layers: the 'dn->transmit()'
+function is called in order to transmit data.
+
+The layer on top of the CAIF Core implementation is
+sometimes referred to as the "Client layer".
+
+
+Configuration of Link Layer
+---------------------------
+The Link Layer is implemented as Linux net devices (struct net_device).
+Payload handling and registration is done using standard Linux mechanisms.
+
+The CAIF Protocol relies on a loss-less link layer without implementing
+retransmission. This implies that packet drops must not happen.
+Therefore a flow-control mechanism is implemented where the physical
+interface can initiate flow stop for all CAIF Channels.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/caif/README b/Documentation/networking/caif/README
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..757ccfaa138
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/caif/README
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+Copyright (C) ST-Ericsson AB 2010
+Author: Sjur Brendeland/ sjur.brandeland@stericsson.com
+License terms: GNU General Public License (GPL) version 2
+---------------------------------------------------------
+
+=== Start ===
+If you have compiled CAIF for modules do:
+
+$modprobe crc_ccitt
+$modprobe caif
+$modprobe caif_socket
+$modprobe chnl_net
+
+
+=== Preparing the setup with a STE modem ===
+
+If you are working on integration of CAIF you should make sure
+that the kernel is built with module support.
+
+There are some things that need to be tweaked to get the host TTY correctly
+set up to talk to the modem.
+Since the CAIF stack is running in the kernel and we want to use the existing
+TTY, we are installing our physical serial driver as a line discipline above
+the TTY device.
+
+To achieve this we need to install the N_CAIF ldisc from user space.
+The benefit is that we can hook up to any TTY.
+
+The use of Start-of-frame-extension (STX) must also be set as
+module parameter "ser_use_stx".
+
+Normally Frame Checksum is always used on UART, but this is also provided as a
+module parameter "ser_use_fcs".
+
+$ modprobe caif_serial ser_ttyname=/dev/ttyS0 ser_use_stx=yes
+$ ifconfig caif_ttyS0 up
+
+PLEASE NOTE: 	There is a limitation in Android shell.
+		It only accepts one argument to insmod/modprobe!
+
+=== Trouble shooting ===
+
+There are debugfs parameters provided for serial communication.
+/sys/kernel/debug/caif_serial/<tty-name>/
+
+* ser_state:   Prints the bit-mask status where
+  - 0x02 means SENDING, this is a transient state.
+  - 0x10 means FLOW_OFF_SENT, i.e. the previous frame has not been sent
+	and is blocking further send operation. Flow OFF has been propagated
+	to all CAIF Channels using this TTY.
+
+* tty_status: Prints the bit-mask tty status information
+  - 0x01 - tty->warned is on.
+  - 0x02 - tty->low_latency is on.
+  - 0x04 - tty->packed is on.
+  - 0x08 - tty->flow_stopped is on.
+  - 0x10 - tty->hw_stopped is on.
+  - 0x20 - tty->stopped is on.
+
+* last_tx_msg: Binary blob Prints the last transmitted frame.
+	This can be printed with
+	$od --format=x1 /sys/kernel/debug/caif_serial/<tty>/last_rx_msg.
+	The first two tx messages sent look like this. Note: The initial
+	byte 02 is start of frame extension (STX) used for re-syncing
+	upon errors.
+
+  - Enumeration:
+        0000000  02 05 00 00 03 01 d2 02
+                 |  |     |  |  |  |
+                 STX(1)   |  |  |  |
+                    Length(2)|  |  |
+                          Control Channel(1)
+                             Command:Enumeration(1)
+                                Link-ID(1)
+                                    Checksum(2)
+  - Channel Setup:
+        0000000  02 07 00 00 00 21 a1 00 48 df
+                 |  |     |  |  |  |  |  |
+                 STX(1)   |  |  |  |  |  |
+                    Length(2)|  |  |  |  |
+                          Control Channel(1)
+                             Command:Channel Setup(1)
+                                Channel Type(1)
+                                    Priority and Link-ID(1)
+				      Endpoint(1)
+					  Checksum(2)
+
+* last_rx_msg: Prints the last transmitted frame.
+	The RX messages for LinkSetup look almost identical but they have the
+	bit 0x20 set in the command bit, and Channel Setup has added one byte
+	before Checksum containing Channel ID.
+	NOTE: Several CAIF Messages might be concatenated. The maximum debug
+	buffer size is 128 bytes.
+
+== Error Scenarios:
+- last_tx_msg contains channel setup message and last_rx_msg is empty ->
+  The host seems to be able to send over the UART, at least the CAIF ldisc get
+  notified that sending is completed.
+
+- last_tx_msg contains enumeration message and last_rx_msg is empty ->
+  The host is not able to send the message from UART, the tty has not been
+  able to complete the transmit operation.
+
+- if /sys/kernel/debug/caif_serial/<tty>/tty_status is non-zero there
+  might be problems transmitting over UART.
+  E.g. host and modem wiring is not correct you will typically see
+  tty_status = 0x10 (hw_stopped) and ser_state = 0x10 (FLOW_OFF_SENT).
+  You will probably see the enumeration message in last_tx_message
+  and empty last_rx_message.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt b/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9efd0687dc4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+- CAIF SPI porting -
+
+- CAIF SPI basics:
+
+Running CAIF over SPI needs some extra setup, owing to the nature of SPI.
+Two extra GPIOs have been added in order to negotiate the transfers
+ between the master and the slave. The minimum requirement for running
+CAIF over SPI is a SPI slave chip and two GPIOs (more details below).
+Please note that running as a slave implies that you need to keep up
+with the master clock. An overrun or underrun event is fatal.
+
+- CAIF SPI framework:
+
+To make porting as easy as possible, the CAIF SPI has been divided in
+two parts. The first part (called the interface part) deals with all
+generic functionality such as length framing, SPI frame negotiation
+and SPI frame delivery and transmission. The other part is the CAIF
+SPI slave device part, which is the module that you have to write if
+you want to run SPI CAIF on a new hardware. This part takes care of
+the physical hardware, both with regard to SPI and to GPIOs.
+
+- Implementing a CAIF SPI device:
+
+	- Functionality provided by the CAIF SPI slave device:
+
+	In order to implement a SPI device you will, as a minimum,
+	need to implement the following
+	functions:
+
+	int (*init_xfer) (struct cfspi_xfer * xfer, struct cfspi_dev *dev):
+
+	This function is called by the CAIF SPI interface to give
+	you a chance to set up your hardware to be ready to receive
+	a stream of data from the master. The xfer structure contains
+	both physical and logical addresses, as well as the total length
+	of the transfer in both directions.The dev parameter can be used
+	to map to different CAIF SPI slave devices.
+
+	void (*sig_xfer) (bool xfer, struct cfspi_dev *dev):
+
+	This function is called by the CAIF SPI interface when the output
+	(SPI_INT) GPIO needs to change state. The boolean value of the xfer
+	variable indicates whether the GPIO should be asserted (HIGH) or
+	deasserted (LOW). The dev parameter can be used to map to different CAIF
+	SPI slave devices.
+
+	- Functionality provided by the CAIF SPI interface:
+
+	void (*ss_cb) (bool assert, struct cfspi_ifc *ifc);
+
+	This function is called by the CAIF SPI slave device in order to
+	signal a change of state of the input GPIO (SS) to the interface.
+	Only active edges are mandatory to be reported.
+	This function can be called from IRQ context (recommended in order
+	not to introduce latency). The ifc parameter should be the pointer
+	returned from the platform probe function in the SPI device structure.
+
+	void (*xfer_done_cb) (struct cfspi_ifc *ifc);
+
+	This function is called by the CAIF SPI slave device in order to
+	report that a transfer is completed. This function should only be
+	called once both the transmission and the reception are completed.
+	This function can be called from IRQ context (recommended in order
+	not to introduce latency). The ifc parameter should be the pointer
+	returned from the platform probe function in the SPI device structure.
+
+	- Connecting the bits and pieces:
+
+		- Filling in the SPI slave device structure:
+
+		Connect the necessary callback functions.
+		Indicate clock speed (used to calculate toggle delays).
+		Chose a suitable name (helps debugging if you use several CAIF
+		SPI slave devices).
+		Assign your private data (can be used to map to your structure).
+
+		- Filling in the SPI slave platform device structure:
+		Add name of driver to connect to ("cfspi_sspi").
+		Assign the SPI slave device structure as platform data.
+
+- Padding:
+
+In order to optimize throughput, a number of SPI padding options are provided.
+Padding can be enabled independently for uplink and downlink transfers.
+Padding can be enabled for the head, the tail and for the total frame size.
+The padding needs to be correctly configured on both sides of the link.
+The padding can be changed via module parameters in cfspi_sspi.c or via
+the sysfs directory of the cfspi_sspi driver (before device registration).
+
+- CAIF SPI device template:
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright (C) ST-Ericsson AB 2010
+ *	Author: Daniel Martensson / Daniel.Martensson@stericsson.com
+ *	License terms: GNU General Public License (GPL), version 2.
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <linux/init.h>
+#include <linux/module.h>
+#include <linux/device.h>
+#include <linux/wait.h>
+#include <linux/interrupt.h>
+#include <linux/dma-mapping.h>
+#include <net/caif/caif_spi.h>
+
+MODULE_LICENSE("GPL");
+
+struct sspi_struct {
+	struct cfspi_dev sdev;
+	struct cfspi_xfer *xfer;
+};
+
+static struct sspi_struct slave;
+static struct platform_device slave_device;
+
+static irqreturn_t sspi_irq(int irq, void *arg)
+{
+	/* You only need to trigger on an edge to the active state of the
+	 * SS signal. Once a edge is detected, the ss_cb() function should be
+	 * called with the parameter assert set to true. It is OK
+	 * (and even advised) to call the ss_cb() function in IRQ context in
+	 * order not to add any delay. */
+
+	return IRQ_HANDLED;
+}
+
+static void sspi_complete(void *context)
+{
+	/* Normally the DMA or the SPI framework will call you back
+	 * in something similar to this. The only thing you need to
+	 * do is to call the xfer_done_cb() function, providing the pointer
+	 * to the CAIF SPI interface. It is OK to call this function
+	 * from IRQ context. */
+}
+
+static int sspi_init_xfer(struct cfspi_xfer *xfer, struct cfspi_dev *dev)
+{
+	/* Store transfer info. For a normal implementation you should
+	 * set up your DMA here and make sure that you are ready to
+	 * receive the data from the master SPI. */
+
+	struct sspi_struct *sspi = (struct sspi_struct *)dev->priv;
+
+	sspi->xfer = xfer;
+
+	return 0;
+}
+
+void sspi_sig_xfer(bool xfer, struct cfspi_dev *dev)
+{
+	/* If xfer is true then you should assert the SPI_INT to indicate to
+	 * the master that you are ready to receive the data from the master
+	 * SPI. If xfer is false then you should de-assert SPI_INT to indicate
+	 * that the transfer is done.
+	 */
+
+	struct sspi_struct *sspi = (struct sspi_struct *)dev->priv;
+}
+
+static void sspi_release(struct device *dev)
+{
+	/*
+	 * Here you should release your SPI device resources.
+	 */
+}
+
+static int __init sspi_init(void)
+{
+	/* Here you should initialize your SPI device by providing the
+	 * necessary functions, clock speed, name and private data. Once
+	 * done, you can register your device with the
+	 * platform_device_register() function. This function will return
+	 * with the CAIF SPI interface initialized. This is probably also
+	 * the place where you should set up your GPIOs, interrupts and SPI
+	 * resources. */
+
+	int res = 0;
+
+	/* Initialize slave device. */
+	slave.sdev.init_xfer = sspi_init_xfer;
+	slave.sdev.sig_xfer = sspi_sig_xfer;
+	slave.sdev.clk_mhz = 13;
+	slave.sdev.priv = &slave;
+	slave.sdev.name = "spi_sspi";
+	slave_device.dev.release = sspi_release;
+
+	/* Initialize platform device. */
+	slave_device.name = "cfspi_sspi";
+	slave_device.dev.platform_data = &slave.sdev;
+
+	/* Register platform device. */
+	res = platform_device_register(&slave_device);
+	if (res) {
+		printk(KERN_WARNING "sspi_init: failed to register dev.\n");
+		return -ENODEV;
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+
+static void __exit sspi_exit(void)
+{
+	platform_device_del(&slave_device);
+}
+
+module_init(sspi_init);
+module_exit(sspi_exit);
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/can.txt b/Documentation/networking/can.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..56ca3b75376
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/can.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,836 @@
+============================================================================
+
+can.txt
+
+Readme file for the Controller Area Network Protocol Family (aka Socket CAN)
+
+This file contains
+
+  1 Overview / What is Socket CAN
+
+  2 Motivation / Why using the socket API
+
+  3 Socket CAN concept
+    3.1 receive lists
+    3.2 local loopback of sent frames
+    3.3 network security issues (capabilities)
+    3.4 network problem notifications
+
+  4 How to use Socket CAN
+    4.1 RAW protocol sockets with can_filters (SOCK_RAW)
+      4.1.1 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_FILTER
+      4.1.2 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_ERR_FILTER
+      4.1.3 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_LOOPBACK
+      4.1.4 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_RECV_OWN_MSGS
+      4.1.5 RAW socket returned message flags
+    4.2 Broadcast Manager protocol sockets (SOCK_DGRAM)
+    4.3 connected transport protocols (SOCK_SEQPACKET)
+    4.4 unconnected transport protocols (SOCK_DGRAM)
+
+  5 Socket CAN core module
+    5.1 can.ko module params
+    5.2 procfs content
+    5.3 writing own CAN protocol modules
+
+  6 CAN network drivers
+    6.1 general settings
+    6.2 local loopback of sent frames
+    6.3 CAN controller hardware filters
+    6.4 The virtual CAN driver (vcan)
+    6.5 The CAN network device driver interface
+      6.5.1 Netlink interface to set/get devices properties
+      6.5.2 Setting the CAN bit-timing
+      6.5.3 Starting and stopping the CAN network device
+    6.6 supported CAN hardware
+
+  7 Socket CAN resources
+
+  8 Credits
+
+============================================================================
+
+1. Overview / What is Socket CAN
+--------------------------------
+
+The socketcan package is an implementation of CAN protocols
+(Controller Area Network) for Linux.  CAN is a networking technology
+which has widespread use in automation, embedded devices, and
+automotive fields.  While there have been other CAN implementations
+for Linux based on character devices, Socket CAN uses the Berkeley
+socket API, the Linux network stack and implements the CAN device
+drivers as network interfaces.  The CAN socket API has been designed
+as similar as possible to the TCP/IP protocols to allow programmers,
+familiar with network programming, to easily learn how to use CAN
+sockets.
+
+2. Motivation / Why using the socket API
+----------------------------------------
+
+There have been CAN implementations for Linux before Socket CAN so the
+question arises, why we have started another project.  Most existing
+implementations come as a device driver for some CAN hardware, they
+are based on character devices and provide comparatively little
+functionality.  Usually, there is only a hardware-specific device
+driver which provides a character device interface to send and
+receive raw CAN frames, directly to/from the controller hardware.
+Queueing of frames and higher-level transport protocols like ISO-TP
+have to be implemented in user space applications.  Also, most
+character-device implementations support only one single process to
+open the device at a time, similar to a serial interface.  Exchanging
+the CAN controller requires employment of another device driver and
+often the need for adaption of large parts of the application to the
+new driver's API.
+
+Socket CAN was designed to overcome all of these limitations.  A new
+protocol family has been implemented which provides a socket interface
+to user space applications and which builds upon the Linux network
+layer, so to use all of the provided queueing functionality.  A device
+driver for CAN controller hardware registers itself with the Linux
+network layer as a network device, so that CAN frames from the
+controller can be passed up to the network layer and on to the CAN
+protocol family module and also vice-versa.  Also, the protocol family
+module provides an API for transport protocol modules to register, so
+that any number of transport protocols can be loaded or unloaded
+dynamically.  In fact, the can core module alone does not provide any
+protocol and cannot be used without loading at least one additional
+protocol module.  Multiple sockets can be opened at the same time,
+on different or the same protocol module and they can listen/send
+frames on different or the same CAN IDs.  Several sockets listening on
+the same interface for frames with the same CAN ID are all passed the
+same received matching CAN frames.  An application wishing to
+communicate using a specific transport protocol, e.g. ISO-TP, just
+selects that protocol when opening the socket, and then can read and
+write application data byte streams, without having to deal with
+CAN-IDs, frames, etc.
+
+Similar functionality visible from user-space could be provided by a
+character device, too, but this would lead to a technically inelegant
+solution for a couple of reasons:
+
+* Intricate usage.  Instead of passing a protocol argument to
+  socket(2) and using bind(2) to select a CAN interface and CAN ID, an
+  application would have to do all these operations using ioctl(2)s.
+
+* Code duplication.  A character device cannot make use of the Linux
+  network queueing code, so all that code would have to be duplicated
+  for CAN networking.
+
+* Abstraction.  In most existing character-device implementations, the
+  hardware-specific device driver for a CAN controller directly
+  provides the character device for the application to work with.
+  This is at least very unusual in Unix systems for both, char and
+  block devices.  For example you don't have a character device for a
+  certain UART of a serial interface, a certain sound chip in your
+  computer, a SCSI or IDE controller providing access to your hard
+  disk or tape streamer device.  Instead, you have abstraction layers
+  which provide a unified character or block device interface to the
+  application on the one hand, and a interface for hardware-specific
+  device drivers on the other hand.  These abstractions are provided
+  by subsystems like the tty layer, the audio subsystem or the SCSI
+  and IDE subsystems for the devices mentioned above.
+
+  The easiest way to implement a CAN device driver is as a character
+  device without such a (complete) abstraction layer, as is done by most
+  existing drivers.  The right way, however, would be to add such a
+  layer with all the functionality like registering for certain CAN
+  IDs, supporting several open file descriptors and (de)multiplexing
+  CAN frames between them, (sophisticated) queueing of CAN frames, and
+  providing an API for device drivers to register with.  However, then
+  it would be no more difficult, or may be even easier, to use the
+  networking framework provided by the Linux kernel, and this is what
+  Socket CAN does.
+
+  The use of the networking framework of the Linux kernel is just the
+  natural and most appropriate way to implement CAN for Linux.
+
+3. Socket CAN concept
+---------------------
+
+  As described in chapter 2 it is the main goal of Socket CAN to
+  provide a socket interface to user space applications which builds
+  upon the Linux network layer. In contrast to the commonly known
+  TCP/IP and ethernet networking, the CAN bus is a broadcast-only(!)
+  medium that has no MAC-layer addressing like ethernet. The CAN-identifier
+  (can_id) is used for arbitration on the CAN-bus. Therefore the CAN-IDs
+  have to be chosen uniquely on the bus. When designing a CAN-ECU
+  network the CAN-IDs are mapped to be sent by a specific ECU.
+  For this reason a CAN-ID can be treated best as a kind of source address.
+
+  3.1 receive lists
+
+  The network transparent access of multiple applications leads to the
+  problem that different applications may be interested in the same
+  CAN-IDs from the same CAN network interface. The Socket CAN core
+  module - which implements the protocol family CAN - provides several
+  high efficient receive lists for this reason. If e.g. a user space
+  application opens a CAN RAW socket, the raw protocol module itself
+  requests the (range of) CAN-IDs from the Socket CAN core that are
+  requested by the user. The subscription and unsubscription of
+  CAN-IDs can be done for specific CAN interfaces or for all(!) known
+  CAN interfaces with the can_rx_(un)register() functions provided to
+  CAN protocol modules by the SocketCAN core (see chapter 5).
+  To optimize the CPU usage at runtime the receive lists are split up
+  into several specific lists per device that match the requested
+  filter complexity for a given use-case.
+
+  3.2 local loopback of sent frames
+
+  As known from other networking concepts the data exchanging
+  applications may run on the same or different nodes without any
+  change (except for the according addressing information):
+
+         ___   ___   ___                   _______   ___
+        | _ | | _ | | _ |                 | _   _ | | _ |
+        ||A|| ||B|| ||C||                 ||A| |B|| ||C||
+        |___| |___| |___|                 |_______| |___|
+          |     |     |                       |       |
+        -----------------(1)- CAN bus -(2)---------------
+
+  To ensure that application A receives the same information in the
+  example (2) as it would receive in example (1) there is need for
+  some kind of local loopback of the sent CAN frames on the appropriate
+  node.
+
+  The Linux network devices (by default) just can handle the
+  transmission and reception of media dependent frames. Due to the
+  arbitration on the CAN bus the transmission of a low prio CAN-ID
+  may be delayed by the reception of a high prio CAN frame. To
+  reflect the correct* traffic on the node the loopback of the sent
+  data has to be performed right after a successful transmission. If
+  the CAN network interface is not capable of performing the loopback for
+  some reason the SocketCAN core can do this task as a fallback solution.
+  See chapter 6.2 for details (recommended).
+
+  The loopback functionality is enabled by default to reflect standard
+  networking behaviour for CAN applications. Due to some requests from
+  the RT-SocketCAN group the loopback optionally may be disabled for each
+  separate socket. See sockopts from the CAN RAW sockets in chapter 4.1.
+
+  * = you really like to have this when you're running analyser tools
+      like 'candump' or 'cansniffer' on the (same) node.
+
+  3.3 network security issues (capabilities)
+
+  The Controller Area Network is a local field bus transmitting only
+  broadcast messages without any routing and security concepts.
+  In the majority of cases the user application has to deal with
+  raw CAN frames. Therefore it might be reasonable NOT to restrict
+  the CAN access only to the user root, as known from other networks.
+  Since the currently implemented CAN_RAW and CAN_BCM sockets can only
+  send and receive frames to/from CAN interfaces it does not affect
+  security of others networks to allow all users to access the CAN.
+  To enable non-root users to access CAN_RAW and CAN_BCM protocol
+  sockets the Kconfig options CAN_RAW_USER and/or CAN_BCM_USER may be
+  selected at kernel compile time.
+
+  3.4 network problem notifications
+
+  The use of the CAN bus may lead to several problems on the physical
+  and media access control layer. Detecting and logging of these lower
+  layer problems is a vital requirement for CAN users to identify
+  hardware issues on the physical transceiver layer as well as
+  arbitration problems and error frames caused by the different
+  ECUs. The occurrence of detected errors are important for diagnosis
+  and have to be logged together with the exact timestamp. For this
+  reason the CAN interface driver can generate so called Error Frames
+  that can optionally be passed to the user application in the same
+  way as other CAN frames. Whenever an error on the physical layer
+  or the MAC layer is detected (e.g. by the CAN controller) the driver
+  creates an appropriate error frame. Error frames can be requested by
+  the user application using the common CAN filter mechanisms. Inside
+  this filter definition the (interested) type of errors may be
+  selected. The reception of error frames is disabled by default.
+  The format of the CAN error frame is briefly described in the Linux
+  header file "include/linux/can/error.h".
+
+4. How to use Socket CAN
+------------------------
+
+  Like TCP/IP, you first need to open a socket for communicating over a
+  CAN network. Since Socket CAN implements a new protocol family, you
+  need to pass PF_CAN as the first argument to the socket(2) system
+  call. Currently, there are two CAN protocols to choose from, the raw
+  socket protocol and the broadcast manager (BCM). So to open a socket,
+  you would write
+
+    s = socket(PF_CAN, SOCK_RAW, CAN_RAW);
+
+  and
+
+    s = socket(PF_CAN, SOCK_DGRAM, CAN_BCM);
+
+  respectively.  After the successful creation of the socket, you would
+  normally use the bind(2) system call to bind the socket to a CAN
+  interface (which is different from TCP/IP due to different addressing
+  - see chapter 3). After binding (CAN_RAW) or connecting (CAN_BCM)
+  the socket, you can read(2) and write(2) from/to the socket or use
+  send(2), sendto(2), sendmsg(2) and the recv* counterpart operations
+  on the socket as usual. There are also CAN specific socket options
+  described below.
+
+  The basic CAN frame structure and the sockaddr structure are defined
+  in include/linux/can.h:
+
+    struct can_frame {
+            canid_t can_id;  /* 32 bit CAN_ID + EFF/RTR/ERR flags */
+            __u8    can_dlc; /* data length code: 0 .. 8 */
+            __u8    data[8] __attribute__((aligned(8)));
+    };
+
+  The alignment of the (linear) payload data[] to a 64bit boundary
+  allows the user to define own structs and unions to easily access the
+  CAN payload. There is no given byteorder on the CAN bus by
+  default. A read(2) system call on a CAN_RAW socket transfers a
+  struct can_frame to the user space.
+
+  The sockaddr_can structure has an interface index like the
+  PF_PACKET socket, that also binds to a specific interface:
+
+    struct sockaddr_can {
+            sa_family_t can_family;
+            int         can_ifindex;
+            union {
+                    /* transport protocol class address info (e.g. ISOTP) */
+                    struct { canid_t rx_id, tx_id; } tp;
+
+                    /* reserved for future CAN protocols address information */
+            } can_addr;
+    };
+
+  To determine the interface index an appropriate ioctl() has to
+  be used (example for CAN_RAW sockets without error checking):
+
+    int s;
+    struct sockaddr_can addr;
+    struct ifreq ifr;
+
+    s = socket(PF_CAN, SOCK_RAW, CAN_RAW);
+
+    strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, "can0" );
+    ioctl(s, SIOCGIFINDEX, &ifr);
+
+    addr.can_family = AF_CAN;
+    addr.can_ifindex = ifr.ifr_ifindex;
+
+    bind(s, (struct sockaddr *)&addr, sizeof(addr));
+
+    (..)
+
+  To bind a socket to all(!) CAN interfaces the interface index must
+  be 0 (zero). In this case the socket receives CAN frames from every
+  enabled CAN interface. To determine the originating CAN interface
+  the system call recvfrom(2) may be used instead of read(2). To send
+  on a socket that is bound to 'any' interface sendto(2) is needed to
+  specify the outgoing interface.
+
+  Reading CAN frames from a bound CAN_RAW socket (see above) consists
+  of reading a struct can_frame:
+
+    struct can_frame frame;
+
+    nbytes = read(s, &frame, sizeof(struct can_frame));
+
+    if (nbytes < 0) {
+            perror("can raw socket read");
+            return 1;
+    }
+
+    /* paranoid check ... */
+    if (nbytes < sizeof(struct can_frame)) {
+            fprintf(stderr, "read: incomplete CAN frame\n");
+            return 1;
+    }
+
+    /* do something with the received CAN frame */
+
+  Writing CAN frames can be done similarly, with the write(2) system call:
+
+    nbytes = write(s, &frame, sizeof(struct can_frame));
+
+  When the CAN interface is bound to 'any' existing CAN interface
+  (addr.can_ifindex = 0) it is recommended to use recvfrom(2) if the
+  information about the originating CAN interface is needed:
+
+    struct sockaddr_can addr;
+    struct ifreq ifr;
+    socklen_t len = sizeof(addr);
+    struct can_frame frame;
+
+    nbytes = recvfrom(s, &frame, sizeof(struct can_frame),
+                      0, (struct sockaddr*)&addr, &len);
+
+    /* get interface name of the received CAN frame */
+    ifr.ifr_ifindex = addr.can_ifindex;
+    ioctl(s, SIOCGIFNAME, &ifr);
+    printf("Received a CAN frame from interface %s", ifr.ifr_name);
+
+  To write CAN frames on sockets bound to 'any' CAN interface the
+  outgoing interface has to be defined certainly.
+
+    strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, "can0");
+    ioctl(s, SIOCGIFINDEX, &ifr);
+    addr.can_ifindex = ifr.ifr_ifindex;
+    addr.can_family  = AF_CAN;
+
+    nbytes = sendto(s, &frame, sizeof(struct can_frame),
+                    0, (struct sockaddr*)&addr, sizeof(addr));
+
+  4.1 RAW protocol sockets with can_filters (SOCK_RAW)
+
+  Using CAN_RAW sockets is extensively comparable to the commonly
+  known access to CAN character devices. To meet the new possibilities
+  provided by the multi user SocketCAN approach, some reasonable
+  defaults are set at RAW socket binding time:
+
+  - The filters are set to exactly one filter receiving everything
+  - The socket only receives valid data frames (=> no error frames)
+  - The loopback of sent CAN frames is enabled (see chapter 3.2)
+  - The socket does not receive its own sent frames (in loopback mode)
+
+  These default settings may be changed before or after binding the socket.
+  To use the referenced definitions of the socket options for CAN_RAW
+  sockets, include <linux/can/raw.h>.
+
+  4.1.1 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_FILTER
+
+  The reception of CAN frames using CAN_RAW sockets can be controlled
+  by defining 0 .. n filters with the CAN_RAW_FILTER socket option.
+
+  The CAN filter structure is defined in include/linux/can.h:
+
+    struct can_filter {
+            canid_t can_id;
+            canid_t can_mask;
+    };
+
+  A filter matches, when
+
+    <received_can_id> & mask == can_id & mask
+
+  which is analogous to known CAN controllers hardware filter semantics.
+  The filter can be inverted in this semantic, when the CAN_INV_FILTER
+  bit is set in can_id element of the can_filter structure. In
+  contrast to CAN controller hardware filters the user may set 0 .. n
+  receive filters for each open socket separately:
+
+    struct can_filter rfilter[2];
+
+    rfilter[0].can_id   = 0x123;
+    rfilter[0].can_mask = CAN_SFF_MASK;
+    rfilter[1].can_id   = 0x200;
+    rfilter[1].can_mask = 0x700;
+
+    setsockopt(s, SOL_CAN_RAW, CAN_RAW_FILTER, &rfilter, sizeof(rfilter));
+
+  To disable the reception of CAN frames on the selected CAN_RAW socket:
+
+    setsockopt(s, SOL_CAN_RAW, CAN_RAW_FILTER, NULL, 0);
+
+  To set the filters to zero filters is quite obsolete as not read
+  data causes the raw socket to discard the received CAN frames. But
+  having this 'send only' use-case we may remove the receive list in the
+  Kernel to save a little (really a very little!) CPU usage.
+
+  4.1.2 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_ERR_FILTER
+
+  As described in chapter 3.4 the CAN interface driver can generate so
+  called Error Frames that can optionally be passed to the user
+  application in the same way as other CAN frames. The possible
+  errors are divided into different error classes that may be filtered
+  using the appropriate error mask. To register for every possible
+  error condition CAN_ERR_MASK can be used as value for the error mask.
+  The values for the error mask are defined in linux/can/error.h .
+
+    can_err_mask_t err_mask = ( CAN_ERR_TX_TIMEOUT | CAN_ERR_BUSOFF );
+
+    setsockopt(s, SOL_CAN_RAW, CAN_RAW_ERR_FILTER,
+               &err_mask, sizeof(err_mask));
+
+  4.1.3 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_LOOPBACK
+
+  To meet multi user needs the local loopback is enabled by default
+  (see chapter 3.2 for details). But in some embedded use-cases
+  (e.g. when only one application uses the CAN bus) this loopback
+  functionality can be disabled (separately for each socket):
+
+    int loopback = 0; /* 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled (default) */
+
+    setsockopt(s, SOL_CAN_RAW, CAN_RAW_LOOPBACK, &loopback, sizeof(loopback));
+
+  4.1.4 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_RECV_OWN_MSGS
+
+  When the local loopback is enabled, all the sent CAN frames are
+  looped back to the open CAN sockets that registered for the CAN
+  frames' CAN-ID on this given interface to meet the multi user
+  needs. The reception of the CAN frames on the same socket that was
+  sending the CAN frame is assumed to be unwanted and therefore
+  disabled by default. This default behaviour may be changed on
+  demand:
+
+    int recv_own_msgs = 1; /* 0 = disabled (default), 1 = enabled */
+
+    setsockopt(s, SOL_CAN_RAW, CAN_RAW_RECV_OWN_MSGS,
+               &recv_own_msgs, sizeof(recv_own_msgs));
+
+  4.1.5 RAW socket returned message flags
+
+  When using recvmsg() call, the msg->msg_flags may contain following flags:
+
+    MSG_DONTROUTE: set when the received frame was created on the local host.
+
+    MSG_CONFIRM: set when the frame was sent via the socket it is received on.
+      This flag can be interpreted as a 'transmission confirmation' when the
+      CAN driver supports the echo of frames on driver level, see 3.2 and 6.2.
+      In order to receive such messages, CAN_RAW_RECV_OWN_MSGS must be set.
+
+  4.2 Broadcast Manager protocol sockets (SOCK_DGRAM)
+  4.3 connected transport protocols (SOCK_SEQPACKET)
+  4.4 unconnected transport protocols (SOCK_DGRAM)
+
+
+5. Socket CAN core module
+-------------------------
+
+  The Socket CAN core module implements the protocol family
+  PF_CAN. CAN protocol modules are loaded by the core module at
+  runtime. The core module provides an interface for CAN protocol
+  modules to subscribe needed CAN IDs (see chapter 3.1).
+
+  5.1 can.ko module params
+
+  - stats_timer: To calculate the Socket CAN core statistics
+    (e.g. current/maximum frames per second) this 1 second timer is
+    invoked at can.ko module start time by default. This timer can be
+    disabled by using stattimer=0 on the module commandline.
+
+  - debug: (removed since SocketCAN SVN r546)
+
+  5.2 procfs content
+
+  As described in chapter 3.1 the Socket CAN core uses several filter
+  lists to deliver received CAN frames to CAN protocol modules. These
+  receive lists, their filters and the count of filter matches can be
+  checked in the appropriate receive list. All entries contain the
+  device and a protocol module identifier:
+
+    foo@bar:~$ cat /proc/net/can/rcvlist_all
+
+    receive list 'rx_all':
+      (vcan3: no entry)
+      (vcan2: no entry)
+      (vcan1: no entry)
+      device   can_id   can_mask  function  userdata   matches  ident
+       vcan0     000    00000000  f88e6370  f6c6f400         0  raw
+      (any: no entry)
+
+  In this example an application requests any CAN traffic from vcan0.
+
+    rcvlist_all - list for unfiltered entries (no filter operations)
+    rcvlist_eff - list for single extended frame (EFF) entries
+    rcvlist_err - list for error frames masks
+    rcvlist_fil - list for mask/value filters
+    rcvlist_inv - list for mask/value filters (inverse semantic)
+    rcvlist_sff - list for single standard frame (SFF) entries
+
+  Additional procfs files in /proc/net/can
+
+    stats       - Socket CAN core statistics (rx/tx frames, match ratios, ...)
+    reset_stats - manual statistic reset
+    version     - prints the Socket CAN core version and the ABI version
+
+  5.3 writing own CAN protocol modules
+
+  To implement a new protocol in the protocol family PF_CAN a new
+  protocol has to be defined in include/linux/can.h .
+  The prototypes and definitions to use the Socket CAN core can be
+  accessed by including include/linux/can/core.h .
+  In addition to functions that register the CAN protocol and the
+  CAN device notifier chain there are functions to subscribe CAN
+  frames received by CAN interfaces and to send CAN frames:
+
+    can_rx_register   - subscribe CAN frames from a specific interface
+    can_rx_unregister - unsubscribe CAN frames from a specific interface
+    can_send          - transmit a CAN frame (optional with local loopback)
+
+  For details see the kerneldoc documentation in net/can/af_can.c or
+  the source code of net/can/raw.c or net/can/bcm.c .
+
+6. CAN network drivers
+----------------------
+
+  Writing a CAN network device driver is much easier than writing a
+  CAN character device driver. Similar to other known network device
+  drivers you mainly have to deal with:
+
+  - TX: Put the CAN frame from the socket buffer to the CAN controller.
+  - RX: Put the CAN frame from the CAN controller to the socket buffer.
+
+  See e.g. at Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt . The differences
+  for writing CAN network device driver are described below:
+
+  6.1 general settings
+
+    dev->type  = ARPHRD_CAN; /* the netdevice hardware type */
+    dev->flags = IFF_NOARP;  /* CAN has no arp */
+
+    dev->mtu   = sizeof(struct can_frame);
+
+  The struct can_frame is the payload of each socket buffer in the
+  protocol family PF_CAN.
+
+  6.2 local loopback of sent frames
+
+  As described in chapter 3.2 the CAN network device driver should
+  support a local loopback functionality similar to the local echo
+  e.g. of tty devices. In this case the driver flag IFF_ECHO has to be
+  set to prevent the PF_CAN core from locally echoing sent frames
+  (aka loopback) as fallback solution:
+
+    dev->flags = (IFF_NOARP | IFF_ECHO);
+
+  6.3 CAN controller hardware filters
+
+  To reduce the interrupt load on deep embedded systems some CAN
+  controllers support the filtering of CAN IDs or ranges of CAN IDs.
+  These hardware filter capabilities vary from controller to
+  controller and have to be identified as not feasible in a multi-user
+  networking approach. The use of the very controller specific
+  hardware filters could make sense in a very dedicated use-case, as a
+  filter on driver level would affect all users in the multi-user
+  system. The high efficient filter sets inside the PF_CAN core allow
+  to set different multiple filters for each socket separately.
+  Therefore the use of hardware filters goes to the category 'handmade
+  tuning on deep embedded systems'. The author is running a MPC603e
+  @133MHz with four SJA1000 CAN controllers from 2002 under heavy bus
+  load without any problems ...
+
+  6.4 The virtual CAN driver (vcan)
+
+  Similar to the network loopback devices, vcan offers a virtual local
+  CAN interface. A full qualified address on CAN consists of
+
+  - a unique CAN Identifier (CAN ID)
+  - the CAN bus this CAN ID is transmitted on (e.g. can0)
+
+  so in common use cases more than one virtual CAN interface is needed.
+
+  The virtual CAN interfaces allow the transmission and reception of CAN
+  frames without real CAN controller hardware. Virtual CAN network
+  devices are usually named 'vcanX', like vcan0 vcan1 vcan2 ...
+  When compiled as a module the virtual CAN driver module is called vcan.ko
+
+  Since Linux Kernel version 2.6.24 the vcan driver supports the Kernel
+  netlink interface to create vcan network devices. The creation and
+  removal of vcan network devices can be managed with the ip(8) tool:
+
+  - Create a virtual CAN network interface:
+       $ ip link add type vcan
+
+  - Create a virtual CAN network interface with a specific name 'vcan42':
+       $ ip link add dev vcan42 type vcan
+
+  - Remove a (virtual CAN) network interface 'vcan42':
+       $ ip link del vcan42
+
+  6.5 The CAN network device driver interface
+
+  The CAN network device driver interface provides a generic interface
+  to setup, configure and monitor CAN network devices. The user can then
+  configure the CAN device, like setting the bit-timing parameters, via
+  the netlink interface using the program "ip" from the "IPROUTE2"
+  utility suite. The following chapter describes briefly how to use it.
+  Furthermore, the interface uses a common data structure and exports a
+  set of common functions, which all real CAN network device drivers
+  should use. Please have a look to the SJA1000 or MSCAN driver to
+  understand how to use them. The name of the module is can-dev.ko.
+
+  6.5.1 Netlink interface to set/get devices properties
+
+  The CAN device must be configured via netlink interface. The supported
+  netlink message types are defined and briefly described in
+  "include/linux/can/netlink.h". CAN link support for the program "ip"
+  of the IPROUTE2 utility suite is avaiable and it can be used as shown
+  below:
+
+  - Setting CAN device properties:
+
+    $ ip link set can0 type can help
+    Usage: ip link set DEVICE type can
+    	[ bitrate BITRATE [ sample-point SAMPLE-POINT] ] |
+    	[ tq TQ prop-seg PROP_SEG phase-seg1 PHASE-SEG1
+     	  phase-seg2 PHASE-SEG2 [ sjw SJW ] ]
+
+    	[ loopback { on | off } ]
+    	[ listen-only { on | off } ]
+    	[ triple-sampling { on | off } ]
+
+    	[ restart-ms TIME-MS ]
+    	[ restart ]
+
+    	Where: BITRATE       := { 1..1000000 }
+    	       SAMPLE-POINT  := { 0.000..0.999 }
+    	       TQ            := { NUMBER }
+    	       PROP-SEG      := { 1..8 }
+    	       PHASE-SEG1    := { 1..8 }
+    	       PHASE-SEG2    := { 1..8 }
+    	       SJW           := { 1..4 }
+    	       RESTART-MS    := { 0 | NUMBER }
+
+  - Display CAN device details and statistics:
+
+    $ ip -details -statistics link show can0
+    2: can0: <NOARP,UP,LOWER_UP,ECHO> mtu 16 qdisc pfifo_fast state UP qlen 10
+      link/can
+      can <TRIPLE-SAMPLING> state ERROR-ACTIVE restart-ms 100
+      bitrate 125000 sample_point 0.875
+      tq 125 prop-seg 6 phase-seg1 7 phase-seg2 2 sjw 1
+      sja1000: tseg1 1..16 tseg2 1..8 sjw 1..4 brp 1..64 brp-inc 1
+      clock 8000000
+      re-started bus-errors arbit-lost error-warn error-pass bus-off
+      41         17457      0          41         42         41
+      RX: bytes  packets  errors  dropped overrun mcast
+      140859     17608    17457   0       0       0
+      TX: bytes  packets  errors  dropped carrier collsns
+      861        112      0       41      0       0
+
+  More info to the above output:
+
+    "<TRIPLE-SAMPLING>"
+	Shows the list of selected CAN controller modes: LOOPBACK,
+	LISTEN-ONLY, or TRIPLE-SAMPLING.
+
+    "state ERROR-ACTIVE"
+	The current state of the CAN controller: "ERROR-ACTIVE",
+	"ERROR-WARNING", "ERROR-PASSIVE", "BUS-OFF" or "STOPPED"
+
+    "restart-ms 100"
+	Automatic restart delay time. If set to a non-zero value, a
+	restart of the CAN controller will be triggered automatically
+	in case of a bus-off condition after the specified delay time
+	in milliseconds. By default it's off.
+
+    "bitrate 125000 sample_point 0.875"
+	Shows the real bit-rate in bits/sec and the sample-point in the
+	range 0.000..0.999. If the calculation of bit-timing parameters
+	is enabled in the kernel (CONFIG_CAN_CALC_BITTIMING=y), the
+	bit-timing can be defined by setting the "bitrate" argument.
+	Optionally the "sample-point" can be specified. By default it's
+	0.000 assuming CIA-recommended sample-points.
+
+    "tq 125 prop-seg 6 phase-seg1 7 phase-seg2 2 sjw 1"
+	Shows the time quanta in ns, propagation segment, phase buffer
+	segment 1 and 2 and the synchronisation jump width in units of
+	tq. They allow to define the CAN bit-timing in a hardware
+	independent format as proposed by the Bosch CAN 2.0 spec (see
+	chapter 8 of http://www.semiconductors.bosch.de/pdf/can2spec.pdf).
+
+    "sja1000: tseg1 1..16 tseg2 1..8 sjw 1..4 brp 1..64 brp-inc 1
+     clock 8000000"
+	Shows the bit-timing constants of the CAN controller, here the
+	"sja1000". The minimum and maximum values of the time segment 1
+	and 2, the synchronisation jump width in units of tq, the
+	bitrate pre-scaler and the CAN system clock frequency in Hz.
+	These constants could be used for user-defined (non-standard)
+	bit-timing calculation algorithms in user-space.
+
+    "re-started bus-errors arbit-lost error-warn error-pass bus-off"
+	Shows the number of restarts, bus and arbitration lost errors,
+	and the state changes to the error-warning, error-passive and
+	bus-off state. RX overrun errors are listed in the "overrun"
+	field of the standard network statistics.
+
+  6.5.2 Setting the CAN bit-timing
+
+  The CAN bit-timing parameters can always be defined in a hardware
+  independent format as proposed in the Bosch CAN 2.0 specification
+  specifying the arguments "tq", "prop_seg", "phase_seg1", "phase_seg2"
+  and "sjw":
+
+    $ ip link set canX type can tq 125 prop-seg 6 \
+				phase-seg1 7 phase-seg2 2 sjw 1
+
+  If the kernel option CONFIG_CAN_CALC_BITTIMING is enabled, CIA
+  recommended CAN bit-timing parameters will be calculated if the bit-
+  rate is specified with the argument "bitrate":
+
+    $ ip link set canX type can bitrate 125000
+
+  Note that this works fine for the most common CAN controllers with
+  standard bit-rates but may *fail* for exotic bit-rates or CAN system
+  clock frequencies. Disabling CONFIG_CAN_CALC_BITTIMING saves some
+  space and allows user-space tools to solely determine and set the
+  bit-timing parameters. The CAN controller specific bit-timing
+  constants can be used for that purpose. They are listed by the
+  following command:
+
+    $ ip -details link show can0
+    ...
+      sja1000: clock 8000000 tseg1 1..16 tseg2 1..8 sjw 1..4 brp 1..64 brp-inc 1
+
+  6.5.3 Starting and stopping the CAN network device
+
+  A CAN network device is started or stopped as usual with the command
+  "ifconfig canX up/down" or "ip link set canX up/down". Be aware that
+  you *must* define proper bit-timing parameters for real CAN devices
+  before you can start it to avoid error-prone default settings:
+
+    $ ip link set canX up type can bitrate 125000
+
+  A device may enter the "bus-off" state if too much errors occurred on
+  the CAN bus. Then no more messages are received or sent. An automatic
+  bus-off recovery can be enabled by setting the "restart-ms" to a
+  non-zero value, e.g.:
+
+    $ ip link set canX type can restart-ms 100
+
+  Alternatively, the application may realize the "bus-off" condition
+  by monitoring CAN error frames and do a restart when appropriate with
+  the command:
+
+    $ ip link set canX type can restart
+
+  Note that a restart will also create a CAN error frame (see also
+  chapter 3.4).
+
+  6.6 Supported CAN hardware
+
+  Please check the "Kconfig" file in "drivers/net/can" to get an actual
+  list of the support CAN hardware. On the Socket CAN project website
+  (see chapter 7) there might be further drivers available, also for
+  older kernel versions.
+
+7. Socket CAN resources
+-----------------------
+
+  You can find further resources for Socket CAN like user space tools,
+  support for old kernel versions, more drivers, mailing lists, etc.
+  at the BerliOS OSS project website for Socket CAN:
+
+    http://developer.berlios.de/projects/socketcan
+
+  If you have questions, bug fixes, etc., don't hesitate to post them to
+  the Socketcan-Users mailing list. But please search the archives first.
+
+8. Credits
+----------
+
+  Oliver Hartkopp (PF_CAN core, filters, drivers, bcm, SJA1000 driver)
+  Urs Thuermann (PF_CAN core, kernel integration, socket interfaces, raw, vcan)
+  Jan Kizka (RT-SocketCAN core, Socket-API reconciliation)
+  Wolfgang Grandegger (RT-SocketCAN core & drivers, Raw Socket-API reviews,
+                       CAN device driver interface, MSCAN driver)
+  Robert Schwebel (design reviews, PTXdist integration)
+  Marc Kleine-Budde (design reviews, Kernel 2.6 cleanups, drivers)
+  Benedikt Spranger (reviews)
+  Thomas Gleixner (LKML reviews, coding style, posting hints)
+  Andrey Volkov (kernel subtree structure, ioctls, MSCAN driver)
+  Matthias Brukner (first SJA1000 CAN netdevice implementation Q2/2003)
+  Klaus Hitschler (PEAK driver integration)
+  Uwe Koppe (CAN netdevices with PF_PACKET approach)
+  Michael Schulze (driver layer loopback requirement, RT CAN drivers review)
+  Pavel Pisa (Bit-timing calculation)
+  Sascha Hauer (SJA1000 platform driver)
+  Sebastian Haas (SJA1000 EMS PCI driver)
+  Markus Plessing (SJA1000 EMS PCI driver)
+  Per Dalen (SJA1000 Kvaser PCI driver)
+  Sam Ravnborg (reviews, coding style, kbuild help)
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/cops.txt b/Documentation/networking/cops.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3e344b448e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/cops.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+Text File for the COPS LocalTalk Linux driver (cops.c).
+	By Jay Schulist <jschlst@samba.org>
+
+This driver has two modes and they are: Dayna mode and Tangent mode.
+Each mode corresponds with the type of card. It has been found
+that there are 2 main types of cards and all other cards are
+the same and just have different names or only have minor differences
+such as more IO ports. As this driver is tested it will
+become more clear exactly what cards are supported. 
+
+Right now these cards are known to work with the COPS driver. The
+LT-200 cards work in a somewhat more limited capacity than the
+DL200 cards, which work very well and are in use by many people.
+
+TANGENT driver mode:
+	Tangent ATB-II, Novell NL-1000, Daystar Digital LT-200
+DAYNA driver mode:
+	Dayna DL2000/DaynaTalk PC (Half Length), COPS LT-95,
+	Farallon PhoneNET PC III, Farallon PhoneNET PC II
+Other cards possibly supported mode unknown though:
+	Dayna DL2000 (Full length)
+
+The COPS driver defaults to using Dayna mode. To change the driver's 
+mode if you built a driver with dual support use board_type=1 or
+board_type=2 for Dayna or Tangent with insmod.
+
+** Operation/loading of the driver.
+Use modprobe like this:	/sbin/modprobe cops.o (IO #) (IRQ #)
+If you do not specify any options the driver will try and use the IO = 0x240,
+IRQ = 5. As of right now I would only use IRQ 5 for the card, if autoprobing.
+
+To load multiple COPS driver Localtalk cards you can do one of the following.
+
+insmod cops io=0x240 irq=5
+insmod -o cops2 cops io=0x260 irq=3
+
+Or in lilo.conf put something like this:
+	append="ether=5,0x240,lt0 ether=3,0x260,lt1"
+
+Then bring up the interface with ifconfig. It will look something like this:
+lt0       Link encap:UNSPEC  HWaddr 00-00-00-00-00-00-00-F7-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00
+          inet addr:192.168.1.2  Bcast:192.168.1.255  Mask:255.255.255.0
+          UP BROADCAST RUNNING NOARP MULTICAST  MTU:600  Metric:1
+          RX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
+          TX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 coll:0
+
+** Netatalk Configuration
+You will need to configure atalkd with something like the following to make
+it work with the cops.c driver.
+
+* For single LTalk card use.
+dummy -seed -phase 2 -net 2000 -addr 2000.10 -zone "1033"
+lt0 -seed -phase 1 -net 1000 -addr 1000.50 -zone "1033"
+
+* For multiple cards, Ethernet and LocalTalk.
+eth0 -seed -phase 2 -net 3000 -addr 3000.20 -zone "1033"
+lt0 -seed -phase 1 -net 1000 -addr 1000.50 -zone "1033"
+
+* For multiple LocalTalk cards, and an Ethernet card.
+* Order seems to matter here, Ethernet last.
+lt0 -seed -phase 1 -net 1000 -addr 1000.10 -zone "LocalTalk1"
+lt1 -seed -phase 1 -net 2000 -addr 2000.20 -zone "LocalTalk2"
+eth0 -seed -phase 2 -net 3000 -addr 3000.30 -zone "EtherTalk"
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt b/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c725d33b316
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,703 @@
+
+NOTE
+----
+
+This document was contributed by Cirrus Logic for kernel 2.2.5.  This version
+has been updated for 2.3.48 by Andrew Morton.
+
+Cirrus make a copy of this driver available at their website, as
+described below.  In general, you should use the driver version which
+comes with your Linux distribution.
+
+
+
+CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS
+Linux Network Interface Driver ver. 2.00 <kernel 2.3.48>
+===============================================================================
+ 
+
+TABLE OF CONTENTS
+
+1.0 CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS
+    1.1 Product Overview 
+    1.2 Driver Description
+	1.2.1 Driver Name
+	1.2.2 File in the Driver Package
+    1.3 System Requirements
+    1.4 Licensing Information
+
+2.0 ADAPTER INSTALLATION and CONFIGURATION
+    2.1 CS8900-based Adapter Configuration
+    2.2 CS8920-based Adapter Configuration 
+
+3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE
+
+4.0 COMPILING THE DRIVER
+    4.1 Compiling the Driver as a Loadable Module
+    4.2 Compiling the driver to support memory mode
+    4.3 Compiling the driver to support Rx DMA 
+    4.4 Compiling the Driver into the Kernel
+
+5.0 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
+    5.1 Known Defects and Limitations
+    5.2 Testing the Adapter
+        5.2.1 Diagnostic Self-Test
+        5.2.2 Diagnostic Network Test
+    5.3 Using the Adapter's LEDs
+    5.4 Resolving I/O Conflicts
+
+6.0 TECHNICAL SUPPORT
+    6.1 Contacting Cirrus Logic's Technical Support
+    6.2 Information Required Before Contacting Technical Support
+    6.3 Obtaining the Latest Driver Version
+    6.4 Current maintainer
+    6.5 Kernel boot parameters
+
+
+1.0 CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS
+===============================================================================
+
+
+1.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW
+
+The CS8900-based ISA Ethernet Adapters from Cirrus Logic follow 
+IEEE 802.3 standards and support half or full-duplex operation in ISA bus 
+computers on 10 Mbps Ethernet networks.  The adapters are designed for operation 
+in 16-bit ISA or EISA bus expansion slots and are available in 
+10BaseT-only or 3-media configurations (10BaseT, 10Base2, and AUI for 10Base-5 
+or fiber networks).  
+
+CS8920-based adapters are similar to the CS8900-based adapter with additional 
+features for Plug and Play (PnP) support and Wakeup Frame recognition.  As 
+such, the configuration procedures differ somewhat between the two types of 
+adapters.  Refer to the "Adapter Configuration" section for details on 
+configuring both types of adapters.
+
+
+1.2 DRIVER DESCRIPTION
+
+The CS8900/CS8920 Ethernet Adapter driver for Linux supports the Linux
+v2.3.48 or greater kernel.  It can be compiled directly into the kernel
+or loaded at run-time as a device driver module.
+
+1.2.1 Driver Name: cs89x0
+
+1.2.2 Files in the Driver Archive:
+
+The files in the driver at Cirrus' website include:
+
+  readme.txt         - this file
+  build              - batch file to compile cs89x0.c.
+  cs89x0.c           - driver C code
+  cs89x0.h           - driver header file
+  cs89x0.o           - pre-compiled module (for v2.2.5 kernel)
+  config/Config.in   - sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel.
+  config/Makefile    - sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel.
+  config/Space.c     - sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel.
+
+
+
+1.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
+
+The following hardware is required:
+
+   * Cirrus Logic LAN (CS8900/20-based) Ethernet ISA Adapter   
+
+   * IBM or IBM-compatible PC with:
+     * An 80386 or higher processor
+     * 16 bytes of contiguous IO space available between 210h - 370h
+     * One available IRQ (5,10,11,or 12 for the CS8900, 3-7,9-15 for CS8920).
+
+   * Appropriate cable (and connector for AUI, 10BASE-2) for your network
+     topology.
+
+The following software is required:
+
+* LINUX kernel version 2.3.48 or higher
+
+   * CS8900/20 Setup Utility (DOS-based)
+
+   * LINUX kernel sources for your kernel (if compiling into kernel)
+
+   * GNU Toolkit (gcc and make) v2.6 or above (if compiling into kernel 
+     or a module)   
+
+
+
+1.4 LICENSING INFORMATION
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
+the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+Foundation, version 1.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
+ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or 
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for 
+more details.
+
+For a full copy of the GNU General Public License, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+
+
+
+2.0 ADAPTER INSTALLATION and CONFIGURATION
+===============================================================================
+
+Both the CS8900 and CS8920-based adapters can be configured using parameters 
+stored in an on-board EEPROM. You must use the DOS-based CS8900/20 Setup 
+Utility if you want to change the adapter's configuration in EEPROM.  
+
+When loading the driver as a module, you can specify many of the adapter's 
+configuration parameters on the command-line to override the EEPROM's settings 
+or for interface configuration when an EEPROM is not used. (CS8920-based 
+adapters must use an EEPROM.) See Section 3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE.
+
+Since the CS8900/20 Setup Utility is a DOS-based application, you must install 
+and configure the adapter in a DOS-based system using the CS8900/20 Setup 
+Utility before installation in the target LINUX system.  (Not required if 
+installing a CS8900-based adapter and the default configuration is acceptable.)
+     
+
+2.1 CS8900-BASED ADAPTER CONFIGURATION
+
+CS8900-based adapters shipped from Cirrus Logic have been configured 
+with the following "default" settings:
+
+  Operation Mode:      Memory Mode
+  IRQ:                 10
+  Base I/O Address:    300
+  Memory Base Address: D0000
+  Optimization:	       DOS Client
+  Transmission Mode:   Half-duplex
+  BootProm:            None
+  Media Type:	       Autodetect (3-media cards) or 
+                       10BASE-T (10BASE-T only adapter)
+
+You should only change the default configuration settings if conflicts with 
+another adapter exists. To change the adapter's configuration, run the 
+CS8900/20 Setup Utility. 
+
+
+2.2 CS8920-BASED ADAPTER CONFIGURATION
+
+CS8920-based adapters are shipped from Cirrus Logic configured as Plug
+and Play (PnP) enabled.  However, since the cs89x0 driver does NOT
+support PnP, you must install the CS8920 adapter in a DOS-based PC and
+run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility to disable PnP and configure the
+adapter before installation in the target Linux system.  Failure to do
+this will leave the adapter inactive and the driver will be unable to
+communicate with the adapter.  
+
+
+        **************************************************************** 
+        *                    CS8920-BASED ADAPTERS:                    *
+        *                                                              * 
+        * CS8920-BASED ADAPTERS ARE PLUG and PLAY ENABLED BY DEFAULT.  * 
+        * THE CS89X0 DRIVER DOES NOT SUPPORT PnP. THEREFORE, YOU MUST  *
+        * RUN THE CS8900/20 SETUP UTILITY TO DISABLE PnP SUPPORT AND   *
+        * TO ACTIVATE THE ADAPTER.                                     *
+        ****************************************************************
+
+
+
+
+3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE
+===============================================================================
+
+If the driver is compiled as a loadable module, you can load the driver module
+with the 'modprobe' command.  Many of the adapter's configuration parameters can 
+be specified as command-line arguments to the load command.  This facility 
+provides a means to override the EEPROM's settings or for interface 
+configuration when an EEPROM is not used.
+
+Example:
+
+    insmod cs89x0.o io=0x200 irq=0xA media=aui
+
+This example loads the module and configures the adapter to use an IO port base
+address of 200h, interrupt 10, and use the AUI media connection.  The following
+configuration options are available on the command line:
+
+* io=###               - specify IO address (200h-360h)
+* irq=##               - specify interrupt level
+* use_dma=1            - Enable DMA
+* dma=#                - specify dma channel (Driver is compiled to support
+                         Rx DMA only)
+* dmasize=# (16 or 64) - DMA size 16K or 64K.  Default value is set to 16.
+* media=rj45           - specify media type
+   or media=bnc
+   or media=aui
+   or media=auto
+* duplex=full          - specify forced half/full/autonegotiate duplex
+   or duplex=half
+   or duplex=auto
+* debug=#              - debug level (only available if the driver was compiled
+                         for debugging)
+
+NOTES:
+
+a) If an EEPROM is present, any specified command-line parameter
+   will override the corresponding configuration value stored in
+   EEPROM.
+
+b) The "io" parameter must be specified on the command-line.  
+
+c) The driver's hardware probe routine is designed to avoid
+   writing to I/O space until it knows that there is a cs89x0
+   card at the written addresses.  This could cause problems
+   with device probing.  To avoid this behaviour, add one
+   to the `io=' module parameter.  This doesn't actually change
+   the I/O address, but it is a flag to tell the driver
+   to partially initialise the hardware before trying to
+   identify the card.  This could be dangerous if you are
+   not sure that there is a cs89x0 card at the provided address.
+
+   For example, to scan for an adapter located at IO base 0x300,
+   specify an IO address of 0x301.  
+
+d) The "duplex=auto" parameter is only supported for the CS8920.
+
+e) The minimum command-line configuration required if an EEPROM is
+   not present is:
+
+   io 
+   irq 
+   media type (no autodetect)
+
+f) The following additional parameters are CS89XX defaults (values
+   used with no EEPROM or command-line argument).
+
+   * DMA Burst = enabled
+   * IOCHRDY Enabled = enabled
+   * UseSA = enabled
+   * CS8900 defaults to half-duplex if not specified on command-line
+   * CS8920 defaults to autoneg if not specified on command-line
+   * Use reset defaults for other config parameters
+   * dma_mode = 0
+
+g) You can use ifconfig to set the adapter's Ethernet address.
+
+h) Many Linux distributions use the 'modprobe' command to load
+   modules.  This program uses the '/etc/conf.modules' file to
+   determine configuration information which is passed to a driver
+   module when it is loaded.  All the configuration options which are
+   described above may be placed within /etc/conf.modules.
+
+   For example:
+
+   > cat /etc/conf.modules
+   ...
+   alias eth0 cs89x0
+   options cs89x0 io=0x0200 dma=5 use_dma=1
+   ...
+
+   In this example we are telling the module system that the
+   ethernet driver for this machine should use the cs89x0 driver.  We
+   are asking 'modprobe' to pass the 'io', 'dma' and 'use_dma'
+   arguments to the driver when it is loaded.
+
+i) Cirrus recommend that the cs89x0 use the ISA DMA channels 5, 6 or
+   7.  You will probably find that other DMA channels will not work.
+
+j) The cs89x0 supports DMA for receiving only.  DMA mode is
+   significantly more efficient.  Flooding a 400 MHz Celeron machine
+   with large ping packets consumes 82% of its CPU capacity in non-DMA
+   mode.  With DMA this is reduced to 45%.
+
+k) If your Linux kernel was compiled with inbuilt plug-and-play
+   support you will be able to find information about the cs89x0 card
+   with the command
+
+   cat /proc/isapnp
+
+l) If during DMA operation you find erratic behavior or network data
+   corruption you should use your PC's BIOS to slow the EISA bus clock.
+
+m) If the cs89x0 driver is compiled directly into the kernel
+   (non-modular) then its I/O address is automatically determined by
+   ISA bus probing.  The IRQ number, media options, etc are determined
+   from the card's EEPROM.
+
+n) If the cs89x0 driver is compiled directly into the kernel, DMA
+   mode may be selected by providing the kernel with a boot option
+   'cs89x0_dma=N' where 'N' is the desired DMA channel number (5, 6 or 7).
+
+   Kernel boot options may be provided on the LILO command line:
+
+	LILO boot: linux cs89x0_dma=5
+
+   or they may be placed in /etc/lilo.conf:
+
+	image=/boot/bzImage-2.3.48
+	  append="cs89x0_dma=5"
+	  label=linux
+	  root=/dev/hda5
+	  read-only
+
+   The DMA Rx buffer size is hardwired to 16 kbytes in this mode.
+   (64k mode is not available).
+
+
+4.0 COMPILING THE DRIVER
+===============================================================================
+
+The cs89x0 driver can be compiled directly into the kernel or compiled into
+a loadable device driver module.
+
+
+4.1 COMPILING THE DRIVER AS A LOADABLE MODULE
+
+To compile the driver into a loadable module, use the following command 
+(single command line, without quotes):
+
+"gcc -D__KERNEL__ -I/usr/src/linux/include -I/usr/src/linux/net/inet -Wall 
+-Wstrict-prototypes -O2 -fomit-frame-pointer -DMODULE -DCONFIG_MODVERSIONS 
+-c cs89x0.c"
+
+4.2 COMPILING THE DRIVER TO SUPPORT MEMORY MODE
+
+Support for memory mode was not carried over into the 2.3 series kernels.
+
+4.3 COMPILING THE DRIVER TO SUPPORT Rx DMA
+
+The compile-time optionality for DMA was removed in the 2.3 kernel
+series.  DMA support is now unconditionally part of the driver.  It is
+enabled by the 'use_dma=1' module option.
+
+4.4 COMPILING THE DRIVER INTO THE KERNEL
+
+If your Linux distribution already has support for the cs89x0 driver
+then simply copy the source file to the /usr/src/linux/drivers/net
+directory to replace the original ones and run the make utility to
+rebuild the kernel.  See Step 3 for rebuilding the kernel.
+
+If your Linux does not include the cs89x0 driver, you need to edit three 
+configuration files, copy the source file to the /usr/src/linux/drivers/net
+directory, and then run the make utility to rebuild the kernel.
+
+1. Edit the following configuration files by adding the statements as
+indicated.  (When possible, try to locate the added text to the section of the
+file containing similar statements).
+
+
+a.) In /usr/src/linux/drivers/net/Config.in, add:
+
+tristate 'CS89x0 support' CONFIG_CS89x0
+
+Example:
+
+     if [ "$CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL" = "y" ]; then
+       tristate 'ICL EtherTeam 16i/32 support' CONFIG_ETH16I
+     fi
+
+     tristate 'CS89x0 support' CONFIG_CS89x0
+
+     tristate 'NE2000/NE1000 support' CONFIG_NE2000
+     if [ "$CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL" = "y" ]; then
+       tristate 'NI5210 support' CONFIG_NI52
+
+
+b.) In /usr/src/linux/drivers/net/Makefile, add the following lines: 
+
+ifeq ($(CONFIG_CS89x0),y)
+L_OBJS += cs89x0.o
+else
+  ifeq ($(CONFIG_CS89x0),m)
+  M_OBJS += cs89x0.o
+  endif
+endif
+
+
+c.) In /linux/drivers/net/Space.c file, add the line:
+
+extern int cs89x0_probe(struct device *dev);
+
+
+Example:
+
+ extern int ultra_probe(struct device *dev);
+ extern int wd_probe(struct device *dev);
+ extern int el2_probe(struct device *dev);
+
+ extern int cs89x0_probe(struct device *dev);
+
+ extern int ne_probe(struct device *dev);
+ extern int hp_probe(struct device *dev);
+ extern int hp_plus_probe(struct device *dev);
+
+
+Also add:
+
+ #ifdef CONFIG_CS89x0
+ 	{ cs89x0_probe,0 },
+ #endif
+
+
+2.) Copy the driver source files (cs89x0.c and cs89x0.h) 
+into the /usr/src/linux/drivers/net directory.
+
+
+3.) Go to /usr/src/linux directory and run 'make config' followed by 'make' 
+(or make bzImage) to rebuild the kernel. 
+
+4.) Use the DOS 'setup' utility to disable plug and play on the NIC.
+
+
+5.0 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
+===============================================================================
+
+5.1 KNOWN DEFECTS and LIMITATIONS
+
+Refer to the RELEASE.TXT file distributed as part of this archive for a list of 
+known defects, driver limitations, and work arounds.
+
+
+5.2 TESTING THE ADAPTER
+
+Once the adapter has been installed and configured, the diagnostic option of 
+the CS8900/20 Setup Utility can be used to test the functionality of the 
+adapter and its network connection.  Use the diagnostics 'Self Test' option to
+test the functionality of the adapter with the hardware configuration you have
+assigned. You can use the diagnostics 'Network Test' to test the ability of the
+adapter to communicate across the Ethernet with another PC equipped with a 
+CS8900/20-based adapter card (it must also be running the CS8900/20 Setup 
+Utility).
+
+         NOTE: The Setup Utility's diagnostics are designed to run in a
+         DOS-only operating system environment.  DO NOT run the diagnostics 
+         from a DOS or command prompt session under Windows 95, Windows NT, 
+         OS/2, or other operating system.
+
+To run the diagnostics tests on the CS8900/20 adapter:
+
+   1.) Boot DOS on the PC and start the CS8900/20 Setup Utility.
+
+   2.) The adapter's current configuration is displayed.  Hit the ENTER key to
+       get to the main menu.
+
+   4.) Select 'Diagnostics' (ALT-G) from the main menu.  
+       * Select 'Self-Test' to test the adapter's basic functionality.
+       * Select 'Network Test' to test the network connection and cabling.
+
+
+5.2.1 DIAGNOSTIC SELF-TEST
+
+The diagnostic self-test checks the adapter's basic functionality as well as 
+its ability to communicate across the ISA bus based on the system resources 
+assigned during hardware configuration.  The following tests are performed:
+
+   * IO Register Read/Write Test
+     The IO Register Read/Write test insures that the CS8900/20 can be 
+     accessed in IO mode, and that the IO base address is correct.
+
+   * Shared Memory Test
+     The Shared Memory test insures the CS8900/20 can be accessed in memory 
+     mode and that the range of memory addresses assigned does not conflict 
+     with other devices in the system.
+
+   * Interrupt Test
+     The Interrupt test insures there are no conflicts with the assigned IRQ
+     signal.
+
+   * EEPROM Test
+     The EEPROM test insures the EEPROM can be read.
+
+   * Chip RAM Test
+     The Chip RAM test insures the 4K of memory internal to the CS8900/20 is
+     working properly.
+
+   * Internal Loop-back Test
+     The Internal Loop Back test insures the adapter's transmitter and 
+     receiver are operating properly.  If this test fails, make sure the 
+     adapter's cable is connected to the network (check for LED activity for 
+     example).
+
+   * Boot PROM Test
+     The Boot PROM  test insures the Boot PROM is present, and can be read.
+     Failure indicates the Boot PROM  was not successfully read due to a
+     hardware problem or due to a conflicts on the Boot PROM address
+     assignment. (Test only applies if the adapter is configured to use the
+     Boot PROM option.)
+
+Failure of a test item indicates a possible system resource conflict with 
+another device on the ISA bus.  In this case, you should use the Manual Setup 
+option to reconfigure the adapter by selecting a different value for the system
+resource that failed.
+
+
+5.2.2 DIAGNOSTIC NETWORK TEST
+
+The Diagnostic Network Test verifies a working network connection by 
+transferring data between two CS8900/20 adapters installed in different PCs 
+on the same network. (Note: the diagnostic network test should not be run 
+between two nodes across a router.) 
+
+This test requires that each of the two PCs have a CS8900/20-based adapter
+installed and have the CS8900/20 Setup Utility running.  The first PC is 
+configured as a Responder and the other PC is configured as an Initiator.  
+Once the Initiator is started, it sends data frames to the Responder which 
+returns the frames to the Initiator.
+
+The total number of frames received and transmitted are displayed on the 
+Initiator's display, along with a count of the number of frames received and 
+transmitted OK or in error.  The test can be terminated anytime by the user at 
+either PC.
+
+To setup the Diagnostic Network Test:
+
+    1.) Select a PC with a CS8900/20-based adapter and a known working network
+        connection to act as the Responder.  Run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility 
+        and select 'Diagnostics -> Network Test -> Responder' from the main 
+        menu.  Hit ENTER to start the Responder.
+
+    2.) Return to the PC with the CS8900/20-based adapter you want to test and
+        start the CS8900/20 Setup Utility. 
+
+    3.) From the main menu, Select 'Diagnostic -> Network Test -> Initiator'.
+        Hit ENTER to start the test.
+ 
+You may stop the test on the Initiator at any time while allowing the Responder
+to continue running.  In this manner, you can move to additional PCs and test 
+them by starting the Initiator on another PC without having to stop/start the 
+Responder.
+ 
+
+
+5.3 USING THE ADAPTER'S LEDs
+
+The 2 and 3-media adapters have two LEDs visible on the back end of the board 
+located near the 10Base-T connector.  
+
+Link Integrity LED: A "steady" ON of the green LED indicates a valid 10Base-T 
+connection.  (Only applies to 10Base-T.  The green LED has no significance for
+a 10Base-2 or AUI connection.)
+
+TX/RX LED: The yellow LED lights briefly each time the adapter transmits or 
+receives data. (The yellow LED will appear to "flicker" on a typical network.)
+
+
+5.4 RESOLVING I/O CONFLICTS
+
+An IO conflict occurs when two or more adapter use the same ISA resource (IO 
+address, memory address or IRQ).  You can usually detect an IO conflict in one 
+of four ways after installing and or configuring the CS8900/20-based adapter:
+
+    1.) The system does not boot properly (or at all).
+
+    2.) The driver cannot communicate with the adapter, reporting an "Adapter
+        not found" error message.
+
+    3.) You cannot connect to the network or the driver will not load.
+
+    4.) If you have configured the adapter to run in memory mode but the driver
+        reports it is using IO mode when loading, this is an indication of a
+        memory address conflict.
+
+If an IO conflict occurs, run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility and perform a 
+diagnostic self-test.  Normally, the ISA resource in conflict will fail the 
+self-test.  If so, reconfigure the adapter selecting another choice for the 
+resource in conflict.  Run the diagnostics again to check for further IO 
+conflicts.
+
+In some cases, such as when the PC will not boot, it may be necessary to remove
+the adapter and reconfigure it by installing it in another PC to run the 
+CS8900/20 Setup Utility.  Once reinstalled in the target system, run the 
+diagnostics self-test to ensure the new configuration is free of conflicts 
+before loading the driver again.
+
+When manually configuring the adapter, keep in mind the typical ISA system 
+resource usage as indicated in the tables below.
+
+I/O Address    	Device                        IRQ      Device
+-----------    	--------                      ---      --------
+ 200-20F       	Game I/O adapter               3       COM2, Bus Mouse
+ 230-23F       	Bus Mouse                      4       COM1
+ 270-27F       	LPT3: third parallel port      5       LPT2
+ 2F0-2FF       	COM2: second serial port       6       Floppy Disk controller
+ 320-32F       	Fixed disk controller          7       LPT1
+                                      	       8       Real-time Clock
+                                                 9       EGA/VGA display adapter    
+                                                12       Mouse (PS/2)                              
+Memory Address  Device                          13       Math Coprocessor
+--------------  ---------------------           14       Hard Disk controller
+A000-BFFF	EGA Graphics Adapter
+A000-C7FF	VGA Graphics Adapter
+B000-BFFF	Mono Graphics Adapter
+B800-BFFF	Color Graphics Adapter
+E000-FFFF	AT BIOS
+
+
+
+
+6.0 TECHNICAL SUPPORT
+===============================================================================
+
+6.1 CONTACTING CIRRUS LOGIC'S TECHNICAL SUPPORT
+
+Cirrus Logic's CS89XX Technical Application Support can be reached at:
+
+Telephone  :(800) 888-5016 (from inside U.S. and Canada)
+           :(512) 442-7555 (from outside the U.S. and Canada)
+Fax        :(512) 912-3871
+Email      :ethernet@crystal.cirrus.com
+WWW        :http://www.cirrus.com
+
+
+6.2 INFORMATION REQUIRED BEFORE CONTACTING TECHNICAL SUPPORT
+
+Before contacting Cirrus Logic for technical support, be prepared to provide as 
+Much of the following information as possible. 
+
+1.) Adapter type (CRD8900, CDB8900, CDB8920, etc.)
+
+2.) Adapter configuration
+
+    * IO Base, Memory Base, IO or memory mode enabled, IRQ, DMA channel
+    * Plug and Play enabled/disabled (CS8920-based adapters only)
+    * Configured for media auto-detect or specific media type (which type).    
+
+3.) PC System's Configuration
+
+    * Plug and Play system (yes/no)
+    * BIOS (make and version)
+    * System make and model
+    * CPU (type and speed)
+    * System RAM
+    * SCSI Adapter
+
+4.) Software
+
+    * CS89XX driver and version
+    * Your network operating system and version
+    * Your system's OS version 
+    * Version of all protocol support files
+
+5.) Any Error Message displayed.
+
+
+
+6.3 OBTAINING THE LATEST DRIVER VERSION
+
+You can obtain the latest CS89XX drivers and support software from Cirrus Logic's 
+Web site.  You can also contact Cirrus Logic's Technical Support (email:
+ethernet@crystal.cirrus.com) and request that you be registered for automatic 
+software-update notification.
+
+Cirrus Logic maintains a web page at http://www.cirrus.com with the
+latest drivers and technical publications.
+
+
+6.4 Current maintainer
+
+In February 2000 the maintenance of this driver was assumed by Andrew
+Morton.
+
+6.5 Kernel module parameters
+
+For use in embedded environments with no cs89x0 EEPROM, the kernel boot
+parameter `cs89x0_media=' has been implemented.  Usage is:
+
+	cs89x0_media=rj45    or
+	cs89x0_media=aui     or
+	cs89x0_media=bnc
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/cxacru-cf.py b/Documentation/networking/cxacru-cf.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b41d298398c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/cxacru-cf.py
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+#!/usr/bin/env python
+# Copyright 2009 Simon Arlott
+#
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+# under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
+# Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option)
+# any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
+# ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
+# FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for
+# more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+# this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59
+# Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307, USA.
+#
+# Usage: cxacru-cf.py < cxacru-cf.bin
+# Output: values string suitable for the sysfs adsl_config attribute
+#
+# Warning: cxacru-cf.bin with MD5 hash cdbac2689969d5ed5d4850f117702110
+# contains mis-aligned values which will stop the modem from being able
+# to make a connection. If the first and last two bytes are removed then
+# the values become valid, but the modulation will be forced to ANSI
+# T1.413 only which may not be appropriate.
+#
+# The original binary format is a packed list of le32 values.
+
+import sys
+import struct
+
+i = 0
+while True:
+	buf = sys.stdin.read(4)
+
+	if len(buf) == 0:
+		break
+	elif len(buf) != 4:
+		sys.stdout.write("\n")
+		sys.stderr.write("Error: read {0} not 4 bytes\n".format(len(buf)))
+		sys.exit(1)
+
+	if i > 0:
+		sys.stdout.write(" ")
+	sys.stdout.write("{0:x}={1}".format(i, struct.unpack("<I", buf)[0]))
+	i += 1
+
+sys.stdout.write("\n")
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt b/Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2cce04457b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+Firmware is required for this device: http://accessrunner.sourceforge.net/
+
+While it is capable of managing/maintaining the ADSL connection without the
+module loaded, the device will sometimes stop responding after unloading the
+driver and it is necessary to unplug/remove power to the device to fix this.
+
+Note: support for cxacru-cf.bin has been removed. It was not loaded correctly
+so it had no effect on the device configuration. Fixing it could have stopped
+existing devices working when an invalid configuration is supplied.
+
+There is a script cxacru-cf.py to convert an existing file to the sysfs form.
+
+Detected devices will appear as ATM devices named "cxacru". In /sys/class/atm/
+these are directories named cxacruN where N is the device number. A symlink
+named device points to the USB interface device's directory which contains
+several sysfs attribute files for retrieving device statistics:
+
+* adsl_controller_version
+
+* adsl_headend
+* adsl_headend_environment
+	Information about the remote headend.
+
+* adsl_config
+	Configuration writing interface.
+	Write parameters in hexadecimal format <index>=<value>,
+	separated by whitespace, e.g.:
+		"1=0 a=5"
+	Up to 7 parameters at a time will be sent and the modem will restart
+	the ADSL connection when any value is set. These are logged for future
+	reference.
+
+* downstream_attenuation (dB)
+* downstream_bits_per_frame
+* downstream_rate (kbps)
+* downstream_snr_margin (dB)
+	Downstream stats.
+
+* upstream_attenuation (dB)
+* upstream_bits_per_frame
+* upstream_rate (kbps)
+* upstream_snr_margin (dB)
+* transmitter_power (dBm/Hz)
+	Upstream stats.
+
+* downstream_crc_errors
+* downstream_fec_errors
+* downstream_hec_errors
+* upstream_crc_errors
+* upstream_fec_errors
+* upstream_hec_errors
+	Error counts.
+
+* line_startable
+	Indicates that ADSL support on the device
+	is/can be enabled, see adsl_start.
+
+* line_status
+	"initialising"
+	"down"
+	"attempting to activate"
+	"training"
+	"channel analysis"
+	"exchange"
+	"waiting"
+	"up"
+
+	Changes between "down" and "attempting to activate"
+	if there is no signal.
+
+* link_status
+	"not connected"
+	"connected"
+	"lost"
+
+* mac_address
+
+* modulation
+	"" (when not connected)
+	"ANSI T1.413"
+	"ITU-T G.992.1 (G.DMT)"
+	"ITU-T G.992.2 (G.LITE)"
+
+* startup_attempts
+	Count of total attempts to initialise ADSL.
+
+To enable/disable ADSL, the following can be written to the adsl_state file:
+	"start"
+	"stop
+	"restart" (stops, waits 1.5s, then starts)
+	"poll" (used to resume status polling if it was disabled due to failure)
+
+Changes in adsl/line state are reported via kernel log messages:
+	[4942145.150704] ATM dev 0: ADSL state: running
+	[4942243.663766] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: down
+	[4942249.665075] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: attempting to activate
+	[4942253.654954] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: training
+	[4942255.666387] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: channel analysis
+	[4942259.656262] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: exchange
+	[2635357.696901] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: up (8128 kb/s down | 832 kb/s up)
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/cxgb.txt b/Documentation/networking/cxgb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..20a887615c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/cxgb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,352 @@
+                 Chelsio N210 10Gb Ethernet Network Controller
+
+                         Driver Release Notes for Linux
+
+                                 Version 2.1.1
+
+                                 June 20, 2005
+
+CONTENTS
+========
+ INTRODUCTION
+ FEATURES
+ PERFORMANCE
+ DRIVER MESSAGES
+ KNOWN ISSUES
+ SUPPORT
+
+
+INTRODUCTION
+============
+
+ This document describes the Linux driver for Chelsio 10Gb Ethernet Network
+ Controller. This driver supports the Chelsio N210 NIC and is backward
+ compatible with the Chelsio N110 model 10Gb NICs.
+
+
+FEATURES
+========
+
+ Adaptive Interrupts (adaptive-rx)
+ ---------------------------------
+
+  This feature provides an adaptive algorithm that adjusts the interrupt
+  coalescing parameters, allowing the driver to dynamically adapt the latency
+  settings to achieve the highest performance during various types of network
+  load.
+
+  The interface used to control this feature is ethtool. Please see the
+  ethtool manpage for additional usage information.
+
+  By default, adaptive-rx is disabled.
+  To enable adaptive-rx:
+
+      ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx on
+
+  To disable adaptive-rx, use ethtool:
+
+      ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off
+
+  After disabling adaptive-rx, the timer latency value will be set to 50us.
+  You may set the timer latency after disabling adaptive-rx:
+
+      ethtool -C <interface> rx-usecs <microseconds>
+
+  An example to set the timer latency value to 100us on eth0:
+
+      ethtool -C eth0 rx-usecs 100
+
+  You may also provide a timer latency value while disabling adaptive-rx:
+
+      ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off rx-usecs <microseconds>
+
+  If adaptive-rx is disabled and a timer latency value is specified, the timer
+  will be set to the specified value until changed by the user or until
+  adaptive-rx is enabled.
+
+  To view the status of the adaptive-rx and timer latency values:
+
+      ethtool -c <interface>
+
+
+ TCP Segmentation Offloading (TSO) Support
+ -----------------------------------------
+
+  This feature, also known as "large send", enables a system's protocol stack
+  to offload portions of outbound TCP processing to a network interface card
+  thereby reducing system CPU utilization and enhancing performance.
+
+  The interface used to control this feature is ethtool version 1.8 or higher.
+  Please see the ethtool manpage for additional usage information.
+
+  By default, TSO is enabled.
+  To disable TSO:
+
+      ethtool -K <interface> tso off
+
+  To enable TSO:
+
+      ethtool -K <interface> tso on
+
+  To view the status of TSO:
+
+      ethtool -k <interface>
+
+
+PERFORMANCE
+===========
+
+ The following information is provided as an example of how to change system
+ parameters for "performance tuning" an what value to use. You may or may not
+ want to change these system parameters, depending on your server/workstation
+ application. Doing so is not warranted in any way by Chelsio Communications,
+ and is done at "YOUR OWN RISK". Chelsio will not be held responsible for loss
+ of data or damage to equipment.
+
+ Your distribution may have a different way of doing things, or you may prefer
+ a different method. These commands are shown only to provide an example of
+ what to do and are by no means definitive.
+
+ Making any of the following system changes will only last until you reboot
+ your system. You may want to write a script that runs at boot-up which
+ includes the optimal settings for your system.
+
+  Setting PCI Latency Timer:
+      setpci -d 1425:* 0x0c.l=0x0000F800
+
+  Disabling TCP timestamp:
+      sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_timestamps=0
+
+  Disabling SACK:
+      sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_sack=0
+
+  Setting large number of incoming connection requests:
+      sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_max_syn_backlog=3000
+
+  Setting maximum receive socket buffer size:
+      sysctl -w net.core.rmem_max=1024000
+
+  Setting maximum send socket buffer size:
+      sysctl -w net.core.wmem_max=1024000
+
+  Set smp_affinity (on a multiprocessor system) to a single CPU:
+      echo 1 > /proc/irq/<interrupt_number>/smp_affinity
+
+  Setting default receive socket buffer size:
+      sysctl -w net.core.rmem_default=524287
+
+  Setting default send socket buffer size:
+      sysctl -w net.core.wmem_default=524287
+
+  Setting maximum option memory buffers:
+      sysctl -w net.core.optmem_max=524287
+
+  Setting maximum backlog (# of unprocessed packets before kernel drops):
+      sysctl -w net.core.netdev_max_backlog=300000
+
+  Setting TCP read buffers (min/default/max):
+      sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="10000000 10000000 10000000"
+
+  Setting TCP write buffers (min/pressure/max):
+      sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_wmem="10000000 10000000 10000000"
+
+  Setting TCP buffer space (min/pressure/max):
+      sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_mem="10000000 10000000 10000000"
+
+  TCP window size for single connections:
+   The receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size must be at least as large as the
+   Bandwidth-Delay Product of the communication link between the sender and
+   receiver. Due to the variations of RTT, you may want to increase the buffer
+   size up to 2 times the Bandwidth-Delay Product. Reference page 289 of
+   "TCP/IP Illustrated, Volume 1, The Protocols" by W. Richard Stevens.
+   At 10Gb speeds, use the following formula:
+       RX_WINDOW >= 1.25MBytes * RTT(in milliseconds)
+       Example for RTT with 100us: RX_WINDOW = (1,250,000 * 0.1) = 125,000
+   RX_WINDOW sizes of 256KB - 512KB should be sufficient.
+   Setting the min, max, and default receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size:
+       sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="<min> <default> <max>"
+
+  TCP window size for multiple connections:
+   The receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size may be calculated the same as single
+   connections, but should be divided by the number of connections. The
+   smaller window prevents congestion and facilitates better pacing,
+   especially if/when MAC level flow control does not work well or when it is
+   not supported on the machine. Experimentation may be necessary to attain
+   the correct value. This method is provided as a starting point for the
+   correct receive buffer size.
+   Setting the min, max, and default receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size is
+   performed in the same manner as single connection.
+
+
+DRIVER MESSAGES
+===============
+
+ The following messages are the most common messages logged by syslog. These
+ may be found in /var/log/messages.
+
+  Driver up:
+     Chelsio Network Driver - version 2.1.1
+
+  NIC detected:
+     eth#: Chelsio N210 1x10GBaseX NIC (rev #), PCIX 133MHz/64-bit
+
+  Link up:
+     eth#: link is up at 10 Gbps, full duplex
+
+  Link down:
+     eth#: link is down
+
+
+KNOWN ISSUES
+============
+
+ These issues have been identified during testing. The following information
+ is provided as a workaround to the problem. In some cases, this problem is
+ inherent to Linux or to a particular Linux Distribution and/or hardware
+ platform.
+
+  1. Large number of TCP retransmits on a multiprocessor (SMP) system.
+
+      On a system with multiple CPUs, the interrupt (IRQ) for the network
+      controller may be bound to more than one CPU. This will cause TCP
+      retransmits if the packet data were to be split across different CPUs
+      and re-assembled in a different order than expected.
+
+      To eliminate the TCP retransmits, set smp_affinity on the particular
+      interrupt to a single CPU. You can locate the interrupt (IRQ) used on
+      the N110/N210 by using ifconfig:
+          ifconfig <dev_name> | grep Interrupt
+      Set the smp_affinity to a single CPU:
+          echo 1 > /proc/irq/<interrupt_number>/smp_affinity
+
+      It is highly suggested that you do not run the irqbalance daemon on your
+      system, as this will change any smp_affinity setting you have applied.
+      The irqbalance daemon runs on a 10 second interval and binds interrupts
+      to the least loaded CPU determined by the daemon. To disable this daemon:
+          chkconfig --level 2345 irqbalance off
+
+      By default, some Linux distributions enable the kernel feature,
+      irqbalance, which performs the same function as the daemon. To disable
+      this feature, add the following line to your bootloader:
+          noirqbalance
+
+          Example using the Grub bootloader:
+              title Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (2.4.21-27.ELsmp)
+              root (hd0,0)
+              kernel /vmlinuz-2.4.21-27.ELsmp ro root=/dev/hda3 noirqbalance
+              initrd /initrd-2.4.21-27.ELsmp.img
+
+  2. After running insmod, the driver is loaded and the incorrect network
+     interface is brought up without running ifup.
+
+      When using 2.4.x kernels, including RHEL kernels, the Linux kernel
+      invokes a script named "hotplug". This script is primarily used to
+      automatically bring up USB devices when they are plugged in, however,
+      the script also attempts to automatically bring up a network interface
+      after loading the kernel module. The hotplug script does this by scanning
+      the ifcfg-eth# config files in /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts, looking
+      for HWADDR=<mac_address>.
+
+      If the hotplug script does not find the HWADDRR within any of the
+      ifcfg-eth# files, it will bring up the device with the next available
+      interface name. If this interface is already configured for a different
+      network card, your new interface will have incorrect IP address and
+      network settings.
+
+      To solve this issue, you can add the HWADDR=<mac_address> key to the
+      interface config file of your network controller.
+
+      To disable this "hotplug" feature, you may add the driver (module name)
+      to the "blacklist" file located in /etc/hotplug. It has been noted that
+      this does not work for network devices because the net.agent script
+      does not use the blacklist file. Simply remove, or rename, the net.agent
+      script located in /etc/hotplug to disable this feature.
+
+  3. Transport Protocol (TP) hangs when running heavy multi-connection traffic
+     on an AMD Opteron system with HyperTransport PCI-X Tunnel chipset.
+
+      If your AMD Opteron system uses the AMD-8131 HyperTransport PCI-X Tunnel
+      chipset, you may experience the "133-Mhz Mode Split Completion Data
+      Corruption" bug identified by AMD while using a 133Mhz PCI-X card on the
+      bus PCI-X bus.
+
+      AMD states, "Under highly specific conditions, the AMD-8131 PCI-X Tunnel
+      can provide stale data via split completion cycles to a PCI-X card that
+      is operating at 133 Mhz", causing data corruption.
+
+      AMD's provides three workarounds for this problem, however, Chelsio
+      recommends the first option for best performance with this bug:
+
+        For 133Mhz secondary bus operation, limit the transaction length and
+        the number of outstanding transactions, via BIOS configuration
+        programming of the PCI-X card, to the following:
+
+           Data Length (bytes): 1k
+           Total allowed outstanding transactions: 2
+
+      Please refer to AMD 8131-HT/PCI-X Errata 26310 Rev 3.08 August 2004,
+      section 56, "133-MHz Mode Split Completion Data Corruption" for more
+      details with this bug and workarounds suggested by AMD.
+
+      It may be possible to work outside AMD's recommended PCI-X settings, try
+      increasing the Data Length to 2k bytes for increased performance. If you
+      have issues with these settings, please revert to the "safe" settings
+      and duplicate the problem before submitting a bug or asking for support.
+
+      NOTE: The default setting on most systems is 8 outstanding transactions
+            and 2k bytes data length.
+
+  4. On multiprocessor systems, it has been noted that an application which
+     is handling 10Gb networking can switch between CPUs causing degraded
+     and/or unstable performance.
+
+      If running on an SMP system and taking performance measurements, it
+      is suggested you either run the latest netperf-2.4.0+ or use a binding
+      tool such as Tim Hockin's procstate utilities (runon)
+      <http://www.hockin.org/~thockin/procstate/>.
+
+      Binding netserver and netperf (or other applications) to particular
+      CPUs will have a significant difference in performance measurements.
+      You may need to experiment which CPU to bind the application to in
+      order to achieve the best performance for your system.
+
+      If you are developing an application designed for 10Gb networking,
+      please keep in mind you may want to look at kernel functions
+      sched_setaffinity & sched_getaffinity to bind your application.
+
+      If you are just running user-space applications such as ftp, telnet,
+      etc., you may want to try the runon tool provided by Tim Hockin's
+      procstate utility. You could also try binding the interface to a
+      particular CPU: runon 0 ifup eth0
+
+
+SUPPORT
+=======
+
+ If you have problems with the software or hardware, please contact our
+ customer support team via email at support@chelsio.com or check our website
+ at http://www.chelsio.com
+
+===============================================================================
+
+ Chelsio Communications
+ 370 San Aleso Ave.
+ Suite 100
+ Sunnyvale, CA 94085
+ http://www.chelsio.com
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+it under the terms of the GNU General Public License, version 2, as
+published by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
+with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307, USA.
+
+THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
+WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+ Copyright (c) 2003-2005 Chelsio Communications. All rights reserved.
+
+===============================================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d718bc2ff1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+DCCP protocol
+=============
+
+
+Contents
+========
+- Introduction
+- Missing features
+- Socket options
+- Sysctl variables
+- IOCTLs
+- Other tunables
+- Notes
+
+
+Introduction
+============
+Datagram Congestion Control Protocol (DCCP) is an unreliable, connection
+oriented protocol designed to solve issues present in UDP and TCP, particularly
+for real-time and multimedia (streaming) traffic.
+It divides into a base protocol (RFC 4340) and plugable congestion control
+modules called CCIDs. Like plugable TCP congestion control, at least one CCID
+needs to be enabled in order for the protocol to function properly. In the Linux
+implementation, this is the TCP-like CCID2 (RFC 4341). Additional CCIDs, such as
+the TCP-friendly CCID3 (RFC 4342), are optional.
+For a brief introduction to CCIDs and suggestions for choosing a CCID to match
+given applications, see section 10 of RFC 4340.
+
+It has a base protocol and pluggable congestion control IDs (CCIDs).
+
+DCCP is a Proposed Standard (RFC 2026), and the homepage for DCCP as a protocol
+is at http://www.ietf.org/html.charters/dccp-charter.html
+
+
+Missing features
+================
+The Linux DCCP implementation does not currently support all the features that are
+specified in RFCs 4340...42.
+
+The known bugs are at:
+	http://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/networking/todo#DCCP
+
+For more up-to-date versions of the DCCP implementation, please consider using
+the experimental DCCP test tree; instructions for checking this out are on:
+http://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/networking/dccp_testing#Experimental_DCCP_source_tree
+
+
+Socket options
+==============
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_ID sets the dequeuing policy for outgoing packets. It takes
+a policy ID as argument and can only be set before the connection (i.e. changes
+during an established connection are not supported). Currently, two policies are
+defined: the "simple" policy (DCCPQ_POLICY_SIMPLE), which does nothing special,
+and a priority-based variant (DCCPQ_POLICY_PRIO). The latter allows to pass an
+u32 priority value as ancillary data to sendmsg(), where higher numbers indicate
+a higher packet priority (similar to SO_PRIORITY). This ancillary data needs to
+be formatted using a cmsg(3) message header filled in as follows:
+	cmsg->cmsg_level = SOL_DCCP;
+	cmsg->cmsg_type	 = DCCP_SCM_PRIORITY;
+	cmsg->cmsg_len	 = CMSG_LEN(sizeof(uint32_t));	/* or CMSG_LEN(4) */
+
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_TXQLEN sets the maximum length of the output queue. A zero
+value is always interpreted as unbounded queue length. If different from zero,
+the interpretation of this parameter depends on the current dequeuing policy
+(see above): the "simple" policy will enforce a fixed queue size by returning
+EAGAIN, whereas the "prio" policy enforces a fixed queue length by dropping the
+lowest-priority packet first. The default value for this parameter is
+initialised from /proc/sys/net/dccp/default/tx_qlen.
+
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVICE sets the service. The specification mandates use of
+service codes (RFC 4340, sec. 8.1.2); if this socket option is not set,
+the socket will fall back to 0 (which means that no meaningful service code
+is present). On active sockets this is set before connect(); specifying more
+than one code has no effect (all subsequent service codes are ignored). The
+case is different for passive sockets, where multiple service codes (up to 32)
+can be set before calling bind().
+
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_GET_CUR_MPS is read-only and retrieves the current maximum packet
+size (application payload size) in bytes, see RFC 4340, section 14.
+
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_AVAILABLE_CCIDS is also read-only and returns the list of CCIDs
+supported by the endpoint. The option value is an array of type uint8_t whose
+size is passed as option length. The minimum array size is 4 elements, the
+value returned in the optlen argument always reflects the true number of
+built-in CCIDs.
+
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID is write-only and sets both the TX and RX CCIDs at the same
+time, combining the operation of the next two socket options. This option is
+preferrable over the latter two, since often applications will use the same
+type of CCID for both directions; and mixed use of CCIDs is not currently well
+understood. This socket option takes as argument at least one uint8_t value, or
+an array of uint8_t values, which must match available CCIDS (see above). CCIDs
+must be registered on the socket before calling connect() or listen().
+
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_TX_CCID is read/write. It returns the current CCID (if set) or sets
+the preference list for the TX CCID, using the same format as DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID.
+Please note that the getsockopt argument type here is `int', not uint8_t.
+
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_RX_CCID is analogous to DCCP_SOCKOPT_TX_CCID, but for the RX CCID.
+
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVER_TIMEWAIT enables the server (listening socket) to hold
+timewait state when closing the connection (RFC 4340, 8.3). The usual case is
+that the closing server sends a CloseReq, whereupon the client holds timewait
+state. When this boolean socket option is on, the server sends a Close instead
+and will enter TIMEWAIT. This option must be set after accept() returns.
+
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_SEND_CSCOV and DCCP_SOCKOPT_RECV_CSCOV are used for setting the
+partial checksum coverage (RFC 4340, sec. 9.2). The default is that checksums
+always cover the entire packet and that only fully covered application data is
+accepted by the receiver. Hence, when using this feature on the sender, it must
+be enabled at the receiver, too with suitable choice of CsCov.
+
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_SEND_CSCOV sets the sender checksum coverage. Values in the
+	range 0..15 are acceptable. The default setting is 0 (full coverage),
+	values between 1..15 indicate partial coverage.
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_RECV_CSCOV is for the receiver and has a different meaning: it
+	sets a threshold, where again values 0..15 are acceptable. The default
+	of 0 means that all packets with a partial coverage will be discarded.
+	Values in the range 1..15 indicate that packets with minimally such a
+	coverage value are also acceptable. The higher the number, the more
+	restrictive this setting (see [RFC 4340, sec. 9.2.1]). Partial coverage
+	settings are inherited to the child socket after accept().
+
+The following two options apply to CCID 3 exclusively and are getsockopt()-only.
+In either case, a TFRC info struct (defined in <linux/tfrc.h>) is returned.
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID_RX_INFO
+	Returns a `struct tfrc_rx_info' in optval; the buffer for optval and
+	optlen must be set to at least sizeof(struct tfrc_rx_info).
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID_TX_INFO
+	Returns a `struct tfrc_tx_info' in optval; the buffer for optval and
+	optlen must be set to at least sizeof(struct tfrc_tx_info).
+
+On unidirectional connections it is useful to close the unused half-connection
+via shutdown (SHUT_WR or SHUT_RD): this will reduce per-packet processing costs.
+
+
+Sysctl variables
+================
+Several DCCP default parameters can be managed by the following sysctls
+(sysctl net.dccp.default or /proc/sys/net/dccp/default):
+
+request_retries
+	The number of active connection initiation retries (the number of
+	Requests minus one) before timing out. In addition, it also governs
+	the behaviour of the other, passive side: this variable also sets
+	the number of times DCCP repeats sending a Response when the initial
+	handshake does not progress from RESPOND to OPEN (i.e. when no Ack
+	is received after the initial Request).  This value should be greater
+	than 0, suggested is less than 10. Analogue of tcp_syn_retries.
+
+retries1
+	How often a DCCP Response is retransmitted until the listening DCCP
+	side considers its connecting peer dead. Analogue of tcp_retries1.
+
+retries2
+	The number of times a general DCCP packet is retransmitted. This has
+	importance for retransmitted acknowledgments and feature negotiation,
+	data packets are never retransmitted. Analogue of tcp_retries2.
+
+tx_ccid = 2
+	Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. Depending on the
+	choice of CCID, the Send Ack Vector feature is enabled automatically.
+
+rx_ccid = 2
+	Default CCID for the receiver-sender half-connection; see tx_ccid.
+
+seq_window = 100
+	The initial sequence window (sec. 7.5.2) of the sender. This influences
+	the local ackno validity and the remote seqno validity windows (7.5.1).
+	Values in the range Wmin = 32 (RFC 4340, 7.5.2) up to 2^32-1 can be set.
+
+tx_qlen = 5
+	The size of the transmit buffer in packets. A value of 0 corresponds
+	to an unbounded transmit buffer.
+
+sync_ratelimit = 125 ms
+	The timeout between subsequent DCCP-Sync packets sent in response to
+	sequence-invalid packets on the same socket (RFC 4340, 7.5.4). The unit
+	of this parameter is milliseconds; a value of 0 disables rate-limiting.
+
+
+IOCTLS
+======
+FIONREAD
+	Works as in udp(7): returns in the `int' argument pointer the size of
+	the next pending datagram in bytes, or 0 when no datagram is pending.
+
+
+Other tunables
+==============
+Per-route rto_min support
+	CCID-2 supports the RTAX_RTO_MIN per-route setting for the minimum value
+	of the RTO timer. This setting can be modified via the 'rto_min' option
+	of iproute2; for example:
+		> ip route change 10.0.0.0/24   rto_min 250j dev wlan0
+		> ip route add    10.0.0.254/32 rto_min 800j dev wlan0
+		> ip route show dev wlan0
+	CCID-3 also supports the rto_min setting: it is used to define the lower
+	bound for the expiry of the nofeedback timer. This can be useful on LANs
+	with very low RTTs (e.g., loopback, Gbit ethernet).
+
+
+Notes
+=====
+DCCP does not travel through NAT successfully at present on many boxes. This is
+because the checksum covers the pseudo-header as per TCP and UDP. Linux NAT
+support for DCCP has been added.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/de4x5.txt b/Documentation/networking/de4x5.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c8e4ca9b2c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/de4x5.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,178 @@
+    Originally,   this  driver  was    written  for the  Digital   Equipment
+    Corporation series of EtherWORKS Ethernet cards:
+
+        DE425 TP/COAX EISA
+	DE434 TP PCI
+	DE435 TP/COAX/AUI PCI
+	DE450 TP/COAX/AUI PCI
+	DE500 10/100 PCI Fasternet
+
+    but it  will  now attempt  to  support all  cards which   conform to the
+    Digital Semiconductor   SROM   Specification.    The  driver   currently
+    recognises the following chips:
+
+        DC21040  (no SROM) 
+	DC21041[A]  
+	DC21140[A] 
+	DC21142 
+	DC21143 
+
+    So far the driver is known to work with the following cards:
+
+        KINGSTON
+	Linksys
+	ZNYX342
+	SMC8432
+	SMC9332 (w/new SROM)
+	ZNYX31[45]
+	ZNYX346 10/100 4 port (can act as a 10/100 bridge!) 
+
+    The driver has been tested on a relatively busy network using the DE425,
+    DE434, DE435 and DE500 cards and benchmarked with 'ttcp': it transferred
+    16M of data to a DECstation 5000/200 as follows:
+
+                TCP           UDP
+             TX     RX     TX     RX
+    DE425   1030k  997k   1170k  1128k
+    DE434   1063k  995k   1170k  1125k
+    DE435   1063k  995k   1170k  1125k
+    DE500   1063k  998k   1170k  1125k  in 10Mb/s mode
+
+    All  values are typical (in   kBytes/sec) from a  sample  of 4 for  each
+    measurement. Their error is +/-20k on a quiet (private) network and also
+    depend on what load the CPU has.
+
+    =========================================================================
+
+    The ability to load this  driver as a loadable  module has been included
+    and used extensively  during the driver development  (to save those long
+    reboot sequences).  Loadable module support  under PCI and EISA has been
+    achieved by letting the driver autoprobe as if it were compiled into the
+    kernel. Do make sure  you're not sharing  interrupts with anything  that
+    cannot accommodate  interrupt  sharing!
+
+    To utilise this ability, you have to do 8 things:
+
+    0) have a copy of the loadable modules code installed on your system.
+    1) copy de4x5.c from the  /linux/drivers/net directory to your favourite
+    temporary directory.
+    2) for fixed  autoprobes (not  recommended),  edit the source code  near
+    line 5594 to reflect the I/O address  you're using, or assign these when
+    loading by:
+
+                   insmod de4x5 io=0xghh           where g = bus number
+		                                        hh = device number   
+
+       NB: autoprobing for modules is now supported by default. You may just
+           use:
+
+                   insmod de4x5
+
+           to load all available boards. For a specific board, still use
+	   the 'io=?' above.
+    3) compile  de4x5.c, but include -DMODULE in  the command line to ensure
+    that the correct bits are compiled (see end of source code).
+    4) if you are wanting to add a new  card, goto 5. Otherwise, recompile a
+    kernel with the de4x5 configuration turned off and reboot.
+    5) insmod de4x5 [io=0xghh]
+    6) run the net startup bits for your new eth?? interface(s) manually 
+    (usually /etc/rc.inet[12] at boot time). 
+    7) enjoy!
+
+    To unload a module, turn off the associated interface(s) 
+    'ifconfig eth?? down' then 'rmmod de4x5'.
+
+    Automedia detection is included so that in  principle you can disconnect
+    from, e.g.  TP, reconnect  to BNC  and  things will still work  (after a
+    pause whilst the   driver figures out   where its media went).  My tests
+    using ping showed that it appears to work....
+
+    By  default,  the driver will  now   autodetect any  DECchip based card.
+    Should you have a need to restrict the driver to DIGITAL only cards, you
+    can compile with a  DEC_ONLY define, or if  loading as a module, use the
+    'dec_only=1'  parameter. 
+
+    I've changed the timing routines to  use the kernel timer and scheduling
+    functions  so that the  hangs  and other assorted problems that occurred
+    while autosensing the  media  should be gone.  A  bonus  for the DC21040
+    auto  media sense algorithm is  that it can now  use one that is more in
+    line with the  rest (the DC21040  chip doesn't  have a hardware  timer).
+    The downside is the 1 'jiffies' (10ms) resolution.
+
+    IEEE 802.3u MII interface code has  been added in anticipation that some
+    products may use it in the future.
+
+    The SMC9332 card  has a non-compliant SROM  which needs fixing -  I have
+    patched this  driver to detect it  because the SROM format used complies
+    to a previous DEC-STD format.
+
+    I have removed the buffer copies needed for receive on Intels.  I cannot
+    remove them for   Alphas since  the  Tulip hardware   only does longword
+    aligned  DMA transfers  and  the  Alphas get   alignment traps with  non
+    longword aligned data copies (which makes them really slow). No comment.
+
+    I  have added SROM decoding  routines to make this  driver work with any
+    card that  supports the Digital  Semiconductor SROM spec. This will help
+    all  cards running the dc2114x  series chips in particular.  Cards using
+    the dc2104x  chips should run correctly with  the basic  driver.  I'm in
+    debt to <mjacob@feral.com> for the  testing and feedback that helped get
+    this feature working.  So far we have  tested KINGSTON, SMC8432, SMC9332
+    (with the latest SROM complying  with the SROM spec  V3: their first was
+    broken), ZNYX342  and  LinkSys. ZNYX314 (dual  21041  MAC) and  ZNYX 315
+    (quad 21041 MAC)  cards also  appear  to work despite their  incorrectly
+    wired IRQs.
+
+    I have added a temporary fix for interrupt problems when some SCSI cards
+    share the same interrupt as the DECchip based  cards. The problem occurs
+    because  the SCSI card wants to  grab the interrupt  as a fast interrupt
+    (runs the   service routine with interrupts turned   off) vs.  this card
+    which really needs to run the service routine with interrupts turned on.
+    This driver will  now   add the interrupt service   routine  as  a  fast
+    interrupt if it   is bounced from the   slow interrupt.  THIS IS NOT   A
+    RECOMMENDED WAY TO RUN THE DRIVER  and has been done  for a limited time
+    until  people   sort  out their  compatibility    issues and the  kernel
+    interrupt  service code  is  fixed.   YOU  SHOULD SEPARATE OUT  THE FAST
+    INTERRUPT CARDS FROM THE SLOW INTERRUPT CARDS to ensure that they do not
+    run on the same interrupt. PCMCIA/CardBus is another can of worms...
+
+    Finally, I think  I have really  fixed  the module  loading problem with
+    more than one DECchip based  card.  As a  side effect, I don't mess with
+    the  device structure any  more which means that  if more than 1 card in
+    2.0.x is    installed (4  in   2.1.x),  the  user   will have   to  edit
+    linux/drivers/net/Space.c  to make room for  them. Hence, module loading
+    is  the preferred way to use   this driver, since  it  doesn't have this
+    limitation.
+
+    Where SROM media  detection is used and  full duplex is specified in the
+    SROM,  the feature is  ignored unless  lp->params.fdx  is set at compile
+    time  OR during  a   module load  (insmod  de4x5   args='eth??:fdx' [see
+    below]).  This is because there  is no way  to automatically detect full
+    duplex   links  except through   autonegotiation.    When I  include the
+    autonegotiation feature in  the SROM autoconf  code, this detection will
+    occur automatically for that case.
+
+    Command line  arguments are  now allowed, similar to  passing  arguments
+    through LILO. This will allow a per adapter board set  up of full duplex
+    and media. The only lexical constraints are:  the board name (dev->name)
+    appears in  the list before its parameters.  The list of parameters ends
+    either at the end of the parameter list or with another board name.  The
+    following parameters are allowed:
+
+            fdx        for full duplex
+	    autosense  to set the media/speed; with the following 
+	               sub-parameters:
+		       TP, TP_NW, BNC, AUI, BNC_AUI, 100Mb, 10Mb, AUTO
+
+    Case sensitivity is important  for  the sub-parameters. They *must*   be
+    upper case. Examples:
+
+        insmod de4x5 args='eth1:fdx autosense=BNC eth0:autosense=100Mb'.
+
+    For a compiled in driver, in linux/drivers/net/CONFIG, place e.g.
+	DE4X5_OPTS = -DDE4X5_PARM='"eth0:fdx autosense=AUI eth2:autosense=TP"' 
+
+    Yes,  I know full duplex  isn't permissible on BNC  or AUI; they're just
+    examples. By default, full duplex is turned  off and AUTO is the default
+    autosense setting. In  reality, I expect only the  full duplex option to
+    be used. Note the use of single quotes in the two examples above and the
+    lack of commas to separate items.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/decnet.txt b/Documentation/networking/decnet.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e12a4900cf7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/decnet.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,232 @@
+                    Linux DECnet Networking Layer Information
+                   ===========================================
+
+1) Other documentation....
+
+   o Project Home Pages
+       http://www.chygwyn.com/                      	    - Kernel info
+       http://linux-decnet.sourceforge.net/                - Userland tools
+       http://www.sourceforge.net/projects/linux-decnet/   - Status page
+
+2) Configuring the kernel
+
+Be sure to turn on the following options:
+
+    CONFIG_DECNET (obviously)
+    CONFIG_PROC_FS (to see what's going on)
+    CONFIG_SYSCTL (for easy configuration)
+
+if you want to try out router support (not properly debugged yet)
+you'll need the following options as well...
+
+    CONFIG_DECNET_ROUTER (to be able to add/delete routes)
+    CONFIG_NETFILTER (will be required for the DECnet routing daemon)
+
+    CONFIG_DECNET_ROUTE_FWMARK is optional
+
+Don't turn on SIOCGIFCONF support for DECnet unless you are really sure
+that you need it, in general you won't and it can cause ifconfig to
+malfunction.
+
+Run time configuration has changed slightly from the 2.4 system. If you
+want to configure an endnode, then the simplified procedure is as follows:
+
+ o Set the MAC address on your ethernet card before starting _any_ other
+   network protocols.
+
+As soon as your network card is brought into the UP state, DECnet should
+start working. If you need something more complicated or are unsure how
+to set the MAC address, see the next section. Also all configurations which
+worked with 2.4 will work under 2.5 with no change.
+
+3) Command line options
+
+You can set a DECnet address on the kernel command line for compatibility
+with the 2.4 configuration procedure, but in general it's not needed any more.
+If you do st a DECnet address on the command line, it has only one purpose
+which is that its added to the addresses on the loopback device.
+
+With 2.4 kernels, DECnet would only recognise addresses as local if they
+were added to the loopback device. In 2.5, any local interface address
+can be used to loop back to the local machine. Of course this does not
+prevent you adding further addresses to the loopback device if you
+want to.
+
+N.B. Since the address list of an interface determines the addresses for
+which "hello" messages are sent, if you don't set an address on the loopback
+interface then you won't see any entries in /proc/net/neigh for the local
+host until such time as you start a connection. This doesn't affect the
+operation of the local communications in any other way though.
+
+The kernel command line takes options looking like the following:
+
+    decnet.addr=1,2
+
+the two numbers are the node address 1,2 = 1.2 For 2.2.xx kernels
+and early 2.3.xx kernels, you must use a comma when specifying the
+DECnet address like this. For more recent 2.3.xx kernels, you may
+use almost any character except space, although a `.` would be the most
+obvious choice :-)
+
+There used to be a third number specifying the node type. This option
+has gone away in favour of a per interface node type. This is now set
+using /proc/sys/net/decnet/conf/<dev>/forwarding. This file can be
+set with a single digit, 0=EndNode, 1=L1 Router and  2=L2 Router.
+
+There are also equivalent options for modules. The node address can
+also be set through the /proc/sys/net/decnet/ files, as can other system
+parameters.
+
+Currently the only supported devices are ethernet and ip_gre. The
+ethernet address of your ethernet card has to be set according to the DECnet
+address of the node in order for it to be autoconfigured (and then appear in
+/proc/net/decnet_dev). There is a utility available at the above
+FTP sites called dn2ethaddr which can compute the correct ethernet
+address to use. The address can be set by ifconfig either before or
+at the time the device is brought up. If you are using RedHat you can
+add the line:
+
+    MACADDR=AA:00:04:00:03:04
+
+or something similar, to /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth0 or
+wherever your network card's configuration lives. Setting the MAC address
+of your ethernet card to an address starting with "hi-ord" will cause a
+DECnet address which matches to be added to the interface (which you can
+verify with iproute2).
+
+The default device for routing can be set through the /proc filesystem
+by setting /proc/sys/net/decnet/default_device to the
+device you want DECnet to route packets out of when no specific route
+is available. Usually this will be eth0, for example:
+
+    echo -n "eth0" >/proc/sys/net/decnet/default_device
+
+If you don't set the default device, then it will default to the first
+ethernet card which has been autoconfigured as described above. You can
+confirm that by looking in the default_device file of course.
+
+There is a list of what the other files under /proc/sys/net/decnet/ do
+on the kernel patch web site (shown above).
+
+4) Run time kernel configuration
+
+This is either done through the sysctl/proc interface (see the kernel web
+pages for details on what the various options do) or through the iproute2
+package in the same way as IPv4/6 configuration is performed.
+
+Documentation for iproute2 is included with the package, although there is
+as yet no specific section on DECnet, most of the features apply to both
+IP and DECnet, albeit with DECnet addresses instead of IP addresses and
+a reduced functionality.
+
+If you want to configure a DECnet router you'll need the iproute2 package
+since its the _only_ way to add and delete routes currently. Eventually
+there will be a routing daemon to send and receive routing messages for
+each interface and update the kernel routing tables accordingly. The
+routing daemon will use netfilter to listen to routing packets, and
+rtnetlink to update the kernels routing tables. 
+
+The DECnet raw socket layer has been removed since it was there purely
+for use by the routing daemon which will now use netfilter (a much cleaner
+and more generic solution) instead.
+
+5) How can I tell if its working ?
+
+Here is a quick guide of what to look for in order to know if your DECnet
+kernel subsystem is working.
+
+   - Is the node address set (see /proc/sys/net/decnet/node_address)
+   - Is the node of the correct type 
+                             (see /proc/sys/net/decnet/conf/<dev>/forwarding)
+   - Is the Ethernet MAC address of each Ethernet card set to match
+     the DECnet address. If in doubt use the dn2ethaddr utility available
+     at the ftp archive.
+   - If the previous two steps are satisfied, and the Ethernet card is up,
+     you should find that it is listed in /proc/net/decnet_dev and also
+     that it appears as a directory in /proc/sys/net/decnet/conf/. The
+     loopback device (lo) should also appear and is required to communicate
+     within a node.
+   - If you have any DECnet routers on your network, they should appear
+     in /proc/net/decnet_neigh, otherwise this file will only contain the
+     entry for the node itself (if it doesn't check to see if lo is up).
+   - If you want to send to any node which is not listed in the
+     /proc/net/decnet_neigh file, you'll need to set the default device
+     to point to an Ethernet card with connection to a router. This is
+     again done with the /proc/sys/net/decnet/default_device file.
+   - Try starting a simple server and client, like the dnping/dnmirror
+     over the loopback interface. With luck they should communicate.
+     For this step and those after, you'll need the DECnet library
+     which can be obtained from the above ftp sites as well as the
+     actual utilities themselves.
+   - If this seems to work, then try talking to a node on your local
+     network, and see if you can obtain the same results.
+   - At this point you are on your own... :-)
+
+6) How to send a bug report
+
+If you've found a bug and want to report it, then there are several things
+you can do to help me work out exactly what it is that is wrong. Useful
+information (_most_ of which _is_ _essential_) includes:
+
+ - What kernel version are you running ?
+ - What version of the patch are you running ?
+ - How far though the above set of tests can you get ?
+ - What is in the /proc/decnet* files and /proc/sys/net/decnet/* files ?
+ - Which services are you running ?
+ - Which client caused the problem ?
+ - How much data was being transferred ?
+ - Was the network congested ?
+ - How can the problem be reproduced ?
+ - Can you use tcpdump to get a trace ? (N.B. Most (all?) versions of 
+   tcpdump don't understand how to dump DECnet properly, so including
+   the hex listing of the packet contents is _essential_, usually the -x flag.
+   You may also need to increase the length grabbed with the -s flag. The
+   -e flag also provides very useful information (ethernet MAC addresses))
+
+7) MAC FAQ
+
+A quick FAQ on ethernet MAC addresses to explain how Linux and DECnet
+interact and how to get the best performance from your hardware. 
+
+Ethernet cards are designed to normally only pass received network frames 
+to a host computer when they are addressed to it, or to the broadcast address.
+
+Linux has an interface which allows the setting of extra addresses for
+an ethernet card to listen to. If the ethernet card supports it, the
+filtering operation will be done in hardware, if not the extra unwanted packets
+received will be discarded by the host computer. In the latter case,
+significant processor time and bus bandwidth can be used up on a busy
+network (see the NAPI documentation for a longer explanation of these
+effects).
+
+DECnet makes use of this interface to allow running DECnet on an ethernet 
+card which has already been configured using TCP/IP (presumably using the 
+built in MAC address of the card, as usual) and/or to allow multiple DECnet
+addresses on each physical interface. If you do this, be aware that if your
+ethernet card doesn't support perfect hashing in its MAC address filter
+then your computer will be doing more work than required. Some cards
+will simply set themselves into promiscuous mode in order to receive
+packets from the DECnet specified addresses. So if you have one of these
+cards its better to set the MAC address of the card as described above
+to gain the best efficiency. Better still is to use a card which supports
+NAPI as well.
+
+
+8) Mailing list
+
+If you are keen to get involved in development, or want to ask questions
+about configuration, or even just report bugs, then there is a mailing
+list that you can join, details are at:
+
+http://sourceforge.net/mail/?group_id=4993
+
+9) Legal Info
+
+The Linux DECnet project team have placed their code under the GPL. The
+software is provided "as is" and without warranty express or implied.
+DECnet is a trademark of Compaq. This software is not a product of
+Compaq. We acknowledge the help of people at Compaq in providing extra
+documentation above and beyond what was previously publicly available.
+
+Steve Whitehouse <SteveW@ACM.org>
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/depca.txt b/Documentation/networking/depca.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..24c6b26e565
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/depca.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+
+DE10x
+=====
+
+Memory Addresses:
+
+	SW1	SW2	SW3	SW4
+64K	on	on	on	on	d0000	dbfff
+	off	on	on	on	c0000	cbfff
+	off	off	on	on	e0000	ebfff
+
+32K	on	on	off	on	d8000	dbfff
+	off	on	off	on	c8000	cbfff
+	off	off	off	on	e8000	ebfff
+
+DBR ROM	on	on			dc000	dffff
+	off	on			cc000	cffff
+	off	off			ec000	effff
+
+Note  that the 2K  mode   is set  by   SW3/SW4  on/off or  off/off.  Address
+assignment is through the RBSA register.
+
+I/O Address:
+	SW5
+0x300	on
+0x200	off
+
+Remote Boot:
+	SW6
+Disable	on
+Enable	off
+
+Remote Boot Timeout:
+	SW7
+2.5min	on
+30s	off
+
+IRQ:
+	SW8	SW9	SW10	SW11	SW12
+2	on	off	off	off	off
+3	off	on	off	off	off
+4	off	off	on	off	off
+5	off	off	off	on	off
+7	off	off	off	off	on
+
+DE20x
+=====
+
+Memory Size:
+
+	SW3	SW4
+64K	on	on
+32K	off	on
+2K	on 	off
+2K	off	off
+
+Start Addresses:
+
+	SW1	SW2	SW3	SW4
+64K	on	on	on	on	c0000	cffff
+	on	off	on	on	d0000	dffff
+	off	on	on	on	e0000	effff
+
+32K	on	on	off	off	c8000	cffff
+	on	off	off	off	d8000	dffff
+	off	on	off	off	e8000	effff
+
+Illegal	off	off	 -	 -	  -	  -
+
+I/O Address:
+	SW5
+0x300	on
+0x200	off
+
+Remote Boot:
+	SW6
+Disable	on
+Enable	off
+
+Remote Boot Timeout:
+	SW7
+2.5min	on
+30s	off
+
+IRQ:
+	SW8	SW9	SW10	SW11	SW12
+5	on	off	off	off	off
+9	off	on	off	off	off
+10	off	off	on	off	off
+11	off	off	off	on	off
+15	off	off	off	off	on
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dl2k.txt b/Documentation/networking/dl2k.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..10e8490fa40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/dl2k.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,281 @@
+
+    D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapter Installation
+    for Linux
+    May 23, 2002
+
+Contents
+========
+ - Compatibility List
+ - Quick Install
+ - Compiling the Driver
+ - Installing the Driver
+ - Option parameter
+ - Configuration Script Sample
+ - Troubleshooting
+
+
+Compatibility List
+=================
+Adapter Support:
+
+D-Link DGE-550T Gigabit Ethernet Adapter.
+D-Link DGE-550SX Gigabit Ethernet Adapter.
+D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapter.
+
+
+The driver support Linux kernel 2.4.7 later. We had tested it
+on the environments below.
+
+ . Red Hat v6.2 (update kernel to 2.4.7)
+ . Red Hat v7.0 (update kernel to 2.4.7)
+ . Red Hat v7.1 (kernel 2.4.7)
+ . Red Hat v7.2 (kernel 2.4.7-10)
+
+
+Quick Install
+=============
+Install linux driver as following command:
+
+1. make all
+2. insmod dl2k.ko
+3. ifconfig eth0 up 10.xxx.xxx.xxx netmask 255.0.0.0
+		    ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^\	    ^^^^^^^^\
+				    IP		     NETMASK
+Now eth0 should active, you can test it by "ping" or get more information by
+"ifconfig". If tested ok, continue the next step.
+
+4. cp dl2k.ko /lib/modules/`uname -r`/kernel/drivers/net
+5. Add the following line to /etc/modprobe.conf:
+	alias eth0 dl2k
+6. Run "netconfig" or "netconf" to create configuration script ifcfg-eth0
+   located at /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts or create it manually.
+   [see - Configuration Script Sample]
+7. Driver will automatically load and configure at next boot time.
+
+Compiling the Driver
+====================
+  In Linux, NIC drivers are most commonly configured as loadable modules.
+The approach of building a monolithic kernel has become obsolete. The driver
+can be compiled as part of a monolithic kernel, but is strongly discouraged.
+The remainder of this section assumes the driver is built as a loadable module.
+In the Linux environment, it is a good idea to rebuild the driver from the
+source instead of relying on a precompiled version. This approach provides
+better reliability since a precompiled driver might depend on libraries or
+kernel features that are not present in a given Linux installation.
+
+The 3 files necessary to build Linux device driver are dl2k.c, dl2k.h and
+Makefile. To compile, the Linux installation must include the gcc compiler,
+the kernel source, and the kernel headers. The Linux driver supports Linux
+Kernels 2.4.7. Copy the files to a directory and enter the following command
+to compile and link the driver:
+
+CD-ROM drive
+------------
+
+[root@XXX /] mkdir cdrom
+[root@XXX /] mount -r -t iso9660 -o conv=auto /dev/cdrom /cdrom
+[root@XXX /] cd root
+[root@XXX /root] mkdir dl2k
+[root@XXX /root] cd dl2k
+[root@XXX dl2k] cp /cdrom/linux/dl2k.tgz /root/dl2k
+[root@XXX dl2k] tar xfvz dl2k.tgz
+[root@XXX dl2k] make all
+
+Floppy disc drive
+-----------------
+
+[root@XXX /] cd root
+[root@XXX /root] mkdir dl2k
+[root@XXX /root] cd dl2k
+[root@XXX dl2k] mcopy a:/linux/dl2k.tgz /root/dl2k
+[root@XXX dl2k] tar xfvz dl2k.tgz
+[root@XXX dl2k] make all
+
+Installing the Driver
+=====================
+
+  Manual Installation
+  -------------------
+  Once the driver has been compiled, it must be loaded, enabled, and bound
+  to a protocol stack in order to establish network connectivity. To load a
+  module enter the command:
+
+  insmod dl2k.o
+
+  or
+
+  insmod dl2k.o <optional parameter>	; add parameter
+
+  ===============================================================
+   example: insmod dl2k.o media=100mbps_hd
+   or	    insmod dl2k.o media=3
+   or	    insmod dl2k.o media=3,2	; for 2 cards
+  ===============================================================
+
+  Please reference the list of the command line parameters supported by
+  the Linux device driver below.
+
+  The insmod command only loads the driver and gives it a name of the form
+  eth0, eth1, etc. To bring the NIC into an operational state,
+  it is necessary to issue the following command:
+
+  ifconfig eth0 up
+
+  Finally, to bind the driver to the active protocol (e.g., TCP/IP with
+  Linux), enter the following command:
+
+  ifup eth0
+
+  Note that this is meaningful only if the system can find a configuration
+  script that contains the necessary network information. A sample will be
+  given in the next paragraph.
+
+  The commands to unload a driver are as follows:
+
+  ifdown eth0
+  ifconfig eth0 down
+  rmmod dl2k.o
+
+  The following are the commands to list the currently loaded modules and
+  to see the current network configuration.
+
+  lsmod
+  ifconfig
+
+
+  Automated Installation
+  ----------------------
+  This section describes how to install the driver such that it is
+  automatically loaded and configured at boot time. The following description
+  is based on a Red Hat 6.0/7.0 distribution, but it can easily be ported to
+  other distributions as well.
+
+  Red Hat v6.x/v7.x
+  -----------------
+  1. Copy dl2k.o to the network modules directory, typically
+     /lib/modules/2.x.x-xx/net or /lib/modules/2.x.x/kernel/drivers/net.
+  2. Locate the boot module configuration file, most commonly modprobe.conf
+     or modules.conf (for 2.4) in the /etc directory. Add the following lines:
+
+     alias ethx dl2k
+     options dl2k <optional parameters>
+
+     where ethx will be eth0 if the NIC is the only ethernet adapter, eth1 if
+     one other ethernet adapter is installed, etc. Refer to the table in the
+     previous section for the list of optional parameters.
+  3. Locate the network configuration scripts, normally the
+     /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts directory, and create a configuration
+     script named ifcfg-ethx that contains network information.
+  4. Note that for most Linux distributions, Red Hat included, a configuration
+     utility with a graphical user interface is provided to perform steps 2
+     and 3 above.
+
+
+Parameter Description
+=====================
+You can install this driver without any additional parameter. However, if you
+are going to have extensive functions then it is necessary to set extra
+parameter. Below is a list of the command line parameters supported by the
+Linux device
+driver.
+
+mtu=packet_size			- Specifies the maximum packet size. default
+				  is 1500.
+
+media=media_type		- Specifies the media type the NIC operates at.
+				  autosense	Autosensing active media.
+				  10mbps_hd	10Mbps half duplex.
+				  10mbps_fd	10Mbps full duplex.
+				  100mbps_hd	100Mbps half duplex.
+				  100mbps_fd	100Mbps full duplex.
+				  1000mbps_fd	1000Mbps full duplex.
+				  1000mbps_hd	1000Mbps half duplex.
+				  0		Autosensing active media.
+				  1		10Mbps half duplex.
+				  2		10Mbps full duplex.
+				  3		100Mbps half duplex.
+				  4		100Mbps full duplex.
+				  5          	1000Mbps half duplex.
+				  6          	1000Mbps full duplex.
+
+				  By default, the NIC operates at autosense.
+				  1000mbps_fd and 1000mbps_hd types are only
+				  available for fiber adapter.
+
+vlan=n				- Specifies the VLAN ID. If vlan=0, the
+				  Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) function is
+				  disable.
+
+jumbo=[0|1]			- Specifies the jumbo frame support. If jumbo=1,
+				  the NIC accept jumbo frames. By default, this
+				  function is disabled.
+				  Jumbo frame usually improve the performance
+				  int gigabit.
+				  This feature need jumbo frame compatible 
+				  remote.
+				  
+rx_coalesce=m			- Number of rx frame handled each interrupt.
+rx_timeout=n			- Rx DMA wait time for an interrupt. 
+				  If set rx_coalesce > 0, hardware only assert 
+				  an interrupt for m frames. Hardware won't 
+				  assert rx interrupt until m frames received or
+				  reach timeout of n * 640 nano seconds. 
+				  Set proper rx_coalesce and rx_timeout can 
+				  reduce congestion collapse and overload which
+				  has been a bottleneck for high speed network.
+				  
+				  For example, rx_coalesce=10 rx_timeout=800.
+				  that is, hardware assert only 1 interrupt 
+				  for 10 frames received or timeout of 512 us. 
+
+tx_coalesce=n			- Number of tx frame handled each interrupt.
+				  Set n > 1 can reduce the interrupts 
+				  congestion usually lower performance of
+				  high speed network card. Default is 16.
+				  
+tx_flow=[1|0]			- Specifies the Tx flow control. If tx_flow=0, 
+				  the Tx flow control disable else driver
+				  autodetect.
+rx_flow=[1|0]			- Specifies the Rx flow control. If rx_flow=0, 
+				  the Rx flow control enable else driver
+				  autodetect.
+
+
+Configuration Script Sample
+===========================
+Here is a sample of a simple configuration script:
+
+DEVICE=eth0
+USERCTL=no
+ONBOOT=yes
+POOTPROTO=none
+BROADCAST=207.200.5.255
+NETWORK=207.200.5.0
+NETMASK=255.255.255.0
+IPADDR=207.200.5.2
+
+
+Troubleshooting
+===============
+Q1. Source files contain ^ M behind every line.
+	Make sure all files are Unix file format (no LF). Try the following
+    shell command to convert files.
+
+	cat dl2k.c | col -b > dl2k.tmp
+	mv dl2k.tmp dl2k.c
+
+	OR
+
+	cat dl2k.c | tr -d "\r" > dl2k.tmp
+	mv dl2k.tmp dl2k.c
+
+Q2: Could not find header files (*.h) ?
+	To compile the driver, you need kernel header files. After
+    installing the kernel source, the header files are usually located in
+    /usr/src/linux/include, which is the default include directory configured
+    in Makefile. For some distributions, there is a copy of header files in
+    /usr/src/include/linux and /usr/src/include/asm, that you can change the
+    INCLUDEDIR in Makefile to /usr/include without installing kernel source.
+	Note that RH 7.0 didn't provide correct header files in /usr/include,
+    including those files will make a wrong version driver.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dm9000.txt b/Documentation/networking/dm9000.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5552e2e575c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/dm9000.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+DM9000 Network driver
+=====================
+
+Copyright 2008 Simtec Electronics,
+	  Ben Dooks <ben@simtec.co.uk> <ben-linux@fluff.org>
+
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+This file describes how to use the DM9000 platform-device based network driver
+that is contained in the files drivers/net/dm9000.c and drivers/net/dm9000.h.
+
+The driver supports three DM9000 variants, the DM9000E which is the first chip
+supported as well as the newer DM9000A and DM9000B devices. It is currently
+maintained and tested by Ben Dooks, who should be CC: to any patches for this
+driver.
+
+
+Defining the platform device
+----------------------------
+
+The minimum set of resources attached to the platform device are as follows:
+
+    1) The physical address of the address register
+    2) The physical address of the data register
+    3) The IRQ line the device's interrupt pin is connected to.
+
+These resources should be specified in that order, as the ordering of the
+two address regions is important (the driver expects these to be address
+and then data).
+
+An example from arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/mach-bast.c is:
+
+static struct resource bast_dm9k_resource[] = {
+	[0] = {
+		.start = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000,
+		.end   = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 3,
+		.flags = IORESOURCE_MEM,
+	},
+	[1] = {
+		.start = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 0x40,
+		.end   = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 0x40 + 0x3f,
+		.flags = IORESOURCE_MEM,
+	},
+	[2] = {
+		.start = IRQ_DM9000,
+		.end   = IRQ_DM9000,
+		.flags = IORESOURCE_IRQ | IORESOURCE_IRQ_HIGHLEVEL,
+	}
+};
+
+static struct platform_device bast_device_dm9k = {
+	.name		= "dm9000",
+	.id		= 0,
+	.num_resources	= ARRAY_SIZE(bast_dm9k_resource),
+	.resource	= bast_dm9k_resource,
+};
+
+Note the setting of the IRQ trigger flag in bast_dm9k_resource[2].flags,
+as this will generate a warning if it is not present. The trigger from
+the flags field will be passed to request_irq() when registering the IRQ
+handler to ensure that the IRQ is setup correctly.
+
+This shows a typical platform device, without the optional configuration
+platform data supplied. The next example uses the same resources, but adds
+the optional platform data to pass extra configuration data:
+
+static struct dm9000_plat_data bast_dm9k_platdata = {
+	.flags		= DM9000_PLATF_16BITONLY,
+};
+
+static struct platform_device bast_device_dm9k = {
+	.name		= "dm9000",
+	.id		= 0,
+	.num_resources	= ARRAY_SIZE(bast_dm9k_resource),
+	.resource	= bast_dm9k_resource,
+	.dev		= {
+		.platform_data = &bast_dm9k_platdata,
+	}
+};
+
+The platform data is defined in include/linux/dm9000.h and described below.
+
+
+Platform data
+-------------
+
+Extra platform data for the DM9000 can describe the IO bus width to the
+device, whether or not an external PHY is attached to the device and
+the availability of an external configuration EEPROM.
+
+The flags for the platform data .flags field are as follows:
+
+DM9000_PLATF_8BITONLY
+
+	The IO should be done with 8bit operations.
+
+DM9000_PLATF_16BITONLY
+
+	The IO should be done with 16bit operations.
+
+DM9000_PLATF_32BITONLY
+
+	The IO should be done with 32bit operations.
+
+DM9000_PLATF_EXT_PHY
+
+	The chip is connected to an external PHY.
+
+DM9000_PLATF_NO_EEPROM
+
+	This can be used to signify that the board does not have an
+	EEPROM, or that the EEPROM should be hidden from the user.
+
+DM9000_PLATF_SIMPLE_PHY
+
+	Switch to using the simpler PHY polling method which does not
+	try and read the MII PHY state regularly. This is only available
+	when using the internal PHY. See the section on link state polling
+	for more information.
+
+	The config symbol DM9000_FORCE_SIMPLE_PHY_POLL, Kconfig entry
+	"Force simple NSR based PHY polling" allows this flag to be
+	forced on at build time.
+
+
+PHY Link state polling
+----------------------
+
+The driver keeps track of the link state and informs the network core
+about link (carrier) availability. This is managed by several methods
+depending on the version of the chip and on which PHY is being used.
+
+For the internal PHY, the original (and currently default) method is
+to read the MII state, either when the status changes if we have the
+necessary interrupt support in the chip or every two seconds via a
+periodic timer.
+
+To reduce the overhead for the internal PHY, there is now the option
+of using the DM9000_FORCE_SIMPLE_PHY_POLL config, or DM9000_PLATF_SIMPLE_PHY
+platform data option to read the summary information without the
+expensive MII accesses. This method is faster, but does not print
+as much information.
+
+When using an external PHY, the driver currently has to poll the MII
+link status as there is no method for getting an interrupt on link change.
+
+
+DM9000A / DM9000B
+-----------------
+
+These chips are functionally similar to the DM9000E and are supported easily
+by the same driver. The features are:
+
+   1) Interrupt on internal PHY state change. This means that the periodic
+      polling of the PHY status may be disabled on these devices when using
+      the internal PHY.
+
+   2) TCP/UDP checksum offloading, which the driver does not currently support.
+
+
+ethtool
+-------
+
+The driver supports the ethtool interface for access to the driver
+state information, the PHY state and the EEPROM.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt b/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..25320bf19c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+Note: This driver doesn't have a maintainer.
+
+Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver for Linux.
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General   Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+
+This driver provides kernel support for Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 ethernet cards ( CNET
+10/100 ethernet cards uses Davicom chipset too, so this driver supports CNET cards too ).If you
+didn't compile this driver as a module, it will automatically load itself on boot and print a
+line similar to :
+
+	dmfe: Davicom DM9xxx net driver, version 1.36.4 (2002-01-17)
+
+If you compiled this driver as a module, you have to load it on boot.You can load it with command :
+
+	insmod dmfe
+
+This way it will autodetect the device mode.This is the suggested way to load the module.Or you can pass
+a mode= setting to module while loading, like :
+
+	insmod dmfe mode=0 # Force 10M Half Duplex
+	insmod dmfe mode=1 # Force 100M Half Duplex
+	insmod dmfe mode=4 # Force 10M Full Duplex
+	insmod dmfe mode=5 # Force 100M Full Duplex
+
+Next you should configure your network interface with a command similar to :
+
+	ifconfig eth0 172.22.3.18
+                      ^^^^^^^^^^^
+		     Your IP Address
+
+Then you may have to modify the default routing table with command :
+
+	route add default eth0
+
+
+Now your ethernet card should be up and running.
+
+
+TODO:
+
+Implement pci_driver::suspend() and pci_driver::resume() power management methods.
+Check on 64 bit boxes.
+Check and fix on big endian boxes.
+Test and make sure PCI latency is now correct for all cases.
+
+
+Authors:
+
+Sten Wang <sten_wang@davicom.com.tw >   : Original Author
+
+Contributors:
+
+Marcelo Tosatti <marcelo@conectiva.com.br>
+Alan Cox <alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk>
+Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com>
+Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz>
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dns_resolver.txt b/Documentation/networking/dns_resolver.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d86adcdae42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/dns_resolver.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,157 @@
+			     ===================
+			     DNS Resolver Module
+			     ===================
+
+Contents:
+
+ - Overview.
+ - Compilation.
+ - Setting up.
+ - Usage.
+ - Mechanism.
+ - Debugging.
+
+
+========
+OVERVIEW
+========
+
+The DNS resolver module provides a way for kernel services to make DNS queries
+by way of requesting a key of key type dns_resolver.  These queries are
+upcalled to userspace through /sbin/request-key.
+
+These routines must be supported by userspace tools dns.upcall, cifs.upcall and
+request-key.  It is under development and does not yet provide the full feature
+set.  The features it does support include:
+
+ (*) Implements the dns_resolver key_type to contact userspace.
+
+It does not yet support the following AFS features:
+
+ (*) Dns query support for AFSDB resource record.
+
+This code is extracted from the CIFS filesystem.
+
+
+===========
+COMPILATION
+===========
+
+The module should be enabled by turning on the kernel configuration options:
+
+	CONFIG_DNS_RESOLVER	- tristate "DNS Resolver support"
+
+
+==========
+SETTING UP
+==========
+
+To set up this facility, the /etc/request-key.conf file must be altered so that
+/sbin/request-key can appropriately direct the upcalls.  For example, to handle
+basic dname to IPv4/IPv6 address resolution, the following line should be
+added:
+
+	#OP	TYPE		DESC	CO-INFO	PROGRAM ARG1 ARG2 ARG3 ...
+	#======	============	=======	=======	==========================
+	create	dns_resolver  	*	*	/usr/sbin/cifs.upcall %k
+
+To direct a query for query type 'foo', a line of the following should be added
+before the more general line given above as the first match is the one taken.
+
+	create	dns_resolver  	foo:*	*	/usr/sbin/dns.foo %k
+
+
+=====
+USAGE
+=====
+
+To make use of this facility, one of the following functions that are
+implemented in the module can be called after doing:
+
+	#include <linux/dns_resolver.h>
+
+ (1) int dns_query(const char *type, const char *name, size_t namelen,
+		   const char *options, char **_result, time_t *_expiry);
+
+     This is the basic access function.  It looks for a cached DNS query and if
+     it doesn't find it, it upcalls to userspace to make a new DNS query, which
+     may then be cached.  The key description is constructed as a string of the
+     form:
+
+		[<type>:]<name>
+
+     where <type> optionally specifies the particular upcall program to invoke,
+     and thus the type of query to do, and <name> specifies the string to be
+     looked up.  The default query type is a straight hostname to IP address
+     set lookup.
+
+     The name parameter is not required to be a NUL-terminated string, and its
+     length should be given by the namelen argument.
+
+     The options parameter may be NULL or it may be a set of options
+     appropriate to the query type.
+
+     The return value is a string appropriate to the query type.  For instance,
+     for the default query type it is just a list of comma-separated IPv4 and
+     IPv6 addresses.  The caller must free the result.
+
+     The length of the result string is returned on success, and a negative
+     error code is returned otherwise.  -EKEYREJECTED will be returned if the
+     DNS lookup failed.
+
+     If _expiry is non-NULL, the expiry time (TTL) of the result will be
+     returned also.
+
+The kernel maintains an internal keyring in which it caches looked up keys.
+This can be cleared by any process that has the CAP_SYS_ADMIN capability by
+the use of KEYCTL_KEYRING_CLEAR on the keyring ID.
+
+
+===============================
+READING DNS KEYS FROM USERSPACE
+===============================
+
+Keys of dns_resolver type can be read from userspace using keyctl_read() or
+"keyctl read/print/pipe".
+
+
+=========
+MECHANISM
+=========
+
+The dnsresolver module registers a key type called "dns_resolver".  Keys of
+this type are used to transport and cache DNS lookup results from userspace.
+
+When dns_query() is invoked, it calls request_key() to search the local
+keyrings for a cached DNS result.  If that fails to find one, it upcalls to
+userspace to get a new result.
+
+Upcalls to userspace are made through the request_key() upcall vector, and are
+directed by means of configuration lines in /etc/request-key.conf that tell
+/sbin/request-key what program to run to instantiate the key.
+
+The upcall handler program is responsible for querying the DNS, processing the
+result into a form suitable for passing to the keyctl_instantiate_key()
+routine.  This then passes the data to dns_resolver_instantiate() which strips
+off and processes any options included in the data, and then attaches the
+remainder of the string to the key as its payload.
+
+The upcall handler program should set the expiry time on the key to that of the
+lowest TTL of all the records it has extracted a result from.  This means that
+the key will be discarded and recreated when the data it holds has expired.
+
+dns_query() returns a copy of the value attached to the key, or an error if
+that is indicated instead.
+
+See <file:Documentation/security/keys-request-key.txt> for further
+information about request-key function.
+
+
+=========
+DEBUGGING
+=========
+
+Debugging messages can be turned on dynamically by writing a 1 into the
+following file:
+
+        /sys/module/dnsresolver/parameters/debug
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/driver.txt b/Documentation/networking/driver.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..03283daa64f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/driver.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+Document about softnet driver issues
+
+Transmit path guidelines:
+
+1) The hard_start_xmit method must never return '1' under any
+   normal circumstances.  It is considered a hard error unless
+   there is no way your device can tell ahead of time when it's
+   transmit function will become busy.
+
+   Instead it must maintain the queue properly.  For example,
+   for a driver implementing scatter-gather this means:
+
+	static int drv_hard_start_xmit(struct sk_buff *skb,
+		   		       struct net_device *dev)
+	{
+		struct drv *dp = netdev_priv(dev);
+
+		lock_tx(dp);
+		...
+		/* This is a hard error log it. */
+		if (TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) <= (skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags + 1)) {
+			netif_stop_queue(dev);
+			unlock_tx(dp);
+			printk(KERN_ERR PFX "%s: BUG! Tx Ring full when queue awake!\n",
+			       dev->name);
+			return 1;
+		}
+
+		... queue packet to card ...
+		... update tx consumer index ...
+
+		if (TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) <= (MAX_SKB_FRAGS + 1))
+			netif_stop_queue(dev);
+
+		...
+		unlock_tx(dp);
+		...
+	}
+
+   And then at the end of your TX reclamation event handling:
+
+	if (netif_queue_stopped(dp->dev) &&
+            TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) > (MAX_SKB_FRAGS + 1))
+		netif_wake_queue(dp->dev);
+
+   For a non-scatter-gather supporting card, the three tests simply become:
+
+		/* This is a hard error log it. */
+		if (TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) <= 0)
+
+   and:
+
+		if (TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) == 0)
+
+   and:
+
+	if (netif_queue_stopped(dp->dev) &&
+            TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) > 0)
+		netif_wake_queue(dp->dev);
+
+2) Do not forget to update netdev->trans_start to jiffies after
+   each new tx packet is given to the hardware.
+
+3) A hard_start_xmit method must not modify the shared parts of a
+   cloned SKB.
+
+4) Do not forget that once you return 0 from your hard_start_xmit
+   method, it is your driver's responsibility to free up the SKB
+   and in some finite amount of time.
+
+   For example, this means that it is not allowed for your TX
+   mitigation scheme to let TX packets "hang out" in the TX
+   ring unreclaimed forever if no new TX packets are sent.
+   This error can deadlock sockets waiting for send buffer room
+   to be freed up.
+
+   If you return 1 from the hard_start_xmit method, you must not keep
+   any reference to that SKB and you must not attempt to free it up.
+
+Probing guidelines:
+
+1) Any hardware layer address you obtain for your device should
+   be verified.  For example, for ethernet check it with
+   linux/etherdevice.h:is_valid_ether_addr()
+
+Close/stop guidelines:
+
+1) After the dev->stop routine has been called, the hardware must
+   not receive or transmit any data.  All in flight packets must
+   be aborted. If necessary, poll or wait for completion of 
+   any reset commands.
+
+2) The dev->stop routine will be called by unregister_netdevice
+   if device is still UP.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e100.txt b/Documentation/networking/e100.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..162f323a7a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/e100.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,197 @@
+Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/100 Family of Adapters
+==============================================================
+
+November 15, 2005
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- In This Release
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Building and Installation
+- Driver Configuration Parameters
+- Additional Configurations
+- Known Issues
+- Support
+
+
+In This Release
+===============
+
+This file describes the Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/100 Family of
+Adapters. This driver includes support for Itanium(R)2-based systems.
+
+For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation
+supplied with your Intel PRO/100 adapter.
+
+The following features are now available in supported kernels:
+ - Native VLANs
+ - Channel Bonding (teaming)
+ - SNMP
+
+Channel Bonding documentation can be found in the Linux kernel source:
+/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
+
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+
+For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter &
+Driver ID Guide at:
+
+  http://support.intel.com/support/network/adapter/pro100/21397.htm
+
+For the latest Intel network drivers for Linux, refer to the following
+website. In the search field, enter your adapter name or type, or use the
+networking link on the left to search for your adapter:
+
+  http://downloadfinder.intel.com/scripts-df/support_intel.asp
+
+Driver Configuration Parameters
+===============================
+
+The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting,
+unless otherwise noted.
+
+Rx Descriptors: Number of receive descriptors. A receive descriptor is a data
+   structure that describes a receive buffer and its attributes to the network
+   controller. The data in the descriptor is used by the controller to write
+   data from the controller to host memory. In the 3.x.x driver the valid range
+   for this parameter is 64-256. The default value is 64. This parameter can be
+   changed using the command:
+
+   ethtool -G eth? rx n, where n is the number of desired rx descriptors.
+
+Tx Descriptors: Number of transmit descriptors. A transmit descriptor is a data
+   structure that describes a transmit buffer and its attributes to the network
+   controller. The data in the descriptor is used by the controller to read
+   data from the host memory to the controller. In the 3.x.x driver the valid
+   range for this parameter is 64-256. The default value is 64. This parameter
+   can be changed using the command:
+
+   ethtool -G eth? tx n, where n is the number of desired tx descriptors.
+
+Speed/Duplex: The driver auto-negotiates the link speed and duplex settings by
+   default. The ethtool utility can be used as follows to force speed/duplex.
+
+   ethtool -s eth?  autoneg off speed {10|100} duplex {full|half}
+
+   NOTE: setting the speed/duplex to incorrect values will cause the link to
+   fail.
+
+Event Log Message Level:  The driver uses the message level flag to log events
+   to syslog. The message level can be set at driver load time. It can also be
+   set using the command:
+
+   ethtool -s eth? msglvl n
+
+
+Additional Configurations
+=========================
+
+  Configuring the Driver on Different Distributions
+  -------------------------------------------------
+
+  Configuring a network driver to load properly when the system is started is
+  distribution dependent. Typically, the configuration process involves adding
+  an alias line to /etc/modules.conf or /etc/modprobe.conf as well as editing
+  other system startup scripts and/or configuration files.  Many popular Linux
+  distributions ship with tools to make these changes for you. To learn the
+  proper way to configure a network device for your system, refer to your
+  distribution documentation.  If during this process you are asked for the
+  driver or module name, the name for the Linux Base Driver for the Intel
+  PRO/100 Family of Adapters is e100.
+
+  As an example, if you install the e100 driver for two PRO/100 adapters
+  (eth0 and eth1), add the following to modules.conf or modprobe.conf:
+
+       alias eth0 e100
+       alias eth1 e100
+
+  Viewing Link Messages
+  ---------------------
+  In order to see link messages and other Intel driver information on your
+  console, you must set the dmesg level up to six. This can be done by
+  entering the following on the command line before loading the e100 driver:
+
+       dmesg -n 8
+
+  If you wish to see all messages issued by the driver, including debug
+  messages, set the dmesg level to eight.
+
+  NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots.
+
+
+  Ethtool
+  -------
+
+  The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+  diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.  The ethtool
+  version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality.
+
+  The latest release of ethtool can be found from
+  http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+  Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL)
+  ---------------------------
+  WoL is provided through the ethtool* utility.  For instructions on enabling
+  WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page.
+
+  WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For
+  this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e100 driver must be
+  loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system.
+
+  NAPI
+  ----
+
+  NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the e100 driver.
+
+  See www.cyberus.ca/~hadi/usenix-paper.tgz for more information on NAPI.
+
+  Multiple Interfaces on Same Ethernet Broadcast Network
+  ------------------------------------------------------
+
+  Due to the default ARP behavior on Linux, it is not possible to have
+  one system on two IP networks in the same Ethernet broadcast domain
+  (non-partitioned switch) behave as expected. All Ethernet interfaces
+  will respond to IP traffic for any IP address assigned to the system.
+  This results in unbalanced receive traffic.
+
+  If you have multiple interfaces in a server, either turn on ARP
+  filtering by
+
+  (1) entering: echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/arp_filter
+      (this only works if your kernel's version is higher than 2.4.5), or
+
+  (2) installing the interfaces in separate broadcast domains (either
+      in different switches or in a switch partitioned to VLANs).
+
+
+Support
+=======
+
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+    http://support.intel.com
+
+    or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+    http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported
+kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the
+issue to e1000-devel@lists.sourceforge.net.
+
+
+License
+=======
+
+This software program is released under the terms of a license agreement
+between you ('Licensee') and Intel. Do not use or load this software or any
+associated materials (collectively, the 'Software') until you have carefully
+read the full terms and conditions of the file COPYING located in this software
+package. By loading or using the Software, you agree to the terms of this
+Agreement. If you do not agree with the terms of this Agreement, do not install
+or use the Software.
+
+* Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..71ca9585567
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,461 @@
+Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/1000 Family of Adapters
+===============================================================
+
+Intel Gigabit Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Command Line Parameters
+- Speed and Duplex Configuration
+- Additional Configurations
+- Support
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+
+For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter &
+Driver ID Guide at:
+
+    http://support.intel.com/support/go/network/adapter/idguide.htm
+
+For the latest Intel network drivers for Linux, refer to the following
+website.  In the search field, enter your adapter name or type, or use the
+networking link on the left to search for your adapter:
+
+    http://support.intel.com/support/go/network/adapter/home.htm
+
+Command Line Parameters
+=======================
+
+The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting,
+unless otherwise noted.
+
+NOTES:  For more information about the AutoNeg, Duplex, and Speed
+        parameters, see the "Speed and Duplex Configuration" section in
+        this document.
+
+        For more information about the InterruptThrottleRate,
+        RxIntDelay, TxIntDelay, RxAbsIntDelay, and TxAbsIntDelay
+        parameters, see the application note at:
+        http://www.intel.com/design/network/applnots/ap450.htm
+
+AutoNeg
+-------
+(Supported only on adapters with copper connections)
+Valid Range:   0x01-0x0F, 0x20-0x2F
+Default Value: 0x2F
+
+This parameter is a bit-mask that specifies the speed and duplex settings
+advertised by the adapter.  When this parameter is used, the Speed and
+Duplex parameters must not be specified.
+
+NOTE:  Refer to the Speed and Duplex section of this readme for more
+       information on the AutoNeg parameter.
+
+Duplex
+------
+(Supported only on adapters with copper connections)
+Valid Range:   0-2 (0=auto-negotiate, 1=half, 2=full)
+Default Value: 0
+
+This defines the direction in which data is allowed to flow.  Can be
+either one or two-directional.  If both Duplex and the link partner are
+set to auto-negotiate, the board auto-detects the correct duplex.  If the
+link partner is forced (either full or half), Duplex defaults to half-
+duplex.
+
+FlowControl
+-----------
+Valid Range:   0-3 (0=none, 1=Rx only, 2=Tx only, 3=Rx&Tx)
+Default Value: Reads flow control settings from the EEPROM
+
+This parameter controls the automatic generation(Tx) and response(Rx)
+to Ethernet PAUSE frames.
+
+InterruptThrottleRate
+---------------------
+(not supported on Intel(R) 82542, 82543 or 82544-based adapters)
+Valid Range:   0,1,3,4,100-100000 (0=off, 1=dynamic, 3=dynamic conservative,
+                                 4=simplified balancing)
+Default Value: 3
+
+The driver can limit the amount of interrupts per second that the adapter
+will generate for incoming packets. It does this by writing a value to the
+adapter that is based on the maximum amount of interrupts that the adapter
+will generate per second.
+
+Setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value greater or equal to 100
+will program the adapter to send out a maximum of that many interrupts
+per second, even if more packets have come in. This reduces interrupt
+load on the system and can lower CPU utilization under heavy load,
+but will increase latency as packets are not processed as quickly.
+
+The default behaviour of the driver previously assumed a static
+InterruptThrottleRate value of 8000, providing a good fallback value for
+all traffic types,but lacking in small packet performance and latency.
+The hardware can handle many more small packets per second however, and
+for this reason an adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm was implemented.
+
+Since 7.3.x, the driver has two adaptive modes (setting 1 or 3) in which
+it dynamically adjusts the InterruptThrottleRate value based on the traffic
+that it receives. After determining the type of incoming traffic in the last
+timeframe, it will adjust the InterruptThrottleRate to an appropriate value
+for that traffic.
+
+The algorithm classifies the incoming traffic every interval into
+classes.  Once the class is determined, the InterruptThrottleRate value is
+adjusted to suit that traffic type the best. There are three classes defined:
+"Bulk traffic", for large amounts of packets of normal size; "Low latency",
+for small amounts of traffic and/or a significant percentage of small
+packets; and "Lowest latency", for almost completely small packets or
+minimal traffic.
+
+In dynamic conservative mode, the InterruptThrottleRate value is set to 4000
+for traffic that falls in class "Bulk traffic". If traffic falls in the "Low
+latency" or "Lowest latency" class, the InterruptThrottleRate is increased
+stepwise to 20000. This default mode is suitable for most applications.
+
+For situations where low latency is vital such as cluster or
+grid computing, the algorithm can reduce latency even more when
+InterruptThrottleRate is set to mode 1. In this mode, which operates
+the same as mode 3, the InterruptThrottleRate will be increased stepwise to
+70000 for traffic in class "Lowest latency".
+
+In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of TX and
+RX traffic.  If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the
+interrupt rate will drop as low as 2000 interrupts per second.  If the
+traffic is mostly transmit or mostly receive, the interrupt rate could
+be as high as 8000.
+
+Setting InterruptThrottleRate to 0 turns off any interrupt moderation
+and may improve small packet latency, but is generally not suitable
+for bulk throughput traffic.
+
+NOTE:  InterruptThrottleRate takes precedence over the TxAbsIntDelay and
+       RxAbsIntDelay parameters.  In other words, minimizing the receive
+       and/or transmit absolute delays does not force the controller to
+       generate more interrupts than what the Interrupt Throttle Rate
+       allows.
+
+CAUTION:  If you are using the Intel(R) PRO/1000 CT Network Connection
+          (controller 82547), setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value
+          greater than 75,000, may hang (stop transmitting) adapters
+          under certain network conditions.  If this occurs a NETDEV
+          WATCHDOG message is logged in the system event log.  In
+          addition, the controller is automatically reset, restoring
+          the network connection.  To eliminate the potential for the
+          hang, ensure that InterruptThrottleRate is set no greater
+          than 75,000 and is not set to 0.
+
+NOTE:  When e1000 is loaded with default settings and multiple adapters
+       are in use simultaneously, the CPU utilization may increase non-
+       linearly.  In order to limit the CPU utilization without impacting
+       the overall throughput, we recommend that you load the driver as
+       follows:
+
+           modprobe e1000 InterruptThrottleRate=3000,3000,3000
+
+       This sets the InterruptThrottleRate to 3000 interrupts/sec for
+       the first, second, and third instances of the driver.  The range
+       of 2000 to 3000 interrupts per second works on a majority of
+       systems and is a good starting point, but the optimal value will
+       be platform-specific.  If CPU utilization is not a concern, use
+       RX_POLLING (NAPI) and default driver settings.
+
+RxDescriptors
+-------------
+Valid Range:   80-256 for 82542 and 82543-based adapters
+               80-4096 for all other supported adapters
+Default Value: 256
+
+This value specifies the number of receive buffer descriptors allocated
+by the driver.  Increasing this value allows the driver to buffer more
+incoming packets, at the expense of increased system memory utilization.
+
+Each descriptor is 16 bytes.  A receive buffer is also allocated for each
+descriptor and can be either 2048, 4096, 8192, or 16384 bytes, depending
+on the MTU setting. The maximum MTU size is 16110.
+
+NOTE:  MTU designates the frame size.  It only needs to be set for Jumbo
+       Frames.  Depending on the available system resources, the request
+       for a higher number of receive descriptors may be denied.  In this
+       case, use a lower number.
+
+RxIntDelay
+----------
+Valid Range:   0-65535 (0=off)
+Default Value: 0
+
+This value delays the generation of receive interrupts in units of 1.024
+microseconds.  Receive interrupt reduction can improve CPU efficiency if
+properly tuned for specific network traffic.  Increasing this value adds
+extra latency to frame reception and can end up decreasing the throughput
+of TCP traffic.  If the system is reporting dropped receives, this value
+may be set too high, causing the driver to run out of available receive
+descriptors.
+
+CAUTION:  When setting RxIntDelay to a value other than 0, adapters may
+          hang (stop transmitting) under certain network conditions.  If
+          this occurs a NETDEV WATCHDOG message is logged in the system
+          event log.  In addition, the controller is automatically reset,
+          restoring the network connection.  To eliminate the potential
+          for the hang ensure that RxIntDelay is set to 0.
+
+RxAbsIntDelay
+-------------
+(This parameter is supported only on 82540, 82545 and later adapters.)
+Valid Range:   0-65535 (0=off)
+Default Value: 128
+
+This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a
+receive interrupt is generated.  Useful only if RxIntDelay is non-zero,
+this value ensures that an interrupt is generated after the initial
+packet is received within the set amount of time.  Proper tuning,
+along with RxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific network
+conditions.
+
+Speed
+-----
+(This parameter is supported only on adapters with copper connections.)
+Valid Settings: 0, 10, 100, 1000
+Default Value:  0 (auto-negotiate at all supported speeds)
+
+Speed forces the line speed to the specified value in megabits per second
+(Mbps).  If this parameter is not specified or is set to 0 and the link
+partner is set to auto-negotiate, the board will auto-detect the correct
+speed.  Duplex should also be set when Speed is set to either 10 or 100.
+
+TxDescriptors
+-------------
+Valid Range:   80-256 for 82542 and 82543-based adapters
+               80-4096 for all other supported adapters
+Default Value: 256
+
+This value is the number of transmit descriptors allocated by the driver.
+Increasing this value allows the driver to queue more transmits.  Each
+descriptor is 16 bytes.
+
+NOTE:  Depending on the available system resources, the request for a
+       higher number of transmit descriptors may be denied.  In this case,
+       use a lower number.
+
+TxDescriptorStep
+----------------
+Valid Range:    1 (use every Tx Descriptor)
+                4 (use every 4th Tx Descriptor)
+
+Default Value:  1 (use every Tx Descriptor)
+
+On certain non-Intel architectures, it has been observed that intense TX
+traffic bursts of short packets may result in an improper descriptor
+writeback. If this occurs, the driver will report a "TX Timeout" and reset
+the adapter, after which the transmit flow will restart, though data may
+have stalled for as much as 10 seconds before it resumes.
+
+The improper writeback does not occur on the first descriptor in a system
+memory cache-line, which is typically 32 bytes, or 4 descriptors long.
+
+Setting TxDescriptorStep to a value of 4 will ensure that all TX descriptors
+are aligned to the start of a system memory cache line, and so this problem
+will not occur.
+
+NOTES: Setting TxDescriptorStep to 4 effectively reduces the number of
+       TxDescriptors available for transmits to 1/4 of the normal allocation.
+       This has a possible negative performance impact, which may be
+       compensated for by allocating more descriptors using the TxDescriptors
+       module parameter.
+
+       There are other conditions which may result in "TX Timeout", which will
+       not be resolved by the use of the TxDescriptorStep parameter. As the
+       issue addressed by this parameter has never been observed on Intel
+       Architecture platforms, it should not be used on Intel platforms.
+
+TxIntDelay
+----------
+Valid Range:   0-65535 (0=off)
+Default Value: 64
+
+This value delays the generation of transmit interrupts in units of
+1.024 microseconds.  Transmit interrupt reduction can improve CPU
+efficiency if properly tuned for specific network traffic.  If the
+system is reporting dropped transmits, this value may be set too high
+causing the driver to run out of available transmit descriptors.
+
+TxAbsIntDelay
+-------------
+(This parameter is supported only on 82540, 82545 and later adapters.)
+Valid Range:   0-65535 (0=off)
+Default Value: 64
+
+This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a
+transmit interrupt is generated.  Useful only if TxIntDelay is non-zero,
+this value ensures that an interrupt is generated after the initial
+packet is sent on the wire within the set amount of time.  Proper tuning,
+along with TxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific
+network conditions.
+
+XsumRX
+------
+(This parameter is NOT supported on the 82542-based adapter.)
+Valid Range:   0-1
+Default Value: 1
+
+A value of '1' indicates that the driver should enable IP checksum
+offload for received packets (both UDP and TCP) to the adapter hardware.
+
+Copybreak
+---------
+Valid Range:   0-xxxxxxx (0=off)
+Default Value: 256
+Usage: insmod e1000.ko copybreak=128
+
+Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh RX
+buffer before handing it up the stack.
+
+This parameter is different than other parameters, in that it is a
+single (not 1,1,1 etc.) parameter applied to all driver instances and
+it is also available during runtime at
+/sys/module/e1000/parameters/copybreak
+
+SmartPowerDownEnable
+--------------------
+Valid Range: 0-1
+Default Value:  0 (disabled)
+
+Allows PHY to turn off in lower power states. The user can turn off
+this parameter in supported chipsets.
+
+KumeranLockLoss
+---------------
+Valid Range: 0-1
+Default Value: 1 (enabled)
+
+This workaround skips resetting the PHY at shutdown for the initial
+silicon releases of ICH8 systems.
+
+Speed and Duplex Configuration
+==============================
+
+Three keywords are used to control the speed and duplex configuration.
+These keywords are Speed, Duplex, and AutoNeg.
+
+If the board uses a fiber interface, these keywords are ignored, and the
+fiber interface board only links at 1000 Mbps full-duplex.
+
+For copper-based boards, the keywords interact as follows:
+
+  The default operation is auto-negotiate.  The board advertises all
+  supported speed and duplex combinations, and it links at the highest
+  common speed and duplex mode IF the link partner is set to auto-negotiate.
+
+  If Speed = 1000, limited auto-negotiation is enabled and only 1000 Mbps
+  is advertised (The 1000BaseT spec requires auto-negotiation.)
+
+  If Speed = 10 or 100, then both Speed and Duplex should be set.  Auto-
+  negotiation is disabled, and the AutoNeg parameter is ignored.  Partner
+  SHOULD also be forced.
+
+The AutoNeg parameter is used when more control is required over the
+auto-negotiation process.  It should be used when you wish to control which
+speed and duplex combinations are advertised during the auto-negotiation
+process.
+
+The parameter may be specified as either a decimal or hexadecimal value as
+determined by the bitmap below.
+
+Bit position   7      6      5       4       3      2      1       0
+Decimal Value  128    64     32      16      8      4      2       1
+Hex value      80     40     20      10      8      4      2       1
+Speed (Mbps)   N/A    N/A    1000    N/A     100    100    10      10
+Duplex                       Full            Full   Half   Full    Half
+
+Some examples of using AutoNeg:
+
+  modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x01 (Restricts autonegotiation to 10 Half)
+  modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=1 (Same as above)
+  modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x02 (Restricts autonegotiation to 10 Full)
+  modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x03 (Restricts autonegotiation to 10 Half or 10 Full)
+  modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x04 (Restricts autonegotiation to 100 Half)
+  modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x05 (Restricts autonegotiation to 10 Half or 100
+  Half)
+  modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x020 (Restricts autonegotiation to 1000 Full)
+  modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=32 (Same as above)
+
+Note that when this parameter is used, Speed and Duplex must not be specified.
+
+If the link partner is forced to a specific speed and duplex, then this
+parameter should not be used.  Instead, use the Speed and Duplex parameters
+previously mentioned to force the adapter to the same speed and duplex.
+
+Additional Configurations
+=========================
+
+  Jumbo Frames
+  ------------
+  Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the MTU to a value larger than
+  the default of 1500.  Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size.
+  For example:
+
+       ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up
+
+  This setting is not saved across reboots.  It can be made permanent if
+  you add:
+
+       MTU=9000
+
+   to the file /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x>.  This example
+   applies to the Red Hat distributions; other distributions may store this
+   setting in a different location.
+
+  Notes:
+  Degradation in throughput performance may be observed in some Jumbo frames
+  environments. If this is observed, increasing the application's socket buffer
+  size and/or increasing the /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_*mem entry values may help.
+  See the specific application manual and /usr/src/linux*/Documentation/
+  networking/ip-sysctl.txt for more details.
+
+  - The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 16110.  This value coincides
+    with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 16128.
+
+  - Using Jumbo Frames at 10 or 100 Mbps may result in poor performance or
+    loss of link.
+
+  - Adapters based on the Intel(R) 82542 and 82573V/E controller do not
+    support Jumbo Frames. These correspond to the following product names:
+     Intel(R) PRO/1000 Gigabit Server Adapter
+     Intel(R) PRO/1000 PM Network Connection
+
+  Ethtool
+  -------
+  The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+  diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.  The ethtool
+  version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality.
+
+  The latest release of ethtool can be found from
+  http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+  Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL)
+  ---------------------------
+  WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility.
+
+  WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot.
+  For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e1000 driver must be
+  loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system.
+
+Support
+=======
+
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+    http://support.intel.com
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+    http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported
+kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related
+to the issue to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt b/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..97b5ba942eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,306 @@
+Linux* Driver for Intel(R) Network Connection
+=============================================
+
+Intel Gigabit Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Command Line Parameters
+- Additional Configurations
+- Support
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+
+The e1000e driver supports all PCI Express Intel(R) Gigabit Network
+Connections, except those that are 82575, 82576 and 82580-based*.
+
+* NOTE: The Intel(R) PRO/1000 P Dual Port Server Adapter is supported by
+  the e1000 driver, not the e1000e driver due to the 82546 part being used
+  behind a PCI Express bridge.
+
+For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter &
+Driver ID Guide at:
+
+    http://support.intel.com/support/go/network/adapter/idguide.htm
+
+For the latest Intel network drivers for Linux, refer to the following
+website.  In the search field, enter your adapter name or type, or use the
+networking link on the left to search for your adapter:
+
+    http://support.intel.com/support/go/network/adapter/home.htm
+
+Command Line Parameters
+=======================
+
+The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting,
+unless otherwise noted.
+
+NOTES:  For more information about the InterruptThrottleRate,
+        RxIntDelay, TxIntDelay, RxAbsIntDelay, and TxAbsIntDelay
+        parameters, see the application note at:
+        http://www.intel.com/design/network/applnots/ap450.htm
+
+InterruptThrottleRate
+---------------------
+Valid Range:   0,1,3,4,100-100000 (0=off, 1=dynamic, 3=dynamic conservative,
+                                   4=simplified balancing)
+Default Value: 3
+
+The driver can limit the amount of interrupts per second that the adapter
+will generate for incoming packets. It does this by writing a value to the
+adapter that is based on the maximum amount of interrupts that the adapter
+will generate per second.
+
+Setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value greater or equal to 100
+will program the adapter to send out a maximum of that many interrupts
+per second, even if more packets have come in. This reduces interrupt
+load on the system and can lower CPU utilization under heavy load,
+but will increase latency as packets are not processed as quickly.
+
+The default behaviour of the driver previously assumed a static
+InterruptThrottleRate value of 8000, providing a good fallback value for
+all traffic types, but lacking in small packet performance and latency.
+The hardware can handle many more small packets per second however, and
+for this reason an adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm was implemented.
+
+The driver has two adaptive modes (setting 1 or 3) in which
+it dynamically adjusts the InterruptThrottleRate value based on the traffic
+that it receives. After determining the type of incoming traffic in the last
+timeframe, it will adjust the InterruptThrottleRate to an appropriate value
+for that traffic.
+
+The algorithm classifies the incoming traffic every interval into
+classes.  Once the class is determined, the InterruptThrottleRate value is
+adjusted to suit that traffic type the best. There are three classes defined:
+"Bulk traffic", for large amounts of packets of normal size; "Low latency",
+for small amounts of traffic and/or a significant percentage of small
+packets; and "Lowest latency", for almost completely small packets or
+minimal traffic.
+
+In dynamic conservative mode, the InterruptThrottleRate value is set to 4000
+for traffic that falls in class "Bulk traffic". If traffic falls in the "Low
+latency" or "Lowest latency" class, the InterruptThrottleRate is increased
+stepwise to 20000. This default mode is suitable for most applications.
+
+For situations where low latency is vital such as cluster or
+grid computing, the algorithm can reduce latency even more when
+InterruptThrottleRate is set to mode 1. In this mode, which operates
+the same as mode 3, the InterruptThrottleRate will be increased stepwise to
+70000 for traffic in class "Lowest latency".
+
+In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of TX and
+RX traffic.  If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the
+interrupt rate will drop as low as 2000 interrupts per second.  If the
+traffic is mostly transmit or mostly receive, the interrupt rate could
+be as high as 8000.
+
+Setting InterruptThrottleRate to 0 turns off any interrupt moderation
+and may improve small packet latency, but is generally not suitable
+for bulk throughput traffic.
+
+NOTE:  InterruptThrottleRate takes precedence over the TxAbsIntDelay and
+       RxAbsIntDelay parameters.  In other words, minimizing the receive
+       and/or transmit absolute delays does not force the controller to
+       generate more interrupts than what the Interrupt Throttle Rate
+       allows.
+
+NOTE:  When e1000e is loaded with default settings and multiple adapters
+       are in use simultaneously, the CPU utilization may increase non-
+       linearly.  In order to limit the CPU utilization without impacting
+       the overall throughput, we recommend that you load the driver as
+       follows:
+
+           modprobe e1000e InterruptThrottleRate=3000,3000,3000
+
+       This sets the InterruptThrottleRate to 3000 interrupts/sec for
+       the first, second, and third instances of the driver.  The range
+       of 2000 to 3000 interrupts per second works on a majority of
+       systems and is a good starting point, but the optimal value will
+       be platform-specific.  If CPU utilization is not a concern, use
+       RX_POLLING (NAPI) and default driver settings.
+
+RxIntDelay
+----------
+Valid Range:   0-65535 (0=off)
+Default Value: 0
+
+This value delays the generation of receive interrupts in units of 1.024
+microseconds.  Receive interrupt reduction can improve CPU efficiency if
+properly tuned for specific network traffic.  Increasing this value adds
+extra latency to frame reception and can end up decreasing the throughput
+of TCP traffic.  If the system is reporting dropped receives, this value
+may be set too high, causing the driver to run out of available receive
+descriptors.
+
+CAUTION:  When setting RxIntDelay to a value other than 0, adapters may
+          hang (stop transmitting) under certain network conditions.  If
+          this occurs a NETDEV WATCHDOG message is logged in the system
+          event log.  In addition, the controller is automatically reset,
+          restoring the network connection.  To eliminate the potential
+          for the hang ensure that RxIntDelay is set to 0.
+
+RxAbsIntDelay
+-------------
+Valid Range:   0-65535 (0=off)
+Default Value: 8
+
+This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a
+receive interrupt is generated.  Useful only if RxIntDelay is non-zero,
+this value ensures that an interrupt is generated after the initial
+packet is received within the set amount of time.  Proper tuning,
+along with RxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific network
+conditions.
+
+TxIntDelay
+----------
+Valid Range:   0-65535 (0=off)
+Default Value: 8
+
+This value delays the generation of transmit interrupts in units of
+1.024 microseconds.  Transmit interrupt reduction can improve CPU
+efficiency if properly tuned for specific network traffic.  If the
+system is reporting dropped transmits, this value may be set too high
+causing the driver to run out of available transmit descriptors.
+
+TxAbsIntDelay
+-------------
+Valid Range:   0-65535 (0=off)
+Default Value: 32
+
+This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a
+transmit interrupt is generated.  Useful only if TxIntDelay is non-zero,
+this value ensures that an interrupt is generated after the initial
+packet is sent on the wire within the set amount of time.  Proper tuning,
+along with TxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific
+network conditions.
+
+Copybreak
+---------
+Valid Range:   0-xxxxxxx (0=off)
+Default Value: 256
+
+Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh RX
+buffer before handing it up the stack.
+
+This parameter is different than other parameters, in that it is a
+single (not 1,1,1 etc.) parameter applied to all driver instances and
+it is also available during runtime at
+/sys/module/e1000e/parameters/copybreak
+
+SmartPowerDownEnable
+--------------------
+Valid Range: 0-1
+Default Value:  0 (disabled)
+
+Allows PHY to turn off in lower power states. The user can set this parameter
+in supported chipsets.
+
+KumeranLockLoss
+---------------
+Valid Range: 0-1
+Default Value: 1 (enabled)
+
+This workaround skips resetting the PHY at shutdown for the initial
+silicon releases of ICH8 systems.
+
+IntMode
+-------
+Valid Range: 0-2 (0=legacy, 1=MSI, 2=MSI-X)
+Default Value: 2
+
+Allows changing the interrupt mode at module load time, without requiring a
+recompile. If the driver load fails to enable a specific interrupt mode, the
+driver will try other interrupt modes, from least to most compatible.  The
+interrupt order is MSI-X, MSI, Legacy.  If specifying MSI (IntMode=1)
+interrupts, only MSI and Legacy will be attempted.
+
+CrcStripping
+------------
+Valid Range: 0-1
+Default Value: 1 (enabled)
+
+Strip the CRC from received packets before sending up the network stack.  If
+you have a machine with a BMC enabled but cannot receive IPMI traffic after
+loading or enabling the driver, try disabling this feature.
+
+WriteProtectNVM
+---------------
+Valid Range: 0,1
+Default Value: 1
+
+If set to 1, configure the hardware to ignore all write/erase cycles to the
+GbE region in the ICHx NVM (in order to prevent accidental corruption of the
+NVM). This feature can be disabled by setting the parameter to 0 during initial
+driver load.
+NOTE: The machine must be power cycled (full off/on) when enabling NVM writes
+via setting the parameter to zero. Once the NVM has been locked (via the
+parameter at 1 when the driver loads) it cannot be unlocked except via power
+cycle.
+
+Additional Configurations
+=========================
+
+  Jumbo Frames
+  ------------
+  Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the MTU to a value larger than
+  the default of 1500.  Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size.
+  For example:
+
+       ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up
+
+  This setting is not saved across reboots.
+
+  Notes:
+
+  - The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 9216.  This value coincides
+    with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 9234 bytes.
+
+  - Using Jumbo Frames at 10 or 100 Mbps is not supported and may result in
+    poor performance or loss of link.
+
+  - Some adapters limit Jumbo Frames sized packets to a maximum of
+    4096 bytes and some adapters do not support Jumbo Frames.
+
+  Ethtool
+  -------
+  The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+  diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.  We
+  strongly recommend downloading the latest version of ethtool at:
+
+  http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+  Speed and Duplex
+  ----------------
+  Speed and Duplex are configured through the ethtool* utility. For
+  instructions,  refer to the ethtool man page.
+
+  Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL)
+  ---------------------------
+  WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility. For instructions on
+  enabling WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page.
+
+  WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot.
+  For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e1000e driver must be
+  loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system.
+
+  In most cases Wake On LAN is only supported on port A for multiple port
+  adapters. To verify if a port supports Wake on Lan run ethtool eth<X>.
+
+Support
+=======
+
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+    www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+    http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported
+kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related
+to the issue to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/eql.txt b/Documentation/networking/eql.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0f1550150f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/eql.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,528 @@
+  EQL Driver: Serial IP Load Balancing HOWTO
+  Simon "Guru Aleph-Null" Janes, simon@ncm.com
+  v1.1, February 27, 1995
+
+  This is the manual for the EQL device driver. EQL is a software device
+  that lets you load-balance IP serial links (SLIP or uncompressed PPP)
+  to increase your bandwidth. It will not reduce your latency (i.e. ping
+  times) except in the case where you already have lots of traffic on
+  your link, in which it will help them out. This driver has been tested
+  with the 1.1.75 kernel, and is known to have patched cleanly with
+  1.1.86.  Some testing with 1.1.92 has been done with the v1.1 patch
+  which was only created to patch cleanly in the very latest kernel
+  source trees. (Yes, it worked fine.)
+
+  1.  Introduction
+
+  Which is worse? A huge fee for a 56K leased line or two phone lines?
+  It's probably the former.  If you find yourself craving more bandwidth,
+  and have a ISP that is flexible, it is now possible to bind modems
+  together to work as one point-to-point link to increase your
+  bandwidth.  All without having to have a special black box on either
+  side.
+
+
+  The eql driver has only been tested with the Livingston PortMaster-2e
+  terminal server. I do not know if other terminal servers support load-
+  balancing, but I do know that the PortMaster does it, and does it
+  almost as well as the eql driver seems to do it (-- Unfortunately, in
+  my testing so far, the Livingston PortMaster 2e's load-balancing is a
+  good 1 to 2 KB/s slower than the test machine working with a 28.8 Kbps
+  and 14.4 Kbps connection.  However, I am not sure that it really is
+  the PortMaster, or if it's Linux's TCP drivers. I'm told that Linux's
+  TCP implementation is pretty fast though.--)
+
+
+  I suggest to ISPs out there that it would probably be fair to charge
+  a load-balancing client 75% of the cost of the second line and 50% of
+  the cost of the third line etc...
+
+
+  Hey, we can all dream you know...
+
+
+  2.  Kernel Configuration
+
+  Here I describe the general steps of getting a kernel up and working
+  with the eql driver.	From patching, building, to installing.
+
+
+  2.1.	Patching The Kernel
+
+  If you do not have or cannot get a copy of the kernel with the eql
+  driver folded into it, get your copy of the driver from
+  ftp://slaughter.ncm.com/pub/Linux/LOAD_BALANCING/eql-1.1.tar.gz.
+  Unpack this archive someplace obvious like /usr/local/src/.  It will
+  create the following files:
+
+
+
+       ______________________________________________________________________
+       -rw-r--r-- guru/ncm	198 Jan 19 18:53 1995 eql-1.1/NO-WARRANTY
+       -rw-r--r-- guru/ncm	30620 Feb 27 21:40 1995 eql-1.1/eql-1.1.patch
+       -rwxr-xr-x guru/ncm	16111 Jan 12 22:29 1995 eql-1.1/eql_enslave
+       -rw-r--r-- guru/ncm	2195 Jan 10 21:48 1995 eql-1.1/eql_enslave.c
+       ______________________________________________________________________
+
+  Unpack a recent kernel (something after 1.1.92) someplace convenient
+  like say /usr/src/linux-1.1.92.eql. Use symbolic links to point
+  /usr/src/linux to this development directory.
+
+
+  Apply the patch by running the commands:
+
+
+       ______________________________________________________________________
+       cd /usr/src
+       patch </usr/local/src/eql-1.1/eql-1.1.patch
+       ______________________________________________________________________
+
+
+
+
+
+  2.2.	Building The Kernel
+
+  After patching the kernel, run make config and configure the kernel
+  for your hardware.
+
+
+  After configuration, make and install according to your habit.
+
+
+  3.  Network Configuration
+
+  So far, I have only used the eql device with the DSLIP SLIP connection
+  manager by Matt Dillon (-- "The man who sold his soul to code so much
+  so quickly."--) .  How you configure it for other "connection"
+  managers is up to you.  Most other connection managers that I've seen
+  don't do a very good job when it comes to handling more than one
+  connection.
+
+
+  3.1.	/etc/rc.d/rc.inet1
+
+  In rc.inet1, ifconfig the eql device to the IP address you usually use
+  for your machine, and the MTU you prefer for your SLIP lines.	One
+  could argue that MTU should be roughly half the usual size for two
+  modems, one-third for three, one-fourth for four, etc...  But going
+  too far below 296 is probably overkill. Here is an example ifconfig
+  command that sets up the eql device:
+
+
+
+       ______________________________________________________________________
+       ifconfig eql 198.67.33.239 mtu 1006
+       ______________________________________________________________________
+
+
+
+
+
+  Once the eql device is up and running, add a static default route to
+  it in the routing table using the cool new route syntax that makes
+  life so much easier:
+
+
+
+       ______________________________________________________________________
+       route add default eql
+       ______________________________________________________________________
+
+
+  3.2.	Enslaving Devices By Hand
+
+  Enslaving devices by hand requires two utility programs: eql_enslave
+  and eql_emancipate (-- eql_emancipate hasn't been written because when
+  an enslaved device "dies", it is automatically taken out of the queue.
+  I haven't found a good reason to write it yet... other than for
+  completeness, but that isn't a good motivator is it?--)
+
+
+  The syntax for enslaving a device is "eql_enslave <master-name>
+  <slave-name> <estimated-bps>".  Here are some example enslavings:
+
+
+
+       ______________________________________________________________________
+       eql_enslave eql sl0 28800
+       eql_enslave eql ppp0 14400
+       eql_enslave eql sl1 57600
+       ______________________________________________________________________
+
+
+
+
+
+  When you want to free a device from its life of slavery, you can
+  either down the device with ifconfig (eql will automatically bury the
+  dead slave and remove it from its queue) or use eql_emancipate to free
+  it. (-- Or just ifconfig it down, and the eql driver will take it out
+  for you.--)
+
+
+
+       ______________________________________________________________________
+       eql_emancipate eql sl0
+       eql_emancipate eql ppp0
+       eql_emancipate eql sl1
+       ______________________________________________________________________
+
+
+
+
+
+  3.3.	DSLIP Configuration for the eql Device
+
+  The general idea is to bring up and keep up as many SLIP connections
+  as you need, automatically.
+
+
+  3.3.1.  /etc/slip/runslip.conf
+
+  Here is an example runslip.conf:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+  ______________________________________________________________________
+  name		sl-line-1
+  enabled
+  baud		38400
+  mtu		576
+  ducmd		-e /etc/slip/dialout/cua2-288.xp -t 9
+  command	 eql_enslave eql $interface 28800
+  address	 198.67.33.239
+  line		/dev/cua2
+
+  name		sl-line-2
+  enabled
+  baud		38400
+  mtu		576
+  ducmd		-e /etc/slip/dialout/cua3-288.xp -t 9
+  command	 eql_enslave eql $interface 28800
+  address	 198.67.33.239
+  line		/dev/cua3
+  ______________________________________________________________________
+
+
+
+
+
+  3.4.	Using PPP and the eql Device
+
+  I have not yet done any load-balancing testing for PPP devices, mainly
+  because I don't have a PPP-connection manager like SLIP has with
+  DSLIP. I did find a good tip from LinuxNET:Billy for PPP performance:
+  make sure you have asyncmap set to something so that control
+  characters are not escaped.
+
+
+  I tried to fix up a PPP script/system for redialing lost PPP
+  connections for use with the eql driver the weekend of Feb 25-26 '95
+  (Hereafter known as the 8-hour PPP Hate Festival).  Perhaps later this
+  year.
+
+
+  4.  About the Slave Scheduler Algorithm
+
+  The slave scheduler probably could be replaced with a dozen other
+  things and push traffic much faster.	The formula in the current set
+  up of the driver was tuned to handle slaves with wildly different
+  bits-per-second "priorities".
+
+
+  All testing I have done was with two 28.8 V.FC modems, one connecting
+  at 28800 bps or slower, and the other connecting at 14400 bps all the
+  time.
+
+
+  One version of the scheduler was able to push 5.3 K/s through the
+  28800 and 14400 connections, but when the priorities on the links were
+  very wide apart (57600 vs. 14400) the "faster" modem received all
+  traffic and the "slower" modem starved.
+
+
+  5.  Testers' Reports
+
+  Some people have experimented with the eql device with newer
+  kernels (than 1.1.75).  I have since updated the driver to patch
+  cleanly in newer kernels because of the removal of the old "slave-
+  balancing" driver config option.
+
+
+  o  icee from LinuxNET patched 1.1.86 without any rejects and was able
+     to boot the kernel and enslave a couple of ISDN PPP links.
+
+  5.1.	Randolph Bentson's Test Report
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+  From bentson@grieg.seaslug.org Wed Feb  8 19:08:09 1995
+  Date: Tue, 7 Feb 95 22:57 PST
+  From: Randolph Bentson <bentson@grieg.seaslug.org>
+  To: guru@ncm.com
+  Subject: EQL driver tests
+
+
+  I have been checking out your eql driver.  (Nice work, that!)
+  Although you may already done this performance testing, here
+  are some data I've discovered.
+
+  Randolph Bentson
+  bentson@grieg.seaslug.org
+
+  ---------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+  A pseudo-device driver, EQL, written by Simon Janes, can be used
+  to bundle multiple SLIP connections into what appears to be a
+  single connection.  This allows one to improve dial-up network
+  connectivity gradually, without having to buy expensive DSU/CSU
+  hardware and services.
+
+  I have done some testing of this software, with two goals in
+  mind: first, to ensure it actually works as described and
+  second, as a method of exercising my device driver.
+
+  The following performance measurements were derived from a set
+  of SLIP connections run between two Linux systems (1.1.84) using
+  a 486DX2/66 with a Cyclom-8Ys and a 486SLC/40 with a Cyclom-16Y.
+  (Ports 0,1,2,3 were used.  A later configuration will distribute
+  port selection across the different Cirrus chips on the boards.)
+  Once a link was established, I timed a binary ftp transfer of
+  289284 bytes of data.	If there were no overhead (packet headers,
+  inter-character and inter-packet delays, etc.) the transfers
+  would take the following times:
+
+      bits/sec	seconds
+      345600	8.3
+      234600	12.3
+      172800	16.7
+      153600	18.8
+      76800	37.6
+      57600	50.2
+      38400	75.3
+      28800	100.4
+      19200	150.6
+      9600	301.3
+
+  A single line running at the lower speeds and with large packets
+  comes to within 2% of this.  Performance is limited for the higher
+  speeds (as predicted by the Cirrus databook) to an aggregate of
+  about 160 kbits/sec.	The next round of testing will distribute
+  the load across two or more Cirrus chips.
+
+  The good news is that one gets nearly the full advantage of the
+  second, third, and fourth line's bandwidth.  (The bad news is
+  that the connection establishment seemed fragile for the higher
+  speeds.  Once established, the connection seemed robust enough.)
+
+  #lines  speed	mtu  seconds	theory  actual  %of
+	 kbit/sec      duration	speed	speed	max
+  3	115200  900	_	345600
+  3	115200  400	18.1	345600  159825  46
+  2	115200  900	_	230400
+  2	115200  600	18.1	230400  159825  69
+  2	115200  400	19.3	230400  149888  65
+  4	57600	900	_	234600
+  4	57600	600	_	234600
+  4	57600	400	_	234600
+  3	57600	600	20.9	172800  138413  80
+  3	57600	900	21.2	172800  136455  78
+  3	115200  600	21.7	345600  133311  38
+  3	57600	400	22.5	172800  128571  74
+  4	38400	900	25.2	153600  114795  74
+  4	38400	600	26.4	153600  109577  71
+  4	38400	400	27.3	153600  105965  68
+  2	57600	900	29.1	115200  99410.3 86
+  1	115200  900	30.7	115200  94229.3 81
+  2	57600	600	30.2	115200  95789.4 83
+  3	38400	900	30.3	115200  95473.3 82
+  3	38400	600	31.2	115200  92719.2 80
+  1	115200  600	31.3	115200  92423	80
+  2	57600	400	32.3	115200  89561.6 77
+  1	115200  400	32.8	115200  88196.3 76
+  3	38400	400	33.5	115200  86353.4 74
+  2	38400	900	43.7	76800	66197.7 86
+  2	38400	600	44	76800	65746.4 85
+  2	38400	400	47.2	76800	61289	79
+  4	19200	900	50.8	76800	56945.7 74
+  4	19200	400	53.2	76800	54376.7 70
+  4	19200	600	53.7	76800	53870.4 70
+  1	57600	900	54.6	57600	52982.4 91
+  1	57600	600	56.2	57600	51474	89
+  3	19200	900	60.5	57600	47815.5 83
+  1	57600	400	60.2	57600	48053.8 83
+  3	19200	600	62	57600	46658.7 81
+  3	19200	400	64.7	57600	44711.6 77
+  1	38400	900	79.4	38400	36433.8 94
+  1	38400	600	82.4	38400	35107.3 91
+  2	19200	900	84.4	38400	34275.4 89
+  1	38400	400	86.8	38400	33327.6 86
+  2	19200	600	87.6	38400	33023.3 85
+  2	19200	400	91.2	38400	31719.7 82
+  4	9600	900	94.7	38400	30547.4 79
+  4	9600	400	106	38400	27290.9 71
+  4	9600	600	110	38400	26298.5 68
+  3	9600	900	118	28800	24515.6 85
+  3	9600	600	120	28800	24107	83
+  3	9600	400	131	28800	22082.7 76
+  1	19200	900	155	19200	18663.5 97
+  1	19200	600	161	19200	17968	93
+  1	19200	400	170	19200	17016.7 88
+  2	9600	600	176	19200	16436.6 85
+  2	9600	900	180	19200	16071.3 83
+  2	9600	400	181	19200	15982.5 83
+  1	9600	900	305	9600	9484.72 98
+  1	9600	600	314	9600	9212.87 95
+  1	9600	400	332	9600	8713.37 90
+
+
+
+
+
+  5.2.	Anthony Healy's Report
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+  Date: Mon, 13 Feb 1995 16:17:29 +1100 (EST)
+  From: Antony Healey <ahealey@st.nepean.uws.edu.au>
+  To: Simon Janes <guru@ncm.com>
+  Subject: Re: Load Balancing
+
+  Hi Simon,
+	  I've installed your patch and it works great. I have trialed
+	  it over twin SL/IP lines, just over null modems, but I was
+	  able to data at over 48Kb/s [ISDN link -Simon]. I managed a
+	  transfer of up to 7.5 Kbyte/s on one go, but averaged around
+	  6.4 Kbyte/s, which I think is pretty cool.  :)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ewrk3.txt b/Documentation/networking/ewrk3.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..90e9e5f16e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ewrk3.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+The EtherWORKS 3  driver in this distribution is  designed to  work with all
+kernels   >  1.1.33   (approx)  and  includes  tools   in  the  'ewrk3tools'
+subdirectory   to  allow  set   up of   the   card,  similar  to  the  MSDOS
+'NICSETUP.EXE' tools provided on  the DOS drivers  disk (type 'make' in that
+subdirectory to make the tools).
+
+The supported  cards are DE203,  DE204 and DE205.  All   other cards are NOT
+supported - refer to 'depca.c' for running the LANCE based network cards and
+'de4x5.c'  for the  DIGITAL   Semiconductor PCI  chip  based  adapters  from
+Digital.
+
+The ability to load  this driver as a  loadable module has been included and
+used extensively  during the driver  development (to save those  long reboot
+sequences). To utilise this ability, you have to do 8 things:
+
+    0) have a copy of the loadable modules code installed on your system.
+    1) copy ewrk3.c from the  /linux/drivers/net directory to your favourite
+    temporary directory.
+    2) edit the  source code near  line 1898 to reflect  the I/O address and
+    IRQ you're using.
+    3) compile  ewrk3.c, but include -DMODULE in  the command line to ensure
+    that the correct bits are compiled (see end of source code).
+    4) if you are wanting to add a new  card, goto 5. Otherwise, recompile a
+    kernel with the ewrk3 configuration turned off and reboot.
+    5) insmod ewrk3.o
+          [Alan Cox: Changed this so you can insmod ewrk3.o irq=x io=y]
+          [Adam Kropelin: Multiple cards now supported by irq=x1,x2 io=y1,y2]
+    6) run the net startup bits for your new eth?? interface manually 
+    (usually /etc/rc.inet[12] at boot time). 
+    7) enjoy!
+
+    Note that autoprobing is not allowed in loadable modules - the system is
+    already up and running and you're messing with interrupts.
+
+    To unload a module, turn off the associated interface 
+    'ifconfig eth?? down' then 'rmmod ewrk3'.
+
+The performance we've  achieved so far  has been measured through the 'ttcp'
+tool   at 975kB/s.  This  measures  the  total  TCP  stack performance which
+includes the   card,  so don't  expect   to get   much nearer  the  1.25MB/s
+theoretical Ethernet rate.
+
+
+Enjoy!
+
+Dave
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/fib_trie.txt b/Documentation/networking/fib_trie.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0723db7f849
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/fib_trie.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+			LC-trie implementation notes.
+
+Node types
+----------
+leaf 
+	An end node with data. This has a copy of the relevant key, along
+	with 'hlist' with routing table entries sorted by prefix length.
+	See struct leaf and struct leaf_info.
+
+trie node or tnode
+	An internal node, holding an array of child (leaf or tnode) pointers,
+	indexed	through a subset of the key. See Level Compression.
+
+A few concepts explained
+------------------------
+Bits (tnode) 
+	The number of bits in the key segment used for indexing into the
+	child array - the "child index". See Level Compression.
+
+Pos (tnode)
+	The position (in the key) of the key segment used for indexing into
+	the child array. See Path Compression.
+
+Path Compression / skipped bits
+	Any given tnode is linked to from the child array of its parent, using
+	a segment of the key specified by the parent's "pos" and "bits" 
+	In certain cases, this tnode's own "pos" will not be immediately
+	adjacent to the parent (pos+bits), but there will be some bits
+	in the key skipped over because they represent a single path with no
+	deviations. These "skipped bits" constitute Path Compression.
+	Note that the search algorithm will simply skip over these bits when
+	searching, making it necessary to save the keys in the leaves to
+	verify that they actually do match the key we are searching for.
+
+Level Compression / child arrays
+	the trie is kept level balanced moving, under certain conditions, the
+	children of a full child (see "full_children") up one level, so that
+	instead of a pure binary tree, each internal node ("tnode") may
+	contain an arbitrarily large array of links to several children.
+	Conversely, a tnode with a mostly empty	child array (see empty_children)
+	may be "halved", having some of its children moved downwards one level,
+	in order to avoid ever-increasing child arrays.
+
+empty_children
+	the number of positions in the child array of a given tnode that are
+	NULL.
+
+full_children
+	the number of children of a given tnode that aren't path compressed.
+	(in other words, they aren't NULL or leaves and their "pos" is equal
+	to this	tnode's "pos"+"bits").
+
+	(The word "full" here is used more in the sense of "complete" than
+	as the opposite of "empty", which might be a tad confusing.)
+
+Comments
+---------
+
+We have tried to keep the structure of the code as close to fib_hash as 
+possible to allow verification and help up reviewing. 
+
+fib_find_node()
+	A good start for understanding this code. This function implements a
+	straightforward trie lookup.
+
+fib_insert_node()
+	Inserts a new leaf node in the trie. This is bit more complicated than
+	fib_find_node(). Inserting a new node means we might have to run the
+	level compression algorithm on part of the trie.
+
+trie_leaf_remove()
+	Looks up a key, deletes it and runs the level compression algorithm.
+
+trie_rebalance()
+	The key function for the dynamic trie after any change in the trie
+	it is run to optimize and reorganize. Tt will walk the trie upwards 
+	towards the root from a given tnode, doing a resize() at each step 
+	to implement level compression.
+
+resize()
+	Analyzes a tnode and optimizes the child array size by either inflating
+	or shrinking it repeatedly until it fulfills the criteria for optimal
+	level compression. This part follows the original paper pretty closely
+	and there may be some room for experimentation here.
+
+inflate()
+	Doubles the size of the child array within a tnode. Used by resize().
+
+halve()
+	Halves the size of the child array within a tnode - the inverse of
+	inflate(). Used by resize();
+
+fn_trie_insert(), fn_trie_delete(), fn_trie_select_default()
+	The route manipulation functions. Should conform pretty closely to the
+	corresponding functions in fib_hash.
+
+fn_trie_flush()
+	This walks the full trie (using nextleaf()) and searches for empty
+	leaves which have to be removed.
+
+fn_trie_dump()
+	Dumps the routing table ordered by prefix length. This is somewhat
+	slower than the corresponding fib_hash function, as we have to walk the
+	entire trie for each prefix length. In comparison, fib_hash is organized
+	as one "zone"/hash per prefix length.
+
+Locking
+-------
+
+fib_lock is used for an RW-lock in the same way that this is done in fib_hash.
+However, the functions are somewhat separated for other possible locking
+scenarios. It might conceivably be possible to run trie_rebalance via RCU
+to avoid read_lock in the fn_trie_lookup() function.
+
+Main lookup mechanism
+---------------------
+fn_trie_lookup() is the main lookup function.
+
+The lookup is in its simplest form just like fib_find_node(). We descend the
+trie, key segment by key segment, until we find a leaf. check_leaf() does
+the fib_semantic_match in the leaf's sorted prefix hlist.
+
+If we find a match, we are done.
+
+If we don't find a match, we enter prefix matching mode. The prefix length,
+starting out at the same as the key length, is reduced one step at a time,
+and we backtrack upwards through the trie trying to find a longest matching
+prefix. The goal is always to reach a leaf and get a positive result from the
+fib_semantic_match mechanism.
+
+Inside each tnode, the search for longest matching prefix consists of searching
+through the child array, chopping off (zeroing) the least significant "1" of
+the child index until we find a match or the child index consists of nothing but
+zeros.
+
+At this point we backtrack (t->stats.backtrack++) up the trie, continuing to
+chop off part of the key in order to find the longest matching prefix.
+
+At this point we will repeatedly descend subtries to look for a match, and there
+are some optimizations available that can provide us with "shortcuts" to avoid
+descending into dead ends. Look for "HL_OPTIMIZE" sections in the code.
+
+To alleviate any doubts about the correctness of the route selection process,
+a new netlink operation has been added. Look for NETLINK_FIB_LOOKUP, which
+gives userland access to fib_lookup().
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/filter.txt b/Documentation/networking/filter.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bbf2005270b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/filter.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+filter.txt: Linux Socket Filtering
+Written by: Jay Schulist <jschlst@samba.org>
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+	Linux Socket Filtering is derived from the Berkeley
+Packet Filter. There are some distinct differences between
+the BSD and Linux Kernel Filtering.
+
+Linux Socket Filtering (LSF) allows a user-space program to
+attach a filter onto any socket and allow or disallow certain
+types of data to come through the socket. LSF follows exactly
+the same filter code structure as the BSD Berkeley Packet Filter
+(BPF), so referring to the BSD bpf.4 manpage is very helpful in
+creating filters.
+
+LSF is much simpler than BPF. One does not have to worry about
+devices or anything like that. You simply create your filter
+code, send it to the kernel via the SO_ATTACH_FILTER ioctl and
+if your filter code passes the kernel check on it, you then
+immediately begin filtering data on that socket.
+
+You can also detach filters from your socket via the
+SO_DETACH_FILTER ioctl. This will probably not be used much
+since when you close a socket that has a filter on it the
+filter is automagically removed. The other less common case
+may be adding a different filter on the same socket where you had another
+filter that is still running: the kernel takes care of removing
+the old one and placing your new one in its place, assuming your
+filter has passed the checks, otherwise if it fails the old filter
+will remain on that socket.
+
+Examples
+========
+
+Ioctls-
+setsockopt(sockfd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_ATTACH_FILTER, &Filter, sizeof(Filter));
+setsockopt(sockfd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_DETACH_FILTER, &value, sizeof(value));
+
+See the BSD bpf.4 manpage and the BSD Packet Filter paper written by
+Steven McCanne and Van Jacobson of Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/fore200e.txt b/Documentation/networking/fore200e.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6e0d2a9613e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/fore200e.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+
+FORE Systems PCA-200E/SBA-200E ATM NIC driver
+---------------------------------------------
+
+This driver adds support for the FORE Systems 200E-series ATM adapters
+to the Linux operating system. It is based on the earlier PCA-200E driver
+written by Uwe Dannowski.
+
+The driver simultaneously supports PCA-200E and SBA-200E adapters on
+i386, alpha (untested), powerpc, sparc and sparc64 archs.
+
+The intent is to enable the use of different models of FORE adapters at the
+same time, by hosts that have several bus interfaces (such as PCI+SBUS,
+PCI+MCA or PCI+EISA).
+
+Only PCI and SBUS devices are currently supported by the driver, but support
+for other bus interfaces such as EISA should not be too hard to add (this may
+be more tricky for the MCA bus, though, as FORE made some MCA-specific
+modifications to the adapter's AALI interface).
+
+
+Firmware Copyright Notice
+-------------------------
+
+Please read the fore200e_firmware_copyright file present
+in the linux/drivers/atm directory for details and restrictions.
+
+
+Firmware Updates
+----------------
+
+The FORE Systems 200E-series driver is shipped with firmware data being 
+uploaded to the ATM adapters at system boot time or at module loading time. 
+The supplied firmware images should work with all adapters.
+
+However, if you encounter problems (the firmware doesn't start or the driver
+is unable to read the PROM data), you may consider trying another firmware
+version. Alternative binary firmware images can be found somewhere on the
+ForeThought CD-ROM supplied with your adapter by FORE Systems.
+
+You can also get the latest firmware images from FORE Systems at
+http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/FORE_Systems. Register TACTics Online and go to
+the 'software updates' pages. The firmware binaries are part of
+the various ForeThought software distributions.
+
+Notice that different versions of the PCA-200E firmware exist, depending
+on the endianess of the host architecture. The driver is shipped with
+both little and big endian PCA firmware images.
+
+Name and location of the new firmware images can be set at kernel
+configuration time:
+
+1. Copy the new firmware binary files (with .bin, .bin1 or .bin2 suffix)
+   to some directory, such as linux/drivers/atm.
+
+2. Reconfigure your kernel to set the new firmware name and location.
+   Expected pathnames are absolute or relative to the drivers/atm directory.
+
+3. Rebuild and re-install your kernel or your module.
+
+
+Feedback
+--------
+
+Feedback is welcome. Please send success stories/bug reports/
+patches/improvement/comments/flames to <lizzi@cnam.fr>.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/framerelay.txt b/Documentation/networking/framerelay.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1a0b720440d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/framerelay.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+Frame Relay (FR) support for linux is built into a two tiered system of device 
+drivers.  The upper layer implements RFC1490 FR specification, and uses the
+Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI) as its hardware address.  Usually these
+are assigned by your network supplier, they give you the number/numbers of
+the Virtual Connections (VC) assigned to you.
+
+Each DLCI is a point-to-point link between your machine and a remote one.
+As such, a separate device is needed to accommodate the routing.  Within the
+net-tools archives is 'dlcicfg'.  This program will communicate with the
+base "DLCI" device, and create new net devices named 'dlci00', 'dlci01'... 
+The configuration script will ask you how many DLCIs you need, as well as
+how many DLCIs you want to assign to each Frame Relay Access Device (FRAD).
+
+The DLCI uses a number of function calls to communicate with the FRAD, all
+of which are stored in the FRAD's private data area.  assoc/deassoc, 
+activate/deactivate and dlci_config.  The DLCI supplies a receive function
+to the FRAD to accept incoming packets.
+
+With this initial offering, only 1 FRAD driver is available.  With many thanks
+to Sangoma Technologies, David Mandelstam & Gene Kozin, the S502A, S502E & 
+S508 are supported.  This driver is currently set up for only FR, but as 
+Sangoma makes more firmware modules available, it can be updated to provide
+them as well.
+
+Configuration of the FRAD makes use of another net-tools program, 'fradcfg'.
+This program makes use of a configuration file (which dlcicfg can also read)
+to specify the types of boards to be configured as FRADs, as well as perform
+any board specific configuration.  The Sangoma module of fradcfg loads the
+FR firmware into the card, sets the irq/port/memory information, and provides
+an initial configuration.
+
+Additional FRAD device drivers can be added as hardware is available.
+
+At this time, the dlcicfg and fradcfg programs have not been incorporated into
+the net-tools distribution.  They can be found at ftp.invlogic.com, in 
+/pub/linux.  Note that with OS/2 FTPD, you end up in /pub by default, so just
+use 'cd linux'.  v0.10 is for use on pre-2.0.3 and earlier, v0.15 is for 
+pre-2.0.4 and later.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/gen_stats.txt b/Documentation/networking/gen_stats.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..70e6275b757
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/gen_stats.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+Generic networking statistics for netlink users
+======================================================================
+
+Statistic counters are grouped into structs:
+
+Struct               TLV type              Description
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+gnet_stats_basic     TCA_STATS_BASIC       Basic statistics
+gnet_stats_rate_est  TCA_STATS_RATE_EST    Rate estimator
+gnet_stats_queue     TCA_STATS_QUEUE       Queue statistics
+none                 TCA_STATS_APP         Application specific
+
+
+Collecting:
+-----------
+
+Declare the statistic structs you need:
+struct mystruct {
+	struct gnet_stats_basic	bstats;
+	struct gnet_stats_queue	qstats;
+	...
+};
+
+Update statistics:
+mystruct->tstats.packet++;
+mystruct->qstats.backlog += skb->pkt_len;
+
+
+Export to userspace (Dump):
+---------------------------
+
+my_dumping_routine(struct sk_buff *skb, ...)
+{
+	struct gnet_dump dump;
+
+	if (gnet_stats_start_copy(skb, TCA_STATS2, &mystruct->lock, &dump) < 0)
+		goto rtattr_failure;
+
+	if (gnet_stats_copy_basic(&dump, &mystruct->bstats) < 0 ||
+	    gnet_stats_copy_queue(&dump, &mystruct->qstats) < 0 ||
+		gnet_stats_copy_app(&dump, &xstats, sizeof(xstats)) < 0)
+		goto rtattr_failure;
+
+	if (gnet_stats_finish_copy(&dump) < 0)
+		goto rtattr_failure;
+	...
+}
+
+TCA_STATS/TCA_XSTATS backward compatibility:
+--------------------------------------------
+
+Prior users of struct tc_stats and xstats can maintain backward
+compatibility by calling the compat wrappers to keep providing the
+existing TLV types.
+
+my_dumping_routine(struct sk_buff *skb, ...)
+{
+    if (gnet_stats_start_copy_compat(skb, TCA_STATS2, TCA_STATS,
+		TCA_XSTATS, &mystruct->lock, &dump) < 0)
+		goto rtattr_failure;
+	...
+}
+
+A struct tc_stats will be filled out during gnet_stats_copy_* calls
+and appended to the skb. TCA_XSTATS is provided if gnet_stats_copy_app
+was called.
+
+
+Locking:
+--------
+
+Locks are taken before writing and released once all statistics have
+been written. Locks are always released in case of an error. You
+are responsible for making sure that the lock is initialized.
+
+
+Rate Estimator:
+--------------
+
+0) Prepare an estimator attribute. Most likely this would be in user
+   space. The value of this TLV should contain a tc_estimator structure.
+   As usual, such a TLV needs to be 32 bit aligned and therefore the
+   length needs to be appropriately set, etc. The estimator interval
+   and ewma log need to be converted to the appropriate values.
+   tc_estimator.c::tc_setup_estimator() is advisable to be used as the
+   conversion routine. It does a few clever things. It takes a time
+   interval in microsecs, a time constant also in microsecs and a struct
+   tc_estimator to  be populated. The returned tc_estimator can be
+   transported to the kernel.  Transfer such a structure in a TLV of type
+   TCA_RATE to your code in the kernel.
+
+In the kernel when setting up:
+1) make sure you have basic stats and rate stats setup first.
+2) make sure you have initialized stats lock that is used to setup such
+   stats.
+3) Now initialize a new estimator:
+
+   int ret = gen_new_estimator(my_basicstats,my_rate_est_stats,
+       mystats_lock, attr_with_tcestimator_struct);
+
+   if ret == 0
+       success
+   else
+       failed
+
+From now on, every time you dump my_rate_est_stats it will contain
+up-to-date info.
+
+Once you are done, call gen_kill_estimator(my_basicstats,
+my_rate_est_stats) Make sure that my_basicstats and my_rate_est_stats
+are still valid (i.e still exist) at the time of making this call.
+
+
+Authors:
+--------
+Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch>
+Jamal Hadi Salim <hadi@cyberus.ca>
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt b/Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4eb3cc40b70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+Generic HDLC layer
+Krzysztof Halasa <khc@pm.waw.pl>
+
+
+Generic HDLC layer currently supports:
+1. Frame Relay (ANSI, CCITT, Cisco and no LMI)
+   - Normal (routed) and Ethernet-bridged (Ethernet device emulation)
+     interfaces can share a single PVC.
+   - ARP support (no InARP support in the kernel - there is an
+     experimental InARP user-space daemon available on:
+     http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/hdlc/).
+2. raw HDLC - either IP (IPv4) interface or Ethernet device emulation
+3. Cisco HDLC
+4. PPP
+5. X.25 (uses X.25 routines).
+
+Generic HDLC is a protocol driver only - it needs a low-level driver
+for your particular hardware.
+
+Ethernet device emulation (using HDLC or Frame-Relay PVC) is compatible
+with IEEE 802.1Q (VLANs) and 802.1D (Ethernet bridging).
+
+
+Make sure the hdlc.o and the hardware driver are loaded. It should
+create a number of "hdlc" (hdlc0 etc) network devices, one for each
+WAN port. You'll need the "sethdlc" utility, get it from:
+	http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/hdlc/
+
+Compile sethdlc.c utility:
+	gcc -O2 -Wall -o sethdlc sethdlc.c
+Make sure you're using a correct version of sethdlc for your kernel.
+
+Use sethdlc to set physical interface, clock rate, HDLC mode used,
+and add any required PVCs if using Frame Relay.
+Usually you want something like:
+
+	sethdlc hdlc0 clock int rate 128000
+	sethdlc hdlc0 cisco interval 10 timeout 25
+or
+	sethdlc hdlc0 rs232 clock ext
+	sethdlc hdlc0 fr lmi ansi
+	sethdlc hdlc0 create 99
+	ifconfig hdlc0 up
+	ifconfig pvc0 localIP pointopoint remoteIP
+
+In Frame Relay mode, ifconfig master hdlc device up (without assigning
+any IP address to it) before using pvc devices.
+
+
+Setting interface:
+
+* v35 | rs232 | x21 | t1 | e1 - sets physical interface for a given port
+                                if the card has software-selectable interfaces
+  loopback - activate hardware loopback (for testing only)
+* clock ext - both RX clock and TX clock external
+* clock int - both RX clock and TX clock internal
+* clock txint - RX clock external, TX clock internal
+* clock txfromrx - RX clock external, TX clock derived from RX clock
+* rate - sets clock rate in bps (for "int" or "txint" clock only)
+
+
+Setting protocol:
+
+* hdlc - sets raw HDLC (IP-only) mode
+  nrz / nrzi / fm-mark / fm-space / manchester - sets transmission code
+  no-parity / crc16 / crc16-pr0 (CRC16 with preset zeros) / crc32-itu
+  crc16-itu (CRC16 with ITU-T polynomial) / crc16-itu-pr0 - sets parity
+
+* hdlc-eth - Ethernet device emulation using HDLC. Parity and encoding
+  as above.
+
+* cisco - sets Cisco HDLC mode (IP, IPv6 and IPX supported)
+  interval - time in seconds between keepalive packets
+  timeout - time in seconds after last received keepalive packet before
+            we assume the link is down
+
+* ppp - sets synchronous PPP mode
+
+* x25 - sets X.25 mode
+
+* fr - Frame Relay mode
+  lmi ansi / ccitt / cisco / none - LMI (link management) type
+  dce - Frame Relay DCE (network) side LMI instead of default DTE (user).
+  It has nothing to do with clocks!
+  t391 - link integrity verification polling timer (in seconds) - user
+  t392 - polling verification timer (in seconds) - network
+  n391 - full status polling counter - user
+  n392 - error threshold - both user and network
+  n393 - monitored events count - both user and network
+
+Frame-Relay only:
+* create n | delete n - adds / deletes PVC interface with DLCI #n.
+  Newly created interface will be named pvc0, pvc1 etc.
+
+* create ether n | delete ether n - adds a device for Ethernet-bridged
+  frames. The device will be named pvceth0, pvceth1 etc.
+
+
+
+
+Board-specific issues
+---------------------
+
+n2.o and c101.o need parameters to work:
+
+	insmod n2 hw=io,irq,ram,ports[:io,irq,...]
+example:
+	insmod n2 hw=0x300,10,0xD0000,01
+
+or
+	insmod c101 hw=irq,ram[:irq,...]
+example:
+	insmod c101 hw=9,0xdc000
+
+If built into the kernel, these drivers need kernel (command line) parameters:
+	n2.hw=io,irq,ram,ports:...
+or
+	c101.hw=irq,ram:...
+
+
+
+If you have a problem with N2, C101 or PLX200SYN card, you can issue the
+"private" command to see port's packet descriptor rings (in kernel logs):
+
+	sethdlc hdlc0 private
+
+The hardware driver has to be build with #define DEBUG_RINGS.
+Attaching this info to bug reports would be helpful. Anyway, let me know
+if you have problems using this.
+
+For patches and other info look at:
+<http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/hdlc/>.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/generic_netlink.txt b/Documentation/networking/generic_netlink.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3e071115ca9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/generic_netlink.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+A wiki document on how to use Generic Netlink can be found here:
+
+ * http://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/networking/generic_netlink_howto
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/gianfar.txt b/Documentation/networking/gianfar.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ad474ea07d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/gianfar.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+The Gianfar Ethernet Driver
+Sysfs File description
+
+Author: Andy Fleming <afleming@freescale.com>
+Updated: 2005-07-28
+
+SYSFS
+
+Several of the features of the gianfar driver are controlled
+through sysfs files.  Th